MANUAL 


FOR 


Noncommissioned  Officers  and  Privates 


OF 


INFANTRY 


OF 


THE  ARMY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES 


1917 


To  be  used  by  Engineer  companies  ("dismounted)  and  Coast 
Ailillery  companies  for  Infantry  instruction  and  training 


MILITARY  PUBLISHING  CO. 

42  BROADWAY 

NEW  YORK 


War  Department 
iment  No.  574 
The  Adjutant  General 


' 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
Washington,  April  1%,  1917. 
The    following    Manual    for    Noncommissioned    Officers    and 
^Privates  of  Infantry  of  the  Army  of  the  United  States  is  ap- 
gproved  and  herewith  published  for  the  information  and  govern- 
gment  of  all  concerned. 

13     This  manual  will  also  be  used  by  Engineer  companies   (dis- 
=  mounted)    and   Coast  Artillery  companies  in  connection  with 
c  Infantry  instruction  and  training  prescribed  by  the  War  De- 
apartment. 
5     By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War  : 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 
Official  : 

h.  p.  mccain, 

The  Adjutant  General. 

3 


^l11>645 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Page. 

Chapter  I.  Military  discipline  and  courtesy 9 

Section  1.  Oath  of  enlistment 9 

Section  2.  Obedience 9 

Section  3.  Loyalty 10 

Section  4.  Discipline . 11 

Section  5.  Military  courtesy 12 

Section  6.  Saluting , 13 

Section  7.  Rules  governing  saluting 15 

Section  8.  Courtesies  in  conversation 18 

Chapter  II.  Arms,  uniforms,  and  equipment 19 

Section  1.  The  rifle 19 

Section  2.  Care  of  the  rifle 20 

Section  3.  Cleaning  the  rifle 21 

Section  4.  Uniforms 26 

Section  5.  The  service  kit 28 

Section  6.  The  surplus  kit 29 

Section  7.  Assembling  infantry  equipment 30 

Chapter  III.  Rations  and  forage 35 

Section  1.  The  ration 35 

Section  2.  Individual  cooking 36 

Section  3.  The  forage  ration 40 

Chapter  IV.  Personal  hygiene  and  care  of  the  feet.  . .  42 

Chapter  V.  Extracts  from  Infantry  Drill  Regulations, 

1911 , 48 

Section  1.  Definitions 48 

Section  2.  Introduction 50 

Section  3.  Orders,  commands,  and  signals 56 

Section  4.  School  of  the  soldier 63 

Section  5.  School  of  the  squad 74 

Section  6.  School  of  the  company 88 

Section  7.  Company  inspection Ill 

5 


6  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

.TRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS, 

Page. 

3    Manual  of  tent  pitching 114 

I    Manual  of  the  bayonet 123 

.       I                 SERVICE 148 

;    Princi pies  of  Infantry  training 148 

l  ombal 149 

Patrolling 156 

once  guards 166 

guards 168 

lards 169 

:  7.    OutpOStS 169 

Lflo  trenches 175 

II  Marching  and  camping 179 

1     Breaking  camp  and  preparation  for  a  march. .  179 

181 

king  camp 183 

i  (  e  and  duties 184 

III  Target  practice 189 

liminary  training  in  marksmanship. .  189 

•  adjustment 189 

■  sight  corrections 191 

191 

ight 192 

!ze 193 

•titions 194 

-hot 196 

lination 196 

riflemen 197 

in  small-arms  firing 199 

199 

and  revolver  practice 202 

rom  Manual  of  Interior  Guard 

210 

Miction 210 

ification  of  interior  guards 231 

ils  and  roster? 211 

inder  of  the  guard 214 

f  the  guard 219 

rpozal  of  the  guard 222 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  7 

Chapter  IX.  Extracts  from  Manual  of  Interior  Guard 

Duty,  1914— Continued.  Page. 

Section  7.  Musicians  of  the  guard 227 

Section  8.  Orderlies  and  color  sentinels 227 

Section  9.  Privates  of  the  guard 228 

Section  10.  Orders  for  sentinels 229 

Section  11 .  Countersigns  and  paroles 237 

Section  12.  Guard  patrols 239 

Section  13.  Watchmen 239 

Section  14.  Compliments  from  guards.. 239 

Section  15.  Prisoners 241 

Section  16.  Guarding  prisoners 244 

Section  17.  Flags 248 

Section  18.  Reveille  and  retreat  gun 249 

Section  19.  Guard  mounting 250 

Section  20.  Formal  guard  mounting  for  Infantry 250 

Section  21 .  Informal  guard  mounting  for  Infantry 255 

Section*  22 .  Relieving  the  old  guard 255 

Chapter  X.  Map  reading  and  sketching 258 

Section  1 .  Military  map  reading 258 

Section  2.  Sketching 271 

Chapter  XI.  Message  blanks 274 

Chapter  XII.  Signals  and  codes «   275 

Chapter  XIII.  First-aid  rules 286 

Chapter  XIV.  Laws  and  regulations 297 

Section  1 .  General  provisions 297 

Section  2.  The  Army  of  the  United  States 29S 

Section  3.  Rank  and   precedence   of  officers   and    non- 
commissioned officers 298 

Section  4.  Insignia    of    officers    and    noncommissioned 

officers. 299 

Section  5.  Extracts  from  the  Articles  of  War 300 

Chapter  XV.  English-French  vocabulary 317 

Appendix.  Form  for  last  will  and  testament ,  335 


MANUAL 

FOR 

NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS  AND  PRIVATES  OF  INFANTRY 

OF    THE 

ARMY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


CHAPTER  I. 
MILITARY  DISCIPLINE  AND  COURTESY. 


Section  1.  Oath  of  enlistment. 

Every  soldier  on  enlisting  in  the  Army  takes  upon  himself 
the  following  obligation:  ' 

"I,  ,  do  solemnly  swear   (or  affirm)   that  I  will  bear 

true  faith  and  allegiance  to  the  United  States  of  America;  that 
I  will  serve  them  honestly  and  faithfully  against  all  their  ene- 
mies whomsoever;  and  that  I  will  obey  the  orders  of  the 
President  of  the  United  States,  and  the  orders  of  -the  officers 
appointed  over  me  according  to  the  Rules  and  Articles  of  War." 
(109th  Article  of  War.) 

Section  2.  Obedience. 

The  very  first  paragraph  in  the  Army  Regulations  reads-:- 
"All  persons  in   the   military   service   are   required   to   obey 
strictly  and   to  execute  promptly  the   lawful  orders   of  their 
superiors." 

Obedience  is  the  first  and  last  duty  of  a  soldier.  It  is  the 
foundation  upon  which  all  military  efficiency  is  built.  Without 
it  an  army  becomes  a  mob,  while  with  it  a  mob  ceases  to  be  a 
mob  and  becomes  possessed  of  much  of  the  power  of  an  organ- 
ized force.    It  is  a  quality  that  is  demanded  of  every  person  in 

9 


10  MILITARY  DISCIPLINE  AND  COURTESY. 

from  Hie  highest  to  the  lowest.     Each  enlisted  man 
his   enlistment    oath,    to   obedience.     Each 
Ills  commission,  must  take  upon  himself  the 
^ligation. 

re  promptly  the  lawful  orders  of  your 

Is  enough   to  know  that  the  person  giving  the 

he  be  an  officer,  a  noncommissioned  officer,  or  a 

ich,  is  your  lawful  superior.     You  may  not 

any  not   respect  him,  but  you  must  respect  his 

ithority,  and  reflect  honor  and  credit  upon  your- 

ssiOD  by  yielding  to  all  superiors  that  com- 

ibedience  which  is  the  pleasure  as  well 

every  true  soldier. 

be  strictly  carried  out.     It  is  not  sufficient   to 

ly  that  part  which  suits  you  or  which  involves 

r  hardship.    Nor  is  it  proper  or  permissible, 

red   t<»  do  a   thing  in  a  certain  way  or  to 

>ik  in  a  definitely  prescribed  manner,  for  you 

me  results  by  other  methods. 

be   prompt   and   unquestioning.      When    any 

this     "id  includes  officers  as  well  as  enlisted  men) 

ler,   it   is  not  for  him  to  consider  whether  the 

p  not,  whether  it  would  have  been  better  had 

i d  uiven,  or  whether  the  duty  might  be 

>rmed  by  some  one  else,  or  at  some  other  time,  or 

ther  manner.     His  duty  is,  first,  tj  understand  just 

res   and,  second,  to  proceed  at  once  to  carry 

■  the  best  of  his  ability. 

and  men  of  all  ranks  and  grades  are  given  a  certain 

In  the  execution  of  the  tasks  to  which  they  are 

expected  to  show  initiative  in  meeting  the 

•ns  as  they  arise.     Every  individual,  from  the 

iler  to  the  lowest  private,  must  always  remem- 

>n  and  neglect  of  opportunities  will  warrant  more 

than   an   error   in   the   choice   of  the   means." 

ice  Regulations.) 

Section  3.  Loyalty. 

with  implicit  obedience  you  may  yet  faH  to  measure 
standard  of  duty  which  is  at  once  the  pride  and 


DISCIPLINE.  11 

glory  of  every  true  soldier.  Not  until  you  carry  out  the  desires 
and  wishes  of  your  superiors  in  a  hearty,  willing,  and  cheerful 
manner  are  you  meeting  all  the  requirements  of  your  profession. 
For  an  order  is  but  the  will  of  your  superior,  however  it  may 
be  expressed.  Loyalty  means  that  you  are  for  your  organization 
and  its  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers — not  against  them ; 
that  you  always  extend  your  most  earnest  and  hearty  support 
to  those  in  authority.  No  soldier  is  a  loyal  soldier  who  is  a 
knocker  or  a  grumbler  or  a  shirker.  Just  one  man  of  this  class 
in*a  company  breeds  discontent  and  dissatisfaction  among  many 
others.  You  should,  therefore,  not  only  guard  against  doing 
such  things  yourself  but  should  discourage  such  actions  among 
any  of  your  comrades. 

Section  4.  Discipline. 

"  1.  All  persons  in  the  military  service  are  required  to  obey 
strictly  and  to  execute  promptly  the  lawful  orders  of  their 
superiors. 

"  2.  Military  authority  will  be  exercised  with  firmness,  kind- 
ness, and  justice.  Punishments  must,  conform  to  law  and  fol- 
low offenses  as  promptly  as  circumstances  will  permit. 

"3.  Superiors  are  forbidden  to  injure  those  under  their  au- 
thority by  tyrannical  or  capricious  conduct  or  by  abusive  lan- 
guage. While  maintaining  discipline  and  the  thorough  and 
prompt  performance  of  military  duty,  all  officers,  in  dealing 
with  enlisted  men,  will  bear  in  mind  the  absolute  necessity  of 
so  treating  them  as  to  preserve  their  self-respect.  Officers  will 
keep  in  as  close  touch  as  possible  with  the  men  under  their 
command  and  will  strive  to  build  up  such  relations  of  confidence 
and  sympathy  as  will  insure' the  free  approach  of  their  men  to 
them  for  counsel  and  assistance.  This  relationship  may  be 
gained  and  maintained  without  relaxation  of  the  bonds  of 
discipline  and  with  great  benefit  to  the  service  as  a  whole. 

"  4.  Courtesy  among  military  men  is  indispensable  to  dis- 
cipline; respect  to  superiors  will  not  be  confined  to  obedience 
on  duty,  but  will  be  extended  on  all  occasions. 

"5.  Deliberations  or  discussions  among  "nnlitary  men  convey- 
ing praise  or  censure,  or  any  mar,k  of  approbation,  toward 
others  in  the  military  service,  and  all  publications  relating  to 
private  or  personal  transactions  between  officers  are  prohibited. 


12  MILITARY  DISCIPLINE  AND  COURTESY. 

Efforts  to  Influence  legislation  affecting  the  Army  or  to  procure 

ml   favor  or  consideration  should  never  be  made  except 

through  regular  military  channels;  the  adoption  of  any  other 

1  by  any  officer  or  enlisted  man  will  be  noted  in  the  raili- 

tnrv  record  of  (hose  concerned."     (Army  Regulations.) 

"The  discipline  which  makes  the  soldier  of  a  free  country 
reliable  In  battle  is  not  to  be  gained  by  harsh  or  tyrannical 
lent.     On  the  contrary,  such  treatment  is  far  more  likely 
itroy  than  to  make  an  array.    It  is  possible  to  impart  in- 
Btructlon  and  give  commands  in  such  manner  and  in  such  tone 
as  to  Inspire  In  the  soldier  no  feeling  but  an  intense  de- 
y.  while  the  opposite  manner  and  tone  of  voice  can 
Ite  strong  resentment  and  a  desire  to  disobey. 
me  mode  or  the  other  of  dealing  with  subordinates  springs 
from  a  corresponding  spirit  in  the  breast  of  the  commander. 
Be  who  feels  the  respect  which  is  due  to  others  can  not  fail  to 
^  in   them  regard   for  himself,   while  he  who  feels,  and 
ts,   disrespect  toward  others,  especially   his  in- 
ferior*, can  nor   fall  to  inspire  hatred  against  himself."     (Ad- 
'  •'.  Oen.  John  M.  Schoflcld  to  the  United  States  Corps 
lug.  //,  1S7D.) 
When,   by   l'»ng-continued  drill  and  subordination,  you  have 
our    duties,    and    obedience    becomes   second    nature, 
you   have  acquired   discipline.     It   can   not  be  acquired   in  a 
day   nor  a   month.     It  is  n  growth.     It  is  the  habit  of  obedi- 
ence.    To  teach  this  habit  of  obedience  is  the  main  object  of 
•rder  drill,  and.  if  good  results  are  to  be  expected,  the 
greatest   attention  must  be  paid  to  even  the  smallest  details. 
ay  or  squad  must  be  formed  promptly  at  the  pre- 
•  l   time — not  a   minute  or  even  a  second   late.     All  must 
the  exact  uniform  prescribed  and  in  the  exact  manner 
hod.     When  at  attention  there  must  be  no  grzing  about, 
ainds,   no   chewing  or   spitting  in  ranks.     The 
I    of  arms   and   all    movements   must   be  executed   abso- 
A  drill   of  this  kind  teaches  discipline. 
ppy    drill    breeds    disobedience    and    insubordi- 
ia  other  words,  discipline  simply  means  efficiency. 

Section  5.  Military  courtesy. 

of  life  men  who  are  gentlemanly  and  of  good 
ways  respectful  and  courteous  to  those  about 


SALUTING.  13 

them.  It  helps  to  make  life  move  along  more  smoothly.  In 
civil  life  this  courtesy  is  shown  by  the  custom  of  tipping  the 
hat  to  ladles,  shaking  hands  with  friends,  and  greeting  per- 
sons with  a  nod  or  a  friendly  "  Good  morning,"  etc. 

In  the  Army  courtesy  is  just  as  necessary,  and  for  the  same 
reasons.  It  helps  to  keep  the  great  machine  moving  without 
friction. 

"  Courtesy  among  military  men  is  indispensable  to  discipline ; 
respect  to  superiors  will  not  be  confined  to  obedience  on  duty, 
but  will  be  extended  on  all  occasions."  (Par.  4,  Army  Regula- 
tions, 1918.) 

One  method  of  extending  this  courtesy  is  by  saluting.  When 
in  ranks  the  question  of  what  a  private  should  do  is  simple- 
he  obeys  any  command  that  is  given.  It  is  when  out  of  ranks 
that  a  private  must  know  how  and  when  to  salute. 

Section  6.  Saluting. 

In  the  old  days  the  free  men  of  Europe  were  all  allowed  to 
carry  weapons,  and  when  they  met  each  would  hold  up  his 
right  hand  to  show  that  he  had  no  weapon  in  it  and  that  they 
met  as  friends.  Slaves  or  serfs,  however,  were  not  allowed  to 
carry  weapons,  and  slunk  past  the  free  men  without  making 
any  sign.  In  this  way  the  salute  came  to  be  the  symbol  or  sign 
by  which  soldiers  (free  men)  might  recognize  each  other.  The 
lower  classes  began  to  imitate  the  soldiers  in  this  respect, 
although  in  a  clumsy,  apologetic  way,  and  thence  crept  into  civil 
life  the  custom  of  raising  the  hand  or  nodding  as  one  passed  an 
acquaintance.  The  soldiers,  however,  kept  their  individual 
salute,  and  purposely  made  it  intricate  and  difficult  to  learn  in 
order  that  it  could  be  acquired  only  by  the  constant  training  all 
real  soldiers  received.  To  this  day  armies  have  preserved  their 
salute,  and  when  correctly  done  it  is  at  once  recognized  and 
never  mistaken  for  that  of  the  civilian.  All  soldiers  should  be 
careful  to  execute  the  salute  exactly  as  prescribed.  The  civilian 
or  the  imitation  soldier  who  tries  to  imitate  the  military  salute, 
invariably  makes  some  mistake  which  shows  that  he  is  not  a 
real  soldier;  he  gives  it  in  an  apologetic  manner,  he  fails  to 
stand  or  march  at  attention,  his  coat  is  unbuttoned  or  hat  on 
awry,  or  he  fails  to  look  the  person  saluted  in  the  eye.  There 
is  a  wide  difference  in  the  method  of  rendering  and  meaning 
between  the  civilian  salute  as  used  by  friends  in  passing,  or  by 


14  MILITARY  DISCIPLINE  AND  COURTESY. 

.rs,  and  the  MILITARY  SALUTE,  the 

E     of  the  military  profession. 

with  the  hand,  first  assume  the  position  of  a  soldier 

ttention.     Look   the   officer   you   are  to   salute 

;i.  when  the  proper  distance  separates 

hand  smartly  till  the  tip  of  the  forefinger 

. -r  part  of  the  headdress  or  forehead  above  the 

thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  palm  to  the 

rm   Inclined  at  about  45°,  hand  and  wrist  straight. 

k    fche  officer  you  are  saluting  straight  in  the 

een   your   hand    in   the  position   of  salute  until   the 

Iges  the  salute  or  until  he  has  passed.     Then 

aiartly  to  the  side.    The  salute  is  given  with  the 

To  salute  with  the  rifle,  hring  the  rifle  to  right  shoulder  arms 

■  ly  there.    Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small 

.arm  horizontal,  palm  of  the  hand  down,  thumb 

extended   and  joined,  forefinger  touching  the  end 

g   piece.     Look   the   officer   saluted   in   the   eye. 

r  has  acknowledged  the  salute  or  has  passed, 

hand  smartly  to  the  side  and  turn  the  head  and 

at.     The  ritie  salute  may  also  be  executed  from 

iil.     See  paragraph  94,  Infantry  Drill  Regula- 

;  ph  111,  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations,  1916. 

To  salute  with  the  saber,  bring  the  saber  to  order  saber  if  not 

and  carry  the  saber  to  the  front,  base  of 

i  as  the  chin  and  G  inches  in  front  of  the  neck, 

ft,  point  6  inches  farther  to  the  front  than  the 

tended  on  the  left  of  the  grip,  all  fingers  grasping 

the  officer  saluted  in  the  eye.    When  the  officer 

ged  the  salute  or  has  passed,  lower  the  saber, 

>n  of  the  right  foot  and  near  the  ground, 

hand  by  the  side,  thumb  on  left 'of  grip,  arm 

•turn  to  the  order  saber.    If  mounted,  the  hand 

ind  the  thigh,  point  a  little  to  the  right  and  front  of 

■ 

To  salute  with  the  saber,  bring  the  saber  to 

ready  there,  carry  the  saber  to  the  front 

aded  until  the  thumb  is  about  6  inches  in 

:.  the  blade  vertical,  guard  to  the  left,  all  four 


RULES  GOVERNING  SALUTING.  15 

fingers  grasping  the  grip,  the  thumb  extending  along  the  back 
in  the  groove,  the  fingers  pressing  the  back  of  the  grip  against 
the  heel  of  the  hand.  Look  the  officer  saluted  in  the  eye.  When 
the  officer  has  acknowledged  the  salute  or  has  passed,  bring  the 
saber  down  with  the  blade  against  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoul- 
der, guard  to  the  front,  right  hand  at  the  hip,  the  third  and 
fourth  finger  on  the  back  of  the  grip  and  the  elbow  back. 

The  pistol  is  not  carried  in  the  hand  but  in  the  holster, 
therefore  when  armed  with  the  pistol  salute  with  the  hand. 

Always  stand  or  march  at  attention  before  and  during  the 
salute.  The  hat  should  be  on  straight,  coat  completely  but- 
toned up,  and  hands  out  of  the  pockets. 

Section  7.  Rules  governing  saluting. 

"  759.  (1)  Salutes  shall  be  exchanged  between  officers  and 
enlisted  men  not  in  a  military  formation,  nor  at  drill,  work, 
games,  or  mess,  on  every  occasion  of  their  meeting,  passing  near 
or  being  addressed,  the  officer  junior  in  rank  or  the  enlisted 
man  saluting  first. 

(2)  When  an  officer  enters  a  room  where  there  are  several 
enlisted  men  the  word  "  attention  "  is  given  by  some  one  who 
perceives  him,  when  all  rise,  uncover,  and  remain  standing  at 
attention  until  the  officer  leaves  the  room  or  directs  otherwise. 
Enlisted  men  at  meals  stop  eating  and  remain  seated  at 
attention. 

(3)  An  enlisted  man,  if  seated,  rises  on  the  approach  of  an 
officer,  faces  toward  him,  stands  at  attention,  and  salutes. 
Standing,  he  faces  an  officer  for  the  same  purpose.  If  the 
parties  remain  in  the  same  place  or  on  the  same  ground,  such 
compliments  need  not  be  repeated.  Soldiers  actually  at  work 
do  not  cease  work  to  salute  an  officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

(4)  Before  addressing  an  officer  an  enlisted  man  makes  the 
prescribed  salute  with  the  weapon  with  which  he  is  armed,  or, 
if  unarmed,  with  the  right  hand.  He  also  makes  the  same 
salute  after  receiving  a  reply. 

(5)  In  uniform,  covered  or  uncovered,  but  not  in  formation, 
officers  and  enlisted  men  salute  military  persons  as  follows: 
With  arms  in  hand,  the  salute  prescribed  for  that  arm  (senti- 
nels on  interior  guard  duty  excepted)  ;  without  arms,  the  right- 
hand  salute. 


1G  MILITARY  DISCIPLINE  AND  COURTESY. 

In  civilian  dress,  covered  or  uncovered,  officers  and  en- 
men  salute  military  persons  with  the  right-hand  salute. 
ud    enlisted   men   will    render   the   prescribed 
salutes  In  a  military  manner,  the  officer  junior  in  rank  or  the 
enlisted  men  saluting  first.     When  several  officers  in  company 
...luted  all  entitled  to  the  salute  shall  return  it. 

ipt  in  the  field  under  campaign  or  simulated  cam- 
conditions,  a  mounted  officer  (or  soldier)  dismounts  before 
Qddr  superior  officer  not  mounted. 

A  man  in  formation  shall'  not  salute  when  directly  ad- 
•  l,  but  shall  come  to  attention  if  at  rest  or  at  ease. 
Saluting  distance  is  that  within  which  recognition  is 
In  general,  it  does  not  exceed  30  paces. 
ill  i   When  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  passes  in  rear  of 
a  body  <>i'  troops,  it  is  brought  to  attention  while  he  is  opposite 
tli."  post  of  the  commander. 

ill' )   In    public    conveyances,    such    as    railway    trains    and 
.  and  in  public  places,  such  as  theaters,  honors  and 
al   salutes  may  be  omitted  when  palpably  inappropriate 
or  apt  t-»  disturb  or  annoy  civilians  present. 

Soldiers  at  all  times  and  in  all  situations  pay  the  same 
compliments  to  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy,  Marine  Corps,  and 
Volunteers,  and  to  officers  of  the  National  Guard  as  to  officers 
of  their  own  regiment,  corps,  or  arm  of  service. 

1 11)   Sontinels  on  post  doing  interior  guard  duty  conform  to 

ing  principles,  but  salute  by  presenting  arms  when 

armed  with  the  rifle.    They  will  not  salute  if  it  interferes  with 

the  proper  performance  of  their  duties.    Troops  under  arms 

will  salute  as  prescribed  in  drill  regulations. 

760.  il»  Commanders  of  detachments  or  other  commands 
will  salute  officers  of  graded  higher  than  the  person  command- 
ing the  unit,  by  first  bringing  the  unit  to  attention  and  then 
saluting    as    required    by    subparagraph    (5).    paragraph    759. 

-a luted  is  of  a  junior  or  equal  grade,  the  unit 
attention  in  the  exchange  of  salutes. 
If  two  detachments  or  other  commands  meet,  their  com- 
manders   will    exchange    salutes,    both    commands    being    at 
•  ion. 

761.  Solutes  and  honors,  as  a  rule,  are  not  paid  by  troops 
ly  engaged  in  drill,  on  the  march,  or  in  the  field  under 


RULES  GOVERNING  SALUTING.  17 

campaign   or   simulated  campaign   conditions.     Troops   on  the 
service  of  security  pay  no  compliments  whatever. 

762.  If  the  command  is  in  line  at  a  halt  (not  in  the  field)  and 
armed  with  the  rifle,  or  with  sabers  drawn,  it  shall  be  brought  to 
present  arms  or  present  sabers  before  its  commander  salutes  in  the 
following  cases :  .When  the  National  Anthem  is  played,  or  when 
to  the  color  or  to  the  standard  is  sounded  during  ceremonies,  or 
when  a  person  is  saluted  who  is  its  immediate  or  higher  com- 
mander or  a  general  officer,  or  when  the  national  or  regimental 
color  is  saluted. 

763.  At  parades  and  other  ceremonies,  under  arms,  the  command 
shall  render  the  prescribed  salute  and  shall  remain  in  the  position 
of  salute  while  the  National  Anthem  is  being  played ;  also  at  re- 
treat and  during  ceremonies  when  to  the  color  is  played,  if  no 
band  is  present.  If  not  under  arms,  the  organizations  shall  be 
brought  to  attention  at  the  first  note  of  the  National  Anthem,  to 
the  color  or  to  the  standard,  and  the  salute  rendered  by  the 
officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  in  command  as  prescribed  in 
regulations,  as  amended  herein. 

764.  Whenever  the  National  Anthem  is  played  at  any  place 
when  persons  belonging  to  the  military  service  are  present,  all 
officers  and  enlisted  men  not  in  formation  shall  stand  at  atten- 
tion facing  toward  the  music  (except  at  retreat,  when  they 
shall  face  toward  the  flag).  If  in  uniform,  covered  or  uncov- 
ered, or  in  civilian  clothes,  uncovered,  they  shall  salute  at  the 
first  note  of  the  anthem,  retaining  the  position  of  salute  until 
the  last  note  of  the  anthem.  If  not  in  uniform  and  covered, 
they  shall  uncover  at  the  first  note  of  the  anthem,  holding  the 
headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder  and  so  remain  until  its 
close,  except  that  in  inclement  weather  the  headdress  may  be 
slightly  raised. 

The  same  rules  apply  when  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard  is 
sounded  as  when  the  National  Anthem  is  played. 

When  played  by  an  Army  band,  the  National  Anthem  shall 
be  played  through  without  repetition  of  any  part  not  required 
to  be  repeated  to  make  it  complete. 

The  same  marks  of  respect  prescribed  for  observance  during 
the  playing  of  the  National  Anthem  of  the  United  States  shall 
be  shown  toward  the  national  anthem  of  any  other  country 
when  played  upon  official  occasions. 


18  MILITARY  DISCIPLINE  AND  COURTESY. 

765    Officers   and   enlisted   men    passing   the    uncased    color 
Will  render  honors  as  follows:  If  in  uniform,  they  will  salute  as 
required  bv  subparagraph    (5),  paragraph  759;   if  in  civilian 
ered,  they  will  uncover,  holding  the  headdress  op- 
the  left  shoulder  with  the  right  hand;  if  uncovered,  they 
,lute  with  the  right-hand  .salute."     (Infantry  Drill  Regu- 
lation*. 1911.) 

The  national  flag  belonging  to  dismounted  organizations  is 
called  a  color ;  to  mounted  organizations,  a  standard.  An  un- 
tie that  is  not  in  its  waterproof  cover. 
Privates  do  not  salute  noncommissioned  officers.  Prisorers 
arc  not  permitted  to  salute;  they  merely  come  to  attention  if 
not  actually  at  work.  The  playing  of  the  National  Anthem  as 
a  part  of  a'  medley  is  prohibited  in  the  military  service. 

Section  8.  Courtesies  in  conversation. 

In  speaking  to  an  officer,  always  stand  at  attention  and  use 
the  word  "  Sir."     Examples: 
"  Sir,  Private  Brown,  Company  B,  reports  as  orderly." 
"  Sir.  the  first  sergeant  directed  me  to  report  to  the  captain." 
(Question  by  an  officer :)  "  To  what  company  do  you  belong?  " 
(  Answer  : )  "  Company  H,  sir." 

(Question  by  an  officer:)  "Has  first  call  for  drill  sounded?" 
(Answer:)    "No,  sir;"  or  "Yes,  sir;  it  sounded  about  five 
minutes  ago." 

•a  by  an  officer:)   "Can  you  tell  me,  please,  where 
Major  Smith's  tent  is?  " 

-wer  :)  "  Yes,  sir;  I'll  take  you  to  it." 

third  person  in  speaking  to  an  officer.     Examples 
s  the  Lieutenant  wish,"  etc. 
'  tne  Captain  send  for  me?  " 
In  delivering  a  message  from  one  officer  to  another,  always 
tie  form  similar  to  the  following :  *'  Lieutenant  A  presents 
tmpliments  to  Captain  B  and  states,"  etc.     This  form  is 
hen  the  person  sending  or  receiving  the  message  is 
au  enlisted  man. 

In  all  official  conversation  refer  to  other  soldiers  by  their 
titles,  thus:  Sergeant  B,  Private  C. 


CHAPTER   II. 
ARMS,   UNIFORMS,  AND  EQUIPMENT. 


Section  1.  The  rifle. 

The  rifle  now  used  by  the  Array  of  the  United  States  is  the 
United  States  magazine  rifle,  model  of  1903,  caliber  .30. 

It  is  43.212  inches  |  long  and  weighs  8.69  pounds. 

The  bayonet  weighs  1  pound  and  the  blade  is  16  inches  long. 

The  rifle  is  sighted  for  ranges  up  to  2,850  yards. 

The  maximum  range,  when  elevated  at  an  angle  of  45  degrees, 
is  4,891  yards  (389  yards  less  than  3  miles). 

The  smooth  bore  of  the  rifle  is  0.30  inch  in  diameter.  It  is 
then  rifled  0.004  inch  deep,  making  the  diameter  from  the 
bottom  of  one  groove  to  the  bottom  of  the  opposite  groove  0.308 
inch.  The  rifling  makes  one  complete  turn  in  each  10  inches 
of  the  barrel. 

The  accompanying  plate  shows  the  names  of  the  principal 
parts  of  the  rifle. 

The  only  parts  of  a  rifle  that  an  enlisted  man  is  permitted  to 
take  apart  are  the  bolt  mechanism  and  the  magazine  mechanism. 
Learn  how  to  do  this  fpom  your  squad  leader,  for  you  must 
know  how  in  order  to  keep  your  rifle  clean.  Never  remove  the 
hand  guard  or  the  trigger  guard,  nor  take  the  sights  apart  un- 
less you  have  special  permission  from-a  commissioned  officer. 

The  cartridge  used  for  the  rifle  is  called  the  .30-caliber  model 
L906  cartridge.    There  are  four  types  of  cartridges. 

The  ball  cartridge  consists  of  the  brass  case  or  shell,  the 
primer,  the  charge  of  smokeless  powder,  and  the  bullet.  The 
mllet  has  a  sharp  point,  is  composed  of  a  lead  core  and  a  jacket 
|jf  cupro  nickel,  and  weighs  150  grains.  The  bullet  of  this 
cartridge,  when  fired  from  the  rifle,  starts  with  an  initial 
/elocity  at  the  muzzle  of  2,700  feet  per  second. 

The  blank  cartridge  contains  a  paper  cup  instead  of  a  bullet. 
[t  is  dangerous  up  to  100  feet.  Firing  with  blank  cartridges  at 
i  represented  enemy  at  ranges  less  than  100  yards  is  prohibited. 

The  guard  cartridge  has  a  smaller  charge  of  powder  than  the 
>all  cartridge,  and  five  cannelures  encircle  the  body  of  the  shell 
it  about  the  middle  to  distinguish  it  from  the  ball  cartridge.  It 
s  intended  for  use  on  guard  or  in  riot  duty,  and  gives  good  re- 

19 


20  ASMS,  UNIFORMS,  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

suits  up  to  200  yards.    The  range  of  100  yards  requires  a  sight 

elevation  of  450  yards,  and  the  range  of  200  yards  requires  an 

.'Jon  of  650  yards. 

The  dummy  cartridge  is  tin  plated  and  the  shell  is  provided 

with   six   longitudinal   corrugations   and   three   circular   holes 

The  primer  contains  no  percussion  composition.     It  is  intended 

for  drill  purposes  to  accustom  the  soldier  to  the  operation  of 

ling  the  rifle. 

All  cartridges  are  secured  five  in  a  clip  to  enable  five  car 

he  inserted  into  the  magazine  at  one  motion.     Sixty 

ball  cartridges  in  12  clips  are  packed  in  a   cloth  bandoleer  tc 

facilitate  issue  and  carrying.     When  full  the  bandoleer  weighs 

about  3.SS  pounds.    Bandoleers  are  packed  20  in  a  box,  or  120C 

rounds  in  all.    The  full  box  weighs.  99  pounds. 

Section  2.  Care  of  the  rifle. 


Ever.y  nart  of  the  rifle  must  be  kept  free  from  rust,  dust,  anc 
dirt.  A  dirty  or  rusty  rifle  is  a  sure  sign  that  the  soldier  doe 
not  realize  the  value  of  his  weapon,  and  that  his  training  is 
incomplete.  The  rifle  you  are  :irm%d  with  is  the  most  ac 
curate  in  the  world.  If  it  gets  dirty  or  rusty  it  will  deteriorate 
in  its  accuracy  and  working  efficiency,  and  no  subsequent  can 
will  restore  it  to  its  original  condition.  The  most  important 
part  of  the  rifle  to  keep  clean  is  the  bore.  If,  after  firing,  th« 
bore  Is  left  dirty  over  night,  it  will  be  badly  rusted  in  the 
morning,  therefore  your  rifle  must  be  cleaned  not  later  thai 
the  evening  of  the  day  on  which  it  was  fired.  The  fouling  o: 
the  blank  cartridge  is  as  dangerous  to  the  bore  as  the  foulinj 
of  (he  ball  cartridge. 

r  attempt  to  polish  any  part  that  is  blued.     If  rust  api 
by   rubbing  with  oil.     Never  use  emery  paper 
r  any  preparation  that  cuts  or  scratches,  to  clean  an: 
part  of  the  rifle. 

To  beautify  and  preserve  the  stock  rub  with  raw  linseed  oil 
The  us.'  of  any  other  preparation  on  the  stock  is  strictly  forbidden 

Always  handle  your  rifle  with  care.  Don't  throw  it  aroun< 
as  though  it  were  a  club.  Don't  stand  it  up  against  any  thin 
so  that  it  rests  against  the  front  sight.  Don't  leave  a  stoppe, 
or  a  rug  in  the  bore;  it  will  cause  rust  to  form  at  that  point 
It  may  also  cause  the  gun  barrel  to  burst  if  a  shot  is  fireJol 
before  removing  it.  '  \ 


CLEANING  THE  RIFLE.  21 

n  Guard  the  sights  and  muzzle  carefully  from  any  blow  that 
might  injure  them.  The  front  sight  cover  should  always  be  on 
1 1  the  rifle  except  when  rifle  is  being  fired.  This  is  especially  neces- 
,  sary  to  protect  the  front  sight  while  rifle  is  being  carried  in 
j;scabbard  by  a  mounted  man. 

J    In  coming  to  the  "  order  arms,"  lower  the  piece  gently  to  the 
ground.  "    » 

1  When  there  is  a  cartridge  in  the  chamber  the  piece  is  always 
(carried  locked.  In  this  position  the  safety  lock  should  be 
jkept  turned  fully  to  the  right,  since  if  it  be  turned  to  the  left 
jnearly  to  the  "  ready  "  position  and  the  trigger  be  pulled,  the 
j  rifle  will  be  discharged  when  the  safety  lock  is  turned  to  the 
M  ready  "  position  at  any  time  later  on. 

Cartridges  can  not  be  loaded  from  the  magazine  unless  the 
bolt  is  drawn  fully  to  the  rear.  When  the  bolt  is  closed,  or 
,  only  partly  open,  the  cut-off  may  be  turned  up  or  down  as 
desired,  but  if  the  bolt  is  drawn  fully  to  the  rear,  the  magazine 
can  not  be  cut  off  unless  the  top  cartridge  or  the  follower  be 
pressed  down  slightly  and  the  bolt  be  pushed  forward  so  that 
the  cut-off  may  be  turned  "  off." 

In  the  case  of  a  misfire,  don't  open  the  bolt  immediately,  as  it 
may  be  a  hangflre.  Misfires  are  often  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
bolt  handle  was  not  fully  pressed  down.  Sometimes  in  pulling 
the  trigger  the  soldier  raises  the  bolt  handle  without  knowing  it. 

Unless  otherwise  ordered,  arms  will  be  unloaded  before  being 
taken,  to  quarters  or  tents,  or  as  soon  as  the  men  using  them 
{are  relieved  from  duty. 
j     Keep  the  working  parts  oiled. 

In  every  company  there  should  be  at  least  one  copy  of  the 
Manual  of  the  Ordnance  Department  entitled  "  Description  and 
Rules  for  the  Management  of  the  U.  S.  Magazine  Rifle."  This 
manual  gives  the  name  and  a  cut  of  every  part  of  the  rifle,  ex- 
plains its  use,  shows  how  to  take  the  rifle  apart  and  care  for 
the  same,  and  also  gives  much  other  valuable  and  interesting 
information. 

Section  3.  Cleaning  the  rifle. 

"  Cleaning  the  rifle. —  (a)  The  proper  care  of  the  bore  requires 
conscientious,  careful  work,  but  it  pays  well  in  the  attainment 
of  reduced  labor  of  cleaning,  prolonged  accuracy  life  of  the 
barrel,   and  better  results  in  target  practice.    Briefly  stated, 


22  ARMS,  UNIFORMS,  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

the  care  of  the  bore  consists  in  removing  the  fouling,  resulting  I 
from  firing,  t<>  obtain  a  chemically  clean  surface,  and  in  coating  | 
this  surface  with  n  film  of  oil  to  prevent  rusting.     The  fouling 
which  results  from  firing  is  of  two  kinds — one,  the  products  of 
combustion  of  the  powder;  the  other,  cupro-nickel  scraped  off 
(under  the  abrading  action  of  irregularities  or  grit  in  the  bore). 
Powder  fouling,  because  of  its  acid  reaction,  is  highly  corrosive; 
thai  is.  it  will  induce  rust  and  must  be  removed.     Metal  fouling 
»lf  i<  inactive,  but  may  cover  powder  fouling  and  prevent 
of  cleaning  agents  until  removed,  and  when  accumu- 
lated in  noticeable  quantities  it  reduces  the  accuracy  of  the  rifle. 
(6)    Powder  fouling  may  be  readily  removed  by  scrubbing 
with  hot  soda  solution,  but  this  solution  has  no  effect  on  the 
metal    fouling  of  cupro-nickel.     It   is   necessary,   therefore,   to 
remove  all  metal  fouling  before  assurauce  can  be  had  that  all 
powder  fouling  has  been  removed  and  that  the  bore  may  be 
oiled.     Normally,  after  firing  a  barrel  in  good  condition 
the  metal  fouling  is  so  slight  as  to  be  hardly  perceptible.     It  is 
merely   a   smear  of  infinitesimal  thickness,  easily  removed  by 
Bolvents  of  cupro-nickel.     However,  due  to  pitting,  the  presence 
of  dust,  other  abrasives,  or  to  accumulation,  metal  fouling  may 
occur  in  clearly  visible  flakes  or  patches  of  much  greater  thick- 
much  more  difficult  to  remove. 
(c)   In  cleaning  the  bore  after  firing  it  is  well  to  proceed  as 
follows:  Swab  out  the  bore  with  soda  solution   (subparagraph 
j)  to  remove  powder  fouling.     A  convenient  method  is  to  insert 
the  muzzle  of  the  rifle  into  the  can  containing  the  soda  solution 
and,  with  the  cleaning  rod  inserted  from  the  breech,  pump  the 
barrel   full   u  few  times.     Remove  and  dry  with  a  couple  of 
patches.     Examine  the  bore  to  see  that  there  are  in  evidence  no 
patches  of  metal  fouling  which,  if  present,  can  be  readily  de- 
tected  by  the  naked  eye,  then  swab  out  with  the  swabbing  solu- 
tion— a    dilute   metal-fouling  solution    (subparagraph  j).     The 
at  of  swabbing  required  with  the  swabbing  solution  can  be 
[lined    only   by  experience,   assisted  by  the   color   of  the 
Swabbing  should  be  continued,  however,  as  long  as  the 
wiping  patch  Is  discolored  by  a  bluish-green  stain.    Normally  a 
•   of  minutes'  work  is  sufficient.    Dry  thoroughly  and  oil. 
The  proper  method  of  oiling  a  barrel  is  as  follows:  Wipe 
the  cleaning  rod  dry;  select  a  clean  patch  and  thoroughly  sat- 


CLEANING  THE  RIFLE.  23 

urate  it  with  sperm  oil  or  warmed  cosmic,  being  sure  that  the 
cosmic  has  penetrated  the  patch ;  scrub  the  bore  with  the  patch, 
finally  drawing  the  patch  smoothly  from  the  muzzle  to  the 
breech,  allowing  the  cleaning  rod  to  turn  with  the  rifling.  The 
bore  will  be  found  now  to  be  smooth  and  bright  so  that  any  sub- 
sequent rust  and  sweating  can  be  easily  detected  by  inspection. 
(e)  If  patches  of  metal  fouling  are  seen  upon  visual  inspection 
of  the  bore  the  standard  metal  fouling  solution  prepared  as 
i  hereinafter  prescribed  must  be  used.  After  scrubbing  out  with 
j  the  soda  solution,  plug  the  bore  from  the  breech  with  a  cork 
at  the  front  end  of  the  chamber  or  where  the  rifling  begins.  Slip 
a  2-inch  section  of  rubber  hose  over  the  muzzle  down  to  the 
sight  and  fill  with  the  standard  solution  to  at  least  one-half  inch 
above  the  muzzle  of  the  barrel.  Let  it  stand  for  30  minutes, 
pour  out  the  standard  solution,  remove  hose  and  breech  plug, 
and  swab  out  thoroughly  with  soda  solution  to  neutralize  and 
remove  all  trace  of  ammonia  and  powder  fouling.  Wipe  the 
barrel  clean,  dry,  and  oil.  With  few  exceptions,  one  application 
is  sufficient,  but  if  all  fouling  is  not  removed,  as  determined 
by  careful  visual  inspection  of  the  bore  and  of  the  wiping 
patches,  repeat  as  described  above. 

(/)  After  properly  cleaning  with  either  the  swabbing  solution 
or  the  standard  solution,  as  has  just  been  described,  the  bore 
should  be  clean  and  safe  to  oil  and  put  away,  but  as  a  measure 
of  safety  a  patch  should  always  be  run  through  the  bore  on  the 
next  day  and  the  bore  and  wiping  patch  examined  to  insure  that 
cleaning  has  been  properly  accomplished.  The  bore  should  then 
be  oiled,  as  described  above. 

(g)  If  the  swabbing  solution  or  the  standard  metal-fouling 
solution  is  not  available,  the  barrel  should  be  scrubbed,  as 
already  described,  with  the  soda  solution,  dried,  and  oiled  with 
a  light  oil.  At  the  end  of  24  hours  it  should  again  be  cleaned. 
when  it  will  usually  be  found  to  have  "  sweated  " ;  that  is,  rust 
having  formed  under  the  smear  of  metal  fouling  where  powder 
fouling  was  present,  the  surface  is  puffed  up.  Usually  a  second 
cleaning  is  sufficient,  but  to  insure  safety  it  should  be  again 
examined  at  the  end  of  a  few  days,  before  final  oiling.  The 
swabbing  solution  should  always  be  used,  if  available,  for  it 
must  be  remembered  that  each  puff  when  the  bore  "  sweats  "  is 
an  incipient  rust  pit. 


84  ARMS,  XTNIFORMS,  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

(A )  A  clean  dry  surface  having  been  obtained,  to  prevent  [ 
rust  it  is  necessary  to  coat  every  portion  of  this  surface  with  i\$ 
neutral  oil.  If  the  protection  required  is  but  temporaHT 
und  the  arm  is  to  be  cleaned  or  fired  in  a  few  days,  sperm  oif 
may  be  used.  This  Is  easily  applied  and  easily  removed,  but  had 
ifflclent  body  to  hold  its  surface  for  more  than  a  few  days] 
If  ritles  are  to  be  prepared  for  storage  or  shipment,  a  heavier 
oil.  such  as  cosmic,  must  be  used. 

i ; " )   In  preparing  arms  for  storage  or  shipment  they  should  bd 

cleaned  with  particular  care,  using  the  metal-fouling  solution 

scribed  above.    Care  should  be  taken,  insured  by  careful 

tion  on  succeeding  day  or  days,  that  the  cleaning  is  propl 

erly  done  and  all  traces  of  ammonia  solution  removed.    The  bord 

is  then  ready  to  be  coated  with  cosmic.    At  ordinary  tempera 

tares  cosmic  is  not  fluid.     In  order,  therefore,  to  insure  tha' 

every  part  of  the  surface  is  coated  with  a  film  of  oil  the  cosmh 

should  he  warmed.    Apply  the  cosmic  first  with  a  brush;  then 

with  the  breech  plugged,  fill  the  barrel  to  the  muzzle,  pour  ou 

the  surplus,  remove  the  breechblock,  and  allow  to  drain.     Ii 

is  believed  that  more  rifles  are  ruined  by  improper  preparatior 

irage  than  from  any  other  cause.    If  the  bore  is  not  clear 

when  oiled — that  is,  if  powder  fouling  is  present  or  rust  ha 

•1 — a  half  inch  of  cosmic  on  the  outside  will  not  stop  itsLj 
action,  and  the  barrel  will  be  ruined.     Remember  that  the  sur 
face  must  be  perfectly  cleaned  before  the  heavy  oil  is  applied 
If  the  instructions  as  given  above  are  carefully  followed,  arm 
may  he  stored  for  years  without  harm. 

in    Preparation  of  solutions  : 

Soda  solution. — This  should  be  a  saturated  solution  of  sa 
soda  (bicarbonate  of  soda).  A  strength  of  at  least  20  per  cen 
is  necessary.  The  spoon  referred  to  in  the  following  direction! 
is  the  model  1910  spoon  issued  in  the  mess  outfit. 

da,  one-fourth  pound,  or  four  (4)  heaping  spoonfuls.    ] 

Water.  1  pint  or  cup,  model  of  1910,  to  upper  rivets. 

The  sal  soda  will  dissolve  more  readily  in  hot  water. 

Siraiibing  solution. — Ammonium  persulphate,  60  grains,  one! 
half  spoonful  smoothed  off.  J 

Ammonia.  28  per  cent.  6  ounces,  or  three-eighths  of  a  pint,  0]J 
12  spoonfuls. 

Water,  4  ounces,  or  one-fourth  pint,  or  8  spoonfuls. 


- 


: 


CLEANING  THE  RIFLE.  26 

Dissolve  the  ammonium  persulphate  in  the  water  and  add  the 
immonia.  Keep  in  tightly  corked  bottle ;  pour  out  only  what 
is  necessary  at  the  time,  and  keep  the  bottle  corked. 

Standard  metal  fouling  solution. — Ammonium  persulphate,  1 
)unce,  or  2  medium  heaping  spoonfuls. 

Ammonium  carbonate,  200  grains,  or  1  heaping  spoonful. 

Ammonia,  28  per  cent,  6  ounces,  or  three-eighths  pint,  or  12 
spoonfuls. 

Water,  4  ounces,  or  one-fourth  pint,  or  8  spoonfuls. 

Powder  the  persulphate  and  carbonate  together,  dissolve  in 
iie  water  and  add  the  ammonia ;  mix  thoroughly  and  allow  to 
jtand  for  one  hour  before  using.  It  should  be  kept  in  a  strong 
x>ttle,  tightly  corked.  The  s6lution  should  not  be  used  more 
±an  twice,  and  used  solution  should  not  be  mixed  with  unused 
jolution,  but  should  be  bottled  separately.  The  solution,  when 
nixed,  should  be  used  within  30  days.  Care  should  be  exercised 
n  mixing  and  using  this  solution  to  prevent  injury  to  the  rifle. 
In  experienced  noncommissioned  officer  should  mix  the  solution 
tnd  superintend  its  use. 

Neither  of  these  ammonia  solutions  have  any  appreciable 
iction  on  steel  when  not  exposed  to  the  air,  but  if  allowed  to 
Waporate  on  steel  they  attack  it  rapidly.  Care  should,  there- 
lore,  be  taken  that  none  spills  on  the  mechanism  and  that  the 
)arrel  is  washed  out  promptly  with  soda  solution.  The  first 
ipplication  of  soda  solution  removes  the  greater  portion  of  the 
jowder  fouling  and  permits  a  more  effective  and  economical 
lse  of  the  ammonia  solution.  These  ammonia  solutions  are 
xpensive  and  should  be  used  economically. 

(Jc)  It  is  a  fact  recognized  by  all  that  a  highly  polished  steel 
surface  rusts  much  less  easily  than  one  which  is  roughened ; 
ilso  that  a  barrel  which  is  pitted  fouls  much  more  rapidly  than 
me  which  is  smooth.  Every  effort,  therefore,  should  be  made  to 
prevent  the  formation  of  pits,  which  are  merely  enlarged  rust 
jpots.  and  which  not  only  affect  the  accuracy  of  the  arm  but 
ncrease  the  labor  of  cleaning. 

(I)  The  chambers  of  rifles  are  frequently  neglected  because 
:hey  are  not  readily  inspected.  Care  should  be  taken  to  see 
jihat  they  are  cleaned  as  thoroughly  as.  the  bore.  A  roughened 
Camber  delays  greatly  the  rapidity  of  fire,  and  not  infrequently 
Piuses  shells  to  stick. 


£6  ARMS,  UNIFORMS,  AND  EQUIPMENT. 


(m)  A  cleaning  rack  should  be  provided  for  every  barrack 
Rifles  should  always  be  cleaned  from  the  breach,  thus  avoiding  F 
possible  injury  to  the  rifling  at  the  muzzle,  which  would  affect  I 
the  shooting  adversely.  If  the  bore  for  a  length  of  6  inches  at  the 
muzzle  is  perfect,  a  minor  injury  near  the  chamber  will  have  lit- 
tle effect  od  the  accuracy  of  the  rifle.  The  rifle  should  be  cleaned 
as  soon  as  the  firing  for  the  day  is  completed.  The  fouling  is 
easier  to  remove  then,  and  if  left  longer  it  will  corrode  the  barrel 

( n )  The  principles  as  outlined  above  apply  equally  well  for  the 
care  of  the  barrel  of  the  automatic  pistol.  Special  attention  | 
should  be  paid  to  cleaning  the  chamber  of  the  pistol,  using  the 
soda  solution.  It  has  been  found  that  the  chamber  pits  readily 
if  it  is  not  carefully  cleaned,  with  the  result  that  the  operation 
of  the  pistol  is  made  less  certain."  (Par.  134,  Small  Arms  Firing 
Manual,  1913.) 

Section  4.  Uniforms. 

Uniforms  and  clothing  issued  to  enlisted  men  must  not  be  1 
sold,   pawned,   loaned,   given   away,   lost  or   damaged   through 
neglect   or   carelessness.     Any  soldier  who   violates   this  rule 
may  be  tried  by  a  military  court  and  punished. 

All  uniforms  and  articles  of  clothing  issued  to  enlisted  men, 
whether  or  not  charged  on  their  clothing  allowance,  remain  the 
property  of  the  United  States  and  do  not  become  the  property 
of  the  soldier  either  before  or  after  discharge  from  the  service. 
Under  the  law  a  soldier  honorably  discharged  from  the  Army  of 
the  United  States  is  authorized  to  wear  his  uniform  from  the 
place  of  his  discharge  to  his  home  within  three  months  after 
the  date  of  such  discharge.  To  wear  the  'uniform  after  three 
months  from  the  date  of  such  discharge  renders  such  person 
liable  to  fine  or  imprisonment,  or  both. 

The  dress  uniform  (the  blue  uniform)  consists  of  the  dress 
cap,  dress  coat,  dress  trousers,  and  russet-leather  shoes.  The 
straight,  standing,  military,  white  linen  collar,  showing  no 
opening  in  front,  is  always  worn  with  this  uniform,  with  not  to 
exceed  one-half  inch  showing  above  the  collar  of  the  coat. 
Turndown,  piccadilly,  or  roll  collars  are  not  authorized. 

When  under  arms,  white  gloves  and  the  garrison  belt  (or 
russet-leather  belt  and  cartridge  box)  are  worn. 

The  full-dress  uniform  is  the  same  as  the  dress  uniform,  with 
the  breast  cord  added. 


UNIFORMS.  •  27 

The  service  uniform  is  either  cotton  (summer)  or  woolen 
winter)  olive  drab. 

For  duty  in  the  field  it  consists  of  the  service  hat,  with  cord 
ewed  on,  service  coat  or  sweater,  service  breeches,  olive-drab 
iannel  shirt,  leggings,  russet-leather  shoes,  and  identification 
ag.  In  cold  weather  olive-drab  woolen  gloves  are  worn;  at 
ther  times,  no  gloves. 

When  not  in  the  field,  the  service  cap  is  worn  instead  of  the 
ampaign  hat.  Under  arms,  white  gloves  and  the  garrison  belt 
or  russet-leather  belt  and  cartridge  box)  are  worn. 

Wear  the  exact  uniform  prescribed  by  your  commanding 
fficer,  whether  you  are  on  duty  or  off  duty. 

Never  wear  a  mixed  uniform,  as,  for  instance,  a  part  of  the 
ervice  uniform  with  the  blue  uniform. 

Never  wear  any  part  of  the  uniform  with  civilian  clothes, 
t  is  very  unsoldierly,  for  example,  to  wear  a  civilian  overcoat 
ver  the  uniform  or  to  wear  the  uniform  overcoat  #over  a 
Exilian  suit. 

Keep  the  uniform  clean  and  neat  and  in  good  repair. 

Grease  spots  and  dust  and  dirt  should  be  removed  as  soon  as 
ossible. 

Rips  and  tears  should  be  promptly  mended. 

Missing  buttons  and  cap  and  collar  ornaments  should  be 
romptly  replaced. 

There  is  but  one  correct  and  soldierly  way  to  wear  the  cap. 
Fever  wear  it  on  the  back  or  side  of  the  head. 

The  service  hat  should  be  worn  in  the  regulation  shape, 
eaked,  with  four  indentations,  and  with  hat  cord  sewed  on. 
>o  not  cover  it  with  pen  or  pencil  marks. 

Never  appear  outside  your  room  or  tent  with  your  coat  or 
live-drab  shirt  unbuttoned  or  collar  of  coat  unhooked.  Ohev- 
>ns,  service  stripes,  and  campaign  medals  and  badges  are  a 
art  of.  the  uniform  and  must  be  worn  as  prescribed. 

When  Coats  are  not  worn  with  the  service  uniform  olive- 
rab  shirts  are  prescribed. 

Suspenders  must  never  be  worn  exposed  to  view. 

Never  appear  in  breeches  without  leggings. 

Leather  leggings  should  be  kept  polished.     Canvas  leggings 

lould  be  scrubbed  when  dirty. 


28  ARMS,  UNIFORMS,  AND  EQTTIPMENT. 

Russet-leather  (tan)  shoes  should  be  kept  clean  and  polishe 

The  overcoat  when  worn  must  be  buttoned  throughout  ai 
the  collar  hooked.  When  the  belt  is  worn  it  will  be  worn  ov 
side  the  overcoat. 

Secti'on  5.  The  service  kit; 

The  service  kit  is  composed  of  two  parts — (a)  the  field  k 
which  includes  everything  the  soldier  wears  or  carries  wi' 
him  in  the  held,  and  (b)  the  surplus  kit. 

The  held  kit  consists  of — 

( a  )  The  clothing  worn  on  the  person. 

(b)   Arms  and  equipment,  consisting  of — 

FOR  EACH  ENLISTED   MAN.1 

1  first-aid  packet. 

1  pouch  for  first-aid  packet. 

1  canteen. 

1  canteen  cover. 

1  can.  haeon. 

1  can.  condiment. 

1  pack"  carrier  (except  individually  mounted  men). 

1  haversack  (except  individually  mounted  men). 

1  meat  can.  • 

1  cup. 

1  knife. 

1  fork. 

1  sj. 

1  shelter  tent  half. 

1  shelter  tent  pole  (when  issued) 

lent  pins. 
1  identification  tag  with  tape. 

FOR  EACH   ENLISTED  MAN  AKMED   WITH  THE  RIFLE. 

1  United  States  magazine  rifle,  caliber  .30. 

1  bayonet. 

1  bayonet  scabbard. 

1  gun  sling. 

1  rifle  cartridge  belt. 

v  model  equipment,  1910.     The  old  model  equipment  is  the  san 

•  omit  canteen  cover,  bacon  and  condiment  cans,  and  pack  carrie 

and  add  1  cartridge-belt  suspenders,  1  canteen  btrap,  and  1  blanket-ro 


THE  SURPLUS  KIT.  89 

FOE  EACH  ENLISTED  MAN  ARMED  WITH  THE  PISTOL. 

1  pistol,  caliber  .45. 
1  pistol  holster. 

1  magazine  pocket,  double,  web. 

2  extra  magazines. 

1  pistol  belt  (except  for  men  armed  also  with  the  rifle). 

OK  EACH  ENLISTED  MAN,   INDIVIDUALLY   MOUNTED,   IN   ADDITION   TO 
THE  ABOVE. 

1  rifle  scabbard  (if  armed  with  rifle). 

1  spurs,  pair. 

1  spur  straps,  pair. 

1  set  of  horse  equipment. 

(c)  Extra  clothing  and  articles  to  be  carried  on  the  soldier  or 
>n  the  packed  saddle. 

1  blanket. 

1  comb. 

1  drawers,  pair. 

1  poncho  (dismounted  men). 

1  slicker  (mounted  men). 

1  soap,  cake. 

2  stockings,  pair. 
1  toothbrush, 

1  towel. 

1  undershirt. 

1  housewife  (for  one  man  of  each  squad). 

(d)  Ammunition,  consisting  of — 

90  rounds  ball  cartridges,  caliber  .30  (old  model  belt). 
100  rounds  ball  cartridges,  caliber  .30  (new  model  belt). 

(e)  Rations,  consisting  of — 

lor  2  reserve  rations  (bacon, hard  bread, coffee, sugar, and  salt). 

(f)  Intrenching  tools,  consisting  of — 

2  pick  mattocks,  per  squad. 

1  bolo  or  hand  axe,  per  squad. 
4  shovels,  intrenching,  per  squad. 
1  wire  cutter,  per  squad. 

Section  6.  The  surplus  kit. 
The  surplus  kit  for  each  man  consists  of — 
1  breeches,  pair. 
1  drawers,  pair. 


30  ARMS,  UNIFORMS,  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

1  shirt,  olive  drab. 

1  shoes,  russet  leather,  pair. 

2  stockings,  pair. 
1  undershirt. 

1  shoe  laces,  extra,  pair. 

Each  surplus  kit  bag  contains  1  jointed  cleaning  rod  and  case. 

Squad  leaders  are  responsible  that  surplus  kit  bags  are  kept 
in  order  and  fully  packed  in  the  field.1  Men  are  allowed  access 
to  them  for  the  purpose  of  making  substitutions. 

The  surplus  kits  are  packed  in  surplus  kit  bags,  one  for  each 
squad,  one  for  sergeants,  and  one  for  cooks  and  buglers. 

The  kit  of  each  man  will  be  packed  as  follows : 

Stockings  to  be  rolled  tightly,  one  pair  in  the  toe  of  each 
shoe;  shoes  placed  together,  heels  at  opposite  ends,  soles  out- 
ward, wrapped  tightly  in  underwear,  and  bundle  securely  tied 
around  the  middle  by  the  extra  pair  of  the  shoe  laces,  each 
bundle  to  be  tagged  with  the  company  number  of  the  owner. 
These  individual  kits  will  be  packed  in  the  surplus  kit  bag 
in  two  layers  of  four  kits  each,  the  breeches  and  olive  drab 
shirts  to  be  neatly  folded  and  packed  on  the  top  and  sides  of 
the  layers,  the  jointed  cleaning  rod  and  case,  provided  for  each 
squad,  being  attached  by  the  thongs  on  the  inside  of  the  bag. 

When  overcoats  or  sweaters  are  not  prescribed  to  be  worn  on 
the  person  they  will  be  collected  into  bundles  of  convenient  size 
and  secured  by  burlap  or  other  suitable  material,  or  will  be 
boxed.  They  will  be  marked  ready  for  shipment  to  be  for- 
warded when  required.1 

Section  7.  Assembling  Infantry  equipment.8 

TO  ASSEMBLE  THE  FULL  EQUIPMENT. 
WITH   RATIONS. 

Place  the  assembled  equipment  on  the  ground,  suspender  side 
of  haversack   down,  pockets   of  cartridge   belt   up,   haversack 

1  In  campaign  or  simulated  campaign,  when  an  organization  is  re- 
stricted to  its  prescribed  field-train  transportation,  surplus  kits,  over- 
coats, and  sweaters  are  stored  on  the  line  of  communications  or  other 
ted  place  with  the  permanent  camp  equipment  of  the  organiza- 
tion. 

-  Since  these  instructions  were  written  1  drawers  and  1  undershirt 
have  been  added  to  the  field  kit.  Place  them  in  pack  when  carried, 
othciwi.se  in  haversack. 


ASSEMBLING  INFANTRY  ECIUIPMENT.  31 

spread  out,   inside  flap  and  pack  carrier   extended  their  full 
length  to  the  rear. 

Place  three  cartons  of  hard  bread  in  the  center  of  the  haver- 
sack body,  the  lower  one  on  the  line  of  attachment  of  the  inside 
flap;  lay  the  remaining  carton  of  hard  bread,  the  condiment 
can  and  the  bacon  can  on  the  top  of  these,  the  condiment  can 
and  the  bacon  can  at  the  bottom,  top  of-  the  bacon  can  to  the 
front ;  the  socks  and  toilet  articles  are  rolled,  towel  on  the  out- 
side, into  a  bundle  of  the  same  approximate  dimensions  as  a 
carton  of  hard  bread,  and  are  placed  in  front  of  the  two  rows 
thus  formed. 

The  inside  flap  of  the  haversack  is  folded  over,  these  articles, 
the  end  of  the  flap  being  turned  in  so  that  the  flap,  thus  short- 
ened, extends  about  2  inches  beyond  the  top  of  the  upper  row; 
the  sides  of  the  haversack  are  folded  over  the  sides  of  the  rows ; 
the  upper  binding  straps  are  passed  through  the  loops  on  the 
outside  of  the  inside  flap,  each  strap  through  the  loop  opposite 
the  poi~t  of  its  attachment  to  the  haversack  body,  and  fastened 
by  :  V  ;s  of  the  buckle  on  the  opposite  side,  the  strap  being 
passed  through  the  opening  in  the  buckle  next  to  its  attach- 
ment, over  the  center  bar,  and  back  through  the  opening  of 
the  bu  kle  away  from  its  attachment ;  the  strap  is  pulled  tight 
to  make  the  fastening  secure;  the  outer  flap  of  the  haversack 
is  folded  over  and  fastened  by  means  oX  the  lower  haversack 
binding  strap  and  the  buckle  on  the  inside  of  the  outer  flap ; 
the  strap  is  pulled  tight,  drawing  the  outer  flap  snugly  over  the 
filled  haversack. 

The  haversack  is  now  packed  and  the  carrier  is  ready  for  the 
reception  of  the  pack. 

If  one  reserve  ration  and  one  emergency  ration  are  carried 
in  lieu  of  two  reserve  rations,  the  haversack  is  packed  in  the* 
manner  described  above,  except  that  two  cartons  of  hard  bread 
and  the  bacon  can  form  the  bottom  layer,  the  bacon  can  on  the 
bottom ;  the  condiment  can,  the  emergency  ration,  and  the  toilet 
articles  form  the  top  layer. 

If  one  emergency  ration  is  carried  in  addition  to  the  two 
reserve  rations,  it  is  packed  on  top  of  the  top  la^er. 

To  make  the  pack:  Spread  the  shelter  half  Gh  the  ground  and 
fold  in  the  triangular  ends,  forming  an  approximate  square  from 
the  half,  the  guy  on  the  inside ;  fold  the  poncho  once  across  its 


ARMS,  UNIFORMS,  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

shortest  dimension,  then  twice  across  its  longest  dimension,  and 
lay  it  in  the  center  of  the  shelter  half;  fold  the  blanket  as  de- 
scribed for  the  poncho  and  place  it  on  the  latter ;  place  the  shel- 
ter tent  pins  in  the  folds  of  the  blanket,  in  the  center  and  across 
the  shortest  dimension ;  fold  the  edges  of  the  shelter  half  snugly- 
over  the  blanket  and  poncho  and,  beginning  on  either  of  the  short 
roll  tightly  and  compactly.    This  forms  the  pack. 

To  assemble  the  pack:  Place  the  pack  in  the  pack  carrier  and 
grasp  the  lower  suspension  rings,  one  in  each  hand;  place  the 
right  knee  against  the  bottom  of  the  roll;  pull  the  carrier  down 
and  force  the  pack  up  close  against  the  bottom  of  the  packed 
haversack;  without  removing  the  knee,  pass  the  lower  carrier 
binding  strap  over  the  pack  and  secure  it  by  means  of  the  oppo- 
site buckle;  in  a  similar  manner  secure  the  lower  haversack 
binding  strap  and  then  the  upper  carrier  binding  strap. 

Engage  the  snap  hook  on  the  pack  suspenders  in  the  lower  sus- 
pension rings. 

The  equipment  is  now  assembled  and  packed  as  prescribed  for 
the  full  equipment.  0 

TO  ASSEMBLE  THE  FULL  EQUIPMENT. 
WITHOUT    RATIONS. 

Place  the  assembled  equipment  on  the  ground  as  heretofore 
ibed;  fold  up  the  inside  flap  of  the  haversack  so  that  its 
end  will  be  on  a  line  with  the  top  of  the  haversack  body;  fold 
up  the  lower  haversack  strap  in  the  same  manner. 

To  make  up  the  pack:   Fold  the  poncho,  blanket,  and  shelter 

half,  and  make  up  the  pack  as  heretofore  prescribed,  except  that 

the  condiment   and   bacon   can    (the  former  inside  the  latter) 

and  the  toilet  articles  and  socks  are  rolled  in  the  pack.     In  this 

he  pack  is  rolled,  beginning  on  either  of  the  long  sides 

id  of  the  short  sides,  as  heretofore  described. 

To  assemble  the  pack:   Place  the  pack  on  the  haversack  and 

carrier,  its  upper  end  on  a  line  with  the  upper  edge  of  the 

haversack  body;  bind  it  to  the  haversack  and  carrier  by  means 

of  the  haversack  and  pack  binding  straps;  fold  down  the  outer 

flap  on  the  haversack  and  secure  it  by  means  of  the  free  end  of 

the  middle  haversack  binding  strap  and  the  buckle  provided  on 

the  underside  of  the  dap;  engage  the  snap  hooks  of  the  pack 

suspenders  in  the  lower  suspension  rings. 

The  equipment  is  now  packed  and  assembled. 


ASSEMBLING  INFANTRY  EQUIPMENT.  88 

To  adjust  the  equipment  to  the  soldier:  Put  on  the  equipment, 
slipping  the  .arms  one  at  a  time  through  the  pack  suspenders 
as  through  the  sleeves  of  a  coat;  by  means  of  the  adjusting 
buckles  on  the  belt  suspenders  raise  or  lower  the  belt  until  it 
rests  well  down  over  the  hip  bones  on  the  sides  and  below  the 
pit  of  the  abdomen  in  front ;  raise  or  lower  it  in  rear  until  the 
adjusting  strap  lies  smoothly  across  the  small  of  the  back;  by 
means  of  the  adjusting  buckles  on  the  pack  suspenders,  raise  or 
lower  the  load  on  the  back  until  the  top  of  the  haversack  is  on 
a  level  with  the  top  of  the  shoulders,  the  pack  suspenders,  from 
their  point  of  attachment  to  the  haversack  to  the  line  of  tan- 
gency  with  the  shoulder,  being  horizontal.  The  latter  is  abso- 
lutely essential  to  the  proper  adjustment  of  the  load. 

The  position  of  the  belt  is  the  same  whether  filled  or  empty. 

TO    ASSEMBLE    THE    FULL    EQUIPMENT    LESS    THE    PACK. 
WITH  RATIONS. 

Detach  the  carrier  from  the  haversack ;  place  the  rest  of  the 
equipment  on  the  ground  as  heretofore  described ;  place  the 
four  cartons  of  hard  bread,  the  bacon  can,  the  condiment  can. 
and  the  toilet  articles  in  one  row  in  the  middle  of  the  haver- 
sack body,  the  toilet  articles  at  the  top,  the  bacon  can  at  the 
bottom,  top  to  the  front,  the  row  extending  from  top  to  bottom 
of  the  haversack ;  fold  the  inside  flap  over  the  row  thus  formed ; 
fold  the  sides  of  the  haversack  up  and  over ;  pass  the  three 
haversack  binding  straps  through  the  loops  on  the  inside  Hap 
and  secure  by  means  of  the  buckles  on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
haversack ;  pass  the  lower  haversack  binding  strap  through  the 
small  buttonhole  in  the  lower  edge  of  the  haversack,  fold  the 
outer  flap  of  the  haversack  over  the  whole,  and  secure  by 
means  of  the  buckle  on  its  underside  and  the  lower  haversack 
binding  strap. 

Pass  the  haversack  suspension  rings  through  the  contiguous 
buttonholes  in  the  lower  edge  of  the  haversack  and  engage  the 
snap  hooks  on  the  ends  of  the  pack  suspenders. 

If  one  reserve  ration  and  one  emergency  ration  are  carried 
in  lieu  of  two  reserve  rations,  the  haversack  is  packed  in 
the  manner  described  above,  except  that  one  emergency  ration 
is  substituted  for  two  of  the  cartons  of  hard  bread. 


34  ARMS.  UNIFORMS.  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

If  one  emergency  ration  is  carried  in  addition  to  the  two 
reserve  rat  a  packed  on  top  of  the  layer. 

TO    ASSEMBLE    THE    FULL    EQUIPMENT   LESS    THE   PACK. 
WITHOUT  RATIONS. 

Detach  the  carrier  from  the  haversack;  place  the  rest  of  the 
equipment  on  the  ground,  as  heretofore  described ;  fold  up  the 
Inside  flap  of  the  haversack  until  its  upper  end  is  on  a  line  with 
the  top  of  the  haversack  body  ;  fold  the  sides  of  the  haversack 
over,  pass  the  three  haversack  binding  straps  through  the  loops 
on  the  Inside  flap  and  secure  by  means  of  the  buckles  on  the 
opposite  side  of  the  haversack ;  pass  the  lower  haversack  binding 
strap  through  the  small  buttonhole  in  the  lower  edge  of  the 
haversack:  place  the  condiment  and  bacon  can  (the  former  in- 
side the  latter)  and  the  toilet  articles  and  socks  in  the  bottom 
of  the  pouch  thus  formed ;  fold  the  outer  flap  of  the  haversack 
over  the  whole  and  secure  by  means  of  the  buckle  on  its  under- 
side and  the  lower  haversack  binding  strap. 

Pass  the  haversack  suspension  rings  through  the  contiguous 
buttonholes  in  the  lower  edge  of  the  haversack  and  engage  the 
snap  hooks  on  the  ends  of  the  pack  suspenders. 

To  adjust  the  equipment  to  the  soldier:  Put  on  the  equipment 
as  prescribed  for  the  full  equipment.  Adjust  the  cartridge  belt 
as  prescribed  for  the  full  equipment.  Adjust*  the  pack  sus- 
penders so  that  the  top  of  the  haversack  is  on  a  level  with  the 
top  of  the  shoulders. 

TO  DISCARD  THE  PACK  WITHOUT  REMOVING  TEE  EQUIPMENT 
FEOM    THE    BODY. 

Unsnap  the  pack  suspenders  from  the  suspension  rings  and 
snap  them  into  the  eyelets  on  top  of  the  belt  and  in  rear  of 
the  rear  pockets  of  the  right  and  left  pocket  sections;  support 
the  bottom  of  the  pack  with  the  left  hand  and  with  the  right 
hand  grasp  the  coupling  strap  at  its  middle  and  withdraw  first 
ad,  then  the  other;  press  down  gently  on  the  pack  with 
both  hands  and  remove  it.  When  the  pack  has  been  removed, 
lace  the  coupling  strap  into  the  buttonholes  along  the  upper  edge 
of  the  carrier.  Adjust  the  pack  suspenders. 
OLD   MODEL   EQUIPMENT. 

To  roll  the  blanket  roll.—  See  page  120. 


CHAPTER  III. 

RATIONS  AND  FORAGE. 


Section  1.  The  ration. 

A  ration  is  the  allowance  of  food  for  one  man  for  one  day. 
In    the   field    there   are   three   kinds   of   rations   issued,    as 
follows : 

The  garrison  ration  is  intended  to  be  issued  in  kind  whenever 
possible.  The  approximate  net  weight  of  this  ration  is  4.5 
pounds. 

The  reserve  ration  is  the  simplest  efficient  ration,  and  con- 
stitutes the  reserve  carried  for  field  service.    It  consists  of — 

Ounces. 

Bacon . 12 

Hard   bread 1G 

Coffee,  roasted  and  ground 1. 12 

Sugar .    2. 4 

Salt . .  16 


Approximate  net  weight pounds—    2 

The  field  ration  is  the  ration  prescribed  in  orders  by  the  com- 
mander of  the  field  forces.  It  consists  of  the  reserve  ration,  in 
whole  or  in  part,  supplemented  by  articles  requisitioned  or 
purchased  locally  or  shipped  from  the  rear. 

In  campaign  a  command  carries  as  a  part  of  its  normal 
equipment  the  following  rations: 

(a)  On  each  man:  At  least  two  days'  reserve  rations. 

(b)  In  the  ration  section  of  the  field  train,  for  each  man: 

Two  days'  field  and  one  day's  reserve  rations. 

(c)  In  the  supply  train:  Two  days'  field  rations. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  commanders  will  require  each 
man  on  the  march  to  carry  the  unconsumed  portion  of  the  day's 
ration  issued  the  night  before  for  the  noonday  meal.  Reserve 
rations  are  consumed  only  in  case  of  extreme  necessity,  when 
other  supplies  are  not  available.    They  are  not  to  be  consumed 

35 


36  RATIONS  AND  FORAGE. 

'  without  an  express  order  from  the  officer  in  cora- 

who  is  responsible  for  the  provision  of  sup- 

nainely,   the  division  comnfander  or  other   independent- 

nent  commander,     Every  officer  within  the  limits  of  his 

ioi  sible  for  the  enforcement  of  this  regula- 

:  .  rve  rations  consumed  must  be  replaced  at  the  first 

>rtunity. 

Section  2.  Individual  cooking. 

(times  rations  for  several  days  are  issued  to  the  soldier 

time,  and  in  such  cases  you  should  be  very  careful  to  so 

rations  that  they  will  last  you  the  entire  period.     If 

,;T  yourself  one  day,  or  waste  your  rations,  you  will  have 

rve  later  on. 

rally  the  cooking  for  the  company  will  be  done  by  the 

ny  cook,  but  sometimes  every  soldier  will  have  to  prepare 

.  using  only  his  field  mess  kit  for  the  purpose. 

Lost  fire  for  individual  cooking  Is  a  small,  clear  one,  or, 

a  few  brisk  coals.    To  make  such  a  fire,  first  gather 

n  Dumber  of  sticks  about  1  inch  in  diameter.    These  should  be 

•tad  limbs  adhering  to  a  tree  are  dryer  than  those  picked 

up  from  the  ground.     Split  some  of  these  and  shave  them  up 

ndliug.    Dig  a  trench  in  the  ground,  laid  with  the  wind, 

r  long,  4  inches  wide,  and  6  Inches  deep.    Start  the 

flro  in  this  trench  gradually,  piling  on  the  heavier  wood  as  the 

When  the  trench  is  full  of  burning  wood,  allow 

few  minutes  to  burn  down  to  coals  and  stop  blazing  high. 

Then   rest  the  meat  can   and  cup  over  the  trench  and  start 

lather  may  be  supported,  if  necessary,  with  green 

sticks.     If  you  can  not  scrape  a  trench  in  the  soil,  build  one 

>cks  "i"  with  two  parallel  logs. 

'Mowing  recipes  have  been  furnished  from  the  office  of 

irtermaster  General,  United  States  Army: 

Fill    the   cup   two-thirds   full    of   water   and    bring 

Add  one  heaping  spoonful  of  coffee  and  stir  well, 

■nful  of  sugar  if  desired.    Boil  five  minutes  and 

11   to   the  side   of  the  fire  to  simmer  for  about  10 

minutes.    Then,  to  clear  the  coffee,  throw  in  a  spoonful  or  two 

This  coffee  is  of  medium  strength  and  is  within 

ait  of  the  ration  if  made  but  twice  a  day. 


INDIVIDUAL  EQUIPMENT.  37 

Cocoa. — Take  two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water,  bring  to  a  boil, 
add  one  heaping  spoonful  of  cocoa,  and  stir  until  dissolved. 
Add  one  spoonful  of  sugar,  if  desired,  and  boil  for  five 
minutes. 

Chocolate. — Take  two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water,  bring  to 
a  boil,  add  a  piece  of  chocolate  about  the  size  of  a  hickory 
nut,  breaking  or  cutting  it  into  small  pieces  and  stirring  until 
dissolved.  Add  one  spoonful  of  sugar,  if  desired,  and  boil  for 
five  minutes. 

Tea. — Take  two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water,  bring  to  a  boil, 
add  one-half  of  a  level  spoonful  of  tea,  and  then  let  it 
stand  or  "  draw "  for  three  minutes.  If  allowed  to  stand 
longer  the  tea  will  get  bitter,  unless  separated  from  the  tea 
leaves. 


Bacon. — Cut  slices  about  five  to  the  inch,  three  of  which 
should  generally  be  sufficient  for  one  man  for  one  meal.  Place 
in  a  meat  "an  vith  about  one-half  inch  of  cold  water.  Let 
come  to  a  boil  and  then  pour  the  water  off.  Fry  over  a  brisk 
fire,  turning  the  bacon  once  and  quickly  browning  it.  Remove 
the  bacon  to  lid  of  meat  can,  leaving  the  grease  for  frying 
potatoes,  onions,  rice,  flapjacks,  etc.,  according  to  recipe. 

Fresh  meat  (to  fry). — To  fry,  a  small  amount  of  grease  (one 
to  two  spoonfuls)  is  necessary.  Put  grease  in  the  meat  can 
and  let  come  to  a  smoking  temperature,  then  drop  in  the  steak 
and,  if  about  one-half  inch  thick,  let  fry  for  about  one  minute 
before  turning,  depending  upon  whether  it  is  desired  it  shall 
be  rare,  medium,  or  Well  done.  Then  turn  and  fry  briskly  as 
before.    Salt  and  pepper  to  taste. 

Applies  to  beef,  veal,  pork,  mutton,  venison,  etc. 

Fresh  meat  (to  broil). — Cut  in  slices  about  one  inch  thick, 
from  half  as  large  as  the  hand  to  four  times  that  size.  Sharpen 
a  stick  or  branch  of  convenient  length — say,  from  two  to  four 
feet  long — and  weave  the  point  of  the  stick  through  the  steak 
several  times,  so  that  it  may  be  readily  turned  over  a  few  brisk 
coals  or  on  the  windward  side  of  a  small  lire.  Allow  to  brown 
nicely,  turning  frequently.  Salt  and  pepper  to  taste.  Meat 
with  considerable  fat  is  preferred,  though  any  meat  may  be 
broiled  in  this  manner. 


346645 


38  RATIONS  AND  FORAGE. 

(to  stew).— Cut  into  chunks  from  one-half  inch 
-      Fill  cup  about  one-third  full  of  meat  and 
with  about  one  inch  of  water.    Let  boil  or  simmer  about 
or  until  tender.    Add  such  fibrous  vegetables  as  car- 
turnips,  or  cabbage,  cut  into  small  chunks,  soon  after  the 
i  to  boil,  and  potatoes,  onions,  or  other  tender 
hit's  when  the  meat  is  about  half  done.    Amount  of  vege- 
to  he  added,  about  the  same  as  meat,  depending  upon 
supply  am!  taste.    Suit  and  pepper  to  taste.    Applies  to  all  fresh 
and  fowls.    The  proportion  of  meat  and  vegetables  used 
with  their  abundance,  and  fixed  quantities  can  not  be 
adhered  to.    Fresh  fish  can  be  handled  as  above,  except  that  it 
feed  much  quicker,  and  potatoes  and  onions  and  canned 
ire  the  only  vegetables  generally  used  with  it    thus  mak- 
A  slice  of  bacon  would  greatly  improve  the 
May  be  conveniently  cooked  in  meat  can  or  cup. 

VEGETABLES. 

Potatoes    (fried). — Take  two  medium-sized  potatoes  or  one 
one    (about   one-half  pound),   peel   and   cut   into   slices 
about  one-fourth  inch  thick  and  scatter  well  in  the  meat  can 
in    which    the   grease   remains    after   frying   the   bacon.      Add 
sufficient  water  to  half  cover  the  potatoes,  cover  with  the  lid 
iep  the  moisture  in,  and  let  come  to  a  boil  for  about  15  to 
tea.     Remove  the  cover  and  dry  as  desired.     Salt  and 
pepper  to  taste.     During  the  cooking  the  bacon  already  pre- 
pared may  be  kept  on  the  cover,  which  is  most  conveniently 
i  bottom  side  up  over  the  cooking  vegetables. 
ma  (fried). — Same  as  potatoes. 

ihoiled). — Peel  two  medium-sized  potatoes    (about 

.If  pound)  or  one  large  one,  and  cut  in  coarse  chunks  of 

about  the  same  size — say  1*  inch  cubes.     Place  in  meat  can 

fourths  fill  with  water.     Cover  with  lid  and  let  boil 

tmer  for  15  or  20  minutes.     They  are  done  when  easily 

with  a   sharp  stick.     Pour  off  the  water  and  let 

dry  out  for  one  or  two  minutes  over  hot  ashes  or  light  coals. 

(baked).— Take  two  medium-sized  potatoes    (about 

one-half  pound)   or  one  large  one  cut  in  half.     Lay  in  a  bed 

«l8  and  cover  with  same  and  smother  with  ashes. 

Do  not  disturb  for  30  or  40  minutes,  when  they  should  be  done. 


INDIVIDUAL  EQUIPMENT.  39 

Canned  tomatoes. — One  2-pound  can  is  generally  sufficient:  for 
five  men. 

Stew. — Pour  into  tlie  meat  can  one  man's  allowance  of  toma- 
toes and  add  about  two  large  hardtacks  broken  into  small 
pieces  and  let  come  to  a  boil.  Add  salt  and  pepper  to  taste,  or 
add  a  pinch  of  salt  and  one-fourth  spoonful  of  sugar. 

Or,  having  fried  the  bacon,  pour  the  tomatoes  into  the  meat 
can,  the  grease  remaining,  and  add,  if  desired,  two  broken 
hardtacks.    Set  over  a  brisk  fire  and  let  come  to  a  boil. 

Or,  heat  the  tomatoes  just  as  they  come  from  the  can,  adding 
two  pinches  of  salt  and  one-half  spoonful  of  sugar,  if  desired. 

Or,  especially  in  hot  weather,  eaten  cold  with  hard  bread, 
the^-  are  very  palatable. 

Rice. — Take  about  two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water,  bring 
to  a  boil,  add  four  heaping  spoonfuls  of  rice,  and  boil  until  the 
grains  are  soft  enough  to  be  easily  mashed  between  the  fingers 
(about  20  minutes).  Add  two  pinches  of  salt  and,  after  stirring, 
pour  off  the  water  and  empty  rice  out  on  meat  can.  Bacon 
grease  or  sugar  may  be  added. 

Com  meal,  fine  hominy,  oatmeal. — Take  about  one-third  of  a 
cupful  of  water,  bring  to  a  boil,  add  4  heaping  spoonfuls  of 
the  meal  or  hominy,  and  boil  about  20  minutes.  Then  add 
about  two  pinches  of  salt  and  stir  well. 

Dried  beans  and  peas. — Put  4  heaping  spoonfuls  in  about 
two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water  and  boil  until  soft.  This 
generally  takes  from  three  to  four  hours.  Add  one  pinch  of 
salt.  About  half  ,an  hour  before  the  beans  are  done  add  one 
slice  of  bacon 

HOT    BKEADS. 

Flapjacks. — Take  G  spoonfuls  of  flour  and  one-third  spoon- 
ful of  baking  powder  and  mix  thoroughly  (or  dry  mix  in  a 
large  pan  before  issue,  at  the  rate  of  25  pounds  of  flour  and  3 
half  cans  of  baking  powder  for  100  men)  Add  sufficient  cold 
water  to  make  a  batter  that  will  drip  freely  from  the  spoon. 
adding  a  pinch  of  salt.  Pour  into  the  meat  can,  which  should 
contain  the  grease  from  fried  bacon  or  a  spoonful  of  butter  or 
fat,  and  place  over  medium  hot  coals  sufficient  to  bake,  so  that 
in  from  5  to  7  minutes  the  flapjack  may  be  turned  by  a  quick 


40  RATIONS  AND  FORAGE. 

f  the  pan.    Fry  from  5  to  7  minutes  longer,  or  until  by 
i  it  is  found  to  be  done. 

-Hoecake  is  made  exactly  the  same  as  flapjacks 
abstltuting  corn  meal  for  flour. 

;/  rations.— Detailed  instructions  as  to  the  manner 
paring  the  emergency  ration  are  found  on  the  label  of 
in     Remember  that  even  a  very  lim;ted  amount  of  bacon 
or  bard  bread,  or  both,  consumed  with  the  emergency  ration 
it  far  more  palatable,  and  generally  extends  the  period 
during  which  it  can  be  consumed  with  relish.    For  this  reason 
tld  be  better  to  husband  the  supply  of  hard  bread  and 
use   with   the   emergency   ration   when   it   becomes 
it  that  the  latter  must  be  consumed  rather  than  to  retain 
lergency  ration  to  the  last  extremity  and  force  its  ex- 
clusive use  for  a  longer  period  than  two  or -three  days. 

Section  3.  The  Forage  Ration. 

"  1017,  Army  Regulations.— The  forage  ration  for  a  horse  is 

inds  of  hay  and  12  pounds  of  oats,  corn,  or  barley,  and  3$ 

pounds  of  straw   (or  hay)   for  bedding;  for  a  Field  Artillery 

of  the  heavy-draft  type,  weighing  1,300  pounds  or  over, 

inds  of  hay  and  14  pounds  of  oats,  corn,  or  barley,  and  3$ 

pounds  of  straw  (or  hay)  for  bedding;  for  a  mule,  14  pounds 

of  hay  and  9  pounds  of  oats,  corn,  or  barley,  and  3$  pounds  of 

straw  (or  hay)  for  bedding.    To  each  animal  3  pounds  of  bran 

may  be  issued  in  lieu  of  that  quantity  of  grain. 

amanding  officer  may,  in  his  discretion,  vary  the  pro- 
•  the  components  of  the  ration  (1  pound  of  grain,  1$ 
hay,  and  2  pounds  of  straw  being  taken  as  equiva- 
.  and  in  the  field  may  substitute  other  recognized  articles 
btained  locally,  the  variation  or  the  substitution  not 
•he  money  value  of  the  components  of  the  ration  at  the 
rates  in  effect  at  the  time  of  change. 
.  Army  Regulations. — Where  grazing  is  practicable,  or 
little  work  is  required  of  the  animals,  commanding  officers 
will  reduce  the  forage  ration.    When,  on  the  other  hand,  condi- 
tions demand  it,  they  are  authorized  to  Increase  the  ration,  not 
in  excess,  however,  of  savings  made." 


THE  FORAGE  RATION.  41 

In  the  field  the  authorized  allowances  must  often  be  reduced 
and  supplemented  by  grazing  and  other  kinds  of  food,  such  as 
green  forage,  beans,  peas,  rice,  palay,  wheat,  and  rye.  Wheat 
and  rye  should  be  crushed  and  fed  sparingly  (about* one-fourth 
of  the  allowance).  For  unshelled  corn,  add  about  one-quarter 
weight. 

On  the  march  the  grain  ration  is  the  only  forage  carried.  It 
consists  of  12  pounds  of  grain  for  each  horse  and  9  pounds  of 
grain  for  each  mule.  Recourse  must  be  had  to  grazing  if  it  is 
not  possible  to  procure  long  forage  in  the  country  traversed. 

In  campaign  a  command  carries  as  a  part  of  its  normal  equip- 
ment the  following  forage: 

(a)  For  each  draft  animal :  On  each  vehicle  a  reserve  of  one 
day's  grain  ration  for  its  draft  animals. 

(6)  On  animals  and  vehicles:  A  portion  of  their  grain  ra- 
tion issued  the  night  before,  for  a  noonday  feed. 

(c)  In  the  ration  section  of  the  field  train,  for  each  animal, 
two  day's  grain  rations. 

(d)  In  supply  train  of  an  Infantry  division  two  days'  grain 
rations,  and  of  a  Cavalry  division  one  days'  grain  ration. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

PERSONAL  HYGIENE  AND  CAKE  OF  THE  FEET. 


PERSONAL  HYGIENE. 

i  ry  -fiows  that  In  almost  every  war  many  more  men  die 

than  from  wounds  received  in  battle.    Much  of  this 

preventable  and  is  due  either  to  the  ignorance  or 

a   of   the  person   who   has   the  disease   or   of  other 

out  him.     It  is  a  terrible  truth  that  one  man  who 

s  :my  of  the  great  rules  of  health  may  be  the  means  of 

killing  ore  of  his  comrades  than  are  killed  by  the  bullets 

of  the  enemy. 

It  is  therefore  most  important  that  every  soldier  should  learn 
how  to  take  care  of  his  health  when  in  the  field  and  that  he 
should  also  insist  that  his  comrades  do  not  violate  any  of  the 
rules  prescribed  for  this  purpose. 

\   great  many  diseases  are  due  to  germs,  which  are  either 
animals  or  little  plants  so  very  small  that  they  can  only 
en  by  aid  of  the  microscope.    All  diseases  caused  by  germs 
ing."     All  other  diseases  are  not  "catching." 
There  are  only  five  ways  of  catching  disease: 

ting  certain  germs  on  the  body  by  touching  some  one 

nething   which   has  them   on   it.     Thus,   one  may   catch 

ses,  smallpox,  measles,  scarlet  fever,  chicken  pox, 

mumps,  boils,  body  lice,  ringworm,  barber's  itch,  dhobie  itch, 

and  some  other  diseases.    Wounds  are  infected  in  this  manner. 

( l) )   Breathing  in  certain  germs  which  float  in  the  air.     In 

this   way    one   may    catch    pneumonia,    consumption,    influenza, 

diphtheria,  whooping  cough,  tonsilitis,  spinal  meningitis,  mea- 

and  certain  ether  diseases. 

germs  in  through  the  mouth  in  eating  or 

drinking.     Dysentery,  cholera,  typhoid  fever,  diarrhea,  and  in- 

al  worms  may  be  caught  in  this  manner. 

Having  certain  germs  injected  into  the  body  by  the  bites 

.!   as  moso^itoes,  fleas,  and  bedbugs.     Malaria, 

fever,  dengue  fever,  and  bubonic  plague  may  be  caught 

in  this  way. 

42 


PEBSONAL  HYGIENE.  43 

(e)  Inheriting  the  germ  from  one's  parents. 

Persons  may  have  these  germs  sometimes  without  apparently 
being  sick  with  any  disease.  Such  persons  and  persons  who  are 
sick  with  the  diseases  are  a  great  source  of  danger  to  others 
about  them.  Germs  which  multiply  in  such  persons  are  found 
in  their  urine  and  excretions  from  the  bowels;  in  discharges 
from  ulcers  and  abscesses;  in  the  spit  or  particles  coughed  or 
sneezed  into  the  air ;  in  the  perspiration  or  scales  from  the 
skin ;  and  in  the  blood  sucked  up  by  biting  insects. 

Those  who  have  taken  care  of  their  health  and  who  have  not 
become  weakened  by  bad  habits,  exposure,  and  fatigue  ape  not 
only  less  liable  to  catch  disease,  but  are  more  apt  to  recover 
when  taken  sick. 

Knowing  all  these  things,  the  soldier  can  understand  the  rea- 
sons for  the  following  rules  and  how  important  it  is  that  they 
should  be  carried  out  by  each  and  every  person : 

Stay  away  from  persons  having  "  catching  "  diseases. 

If  you  have  any  disease,  don't  try  to  cure  it  yourself,  but  go 
to  the  surgeon.     Insist  that  other  soldiers  do  likewise. 

Typhoid  fever  is  one  of  the  most  dangerous  and  common  camp 
diseases.  Modern  medicine  has,  however,  discovered  an  effec- 
tive preventative  for  this  disease  in  the  typhoid  prophylactic, 
which  renders  the  person  immune  from  typhoid  fever.  The 
treatment  consists  in  injecting  into  the  arm  a  preventative 
serum.     The  injection  is  given  three  times  at.  10-day  intervals. 

Association  with  lewd  women  is  dangerous.  It  may  result 
in  disabling  you  for  life.  It  is  the  cause  of  a  disease  (syphilis) 
which  may  be  transmitted  by  a  parent  to  his  children.  Soldiers 
with  venereal  diseases  should  not  use  basins  or  toilet  articles 
used  by  ethers,  as  the  germs  of  these  diseases  if  gotten  into  the 
eye  very  often  cause  blindness.  Likewise,  if  they  use  the  same 
drinking  cup  used  by  others  they  may  give  others  the  disease. 
They  should  promptly  report  their  trouble  to  the  surgeon,  that 
they  may  receive  the  best  medical  advice  and  attention. 

Should  a  soldier  expose  himself  to  infection  by  having  inter- 
course with  an  unknown  woman,  he  should  report  as  soon  as 
possible  afterwards  to  the  regimental  infirmary  for  prophy- 
lactic treatment,  which,  if  taken  within  a  few  hours  after 
intercourse,  will  prevent  to  a  large  degree  the  liability  of 
contracting  any  disease. 


44         PERSONAL  HYGIENE  AND  CAEE  OF  THE  FEET. 

iked   germs   are   dead   and   therefore  harmless.     Water, 

when  clear,  may  be  alive  with  deadly  germs.    Therefore, 

the   conditions   are   such   that   the   commanding   officer 

nil  drinking  water  to  be  boiled,  be  careful  to  live  up  to 

rder. 

the  latrines  and  don't  go  elsewhere  to  relieve  yourself. 
In  open  latrines  cover  your  deposit  with  dirt,  as  it  breeds  flies 
iiMl  may  also  be  full  of  germs. 

Piles  carry  germs  from  one  place  to  another.  Therefore  see 
that  your  food  nnd  mess  kit  are  protected  from  them. 

All*  slops  and  scraps  of  food  scattered  about  camp  soon 
produce  bad  odors  and  draw  flies.  Therefore  do  your  part 
toward  keeping  the  camp  free  from  disease  by  carefully  de- 
puting such  refuse  in  the  pits  or  cans  used  for  this  purpose. 

Urinate  only  in  the  latrines,  or  in  the  cans  set  out  for  this 

purpose,  never  on  the  ground  around  camp,  because  it  not  only 

bad  smells  but  urine  sometimes  contains  the  germs  of 

ing"  diseases. 

.Soapy  water  thrown  on  the  ground  soon  produces  bad  odors. 

Therefore  in  camps  of  several  days'  duration  this  water  should 

be  thrown  in  covered  pits  or  in  cans  used  for  this  purpose. 

or  tain  mosquitoes  can  transmit  malaria  and  yellow  fever, 
ur  mosquito  bar  for  this  reason  as  well  as  for  personal 
comfort. 

p  your  mouth  clean  by  brushing  your  teeth  once  or  twice 
a  day.  It  helps  to  prevent  the  teeth  from  decaying.  Decayed 
teeth  cause  toothache.  They  also  lead  one  to  swallow  food 
without  properly  chewing  it,  and  this  leads  to  stomach  troubles 
of  various  kinds.  Food  left  around  and  between  the  teeth  is 
bad  for  the  teeth  and  forms  good  breeding  places  for  germs. 

p  the  skin  clean.    Through  the  pores  of  the  skin  the  body 
Id  of  much  waste  and  poisonous  matter.    Therefore  re- 
rhis  and  keep  the  pores  open  by  bathing  once  every  day, 
ible.    If  water  is  scarce,  rub  the  body  over  with  a  wet 
If  no  water  is  at  hand,  take  a  dry  rub.    Wash  care- 
fully  the  armpits,  between  the  legs,  and  under  the  foreskin, 
a  will  prevent  chafing. 

-kin  protects  the  sensitive  parts  underneath  from  injury 

and   helps  to  keep  out  germs.     Therefore  when  blisters  are 

1  don't  tear  off  the  skin.    Insert  a  needle  under  the  skin 


PEBSOJTAI  HYGIENE.  48 

a  little  distance  back  from  the  blister  and  push  it  through  to 
the  opposite  side.  Press  out  the  liquid  through  the  holes  thus 
formed.  Heat  the  needle  red  hot  first,  with  a  match  or  candle, 
to  kill  the  germs. 

When  the  skin  is  broken  (in  cuts  and  wounds)  keep  the  open- 
ing covered  with  a  bandage  to  keep  out  germs  and  dirt ;  other- 
wise the  sore  may  fester.    Pus  is  always  caused  by  germs. 

Keep  your  hair  short.  Long  hair  and  a  long  beard  in  the 
field  generally  means  a  dirty  head  and  a  dirty  face  and  favors 
skin  diseases,  lice,  and  dandruff. 

Don't  let  any  part  of  the  body  become  chilled,  as  this  very 
often  is  the  direct  cause  of  diarrhea,  dysentery,  pneumonia, 
rheumatism,  and  other  diseases. 

Wet  clothes  may  be  worn  while  marching  or  exercising  with- 
out bad  results,  but  there  is  great  danger  if  one  rests  in  wet 
clothing,  as  the  body  may  become  chilled. 

Don't  sit  or  lie  or  sleep  directly  on  damp  ground,  as  this  is 
sure  to  chill  the  body. 

When  hot  or  perspiring  or  when  wearing  damp  clothes,  don't 
remain  where  a  breeze  can  strike  you.  You  are  sure  to  be- 
come chilled. 

Every  day,  if  possible,  hang  your  blanket  and  clothing  out  to 
air  in  the  sun ;  shake  or  beat  them  with  a  small  stick.  Germs 
and  vermin  don't  like  this  treatment,  but  damp,  musty  clothing 
suits  them  very  well.  Wash  your  shirts,  underwear,  and  socks 
frequently.  The  danger  of  blood  poisoning  from  a  wound  is 
greatly  increased  if  the  bullet  passes  through  dirty  clothes. 

Ditch  your  tent  as  soon  as  you  can,  particularly  a  shelter 
tent,  even  if  you  camp  for  one  night  only.  Otherwise  a  little 
rain  may  ruin  a  whole  night's  rest. 

Always  prepare  your  bed  before  dark.  Level  off  the  ground 
and  scrape  out  a  little  hollow  for  your  hips.  Get  some  straw 
or  dry  grass  if  possible.  Green  grass  or  branches  from  trees 
are  better  than  nothing.  Sleep  on  your  poncho.  This  keeps 
the  dampness  from  coming  up  from  the  ground  and  chilling  the 
body.  Every  minute  spent  in  making  a  good  bed  means  about 
an  hour's  good  rest  later  on. 

Avoid  the  food  and  drink  found  for  sale  in  the  cheap  stands 
about  camp.  The  quality  is  generally  bad,  and  it  is  often  pre- 
pared in  filthy  places  by  very  dirty  persons. 


46  PERSONAL  HYGIENE  AND  CAI^  OF  THE  FEET. 

The  us.?  of  Intoxicating  liquor  is  particularly  dangerous  in 

i\e  use,  even  at  long  intervals,  breaks  down 

em.    Drinking  men  are  more  apt  to  get  sick  and  less 

get    well    than  are   their   more  sober   comrades.     If 

:  Is  taken  at  all,  it  is  best  after  the  work  of  the  day  is 

over.     It  should  never  be  taken  when  the  body  is  exposed  to 

severe  cold,  as  it  diminishes  the  resistance  of  the  body.     Hot 

tea  or  coffee  is  much  preferable  under  these  circumstances. 

CARE  OF  THE  FEET. 

ddier  can  not  march  with  sore  feet,  and  marching  is  the 

main   part  of  an   infantryman's  daily  duty  in  the  field.     All 

soldiers  should  be  familiar  with  the  proper  methods  of  caring 

;.     Sore  feet  are  generally  due  to  carelessness,  neg- 

r  ignorance  on  the  part  of  the  soldier. 

The  most  important  factor  in  the  care  of  the  feet  and  the 

inarching  ability  of  the  soldier   is  the  shoe.     Civilian  shoes, 

particularly  light,   patent   leather,  or  low  shoes,  are  sure  to 

cause  injury   and  in  time  will  ruin  a  man's  foot.     Only  the 

marching  shoe  issued  by  the  Quartermaster  Corps  should  be 

worn,  and  they  must  be  properly  fitted  to  the  individual.     It 

will  not  suffice  to  order  a  marching  shoe  of  the  same  size  as 

one's  ordinary  civilian  shoes,  for  it  must  be  remembered  that  a 

:•  may  have  to  march  many  miles  daily  over  rough  roads 

and  carrying  a  heavy  pack.    The  pack  itself  causes  the  foot  to 

spread  out  to  a  larger  size,  and  the  rough  roads  give  so  much 

i   the  muscles  of  the  feet  that  they  swell   greatly 

igh    the   increased  blood   supply.      (For   directions   as   to 

iring  the  foot  for  the  marching  shoe  see  General  Order 

No.  26,  War  Department,  1912,  a  copy  of  which  should  be  on 

hand  in  each  company.) 

start  out  on  a  march  wearing  new  shoes.    This  is  a 
frequent  cause  of  sore  feet.     New  shoes  should   be  properly 
i    in    before   beginning   a   march   by    wearing    them    for 
1   hours  daily  for  a  week  before  the  march,  and  they 
dapted  to  the  contours  of  the  feet  by  stretching  them 
with  shoe  stretchers  with  adjustable  knobs  to  take  the  pres- 
et' painful  corns  and  buuions.    Such  stretchers  are  issued 
by  the  Quartermaster  Corps,  and  there  should  be  one  or  more 


CARE  OF  THE  FEET.  47 

pair  in  every  company  of  infantry.  Should  this  be  impracti- 
cable, then  the  following  is  suggested : 

The  soldier  stands  in  his  new  shoes  in  about  2|-  inches  of 
water  for  about  five  minutes  until  the  leather  is  thoroughly 
pliable  and  moist;  he  should  then  walk  for  about  an  hour  on 
a  level  surface,  letting  the  shoes  dry  on  his  feet,  to  the  irregu- 
larities of  which  the  leather  is  thus  molded  in  the  same  way 
as  it  was  previously  molded  over  the  shoe  last.  On  taking 
the  shoes  off  a  very  little  neat's-foot  oil  should  be  rubbed  into 
the  leather  to  prevent  its  hardening  and  cracking. 

If  it  is  desired  to  waterproof  shoes  at  any  time,  a  considerable 
amount  of  neat's-foot  oil  should  be  rubbed  into  the  leather. 
Waterproof  leather  causes  the  feet  of  some  men  to  perspire 
unduly  and  keeps  them  constantly  soft. 

Light  woolen  or  heavy  woolen  socks  will  habitually  be  worn 
for  inarching.  Cotton  socks  will  not.  be  worn  unless  specifically 
ordered  by  the  surgeon.  The  socks  will  be  large  enough  to  per- 
mit free  movement  of  the  toes,  but  not  so  loose  as  to  permit,  of 
wrinkling.  Darned  socks,  or  socks  with  holes  in  them,  will  not 
be  worn  in  inarching. 

Until  the  feet  have  hardened  they  should  be  dusted  with  foot 
powder,  which  can  be  obtained  at  the  regimental  infirmary, 
before  each  day's  march.     Clean  socks  should  be  worn  daily. 

As  soon  as  possible  after  reaching  camp  after  a  day  of  march- 
ing the  feet  should  be  washed  with  soap  and  water,  and  the 
soldier  should  put  on  a  dry  pair  of  socks  and  his  extra  pair  of 
shoes  from  his  surplus  kit.  If  the  skin  is  tender,  or  the  feet 
perspire,  wash  with  warm  salt  water  or  alum  water,  but  do  not 
soak  the  eet  a  long  time,  as  this,  although  very  comforting  at 
the  time,  tends  to  keep  them  soft.  Should  blisters  appear  on 
the  feet,  prick  and  evacuate  them  by  pricking  at  the  lower  edge 
with  a  pin  which  has  been  passed  through  the  flame  of  a  match 
and  cover  them  with  zinc  oxide  plaster  applied  hot.  This 
plaster  can  be  obtained  on  request  at  the  regimental  infirmary. 
If  serious  abrasions  appear  on  the  feet,  or  corns,  bunions,  and 
ingrowing  nails  cause  trouble,  have  your  name  placed  on  sick 
report  and  apply  to  the  surgeon  for  treatment.  Cut  the  toe 
nails  square  (fairly  close  in  the  middle,  but  leaving  the  sides 
somewhat  longer),  as  this  prevents  ingrowing  nails. 


CHAPTER  V. 
EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

UNITED    STATES    ABMY,    1911. 

I  Corrected  to  April  15,  1917.] 


Section  1.  Definitions. 

Alignment:  A  straight  line  upon  which  several  elements  are 
formed,  or  are  to  be  formed ;  or  the  dressing  of  several  ele- 
ments upon  a  straight  line. 

Base:  The  element  on  which  a  movement  is  regulated. 

Battle  sight:  The  position  of  the  rear  sight  when  the  leaf  is 
laid  down. 

Center:  The  middle  point  or  element  of  a  command. 

Column:  A  formation  in  which  the  elements  are  placed  one  be- 
hind another. 

Deploy:  To  extend  the  front.  In  general  to  change  from  column 
to  line,  or  from  close  order  to  extended  order. 

Depth:  The  space  from  head  to  rear  of  any  formation,  including 
the  leading  and  rear  elements.  The  depth  of  a  man  is 
assumed  to  be  12  inches. 

Distance:  Space  between  elements  in  the  direction  of  depth. 
Distance  is  measured  from  the  back  of  the  man  in  front  to 
the  breast  of  the  man  in  rear.  The  distance  between  ranks 
is  40  inches  in  both  line  and  column. 

Element:  A  file,  squad,  platoon,  company,  or  larger  body,  form- 
ing part  of  a  still  larger  body. 

48 


DEFINITIONS. 

File:  Two  men,  the  front-rank  man  and  the  corresponding  man 
of  the  rear  rank.  The  front-rank  man  is  the  file  leader. 
A  file  which  has  no  rear-rank  man  is  a  blank  file.  The  term 
file  applies  also  to  a  single  man  in  a  single-rank  formation. 

File  closers:  Such  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  a 
company  as  are  posted  in  rear  of  the  line.  For  convenience, 
all  men  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

Flank:  The  right  or  left  of  a  command  in  line  or  in  column; 
also  the  element  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  line. 

Formation:  Arrangement  of  the  elements  of  a  command.  The 
placing  of  all  fractions  in  their  order  in  line,  in  column,  or 
for  battle. 

Front:  The  space,  in  width,  occupied  by  an  element,  either  in 
line  or  in  column.  The  front  of  a  man  is  assumed  to  be  22 
inches.    Front  also  denotes  the  direction  of  the  enemy. 

Guide:  An  officer,  noncommissioned  officer,  or  private  upon 
whom  the  command  or  elements  thereof  regulates  its 
march. 

Head:  The  leading  element  of  a  column. 

Interval:  Space  between  elements  of  the  same  line.  The  in- 
terval between  men  in  ranks  is  4  inches,  and  is  measured 
from  elbow  to  elbow.  Between  companies,  squads,  etc.,  it 
is  measured  from  the  left  elbow  of  the  left  man  or  guide  of 
the  group  on  the  right  to  the  right  elbow  of  the  right  man 
or  guide  of  the  group  on  the  left. 

Left    The  left  extremity  or  element  of  a  body  of  troops. 

Line:  A  formation  in  which  the  different  elements  are  abreast 
of  each  other. 

Order,  close:  The  formation  in  which  the  units,  in  double  rank. 
are  arranged  in  line  or  in  column  with  normal  intervals 
and  distances. 

Order,  extended:  The  formation  in  which  the  units  are  sepa- 
rated by  intervals  greater  than  in  close  order. 

Face:  Thirty  inches;  the  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time. 

Point  of  rest:  The  point  at  which  a  formation  begins.  Specifi- 
cally, the  point  toward  which  units  are  aligned  in  successive 
movements. 

Rank:  A  line  of  men  placed  side  by  side. 

Right:  The  right  extremity  or  element  of  a  body  of  troops. 


60        EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

PART  I.— DRILL. 

Section  2. — Introduction. 

1  -  Success  In  battle  is  the  ultimate  object  of  all  military 
training;  success  may  be  looked  for  only  when  the  training  is 
Intelligent  and  thorough. 

2.  Commanding  officers  are  accountable  for  the  proper  train- 

their  respective  organizations  within  the  limits  prescribed 
by  regulations  and  orders. 

Hence  of  an  organization  is  judged  by  its  field  effi- 

The  field  efficiency  of  an  organization  depends  primarily 

upon  its  effectiveness  as  a  whole.    Thoroughness  and  uniformity 

training  of  the  units  of  an  organization  are  indispensable 

to  tlif  efficiency  of  the  whole;  it  is  by  such  means  alone  that 

the  requisite  teamwork  may  be  developed. 

3.  Simple  movements  and  elastic  formations  are  essential  to 
correct  training  for  battle. 

4.  The  Drill  Kegulations  are  furnished  as  a  guide.  They  pro- 
vide the  principles  for  training  and  for  increasing  the  proba- 
bility of  success  in  battle. 

In  the  interpretation  of  the  regulations,  the  spirit  must  be 
sought  Quibbling  over  the  minutiae  of  form  is  indicative  of 
failure  to  grasp  the  spirit. 

5.  The  principles  of  combat  are  considered  in  Part  II  of  these 
regulations,  They  are  treated  in  the  various  schools  included 
in  Part  I  only  to  the  extent  necessary  to  indicate  the  functions 
of  the  various  commanders  and  the  division  of  responsibility 

en  them.    The  amplification  necessary  to  a  proper  under- 
ling of  their  application  is  to  be  sought  in  Part  II. 

6.  The  following  important  distinctions  must  be  observed: 
{a  i  Drills  executed  at  attention  and  the  ceremonies  are  dis- 
ciplinary exercises  designed  to  teach  precise  and  soldierly  move- 
ment, and  to  inculcate  that  prompt  and  subconscious  obedience 
which  is  essential  to  proper  military  control.  To  this  end 
smartness  and  precision  should  be  exacted  in  the  execution  of 
every  detail.    Such  drills  should  be  frequent,  but  short. 

1  The  numbers  refer  to  paragraphs  In  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations, 


INTRODUCTION.  61 

(&)  The  purpose  of  extended  order  drill  is  to  teach  the  mecha- 
nism of  deployment,  of  the  firings,  and,  in  general,  of  the  em- 
ployment of  troops  in  combat.  Such  drills  are  in  the  nature  of 
disciplinary  exercises  and  should  be  frequent,  thorough,  and 
exact  in  order  to  habituate  men  to  the  firm  control  of  their 
leaders.  Extended  order  drill  is  executed  at  ease.  The  com- 
pany is  the  largest  unit  which  executes  extended  order  drill. 

(c)  Field  exercises  are  for  instruction  in  the  duties  incident 
to  campaign.  Assumed  situations  are  employed.  Each  exer- 
cise should  conclude  with  a  discussion,  on  the  ground,  of  the 
exercise  and  principles  involved. 

(d)  The  combat  exercise,  a  form  of  field  exercise  of  the  com- 
pany, battalion,  and  larger  units,  consists  of  the  application  of 
tactical  principles  to  assumed  situations,  employing  in  the  exe- 
cution the  appropriate  formations  and  movements  of  close  and 
extended  order. 

Combat  exercises  must  simulate,  as  far  as  possible,  the  battle 
conditions  assumed.  In  order  to  familiarize  both  officers  and 
men  with  such  conditions,  companies  and  battalions  will  fre- 
quently be  consolidated  to  provide  war-strength  organizations. 
Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  not  required  to  complete 
the  full  quota  of  the  units  participating  are  assigned  as  ob- 
servers or  umpires. 

The  firing  line  can  rarely  be  controlled  by  the  voice  alone; 
thorough  training  to  insure  the  proper  use  of  prescribed  signals 
is  necessary. 

The  exercise  should  be  followed  by  a  brief  drill  at  attention 
in  order  to  restore  smartness  and  control. 

7.  In  field  exercises  the  enemy  is  said  to  be  imaginary  when 
his  position  and  force  are  merely  assumed;  outlined  when  his 
position  and  force  are  indicated  by  a  few  men;  represented 
when  a  body  of  troop  acts  as  such. 

General  Rules  for  Drills  and  Formations. 

8.  When  the  preparatory  commands  consists  of  more  than  one 
part  its  elements  are  arranged  as  follows: 

(1)  For  movements  to  be  executed  successively  by  the  sub- 
divisions or  elements  of  an  organization:  (a)  Description  of 
the  movement;  (b)  how  executed,  or  on  what  element  executed. 


62       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

(2)  For  movements  to  be  executed  simultaneously  by  the 
subdivisions  of  an  organization:  (a)  The  designation  of  the 
subdivisions;  (o)  the  movement  to  be  executed. 

9.  Movements  that  may  be  executed  toward  either  flank  are 
explained  as  toward  but  one  flank,  it  being  necessary  to  sub- 
stitute the  word  "  left "  for  "  right,"  and  the  reverse,  to  have 
the  explanation  of  the  corresponding  movement  toward  the 
other  flunk.  The  commands  are  given  for  the  execution  of  the 
movements  toward  either  flank.  The  substitute  word  of  the 
command  is  placed  within  parentheses. 

10.  Any  movement  may  be  executed  either  from  the  halt  or 
when  marching,  unless  otherwise  prescribed.  If  at  a  halt,  the 
command  for  movements  involving  marching  need  not  be  pref- 
aced by  forward,  as  1.  Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

11.  Any  movement  not  specially  excepted  may  be  executed 
in  double  time. 

If  at  a  halt,  or  if  marching  In  quick  time,  the  command  double 
time  precedes  the  command  of  execution. 

12.  In  successive  movements  executed  in  double  time  the 
leading  or  base  unit  marches  in  quick  time  when  not  otherwise 
prescribed;  the  other  units  march  in  double  time  to  their  places 
in  the  formation  ordered  and  then  conform  to  the  gait  of  the 
lending  or  base  unit.  If  marching  in  double  time,  the  command 
double  time  is  omitted.  The  leading  or  base  unit  marches  In 
quick  time;  the  other  units  continue  at  double  time  to  their 
places  in  the  formation  ordered  and  then  conform  to  the  gait 
of  the  leading  or  base  unit. 

13.  To  hasten  the  execution  of  a  movement  begun  in  quick 
time,  the  command :  1.  Double,  time,  2.  MARCH,  is  given.  The 
leading  or  base  unit  continues  to  march  in  quick  time,  or  re- 
mains at  a  halt  if  already  halted ;  the  other  units  complete  the 
execution  of  the  movement  in  double  time  and  then  conform 
to  the  gait  of  the  leading  or  base  unit 

14.  To  stay  the  execution  of  a  movement  when  marching,  for 
the  correction  of  errors,  the  command :  1.  In  place,  2.  HALT,  is 
given.  All  halt  and  stand  fast,  without  changing  the  position 
of  the  pieces.  To  resume  the  movement  the  command:  1.  Re- 
sume, 2.  MARCH,  is  given. 


INTRODUCTION.  68 

j  15.  To  revoke  a  preparatory  command,  or,  being  at  a  bait, 
jto  begin  anew  a  movement  improperly  begun,  the  command, 
AS  YOtT  WERE,  is  given,  at  which  the  movement  ceases  and  the 
(former  position  is  resumed. 

16.  Unless  otherwise  announced,  the  guide  of  a  company  or 
[Subdivision  of  a  company  in  line  is  right;  of  a  battalion  in  line 
or  line  of  subdivisions  or  of  a  deployed  line,  uter;  of  a  rank 
[in  column  of  squads,  toward  the  side  of  the  guide  of  the  com- 
pany. 

To  march  with  guide  other  than  as  prescribed  above,  or  to 
change  the  guide :  Guide  (right,  left,  or  center). 

In  successive  formations  into  line,  the  guide  is  toward  the 
point  of  rest;  in  platoons  or  larger  subdivisions  it  is  so  an- 
nounced. 

The  announcement  of  the  guide,  when  given  in  connection 
with  a  movement,  follows  the  command  of  execution  for  that 
movement.  Exception:  1.  As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left  or 
center),  2.  MARCH. 

17.  The  turn  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  subdivisions  is  used  in  all 
formations  from  line  into  column  and  the  reverse. 

The  turn  on  the  moving  pivot  Is  used  by  subdivisions  of  a 
column  in  executing  changes  of  direction. 

18.  Partial  changes  of  direction  may  be  executed : 

By  interpolating  in  the  preparatory  command  the  word  half, 
as  Column  half  right  (left),  or  Right  (left)  half  turn.  A  change 
of  direction  of  45°  is  executed. 

By  the  command:  INCLINE  TO  THE  RIGHT  (LEFT).  The 
guide,  or  guiding  element,  moves  in  the  indicated  direction  and 
the  remainder  of  the  command  conforms.  This  movement  ef- 
fects slight  changes  of  direction. 

19.  The  designations  line  of  platoons,  line  of  companies,  line 
of  battalions,  etc.,  refer  to  the  formations  in  which  the  platoons, 
companies,  battalions,  etc.,  each  in  column  of  squads,  are  in 
line. 

20.  Full  distance  in  column  of  subdivisions  is  such  that  in 
forming  line  to  the  right  or  left  the  subdivisions  will  have  their 
proper  intervals. 

In  column  of  subdivisions  the  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision 
is  charged  with  the  step  and  direction ;  the  guides  in  rear  pre- 
serve the  trace,  step,  and  distance. 


54       EXTRACTS  FROIvI  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

21  In  close  order,  all  details,  detachments,  and  other  bodies 
of  troops  are  habitually  formed  in  double  rank. 

nsure  uniformity  of  interval  between  files  when  falling 
in.  and  in  alignments,  each  man  places  the  palm  of  the  left  hand 
upon  the  hip,  fingers  pointing  downward.  In  ftie  first  case  the 
hand  is  dropped  by  the  side  when  the  next  man  on  the  left  has 
his  interval;  in  the  second  case,  at  the  command  front. 

22.  The  posts  of  officers,  noncommissioned  officers,  special 
units  (such  as  band  or  machine-gun  company),  etc.,  in  the 
various  formations  of  the  company,  battalion,  or  regiment,  are 
shown  in  plates. 

In  all  changes  from  one  formation  to  another  involving  a 
change  of  post  on  the  part  of  any  of  these,  posts  are  promptly 
taken  by  the  most  convenient  route  as  soon  as  practicable  after 
the  command  of  execution  for  the  movement;  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  who  have  prescribed  duties  in  connection 
with  the  movement  ordered,  take  their  new  posts  when  such 
duties  are  completed. 

As  instructors,  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  go 
wherever  their  presence  is  necessary.  As  file  closers  it  is  their 
duty  to  rectify  mistakes  and  insure  steadiness  and  promptness 
in  the  ranks. 

23.  Except  at  ceremonies,  the  special  units  have  no  fixed 
places.  They  take  places  as  directed ;  in  the  absence  of  direc- 
tions, they  conform  as  nearly  as  practicable  to  the  plates,  and 
in  subsequent  movements  maintain  their  relative  positions  with 
respect  to  the  flank  or  end  of  the  command  on  which  they  were 
originally  posted. 

24.  General,  field,  and  staff  officers  are  habitually  mounted. 
The  staff  of  an  officer  forms  in  single  rank  3  paces  in  rear  of 
him,  the  right  of  the  rank  extending  1  pace  to  the  right  of  a 
point  directly  in  rear  of  him.  Members  of  the  staff  are  ar- 
ranged in  order  from  right  to  left  as  follows:  General  staff 
officers,  adjutant,  aids,  other  staff  officers,  arranged  in  each 
classification  in  order  of  rank,  the  senior  on  the  right.  The 
Mag  of  the  general  officer  and  the  orderlies  are  3  paces  in  rear 
of  the  staff,  the  flag  on  the  right.  When  necessary  to  reduce 
the  front  of  the  staff  and  orderlies,  each  line  executes  twos  right 


INTRODUCTION.  65 

or  fours  right,  as  explained  in  the  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations, 
and  follows  the  commander. 

When  not  otherwise  prescribed,  staff  officers  draw  and  return 
(saber  with  their  chief. 

25.  In  making  the  about,  an  officer,  mounted,  habitually  turns 
;  to  the  left. 

When  the  commander  faces  to  give  commands,  the  staff,  flag, 
J  and  orderlies  do  not  change  position. 

26.  When  making  or  receiving  official  reports,  or  on  meeting 
out  of  doors  all  officers  will  salute. 

Military  courtesy  requires  the  junior  to  salute  first,  but  when 
the  salute  is  introductory  to  a  report  made  at  a  military  cere- 
mony or  formation,  to  the  representative  of  a  common  superior 
(as,  for  example,  to  the  adjutant,  6fficer  of  the  day,  etc.),  the 
officer  making  the  report,  whatever  his  rank,  will  salute  first. 
The  officer  to  whom  the  report  is  made  will  acknowledge  by 
saluting  that  he  has  received  and  understood  the  report. 

27.  For  ceremonies,  all  mounted  enlisted  men  of  a  regiment 
or   smaller  unit,   except  those  belonging  to   the   machine-gun 

i  organizations,  are  consolidated  into  a  detachment.    The  senior 

[  present  commands  if  no  officer  is  in  charge.    The  detachment  is 

formed  as  a  platoon  or  squad  of  Cavalry  in  line  or  column  of 

fours.     Noncommissioned  staff  officers  are  on  the  right  or  in 

the  leading  ranks. 

28.  For  ceremonies,  such  of  the  noncommissioned  staff  officers 
as  are  dismounted  are  formed  5  paces  in  rear  of  the  color  in 
order  of  rank  from  right  to  left.  In  column  r>f  squads  they 
march  as  file  closers. 

29.  Other  than  for  ceremonies,  noncommissioned  staff  officers 
and  orderlies  accompany  their  immediate  chiefs  unless  other- 
wise directed.  If  mounted,  the  noncommissioned  staff  officers 
are  ordinarily  posted  on  the  right  or  at  the  head  of  the  orderlies. 

30.  In  all  formations  and  movements  a  noncommissioned 
officer  commanding  a  platoon  or  company  carries  his  piece  as 
the  men  do,  if  he  is  so  armed,  and  takes  the  same  post  as  an 
officer  in  like  situation.  When  the  command  is  formed  in  line 
for  ceremonies  a  noncommissioned  officer  commanding  a  com- 
pany takes  post  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide  after  the  com- 
pany has  been  aligned. 


66       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
Section  3.  Orders,  commands,  and  signals. 

31.  Commands  only  are  employed  in  drill  at  attention.    Othef 
wise  either  a  command,  signal,  or  order  is  employed,  as  be 
suits  the  occasion,  or  one  may  be  used  in  conjunction  wit 
another. 

32.  Signals  should  be  freely  used  in  instruction,  in  order  thai 
officers  and  men  may  readily  know  them.  In  making  arm  sig 
nals  the  saber,  rifle,  or  headdress  may  be  held  in  the  hand. 

33.  Officers  and  men  fix  their  attention  at  the  first  word  o 
command,  the  first  note  of  the  bugle  or  whistle,  or  the  firsj 
motion  of  the  signal.  A  signal  includes  both  the  preparatory 
command  and  the  command  of  execution;  the  movement  com 
mences  as  soon  as  the  signal  is  understood,  unless  otherwise 
prescribed. 

34.  Except  in  movements  executed  at  attention,  commander? 
or  leaders  of  subdivisions  repeat  orders,  commands,  or  signal! 
whenever  such  repetition  is  deemed  necessary  to  insure  prompt 
and  correct  execution. 

Officers,  battalion  noncommissioned  staff  officers,  platoon  lead- 
ers, guides,  and  musicians  are  equipped  with  whistles. 

The  major  and  his  staff  will  use  a  whistle  of  distinctive  tone;, 
the  captain  and  company  musicians  a  second  and  distinctive 
whistle;  the  platoon  leaders  and  guides  a  third  distinctive 
whistle. 

35.  Prescribed  signals  are  limited  to  such  as  are  essential 
as  a  substitute  for  the  voice  under  conditions  which  render  the 
voice  inadequate. 

Before  or  during  an  engagement  special  signals  may  be  agreed 
upon  to  facilitate  the  solution  of  such  special  difficulties  as  the 
particular  situation  is  likely  to  develop,  but  It  must  be  remem- 
bered that  simplicity  and  certainty  are  indispensable  qualities 
of  a  signal. 

OBDEBS. 

36.  In  these  regulations  an  order  embraces  instructions  or 
directions  given  orally  or  in  writing  in  terms  suited  to  the  par- 
ticular occasion  and  not  prescribed  herein. 


ORDERS,  COMMANDS.  AND  SIGNALS.  57 

Orders  are  employed  only  when  the  commands  prescribed 
herein  do  not  sufficiently  indicate  the  will  of  the  commander. 

Orders  are  more  fully  described  in  paragraphs  378  to  383, 
inclusive. 

COMMANDS. 

37.  In  these  regulations  a  command  is  the  will  of  the  com- 
JJmander  expressed  in  the  phraseology  prescribed  herein. 
!    38.  There  are  two  kinds  of  commands : 

f    The  preparatory   command,   such   as   forward,   indicates  the 
movement  that  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  MARCH,  HALT,  or  ARMS, 
causes  the  execution. 

Preparatory  commands  are  distinguished  by  italics,  those  of 
execution  by  CAPITALS. 

Where  it  is  not  mentioned  in  the  text  who  gives  the  com- 
mands prescribed,  they  are  to  be  given  by  the  commander  of 
the  unit  concerned. 

The  preparatory  command  should  be  given  at  such  an  interval 
I  of  time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  to  admit  of  being 
properly  understood ;  the  command  of  execution  should  be  given 
!  at  the  instant  the  movement  is  to  commence. 

The  tone  of  command  is  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a  loudness 
proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  for  whom  it  is  intended. 

Each  preparatory  command  is  enunciated  distinctly,  with  a 
rising  inflection  at  the  end,  and  in  such  manner  that  the  com- 
mand of  execution  may  be  more  energetic. 

The  command  of  execution  is  firm  in  tone  and  brief. 

39.  Majors  and  commanders  of  units  larger  than  a  battalion 
repeat  such  commands  of  their  superiors  as  are  to  be  executed 
by  their  units,  facing  their  units  for  tiiat  purpose.  The  bat- 
talion is  the  largest  unit  that  executes  a  movement  at  the  com- 
mand of  execution  of  its  commander. 

40.  When  giving  commands  to  troops  it  is  usually  best  to 
face  toward  them. 

Indifference  in  giving  commands  must  be  avoided,  as  it  leads 
to  laxity  in  execution.  Commands  should  be  given  with  spirit 
at  all  times. 


58   EXTRACTS  FBOM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

BUGLE   SIGNALS. 

41.  The  authorized  bugle  signals  are  published  in  Part  V  ofl 
these  regulations.  I 

The  following  bugle  signals  may  be  used  off  the  battle  field,] 
when  not  likely  to  convey  information  to  the  enemy: 

Attention:  Troops  are  brought  to  attention. 

Attention  to  orders:  Troops  fix  their  attention. 

Forward,  march:  Used  also  to  execute  quick  time  from  double 
time. 

Double  time,  march. 

To  the  rear,  march :   In  close  order,  execute  squads  right  about. 

Halt. 

Assemble,  march. 

The  following  bugle  signals  may  be  used  on  the  battle  field : 

Fix  bayonets. 

Charge. 

Assemble,  march. 

These  signals  are  used  only  when  intended  for  the  entire 
firing  line ;  hence  they  can  be  authorized  only  by  the  commander 
of  a  unit  (for  example,  a  regiment  or  brigade)  which  occupies 
a  distiuct  section  of  the  battle  field.  Exception:  Fix  bayonet. 
( See  par.  318. ) 

The  following  bugle  signals  are  used  in  exceptional  cases  on 
the  battle  field.  Their  principal  uses  are  in  field  exercises  and 
practice  firing. 

Commence  firing:  Officers  charged  with  fire  direction  and  con- 
trol open  fire  as  soon  as  practicable.  When  given  to  a  firing 
line,  the  signal  is  equivalent  to  fire  at  will. 

Cease  firing:  All  parts  of  the  line  execute  cease  firing  at  once. 

These  signals  are  not  used  by  units  smaller  than  a  regiment, 
except  when  such  unit  is  independent  or  detached  from  its 
regiment. 

WHISTLE   SIGNALS. 

42.  Attention  to  orders.  A  short  blast  of  the  whistle.  This 
signal  is  used  on  the  march  or  in  combat  when  necessary  to  fix 
the  attention  of  troops,  or  of  their  commanders  or  leaders,  pre- 
paratory to  giving  commands,  orders,  or  signals. 


ORDERS,  COMMANDS,  AND  SIGNALS.  59 

j  When  the  firing  line  is  firing,  each  squad  leader  suspends 
ifiring  and  fixes  his  attention  at  a  short  blast  of  his  platoon 
.leader's  whistle.  The  platoon  leader's  subsequent  commands  or 
jsignals  are  repeated  and  enforced  by  the  squad  leader.  If  a 
(squad  leader's  attention  is  attracted  by  a  whistle  other  than 
ithat  of  his  platoon  leader,  or  if  there  are  no  orders  or  commands 
to  convey  to  his  squad,  he  resumes  firing  at  once. 
j  Suspend  firing.  A  long  blast  of  the  whistle. 
,    All  other  whistle  signals  are  prohibited. 

AEM    SIGNALS. 

43.  The  following  arm  signals  are  prescribed.  In  making 
signals  either  arm  may  be  used.  Officers  who  receive  signals 
on  the  firing  line  "  repeat  back  "  at  once  to  prevent  misunder- 
standing. 

Forward,  march.  Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder;  straighten 
and  hold  the  arm  horizontally,  thrusting  it  in  direction  of 
j  march. 

This  signal  is  also  used  to  execute  quick  time  from  double 
!  time. 

Halt.  Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder  ;  thrust  the  hand  upward 
(and  hold  the  arm  vertically. 

Double  time,  march.  Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder ;  rapidly 
thrust  the  hand  upward  the  full  extent  of  the  arm  several  times. 
Squads  right,  march.  Raise  the  arm  laterally  until  horizontal; 
I  carry  it  to  a  vertical  position  above  the  head  and  swing  it  sev- 
jeral  times  between  the  vertical  and  horizontal  positions. 
i  Squads  left,  march.  Raise  the  arm  laterally  until  horizontal : 
(carry  it  downward  to  the  side  and  swing  it  several  times  be- 
tween the  downward  and  horizontal  positions. 

Squads  right  about,  march  (if  in  close  order)  or,  To  the  rear, 
march  (if  in  skirmish  line).  Extend  the  arm  vertically  above 
the  head ;  carry  it  laterally  downward  to  the  side  and  swing  it 
several  times  between  the  vertical  and  downward  positions. 

Change  direction  or  Column  right  (left),  march.  The  hand  on 
the  side  toward  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  bo  made  is 
carried  across  the  body  to  the  opposite  shoulder,  forearm  hori- 


60   EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

U 

zontal ;  then  swing  in  a  horizontal  plane,  arm  extended,  point|ft: 
log  in  the  new  direction. 

As  skirmishers,  march.  Raise  both  arms  laterally  until  hori-|j 
zontal.  I 

As  skirmishers,  guide  center,  march.  Raise  both  arms  laterally!] 
until  horizontal;  swing  both  simultaneously  upward  until  ver-l 
tieal  and  return  to  the  horizontal ;  repeat  several  times.  li 

As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left),  march.     Raise  both  armsj 
laterally  until  horizontal ;  hold  the  arm  on  the  side  of  the  guide 
steadily  in  the  horizontal  position;   swing  the  other  upward 
until  vertical  and  return  it  to  the  horizontal ;  repeat  several  jar 
times. 

Assemble,  maroh.  Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent 
and  describe  horizontal  circles. 

Range,  or  Change  elevation.  To  announce  range,  extend  the 
arm  toward  the  leaders  or  men  for  whom  the  signal  is  intended, 
fist  closed;  by  keeping  fist  closed  battle  sight  is  indicated;  by 
opening  and  closing  the  fist,  expose  thumb  and  fingers  to  a 
number  equal  to  the  hundreds  of  yards ;  to  add  50  yards  de- 
scribe a  short  horizontal  line  with  forefinger.  To  change  eleva- 
tion, indicate  the  amount  of  increase  or  decrease  by  fingers  as 
above;  point  upward  to  indicate  increase  and  downward  to 
indicate  decrease. 

What  range  are  yon  using?  or  What  is  the  range?  Extend 
the  arms  toward  the  person  addressed,  one  hand  open,  palm 
to  the  front,  resting  on  the  other  hand,  fist  closed. 

Are  you  ready?  or  I  am  ready.  Raise  the  hand,  fingers  ex- 
tended and  joined,  palm  toward  the  person  addressed. 

Commence  firing.  Move  the  arm  extended  in  full  length,  hand 
palm  down,  several  times  through  a  horizontal  arc  in  front  of 
the  body. 

Fire  faster.     Execute  rapidly  the  signal  "  Commence  firing." 

Fire  slower.     Execute  slowly  the  signal  "  Commence  firing." 

To  swing  the  cone  of  fire  to  the  right,  or  left.  Extend  the 
arm  in  full  length  to  the  front,  palm  to  the  right  (left)  ;  swing 
the  arm  to  right  (left),  and  point  in  the  direction  of  the  new 
target. 

Fix  bayonet.  Simulate  the  movement  of  the  right  hand  in 
,;  Fix  bayonet"  (par.  95).— (C.  /.  D.  R.,  No.  11,,  May  18,  1916.) 

Suspend  firing.  Raise  and  hold  the  forearm  steadily  in  a  hori- 


ORDERS,  COMMANDS,  AND  SIGNALS.  61 

Jontal  position  in  front  of  the  forehead,  palm  of  the  hand  to 
t!he  front. 

i  Cease  firing.  Raise  the  forearm  as  in  suspend  firing  and  swing 
Ht  up  and  down  several  times  in  front  of  the  face. 

I  Platoon.  Extend   the    arm    horizontally   toward    the    platoon 
7 leader;  describe  small  circles  with  the  hand.     (See  par.  44.) 
■■    Squad.  Extend    the    arm    horizontally    toward    the    platoon 

leader;  swing  the  hand  up  and  down  from  the  wrist.     (See 
sjiar.  44.) 

Rush.  Same  as  double  time. 

44.  The  signals  platoon  and  squad  are  intended  primarily  for 
ommunication  between  the  captain  and  his  platoon  leaders. 
?he  signal  platoon  or  squad  indicates  that  the  platoon  com- 
aander  is  to  cause  the  signal  wThich  follows  to  be  executed  by 
latoon  or  squad. 

FLAG    SIGNALS. 

45.  The  signal  flags  described  below  are  carried  by  the  com- 
/any  musicians  in  the  field. 

In  a  regiment  in  which  it  is  impracticable  to  make  the  perma- 
lent  battalion  division  alphabetically,  the  flags  of  a  battalion 
ire  as  shown ;  flags  are  assigned  to  the  companies  alphabetically, 
vithln  their  respective  battalions,  in  the  order  given  below. 

Tirst  battalion: 

Company  A.  Red  field,  white  square. 

Company  B.  Red  field,  blue  square. 

Company  C.  Red  field,  white  diagonals. 

Company  D.  Red  field,  blue  diagonals. 
Second  battalion: 

Company  E.  White  field,  red  square. 

Company  F.  White -field,  blue  square. 

Company  G.  White  field,  red  diagonals. 

Company  H.  White  field,  blue  diagonals. 
Third  battalion: 

Company  I.  Blue  field,  red  square. 

Company  K.  Blue  field,  white  square. 

Company  L.  Blue  field,  red  diagonals. 

Company  M.  Blue  field,  white  diagonals. 


6S        EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

46.  In  addition  to  their  use  in  visual  signaling,  these  flags 
serve  to  mark  the  assembly  point  of  the  company  when  dis- 
organized by  combat,  and  to  mark  the  location  of  the  company 
in  bivouac  and  elsewhere,  when  such  use  is  desirable. 

47  (1)  For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the 
reserve  or  commander  in  the  rear,  the  subjoined  signals  (Signal 
Corps  codes)  are  prescribed  and  should  be  memorized.  In 
transmission,  their  concealment  from  the  enemy's  view  should 
be  insured.  In  the  absence  of  signal  flags,  the  headdress  or 
other  substitute  may  be  used. 


Letter  of 
alphabet. 

If  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the 
firing  line. 

If  -ignaled  from  the  firing 
line  to  the  rear. 

AM   

Ammunition  going  forward 

Charge  (mandatory  at  all  times). 

Ammunition  required. 

C  C  C 

Am  about  to  charge  if  no  in- 

C f 

structions  to  the  contrary. 
Cease  firing. 
Double  time  or  "rush." 

D  T 

Double  time  or  "rush" 

K 

Commence  firing .' 

Commence  firing. 
Fix  bayonets. 

F  B 

F  L 

Fix  bayonets 

Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 
Move  forward 

Artillery   fire    is    causing    us 

losses. 
Preparing  to  move  forward. 
Halt. 

G 

H  H  H 

K 

L  T 

Halt 

Negative 

Negative. 

Left 

Left. 

0 

( A r  d  o  i  s  and 
semaphore 
only.) 

(All  methods  but 
a  rd  o  i  s     and 
semaphore.) 

P 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)?    In- 
terrogatory. 

do 

Affirmative 

What  is  the(K  I  ,.,etc)?    In 
terrogatory. 

Do. 

R 

Acknowledgment 
Range. 
Right. 

Support  needed. 
Suspend  firing. 
Target.. 

R  N 

Range 

R  T 

Rigfit 

sss 

SU  F 

Suspend  firing 

T 

Target 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  68 

(2)  The  Two-aem  Semaphobe  Code. 
(See  illustrations  on  pages  2S0  and  281.) 

Section  4.  School  of  the  Soldier. 

48.  The  instructor  explains  briefly  each  movement,  first  exe- 
cuting it  himself  if  practicable.  He  requires  the  recruits  to 
take  the  proper  positions  unassisted  and  does  not  touch  them 
for  the  purpose  of  correcting  them,  except  when  they  are  unable 
to  correct  themselves.  He  avoids  keeping  them  too  long  at  the 
same  movement,  although  each  should  be  understood  before, 
passing  to  another.  He  exacts  by  degrees  the  desired  precision 
and  uniformity. 

49.  In  order  that  all  may  advance  as  rapidly  as  their  abili- 
ties permit,  the  recruits  are  grouped  according  to  proficiency  as 
instruction  progresses.  Those  who  lack  aptitude  and  quickness 
are  separated  from  the  others  and  placed  under  experienced 
drill  masters. 

INSTRUCTION    WITHOUT    &RMS. 

50.  For  preliminary  instruction  a  number  of  recruits,  usually 
not  exceeding  three  or  four,  are  formed  as  a  squad  in  single 
rank. 

POSITION  OF  THE  SOLDIER,  OE  ATTENTION. 

51.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of  about  45°. 

Knees  straight,  without  stiffness. 

Hips  level  and  drawn  back  slightly;  body  erect  and  resting 
equally  on  hips ;  chest  lifted  and  arched ;  shoulders  square  and 
falling  equally. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  thumb  along  the  seam  of 
the  trousers. 

Head  erect  and  squarely  to  the  front,  chin  drawn  in  so  that 
the  axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is  vertical ;  eyes  straight  to  the 
front. 

Weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  upon  the  heels  and  balls 
of  the  feet. 


64       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

THE   BESTS. 

51  Being  at  a  halt,  the  commands  are:  FALL  OUT;  REST; 
AT  EASE;  and,  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but 
are  required  to  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity.  They  resume 
their  former  places,  at  attention,  at  the  command  fall  in. 

At  the  command  rest  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place,  but  is 
not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

At  the  command  at  ease  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place 
nnd  Is  required  to  preserve  silence  but  not  immobility. 

53.  1.  Parade,  2.  REST.  Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight 
to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent ;  clasp  the  hands,  without 
constraint,  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  fingers  joined, 
left  hand  uppermost,  left  thumb  clasped  by  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand;  preserve  silence  and  steadiness  of 
position. 

54.  To  resume  the  attention :  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 
The  men  take  the  position  of  the  soldier. 

EYES  RIGHT  OB  LEFT. 

55.  1.  Eyes,  2.  RIGHT  (LEFT),  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  right,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  oblique, 
eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be 
In.  the  same  rank.  At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  and 
eyes  to  the  front. 

FACINGS. 

56.  To  the  flank:  1.  Right  (left),  2.  FACE. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe;  face  to  the  right 
turning  on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight  pressure  on  the 
ball  of  the  left  foot ;  place  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right. 
Left  face  is  executed  on  the  left  heel  in  the  corresponding 
manner. 

Right  (left)  half  face  is  executed  similarly,  facing  45° 
To  face  in  marching"  and  advance,  turn  on  the  ball  of 
either  foot  and  step  off  with  the  other  foot  in  the  new  line  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  65 

direction;  to  face  in  marching  without  gaining  ground  in  the 
new  direction,  turn  on  the  ball  of  either  foot  and  mark  time. 

57.  To  the  rear:  1.  About,  2.  FACE. 

Carry  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about  a  half  foot-length  to  the 
rear  and  slightly  to  the  left  of  the  left  heel  without  changing 
the  position  of  the  left  foot;  face  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the 
right  on  the  left  heel  and  right  toe ;  place  the  right  heel  by  the 
side  of  the  left. 

SALUTE  WITH  THE  HAND. 

58.  1.  Hand,  2.  SALTJTE. 

Raise  the  right  hand  smartly  till  the  tip  of  the  forefinger 
touches  the  lower  part  of  the  headdress  or  forehead  above  the 
right  eye,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  atfd  joined,  palm  to  the 
left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  45°,  hand  and  wrist  straight; 
at  the  same  time  look  toward  the  person  saluted.  (TWO)  Drop 
the  arm  smartly  by  the  side. 

For  rules  governing  salutes,  see  "  Honors  and  Salutes,"  para- 
graphs 758-765. 

STEPS  AND  MABCHINGS. 

59.  All  steps  and  marchings  executed  from  a  halt,  except 
right  step,  begin  with  the  left  foot. 

60.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches,, 
measured  from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of 
120  steps  per  minute. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  36  inches;  the 
cadence  Is  at  the  rate  of  180  steps  per  minute. 

The  instructor,  when  necessary,  indicates  the  cadence  of  the 
step  by  calling  one,  two,  three,  four,  or  left,  right,  the  instant 
the  left  and  right  foot,  respectively,  should  be  planted. 

61.  All  steps  and  marchings  and  movements  involving  march 
are  executed  in  quick  time  unless  the  squad  be  marching  in 
double  time,  or  double  time  be  added  to  the  command;  in  the 
latter  case  double  time  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command. 
Example:  1.  Squad  right,  double  time,  2.  MAKCH  (School  of  the 
Squad). 


66       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

QUICK  TIME. 

62.  Being  at  a  halt,  to  march  forward  in  quick  time:  1.  For- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  shift  the  weight  of  the  body  to  the 
right  leg,  left  knee  straight. 

At  the  command  march,  move  the  left  foot  smartly  straight 
forward  30  inches  from  the  right,  sole  near  the  ground,  and 
plant  it  without  shock;  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right 
foot  and  plant  it  as  above;  continue  the  march.  The  arms 
swing  naturally. 

63.  Being  at  a  halt,  or  in  march  in  quick  time,  to  march  in 
double  time:  1.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

If  at  a  halt,  at  the  first  command  shift  the  weight  of  the 
body  to  the  right  leg.  At  the  command  march,  raise  the  fore- 
arms, fingers  closed,  to  a  horizontal  position  along  the  waist 
line ;  take  up  an  easy  run  with  the  step  and  cadence  of  double 
time,  allowing  a  natural  swinging  motion  to  the  arms. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  march,  given  as 
either  foot  strikes  the  ground,  take  one  step  in  quick  time,  and 
then  step  off  in  double  time. 

64.  To  resume  the  quick  time:  1.  Quick  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot  in  double  time; 
resume  the  quick  time,  dropping  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

TO  MARK  TIME. 

65.  Being  In  march:  1.  Mark  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot ;  bring  up  the  foot  in 
rear  and  continue  the  cadence  by  alternately  raising  each  foot 
about  2  inches  and  planting  it  on  line  with  the  other. 

Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  march,  raise  and  plant  the 
feet  as  described  above. 

THE  HALF  STEP. 

66.  1.  Half  step,  2.  MARCH. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  in  quick  time,  18  inches  in  double 
time. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  67 

67.  Forward,  half  step,  halt,  and  mark  time  may  be  executed 
one  from  the  other  in  quick  or  double  time. 

To  resume  the  full  step  from  half  step  or  mark  time:  1.  For- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 

SIDE    STEP. 

68.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Right  (left)  step, 
2.  MARCH. 

Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  15  inches  to  the  right;  bring 
the  left  foot  beside  it  and  continue  the  movement  in  the  cadence 
of  quick  time. 

The  side  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not  exe- 
cuted in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  side  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
command. 

BACK    STEP. 

69.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time :  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH. 
Take  steps  of  15  inches  straight  to  the  rear. 

The  back  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not  exe« 
cuted  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  back  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
command.' 

TO    HALT. 

70.  To  arrest  the  march  in  quick  or  double  time:  1.  Squad, 
2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
plant  the  other  foot  as  in  marching;  raise  and  place  the  first 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  other.  If  in  double  time,  drop  the  hands 
by  the  sides. 

TO    MABCH    BY    THE    FLANK. 

71.  Being  in  march :  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 

ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  then  face  to  the  right 
in  marching  and  step  off  in  the  new  direction  with  the  right 
foot. 


68       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

TO  MARCH  TO  THE  REAR. 

72.  Being  in  march:  1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot ;  turn  to  the  right  ahout 
on  the  balls  of  both  feet  and  immediately  step  off  with  the  left 

If  marching  in  double  time,  turn  to  the  right  about,  taking 
four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the  cadence,  and  then  step  off  with 
the  left  foot. 

CHANGE   STEP. 

73.  Being  in  march :  1.  Change  step,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  inarch,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot ;  plant  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left  and  step  off  with  the  left 
foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed,  the  com- 
mand maroh  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground. 

MANUAL  OF  ARMS. 

74.  As  soon  as  practicable  the  recruit  is  taught  the  use, 
nomenclature  (PI.  I),  and  care  of  his  rifle;  when  fair  progress 
has  been  made  in  the  instruction  without  arms,  he  is  taught 
the  manual  of  arms;  instruction  without  arms  and  that  with 
arms  alternate. 

75.  The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the  piece : 
First.  The  piece  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either  the 

chamber  or  the  magazine  except  when  specifically  ordered. 
When  so  loaded,  or  supposed  to  be  loaded,  it  is  habitually  car- 
ried locked ;  that  is,  with  the  safety  lock  turned  to  the  "  safe." 
At  all  other  times  it  is  carried  unlocked,  with  the  trigger 
pulled. 

Second.  Whenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms,  pieces  are 
immediately  inspected  at  the  commands:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS; 
?>.  Order   (Right  shoulder,  port),  4.  ARMS. 

A  similar  inspection  is  made  immediately  before  dismissal. 

If  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine,  they  are 
removed  and  placed  in  the  belt. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  69 

Third.  The  cut-off  is  kept  turned  "  off "  except  when  car- 
tridges are  actually  used. 

Fourth.  The  bayonet  is  not  fixed  except  in  bayonet  exercise, 
on  guard,  or  for  combat. 

Fifth.  Fall  in  is  executed  with  the  piece  at  the  order  arms. 
Fall  out,  rest,  and  at  ease  are  executed  as  without  arms.  On 
resuming  attention  the  position  of  order  arms  is  taken. 

Sixth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the  piece 
is  brought  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  march,  the 
three  motions  corresponding  with  the  first  three  steps.  Move- 
ments may  be  executed  at  the  trail  by  prefacing  the  prepara- 
tory command  with  the  words  at  trail;  as,  1.  At  trail,  forward. 
2.  MARCH;  the  trail  is  taken  at  the  command  march. 

When  the  facings,  alignments,  open  and  close  ranks,  taking 
interval  or  distance,  and  assemblings  are  executed  from  the 
order,  raise  the  piece  to  the  trail  while  in  motion  and  resume 
the  order  on  halting. 

Seventh.  The  piece  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halting.  The 
execution  of  the  order  begins  when  the  halt  is  completed. 

Eighth.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is  held  as  when 
without  arms. 

76.  The  following  rules  govern  the  execution  of  the  manual 
of  arms: 

First.  In  all  positions  of  the  left  hand  at  the  balance  (center 
of  gravity,  bayonet  unfixed)  the  thumb  clasps  the  piece;  the 
sling  is  included  in  the  grasp  of  the  hand. 

Second.  In  all  positions  of  the  piece  "  diagonally  across  the 
body  "  the  position  of  the  piece,  left  arm  and  hand  are  the  same 
as  in  port  arms. 

Third.  In  resuming  the  order  from  any  position  in  the  manual, 
the  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes  with  the  butt  of  the  piece 
about  3  inches  from  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  the  left  hand 
above  and  near  the  right,  steadying  the  piece,  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  forearm  and  wrist  straight  and  inclining  down- 
ward, all  fingers  of  the  right  hand  grasping  the  piece.  To 
complete  the  order,  lower  the  piece  gently  to  the  ground  with 
the  right  hand,  drop  the  left  quickly  by  the  side,  and  take  the 
position  of  order  arms. 


70       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Allowing  the  piece  to  drop  through  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground,  or  other  similar  abuse  of  the  rifle  to  produce  effect  in 
executing  the  manual,  is  prohibited. 

Fourth.  The  cadence  of  the  motions  is  that  of  quick  time; 
the  recruits  are  first  required  to  give  their  whole  attention  to 
the  details  of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being  gradually  acquired 
as  they  become  accustomed  to  handling  their  pieces.  The  in- 
structor may  require  them  to  count  aloud  in  cadence  with  the 
motions. 

Fifth.  The  manual  is  taught  at  a  halt  and  the  movements  are, 
for  the  purpose  of  instruction,  divided  into  motions  and  exe- 
cuted in  detail;  in  this  case  the  command  of  execution  deter- 
mines the  prompt  execution  of  the  first  motion,  and  the  com- 
mands, two,  three,  four,  that  of  the  other  motions. 

To  execute  the  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor  first  cau- 
tions: By  the  numbers;  all  movements  divided  into  motions  are 
then  executed  as  above  explained  until  he  cautions:  Without  the 
numbers;  or  commands  movements  other  than  those  in  the  man- 
ual of  arms. 

Sixth.  Whenever  circumstances  require,  the  regular  positions 
of  the  manual  of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be  ordered  without 
regard  to  the  previous  position  of  the  piece. 

Under  exceptional  conditions  of  weather  or  fatigue  the  rifle 
may  be  carried  in  any  manner  directed. 

77.  Position  of  order  arms  standing:  The  butt  rests  evenly  on 
the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with  toe 
of,  and  touching,  the  right  shoe,  arms  and  hands  hanging  nat- 
urally, right  hand  holding  the  piece  between  the  thumb  and 
fingers. 

78.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  carry  the  piece  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  body,  barrel  to  the  rear  and  vertical,  grasp  it  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  balance,  forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the 
body.    (TWO)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

79.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  grasp  it  smartly  with  both  hands;  the  right, 
palm  down,  at  the  small  of  the  stock ;  the  left  palm  up,  at  the 
balance ;  barrel  up,  sloping  to  the  left  and  crossing  opposite  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  71 

junction  of  the  neck  with  the  left  shoulder;  right  forearm 
horizontal ;  left  forearm  resting  against  the  body ;  the  piece  in  a 
vertical  plane  parallel  to  the  front. 

80.  Being  at  present  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body  and  take  the  posi- 
tion of  port  arms. 

81.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 

Carey  the  piece  to  a  vertical  position  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  body, and  take  the  position  of  present  arms. 

82.  Being  at  present  or  port  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Let  go  with  the  right  hand ;  lower  and  carry  the  piece  to  the 
right  with  the  left  hand ;  regrasp  it  with  the  right  hand  just 
above  the  lower  band;  let  go  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the 
next  to  the  last  position  in  coming  to  the  order.  (TWO)  Com- 
plete the  order. 

83.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body ;  carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  butt,  em- 
bracing it,  the  heel  between  the  first  two  fingers.  (TWO)  With- 
out changing  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  place  the  piece  on  the 
right  shoulder,  barrel  up  and  inclined  at  an  angle  of  about  45° 
from  the  horizontal,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder, 
right  elbow  near  the  side,  the  piece  in  a  vertical  plane  perpen- 
dicular to  the  front;  carry  the  left  hand,  thumb  and  fingers 
extended  and  joined,  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  tip  of  the  fore- 
finger touching  the  cocking  piece,  wrist  straight  and  elbow 
down.     (THREE)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

84.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 
Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 

across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  the  grasp  of  the  butt. 
| (TWO),  (THREE)  Execute  order  arms  as  described  from  port 
arms. 

85.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Change  the  right  hand  to  the  butt.     (TWO),  (THREE)  As  in 

right  shoulder  arms  from  order  arms. 

86.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms :  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  its  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(TWO)  Change  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 


78       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

87  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.     (THREE)  Execute  present  arms. 

88  Being  at  present  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.    (TWO),  (THREE),  (FOUR)  Execute  right 

shoulder  arms  as  from  port  arms. 

89.  Being  at  port  arms :  1.  Left  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 

("airy  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  place  it  on  the 
left  shoulder,  barrel  up,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoul- 
der; at  the  same  time  grasp  the  butt  with  the  left  hand,  heel 
between  first  and  second  fingers,  thumb  and  fingers  closed  on 
the  stock.     (TWO)  Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

Being  at  left  shoulder  arms :  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 
(TWO)  Carry  the  piece  to  the  right  with  the  right  hand,  regrasp 
it  with  the  left,  and  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 

Left  shoulder  arms  may  be  ordered  directly  from  the  order, 
right  shoulder  or  present,  or  the  reverse.  At  the  command  arms 
execute  port  arms  and  continue  in  cadence  to  the  position 
ordered. 

90.  Being  at  order  arms :  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight  to  the  rear,  left  knee 
slightly  benL;  carry  the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
body,  barrel  to  the  left ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  just 
below  the  stacking  swivel,  and  with  the  right  hand  below  and 
against  the  left 

Being  at  parade  rest:  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 

Resume  the  order,  the  left  hand  quitting  the  piece  opposite 
the  right  hip. 

91.  Being  at  order  arms :  1.  Trail,  2,  ARMS. 

Raise  the  piece,  right  arm  slightly  bent,  and  incline  the 
muzzle  forward  so  that  the  barrel  makes  an  angle  of  about  30° 
with  rhe  vertical. 

q   it  can  be  done  without  danger  or  inconvenience   to 
others,  the  piece  may  be  grasped  at  the  balance  and  the  muzzle 
til  the  piece  is  horizontal;  a  similar  position  in  the 
and  may  be  used. 

92.  Being  at  trail  arms :  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLLIES.  78 

BIFLE   SALUTE. 

93.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arras:  1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 
Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  forearm 

horizontal,  palm  of  hand  down,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  and 
joined,  forefinger  touching  end  of  cocking  piece;  look  toward 
he  person  saluted.     (TWO)  Drop  left  hand  by  the  side;  turn 
nead  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

94.  Being  at  order  or  trail  arms :  1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 
Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  right  side,  palm  of  the 

hand  down,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  forefinger 
against  piece  near  the  muzzle ;  look  toward  the  person  saluted. 
(TWO)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side ;  turn  the  head  and  eyes 
to  the  front. 
For  rules  governing  salutes,  see  "Honors  and  Salutes." 

THE  BAYONET. 

95.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Fix,  2.  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt :  Execute  parade 
rest;  grasp  the  bayonet  with  the  right  hand,  back  of  hand  to- 
ward the  body ;  draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scabbard  and  fix  it 
on  the  barrel,  glancing  at  the  muzzle ;  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  is  carried  on  the  haversack :  Draw  the  bayonet 
with  the  left  hand  and  fix  it  in  the  most  convenient  manner. 

96.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Unfix,  2.  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt :  Execute  parade 
rest;  grasp  the  handle  of  the  bayonet  firmly  with  the  right 
hand,  pressing  the  spring  with  the  forefinger  of  the  right  hand ; 
raise  the  bayonet  until  the  handle  is  about  12  inches  above  the 
muzzle  of  the  piece ;  drop  the  point  to  the  left,  back  of  the  hand 
toward  the  body,  and,  glancing  at  the  scabbard,  return  the 
bayonet,  the  blade  passing  between  the  left  arm  and  the  body ; 
regrasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  haversack:  Take 
the  bayonet  from  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  and  return  it  to 
the  scabbard  in  the  most  convenient  manner. 


74       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

If  marching  or  lying  down,  the  bayonet  is  fixed  and  unfixed 
in  the  most  expeditious  and  convenient  manner  and  the  piece 
returned  to  the  original  position. 

Fix  and  unfix  bayonet  are  executed  with  promptness  and 
regularity  but  not  in  cadence. 

97.  CHARGE  BAYONET.  Whether  executed  at  halt  or  in 
motion,  the  bayonet  is  held  toward  the  opponent  as  in  the  posi- 
tion of  guard  in  the  Manual  for  Bayonet  Exercise. 

Exercises  for  instruction  in  bayonet  combat  are  prescribed  in 
the  Manual  for  Bayonet  Exercise. 

THE  INSPECTION. 

98.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  second  command  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 
(TWO)  Seize  the  bolt  handle  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of 
the  right  hand,  turn  the  handle  up,  draw  the  bolt  back,  and 
glance  at  the  chamber.  Having  found  the  chamber  empty,  or 
having  emptied  it,  raise  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

99.  Being  at  inspection'  arms :  1.  Order  (Right  shoulder,  port), 
2.  ARMS. 

At  the  preparatory  command  push  the  bolt  forward,  turn  the 
handle  down,  pull  the  trigger,  and  resume  port  arms.  At  the 
command  arms,  complete  the  movement  ordered. 

TO    DISMISS    THE    SQUAD. 

100.  Being  at  halt :  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Port,  4.  ARMS 
5.  DISMISSED. 

Section  5.  School  of  the  Squad. 

101.  Soldiers  are  grouped  into  squads  fov 
tlon,  discipline,  control,  and  order. 

102.  The  squad  proper  consists  of  a  corporal  and  seven 
privates. 

The  movements  in  the  School  of  the  Squad  are  designed  to 
make  the  squad  a  fixed  unit  and  to  facilitate  the  control  and 
movement  of  the  company.    If  the  number  of  men  grouped  is 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQTTAD.  75 

more  than  3  and  less  than  12,  they  are  formed  as  a  squad  of 
4  files,  the  excess  above  8  being  posted  as  file  closers.     If  the 
number  grouped  is  greater  than  11,  2  or  more  squads  are  formed 
and  the  group  is  termed  a  platoon. 
For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  these  rules  may  be  modified. 

103.  The  corporal  is  the  squad  leader,  and  when  absent  is 
replaced  by  a  designated  private.  If  no  private  is  designated, 
the  senior  in  length  of  service  acts  as  leader. 

The  corporal,  when  in  ranks,  is  posted  as  the  left  man  in  the 
front  rank  of  the  squad. 

When  the  corporal  leaves  the  ranks  to  lead  his  squad,  his  rear 
rank  man  steps  into  the  front  rank,  and  the  file  remains  blank 
until  the  corporal  returns  to  his  place  in  ranks,  when  his  rear 
rank  man  steps  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

104.  In  battle  officers  and  sergeants  endeavor  to  preserve 
the  integrity  of  squads;  they  designate  new  leaders  to  replace 
those  disabled,  organize  new  squads  when  necessary,  and  see 
that  every  man  is  placed  in  a  squad. 

Men  are  taught  the  necessity  of  remaining  with  the  squad  to 
which  they  belong  and,  in  case  it  be  broken  up  or  they  become 
separated  therefrom,  to  attach  themselves  to  the  nearest  squad 
and  platoon  leaders,  whether  these  be  of  their  own  or  of  another 
organization. 

105.  The  squad  executes  the  halt,  rest,  facings,  steps,  and 
marchings  and  the  manual  of  arms  as  explained  in  the  School 
of  the  Soldier. 

TO  FORM   THE   SQUAD. 

106.  To  form  the  squad  the  instructor  places  himself  3  paces 
in  front  of  where  the  center  is  to  be  and  commands:  FALL  IN. 

The  men  assemble  at  attention,  pieces  at  the  order,  and  are 
arranged  by  the  corporal  in  double  rank,  as  nearly  as  practicable 
in  order  of  height  from  right  to  left,  each  man  dropping  his  left 
hand  as  soon  as  the  man  on  his  left  has  his  interval.  The  rear 
rank  forms  with  distance  of  40  inches. 

The  instructor  then  commands:  COUNT  OFF. 

At  this  command  all  except  the  right  file  execute  eyes  right, 
and  beginning  on  the  right,  the  men  in  each  rank  count  one, 


76   EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

two,  three,  four;  each  man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front 
as  he  counts. 
Pieces  are  then  inspected. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

107.  To  align  the  squad,  the  base  file  or  files  having  been 
established:  1.  Right    (Left),  2.   DRESS,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress  all  men  place  the  left  hand  upon  the 
hip  (whether  dressing  to  the  right  or  left)  ;  each  man,  except 
the  b;ise  file,  when  on  or  near  the  new  line  executes  eyes  right, 
and,  taking  steps  of  2  or  3  inches,  places  himself  so  that  his 
right  arm  rests  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  man  on  his  right, 
and  so  that  his  eyes  and  shoulders  are  in  line  with  those  of  the 
men  on  his  right ;  the  rear  rank  men  cover  in  file. 

The  instructor  verifies  the  alignment  of  both  ranks  from  the 
right  flank  and  orders  up  or  back  such  men  as  may  be  in  rear, 
or  in  advance,  of  the  line;  only  the  men  designated  move. 

At  the  command  front,  given  when  the  ranks  are  aligned,  each 
nmn  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  and  drops  his  left 
hand  by  his  side. 

In  the  first  drills  the  basis  of  the  alignment  is  established  on, 
or  parallel  to,  the  front  of  the  squad;  afterwards,  in  oblique 
directions. 

Whenever  the  position  of  the  base  file  or  files  necessitates  a 
considerable  movement  by  the  squad,  such  movement  will  be 
executed  by  marching  to  the  front  or  oblique,  to  the  flank  or 
backward,  as  the  case  may  be,  without  other  command,  and  at 
the  trail. 

108.  To  preserve  the  alignment  when  marching;  GUIDE 
RIGHT   (LEFT). 

The  men  preserve  their  intervals  from  the  side  of  the  guide, 
yielding  to  pressure  from  that  side  and  resisting  pressure  from 
the  opposite  direction ;  they  recover  intervals,  if  lost,  by  gradu- 
ally opening  out  or  closing  in  ;  they  recover  alignment  by  slightly 
lengthening  or  shortening  the  step;  the  rear-rank  men  cover 
their  file  leaders  at  40  inches. 

In  double  rank,  the  front-rank  man  on  the  right,  or  designated 
flank,  conducts  the  march;  when  marching  faced  to  the  flank, 
the  leading  man  of  the  front  rank  is  the  guide. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SGITAD.  77 

TO  TAKE  INTERVALS  AND  DISTANCES. 

109.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt :  1,  Take  interval,  2.  To  the  right 
(left),  3.  MARCH,  4.  Squad,  5.  HALT. 

At  the  second  command  the  rear-rank  men  march  backward 
4  steps  and  halt;  at  the  command  march  all  face  to  the  right 
and  the  leading  man  of  each  rank  steps  off ;  the  other  men  step 
off  in  succession,  each  following  the  preceding  man  at  4  paces, 
rear-rank  men  marching  abreast  of  their  file  leaders. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  when  all  have  their  intervals,  all 
halt  and  face  to  the  front. 

110.  Being  at  intervals,  to  assemble  the  squad:  1.  Assemble, 
to  the  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  front-rank  man  on  the  right  stands  fast,  the  rear-rank 
man  on  the  right  closes  to  40  inches.  The  other  men  face  to 
the  right,  close  by  the  shortest  line,  and  face  to  the  front. 

111.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt  and  having  counted  off:  1.  Take 
distance,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  march  No.  1  of  the  front  rank  moves  straight 
to  the  front ;  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  of  the  front  rank  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3, 
and  4  of  the  rear  rank,  in  the  order  named,  move  straight  to 
the  front,  each  stepping  off  so  as  to  follow  the  preceding  man 
at  4  paces.  The  command  halt  is  given  when  all  have  their 
distances. 

In  case  more  than  one  squad  is  in  line,  each  squad  executes 
the  movement  as  above.  The  guide  of  each  rank  of  numbers  is 
right. 

112.  Being  at  distances,  to  assemble  the  squad :  1.  Assemble, 
2.  MARCH. 

No.  1  of  the  front  rank  stands  fast ;  the  other  numbers  move 
forward  to  their  proper  places  in  line. 

TO  STACK  AND  TAKE  ARMS. 

113.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt :  STACK  ARMS. 

Each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece  with 
the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band  and  rests  the  butt  between  his 
feet,  barrel  to  the  front,  muzzle  inclined  slightly  to  the  front 
and  opposite  the  center  of  the  interval  on  his  right,  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  raising  the  stacking  swivel;  each  even  number 


78       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

of  the  rear  rank  then  passes  his  piece,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to 
his  tile  leader,  who  grasps  it  between  the  bands  with  his  right 
hand  and  throws  the  butt  about  2  feet  in  advance  of  that  of 
his  own  piece  and  opposite  the  right  of  the  interval,  the  right 
hand  slipping  to  the  upper  band,  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
raiding  the  stacking  swivel,  which  he  engages  with  that  of  his 
own  piece;  each  odd  number  of  the  front  rank  raises  his  piece 
with  the  right  hand,  carries  it  well  forward,  barrel  to  the  front; 
the  left  hand,  guiding  the  stacking  swivel,  engages  the  lower 
hook  of  the  swivel  of  his  own  piece  with  the  free  hook  of  that 
of  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank;  he  then  turns  the  barrel 
outward  into  the  angle  formed  by  the  other  two  pieces  and 
lowers  the  butt  to  the  ground,  to  the  right  of  and  against  the 
toe  of  his  right  shoe. 

The  stacks  made,  the  loose  pieces  are  laid  on  them  by  the 
even  numbers  of  the  front  rank. 

When  each  man  has  finished  handling  pieces,  he  takes  the 
position  of  the  soldier. 

114.  Being  in  line  behind  the  stacks:  TAKE  ARMS. 

The  loose  pieces  are  returned  by  the  even  numbers  of  the 
front  rank ;  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  own 
piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  piece  of  his  rear-rank  man  with 
his  right  hand,  grasping  both  between  the  bands ;  each  odd 
number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece  in  the  same  way  with 
the  right  hand,  disengages  it  by  raising  the  butt  from  the 
ground  and  then,  turning  the  piece  to  the  right,  detaches  it 
from  the  stack ;  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  disengages- 
and  detaches  his  piece  by  turning  it  to  the  left,  and  then  passes 
the  piece  of  his  rear-rank  man  to  him,  and  all  resume  the  order. 

115.  Should  any  squad  have  Nos.  2  and  3  blank  files,  No.  1 
rear  rank  takes  the  place  of  No.  2  rear  rank  in  making  and 
breaking  the  stack ;  the  stacks  made  or  broken,  he  resumes  his 
post. 

Pieces  not  used  in  making  the  stack  are  termed  loose  pieces. 
Pieces  are  never  stacked  with  the  bayonet  fixed. 

THE   OBLIQUE    MAECH. 

116.  For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  the  squad  being  in 
column  or  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor  causes  the  squad  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQTJAD.  79 

face  half  right  or  half  left,  points  out  to  the  men  their  relative 
positions,  and  explains  that  these  are  to  be  maintained  in  the 
oblique  march. 

117.  1.  Right  (Left)   oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

Each  man  steps  off  in  a  direction  45°  to  the  right  of  his 
original  front.  He  preserves  his  relative  position,  keeping  his 
shoulders  parallel  to  those  of  the  guide  (the  man  on  the  right 
front  of  the  line  or  column),  and  so  regulates  his  steps  that  the 
ranks  remain  parallel  to  their  original  front. 

At  the  command  halt  the  men  halt  faced  to  the  front. 

To  resume  the  original  direction:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  men  half  face  to  the  left  in  marching  and  then  move 
straight  to  the  front. 

If  at  half  step  or  mark  time  while  obliquing,  the  oblique 
march  is  resumed  by  the  commands:  1.  Oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

TO  TUKN  ON  MOVING  PIVOT. 

118.  Being  in  line:  1.  Right  (Left)  turn,  2.  MARCH. 

The  movement  is  executed  by  each  rank  successively  and  on 
the  same  ground.  At  the  second  command,  the  pivot  man  of 
the  front  rank  faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  takes  the 
half  step ;  the  other  men  of  the  rank  oblique  to  the  right  until 
opposite  their  places  in  line,  then  execute  a  second  right  oblique 
and  take  the  half  step  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  pivot  man. 
All  glance  toward  the  marching  flank  while  at  half  step  and 
take  the  full  step  without  command  as  the  last  man  arrives  on 
the  line. 

Right  (Left)  half  turn  is  executed  in  a  similar  manner.  The 
pivot  man  makes  a  half  change  of  direction  to  the  right  and 
the  other  men  make  quarter  changes  in  obliquing. 

TO  TUEN  ON  FIXED  PIVOT. 

119.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  march:  1.  Squad  right  (left), 
2.  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command,  the  right  flank  man  in  the  front  rank 
faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  marks  time ;  the  other  front- 


80   EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

rank  men  oblique  to  the  right,  place  themselves  abreast  of  the 

time.     In  the  rear  rank  the  third  man  from  the 

In  column  by  the  second  and  first,  moves  straight 

it  until  in  rear  of  his  front-rank  man,  when  all  face 

t  to  marching  and  mark  time;  the  other  number  of 

ink  moves  straight  to  the  front  four  paces  and  places 

of  the  man  on  his  right.     Men  on  the  new  line 

toward  the  marching  ilank  while  marking  time  and,  as 

man  arrives  on  the  line,  both  ranks  execute  forward, 

march,  without  command. 

120.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  halt:  1.  Squad  right  (left),  2. 
MARCH.   3.  Squad,   4.  HALT. 

third  command  is  given  immediately  after  the  second. 

•  rated  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  paragraph 

that  all  men,  on  arriving  on  the  new  line,  mark  time 

•urth  command  is  given,  when  all  halt.     The  fourth 

should  be  given  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 

121  line,  to  turn  about  and  march:  1.  Squad  right 

(left)    about,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command,  the  front  rank  twice  executes  squad 
right,  initiating  the  second  squad  right  when  the  man  on  the 
inarching  Hank  has  arrived  abreast  of  the  rank.     In  the  rear 
third  man  from  the  right,  followed  by  the  second  and 
column,  moves  straight  to  the  front  until  on  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  line  to  be  occupied  by  the  rear  rank;  changes  direc- 
■    right;  moves  in  the  new  direction  until  in  rear  of 
t-rank  man.  when  all  face  to  the  right  in  marching, 
mark  time,  and  glance  toward  the  marching  flank.    The  fourth 
man  i  the  left  of  the  third  to  his  new  position;  as  he 

arrives  on  the  line,  both  ranks  execute  forward,  march,  without 
and. 
122.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  about  and  halt:  1.  Squad  right 
(left)  about.  2.  MARCH.  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

mmand  is  given  immediately  after  the  second. 

:  as  proscribed  in  the  preceding  paragraph 

that  all  men.  on  arriving  on  the  new  line,  mark  time 

the  fourth  command  is  given,  when  all  halt.    The  fourth 

and  should  be  given  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD.  81 

TO   FOLLOW    THE   CORPORAL. 

123.  Being  assembled  or  deployed,  to  march  the  squad  with- 
out unnecessary  commands,  the  corporal  places  himself  in  front 
of  it  and  commands  FOLLOW  ME. 

If  in  line  or  skirmish  line,  No.  2  of  the  front  rank  follows  in 
the  trace  of  the  corporal  at  about  3  paces ;  the  other  men  con- 
form to  the  movements  of  No.  2,  guiding  on  him  and  maintain- 
ing their  relative  positions. 

If  in  column,  the  head  of  the  column  follows  the  corporal. 

TO   DEPLOY   AS    SKIRMISHERS. 

124.  Being  in  any  formation,  assembled:  1.  As  skirmishers, 
2.  MARCH. 

The  corporal  places  himself  in  front  of  the  squad,  if  not 
already  there.  Moving  at  a  run,  the  men  place  themselves 
abreast  of  the  corporal  at  half-pace  intervals,  Nos.  1  and  2  on 
his  right,  Nos.  3  and  4  on  his  left,  rear-rank  men  on  the  right 
of  their  file  leaders,  extra  men  on  the  left  of  No.  4;  all  then 
conform  to  the  corporal's  gait. 

When  the  squad  is  acting  alone,  skirmish  line  is  similarly 
formed  on  No.  2  of  the  front  rank,  who  stands  fast  or  con- 
tinues the  march,  as  the  case  may  be ;  the  corporal  places  him- 
self in  front  of  the  squad  when  advancing  and  in  rear  when 
halted. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers,  the  men  march  at  ease,  pieces 
at  the  trail  unless  otherwise  ordered. 

The  corporal  is  the  guide  when  in  the  line ;  otherwise  No.  2 
front  rank  is  the  guide. 

125.  The  normal  interval  between  skirmishers  is  one-half 
pace,  resulting  practically  in  one  man  per  yard  of  front.  The 
front  of  a  squad  thus  deployed  as  skirmishers  is  about  10  paces. 

TO  INCREASE  OR  DIMINISH  INTERVALS. 

126.  If  assembled,  and  it  is  desired  to  deploy  at  greater  than 
the  normal  interval ;  or  if  deployed,  and  it  is  desired  to  increase 


S3       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

or  decrease  the  Interval:  1.  As  skirmishers,   (so  many)  paces, 
2.  MARCH. 

Intervals  are  taken  at  the  indicated  number  of  paces.  If 
already  deployed,  the  men  move  by  the  flank  toward  or  away 
from  the  guide. 

THE  ASSEMBLY. 

127.  Being  deployed:  1.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

The  men  move  toward  the  corporal  and  form  in  their  proper 
places. 

If  the  corporal  continues  to  advance,  the  men  move  in  double 
time,  form,  and  follow  him. 

The  assembly  while  marching  to  the  rear  is  not  executed. 

KNEELING   AND  LYING  DOWN. 

128.  If   standing:  KNEEL. 

Half  face  to  the  right ;  carry  the  right  toe  about  1  foot  to  the 
left  rear  of  the  left  heel ;  kneel  on  right  knee,  sitting  as  nearly 
as  possible  on  the  right  heel;  left  forearm  across  left  thigh; 
piece  remains  in  position  of  order  arms,  right  hand  grasping  it 
above  the  lower  band. 

129.  If  standing  or  kneeling:  LIE  DOWN. 

Kneel,  but  with  right  knee  against  left  heel;  carry  back  the 
left  foot  and  lie  flat  on  the  belly,  inclining  body  about  35°  to  the 
right;  piece  horizontal,  barrel  up,  muzzle  off  the  ground  and 
pointed  to  the  front;  elbows  on  the  ground;  left  hand  at  the 
balance,  right  hand  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock  opposite  the 
neck.    This  is  the  position  of  order  arms,  lying  down, 

130.  If  kneeling  or  lying  down:  RISE. 

If  kneeling,  stand  up,  faced  to  the  front,  on  the  ground  marked 
by  the  left  heel. 

If  lying  down,  raise  body  on  both  knees;  stand  up,  faced  to 
the  front,  on  the  ground  marked  by  the  knees. 

131.  If  lying  down:  KNEEL. 

Raise  the  body  on  both  knees ;  take  the  position  of  kneel. 

132.  In  double  rank,  the  positions  of  kneeling  and  lying 
down  are  ordinarily  used  only  for  the  better  utilization  of  cover. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers,  a  sitting  position  may  be  taken 
in  lieu  of  the  position  kneeUng. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQTT4D.  83 

LOADINGS  AND  FIRINGS. 

133.  The  commands  for  loading  and  firing  are  the  same 
Whether  standing,  kneeling,  or  lying  down.  The  firings  are 
always  executed  at  a  halt. 

When  kneeling  or  lying  down  in  double  rank,  the  rear  rank 
does  not  load,  aim,  or  fire. 

The  instruction  in  firing  will  be  preceded  by  a  command  for 
loading. 

Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skirmish  line  only. 

134.  Pieces  having  been  ordered  loaded  are  kept  loaded 
without  command  until  the  command  unload,  or  inspection  arms, 
fresh  clips  being  inserted  when  the, magazine  is  exhausted. 

135.  The  aiming  point  or  target  is  carefully  pointed  out. 
This  may  be  done  before  or  after  announcing  the  sight  setting. 
Both  are  indicated  before  giving  the  command  for  firing,  but 
may  be  omitted  when  the  target  appears  suddenly  and  is  un- 
mistakable; in  such  case  battle  sight  is  used  if  no  sight  setting 
is  announced. 

136.  The  target  or  aiming  point  having  been  designated  and 
the  sight  setting  announced,  such  designation  or  announcement 
need  not  be  repeated  until  a  change  of  either  or  both  is  neces- 
sary. 

Troops  are  trained  to  continue  their  fire  upon  the  aiming 
point  or  target  designated,  and  at  the  sight  setting  announced, 
until  a  change  is  ordered. 

137.  If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  position  of  load,  that 
position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight  setting; 
if  the  announcement  is  omitted,  the  position  is  taken  at  the 
first  command  for  firing. 

138.  When  deployed,  the  use  of  the  sling  as  an  aid  to  accu- 
rate firing  is  discretionary  with  each  man. 

TO   LOAD. 

139.  Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  1.  With  dummy 
(blank  or  ball)  cartridges,  2.  LOAD 

At  the  command  load  each  front-rank  man  or  skirmisher 
faces  half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right,  about  1 
foot,  to  such  position  as  will  insure  the  greatest  firmness  and 


84       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

of  the  body ;  raises,  or  lowers,  the  piece  and  drops  it 
eft  hand  at  the  balance,  left  thumb  extended  al«ng 
ock,  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  breast,  and  turns  the  cut- 
off up.    With  the  right  hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back, 
q  loaded  clip  and  inserts  the  end  in  the  clip  slots,  places 
•imb  on  the  powder  space  of  the  top  cartridge,  the  fingers 
-    around  the  piece  and  tips  resting  on  the  magazine 
plate;  forces  the  cartridges  into  the  magazine  by  pressing 
with  the  thumb;  without  removing  the  clip,  thrusts  the* 
bolt  home,  turning  down  the  handle;  turns  the  safety  lock  to 
safe "   and  carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock, 
r-enr-rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front,  takes  a  similar 
n  opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front-rank  man, 
muzzle  of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front  rank,  and  loads. 
A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  pieces  being  held 

orly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of  load. 
If  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is  similar;  if 
kneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh;  if  sitting,  the 
elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees.    If  lying  down,  the  left  hand 
es  and  supports  the  piece  at  the  balance,  the  toe  of  the 
butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 
For  reference,  these  positions   (standing,  kneeling,  and  lying 
are  designated  as  that  of  load. 

140.  For  instruction  in  loading:  1.  Simulate,  2.  LOAD. 
Executed  as  above  described,  except  that  the  cut-off  remains 

"  off  "  and  the  handling  of  cartridges  is  simulated. 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and  firing; 
after  a  few  lessons  dummy  cartridges  may  be  used.  Later, 
blank  cartridges  may  be  used. 

141.  The  ride  may  be  used  as  a  single  loader  by  turning  the 
magazine  "  off."  The  magazine  may  be  filled  in  whole  or  in 
part  while  "  off  "  or  "  on  "  by  pressing  cartridges  singly  down 
and  back  until  they  are  in  the  proper  place.  The  use  ef  the 
rifle  as  a  single  loader  is,  however,  to  be  regarded  as  exceptional. 

TO    UNLOAD. 

142.  UNLOAD. 

Take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  safety  lock  up  and  move 

ternately  back  and  forward  until  all  the  cartridges  are 

ejected.     After   the  last  cartridge   is  ejected  the  chamber  is 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQTTAD.  85 

closed  by  first  thrusting  the  bolt  slightly  forward  to  free  it 
from  the  stud  holding  it  in  place  when  the  chamber  is  open, 
pressing  the  follower  down  and  back  to  engage  it  under  the 
bolt  and  then  thrusting  the  bolt  home;  the  trigger  is  pulled. 
The  cartridges  are  then  picked  up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to  the 
belt  and  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  order. 

TO  SET  THE  SIGHT. 

143.  RANGE,  ELEVEN  HUNDRED  (EIGHT-FIFTY,  etc.),  or 
BATTLE  SIGHT. 

The  sight  is  set  at  the  elevation  indicated.  The  instructor 
explains  and  verifies  sight  settings. 

TO   FIBE   BY   VOLLEY. 

144.  1.  READY,  2.  AIM,  3.  Squad,  4.  FIRE. 

At  the  command  ready  turn  the  safety'  lock  to  the  "  ready  " ; 
at  the  command  aim  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands  and  sup- 
port the  butt  firmly  against  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder, 
right  thumb  clasping  the  stock,  barrel  horizontal,  left  elbow 
well  under  the  pieco,  right  elbow  as  high  as  the  shoulder ;  in- 
cline the  head  slightly  forward  and  a  little  to  the  right,  cheek 
against  the  stock,  left  eye  closed,  right  eye  looking  through  the 
notch  of  the  rear  sight  so  as  to  perceive  the  object  aimed  at, 
second  joint  of  forefinger  resting  lightly  against  the  front  of 
the  trigger  and  taking  up  the  slack;  top  of  front  sight  is  care- 
fully raised  into,  and  held  in,  the  line  of  sight. 

Each  rear-rank  man  aims  through  the  interval  to  the  right 
of  his  file  leader  and  leans  slightly  forward  to  advance  the 
muzzle  of  his  piec«  beyond  the  front  rank. 

In  aiming  kneeling,  the  left,  elbow  rests  on  the  left  knee, 
point*  of  elbow  in  front  of  kneecap. 

In  aiming  sitting,  the  elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees. 

In  aiming  lying  down,  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands ;  rest 
on  both  elbows  and  press  the  butt,  firmly  against  the  right 
shoulder. 

At  the  command  fire  press  the  finger  against  the  trigger ;  lire 
without  deranging  the  aim  and  without  lowering  or  turning  the 
piece ;  lower  the  piece  to  the  position  of  Load  and  load. 


86       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

145.  To  continue  the  firing :  1.  AIM,  2.  Squad,  3.  FIRE. 
Each  command  is  executed   as  previously  explained.     Load 

(from  magazine)  is  executed  by  drawing  back  and  thrusting 
home  the  bolt  with  the  right  hand,  leaving  the  safety  lock  at 
the  "  ready." 

TO  FIBE  AT   WILL. 

146.  FIRE  AT  WILL. 

Each  man,  independently  of  the  others,  comes  to  the  ready, 
aims  carefully  and  deliberately  at  the  aiming  point  or  target, 
fires,  loads,  and  continues  the  firing  until  ordered  to  suspend  or 
cease  firing. 

147.  To  increase  (decrease)  the  rate  of  fire  in  progress  the 
instructor  shouts:  FASTER  (SLOWER). 

Men  are  trained  to  fire  at  the  rate  of  about  three  shots  per 
minute  at  effective  ranges  and  five  or  six  at  close  ranges,  de- 
voting the  minimum  of  time  to  loading  and  the  maximum  to 
deliberate  aiming.  To  illustrate  the  necessity  for  deliberation, 
and  to  habituate  men  to  combat  conditions,  small  and  compara- 
tively indistinct  targets  are  designated. 

TO   FIBE   BY   CLIP. 

148.  CLIP  FIRE. 

Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  fire  at  will,  except  that  each 
man.  after  having  exhausted  the  cartridges  then  in  the  piece, 
suspends  firing. 

TO  SUSPEND  FIEINQ. 

149.  The  instructor  blows  a  long  blast  of  the  whistle  and 

same,  if  necessary,  or  commands:  SUSPEND  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  pieces  are  held,  loaded  and  locked,  in  a  posi- 
tion of  readiness  for  instant  resumption  of  firing,  rear  sights 
unchanged.  The  men  continue  to  observe  the  target  or  aiming 
point,  or  the  place  at  which  the  target  disappeared,  or  at  which 
it  is  expected  to  reappear. 

This  whistle  signal  may  be  used  as  a  preliminary  to  cease 
firing. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD.  87 

TO   CEASE  FIBING. 

150.  CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  pieces  not  already  there  are  brought  to  the 
position  of  load;  those  not  loaded  are  loaded;  sights  are  laid, 
pieces  are  locked  and  brought  to  the  order. 

Cease  firing  is  used  for  long  pauses,  to  prepare  for  changes  of 
position,  or  to  steady  the  men. 

151.«Commands  for  suspending  or  ceasing  fire  may  be  given 
at  any  time  after  the  preparatory  command  for  firing  whether 
the  firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not. 

THE    USE    OF    COVES. 

152.  The  recruit  should  be  given  careful  instruction  in  the 
individual  use  of  cover. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that,  in  taking  advantage 
of  natural  cover,  he  must  be  able  to  fire  easily  and  effectively 
upon  the  enemy ;  if  advancing  on  an  enemy,  he  must  do  so 
steadily  and  as  rapidly  as  possible ;  he  must  conceal  himself  as 
much  as  possible  while  firing  and  while  advancing.  While 
setting  his  sight  he  should  be  under  cover  or  lying  prone. 

153.  To  teach  him  to  fire  easily  and  effectively,  at  the  same 
time  concealing  himself  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  he  is 
practiced  in  simulated  firing  in  the  prone,  sitting,  kneeling,  and 
crouching  positions,  from  behind  hillocks,  trees,  heaps  of  earth 
or  rocks,  from  depressions,  gullies,  ditches,  doorways,  or  win- 
dows. He  is  taught  to  fire  around  the  right  side  of  his  conceal- 
ment whenever  possible,  or,  when  this  is  not  possible,  to  rise 
enough  to  fire  over  the  top  of  his  concealment. 

When  these  details  are  understood,  he  is  required  to  select 
cover  with  reference  to  an  assumed  enemy  and  to  place  himself 
behind  it  in  proper  position  for  firing. 

154.  The  evil  of  remaining  too  long  in  one  place,  however 
good  the  concealment,  should  be  explained.  He  should  be  taught 
to  advance  from  cover  to  cover,  selecting  cover  in  advance  be- 
fore leaving  his  concealment. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that  a  man  running  rapidly 
toward  an  enemy  furnishes  a  poor  target.  He  should  be  trained 
in  springing  from  a  prone  position  behind  concealment,  running 


88       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

at  top  speed  to  cover  and  throwing  himself  behind  it.    He  should 
noticed  in  advancing  from  cover  to  cover  by  crawling, 
or  by  lying  on  the  left  side,  rifle  grasped  in  the  right  hand,  and 
pushing  himself  forward  with  the  right  leg. 

155.  He  should  be  taught  that,  when  fired  on  while  acting 
independently,  he  should  drop  to  the  ground,  seek  cover,  and 
tlu-n  endeavor  to  locate  his  enemy. 

156.  Tin1  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the  use  of  cover  is  con- 
tinued in  the  combat  exercises  of  the  company,  but  ^e  must 
thni  be  taught  that  the  proper  advance  of  the  platoon  or  com- 
pany and  the  effectiveness  of  its  fire  is  of  greater  importance 
than  the  question,  of  cover  for  individuals.  He  should  also  be 
taught  that  he  may  not  move  about  or  shift  his  position  in  the 

.  line  except  the  better  to  see  the  target 

OBSERVATION. 

157.  The  ability  to  use  his  eyes  accurately  is  of  great  impor- 
tance to  the  soldier.  The  recruit  should  be  trained  in  observing 
lus  surrounding  from  positions  and  when  on  the  march. 

He  should  be  practiced  in  pointing  out  and  naming  military 
features  of  the  ground ;  in  distinguishing  between  living  beings; 
in  counting  distant  groups  of  objects  or  beings;  in  recognizing 
-  and   forms. 

158.  In  the  training  of  men  in  the  mechanism  of  the  firing 
line,  they  should  be  practiced  in  repeating  to  one  another  target 
and  aiming  point  designations  and  in  quickly  locating  and  point- 
it  a  designated  target.    They  should  be  taught  to  dis- 
tinguish,  from  a  prone  position,  distant  objects,  particularly 

.  both  with  the  naked  eye  and  with  field  glasses.     Simi- 
larly, they  should  be  trained  in  estimating  distances. 

Section  6.  School  of  the  company. 

159.  The  captain  is  responsible  for  the  theoretical  and  prac- 
tical instruction  of  his  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers,  not 
only  in  the  duties  of  their  respective  grades,  but  in  those  of  the 
next  higher  grades. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  89 

160.  The  company  in  line  is  formed  in  double  rank  with  the 
men  arranged,  as  far  as  practicable,  according  to  height  from 
right  to  left,  the  tallest  on  the  right. 

The  original  division  into  squads  is  effected  by  the  command : 
COUNT  OFF.  The  squads,  successively  from  the  right,  count  off 
as  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  corporals  placing  themselves 
as  Nos.  4  of  the  front  rank.  If  the  left  squad  contains  less  than 
six  men,  it  is  either  increased  to  that  number  by  transfers  from 
other  squads  or  is  broken  up  and  its  members  assigned  to  other 
squads  and  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers.  These  squad  or- 
ganizations are  maintained,  by  transfers  if  necessary,  until  the 
company  becomes  so  reduced  in  numbers  as  to  necessitate  a  new 
division  into  squads.    No  squad  will  contain  less  than  six  men. 

161.  The  company  is  further  divided  into  two,  three,  or  four 
;  platoons,  each  consisting  of  not  less  than  two  nor  more  than 
;four  squads.  In  garrison  or  ceremonies  the  strength  of  platoons 
may  exceed  four  squads. 

162.  At  the  formation  of  the  company  the  platoons  or  squads 
are  numbered  consecutively  from  right  to  left  and  these  designa- 
tions do  not  change. 

For  convenience  in  giving  commands  and  for  reference,  the 
designations,  right,  center,  left,  when  in  line,  and  leading,  center, 
rear,  when  in  column,  are  applied  to  platoons  or  squads.  These 
designations  apply  to  the  actual  right,  left,  center,  head,  or  rear, 
in  whatever  direction  the  company  may  be  facing.  The  center 
squad  is  the  middle  or  right  middle  squad  of  the  company. 

The  designation  "  So-and-so's "  squad  or  platoon  may  also 
be  used. 

163.  Platoons  are  assigned  to  the  lieutenants  and  noncom- 
missioned officers,  in  order  of  rank,  as  follows :  1,  right ;  2,  left ; 
3,  center  (right  center)  ;  4,  left  center. 

The  noncommissioned  officers  next  in  rank  are  assigned  as 
guides,  one  to  each  platoon.  If  sergeants  still  remain,  they  are 
assigned  to  platoons  as  additional  guides.  When  the  platoon  is 
[deployed,  its  guide  or  guides  accompany  the  platoon  leader. 

During  battle,  these  assignments  are  not  changed ;  vacancies 
are  filled  by  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  platoon  or  by  the 
nearest  available  officers  or  noncommissioned  officers  arriving 
with  reenforcing  troops. 


UNE    (i4Sqds.-4Piarrs)  • 

4~PLAT  3"PUVT.  -3 


'■■■■■H  V 


i  i  i  i  i  i  i.ii  j  i.i  :,  i 


,1  ;  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  azc 


COLUMN  of  SODS 
,*      (i2Sqds- 
■a    /.Rats) 


i  i  i  i  i 

i^i  i  i  iti 

n  i  i  i»i 

i^i  i  i  i 


en 


i  r  i  i  i 
31 
2 


^T7a 


Mill 

i  I  I  I  M 


COLUMN 

or  PLATOONS 


At  (lOSqdS 


2  Rats) 


NISI    I    I    U1    I    I    IA  ■ 


f  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i,.:  mini 


M 

I ?*PLAT. 

&£>:   1   I   I^I  I   1  H  I  I   1^1  I,  I   W   I  T~H 

f  i  i  r  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  ij   i  i  i  i  i   ii-i 
B  6  S 


Rate  If. 
THE  COMPANY. 

CAPTAIN 

i"ueuT  I 

i-UEuT. 
("SERGT. 
LEADER.  ^PLAT.  i 

guide  I 

SCU40  lXADCR 

MUSICIAN  I 

OTHERS  IN  UNE 
Of  FILE-CLOSERS 


PRIVATE  O 

iNiurs^emAL-S   ARE  OiS' 
5     IN,   PACES  . 


UNEof  PLATOONS 


(HSqdS.-ARats) 


3,:>PLAT. 


3 

yopLAT. 


I    I    I    I   1 
Mill 


(MM 


SKIRMISH    LiNE -HALTED.  (16  SqdS.  -  C  Plats) 
tf»*>LAT.  j«plAt.  z  -plat 


cU 


ffl    OD 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  91 

164.  The  first  sergeant  is  never  assigned  as  a  guide.  When 
not  commanding  a  platoon  he  is  posted  as  a  file  closet  opposite 

i  the  third  file  from  the  outer  flank  of  the  first  platoon ;  and  when 
the  company  is  deployed  he  accompanies  the  captain. 

The  quartermaster  sergeant,  when  present,  is  assigned  accord- 
ing to  his  rank  as  a  sergeant. 

Enlisted  men  below  the  grade  of  sergeant,  armed  with  the 
! rifle,  are  in  ranks  unless  serving  as  guides;  when  not  so  armed, 
they  are  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

Musicians,  when  required  to  play,  are  at  the  head  of  the 
;  column.  When  the  company  is  deployed,  they  accompany  the 
.captain. 

165.  The  company  executes  the  halt,  rests,  facings,  steps  and 
j  marchings,  manual  of  arms,  loadings  and  firings,  takes  intervals 
J  and  distances  and  assembles,  increases  and  diminishes  intervals, 
Presumes  attention,  obliques,  resumes  the  direct  march,  preserves 
[alignments,  kneels,  lies  down,  rises,  stacks  and  takes  arms,  as 
[explained  in  the  Schools  of  the  Soldier  and  the  Squad,  sub- 
stituting in  the  commands  company  for  squad. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  platoons,  detachments,  details,  etc., 
substituting  their  designation  for  squad  in  the  commands.  In 
the  same  manner  these  execute  the  movements  prescribed  for  the 
company,  whenever  possible,  substituting  their  designation  for 
company  in  the  commands. 

166.  A  company  so  depleted  as  to  make  division  into  platoons 
impracticable  is  led  by  the  captain  as  a  single  platoon,  but  re- 
tains the  designation  of  company.  The  lieutenants  and  first 
sergeant  assist  in  fire  control;  the  other  sergeants  place  them- 
selves in  the  firing  line  as  skirmishers. 

CLOSE  ORDER. 

BULE0. 

167.  The  guides  of  the  right  and  left,  or  leading  and  rear, 
platoons,  are  the  right  and  left,  or  leading  and  rear,  guides, 
respectively,  of  the  company  when  it  is  in  line  or  in  column  of 
squads.    Other  guides  are  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

In  platoon  movements  the  post  of  the  platoon  guide  is  at  the 
head  of  the  platoon,  If  the  platoon  1b  in  column,  and  on  the 


82   EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

guiding  flank  if  in  line.    When  a  platoon  has  two  guides  their1 
original  assignment  to  flanks  of  the  platoon  does  not  change. 

168.  The  guides  of  a  column  of  squads  place  themselves  orij 
the  flank  opposite  the  file  closers.     To  change  the  guides  and  ? 
file  closers  to  the  other  flank,  the  captain  commands:  1.  File 
closers  on  left  (right)  flank;  2.  MARCH.    The  file  closers  dartj 
through  the  column;  the  captain  and  guides  change. 

In  column  of  squads,  each  rank  preserves  the  alignment  to- 
ward the  side  of  the  guide. 

169.  Men  in  the  line  of  file  closers  do  not  execute  the  load- 
ings or  firings. 

Guides  and  enlisted  men  in  the  line  of  file  closers  execute  the 
manual  of  arms  during  the  drill  unless  specially  excused,  when 
they  remain  at  the  order.  During  ceremonies  they  execute  all 
movements. 

170.  In  taking  intervals  and  distances,  unless  otherwise  di 
rected,  the  right  and  left  guides,  at  the  first  command,  place 
themselves  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  and,  with  them,  take  a 
distance  of  4  paces  from  the  rear  rank.  In  taking  intervals,  at 
the  command  inarch,  the  file  closers  face  to  the  flank  and  each 
steps  off  with  the  file  nearest  him.  In  assembling  the  guides 
and  file  closers  resume  their  positions  in  line. 

171.  In  movements  executed  simultaneously  by  platoons  (as 
platoons  right  or  platoons,  column  right),  platoon  leaders  re- 
peat the  preparatory  command  (platoon  right,  etc.),  applicable 
to  their  respective  platoons.  The  command  of  execution  is  given 
by  the  captain  only. 

TO  FORM  THE   COMPANY. 

172.  At  the  sounding  of  the  assembly  the  first  sergeant  takes 
position  6  paces  in  front  of  where  the  center  of  the  company  is 
to  be,  faces  it,  draws  saber,  and  commands :  FALL  IN. 

The  right  guide  of  the  company  places  himself,  facing  to  the 
front,  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  and  at  such 
point  that  the  center  of  the  company  will  be  6  paces  from  and 
opposite  the  first  sergeant;  the  squads  form  in  their  proper 
places  on  the  left  of  the  right  guide,  superintended  by  the  other 
sergeants,  who  then  take  their  posts. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  93 

The  first  sergeant  commands:  REPORT.  Remaining  in  posi- 
ion  at  the  order,  the  squad  leaders,  in  succession  from  the 

jight,  salute  and  report:  All  present;  or  Private(s)  ao- 

ent.  The  first  sergeant  does  not  return  the  salutes  of  the 
quad  leaders:  he  then  commands:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3. 
Irder,  4.  ARMS,  faces  about,  salutes  the  captain,  reports:  Sir, 
.11  present  or  accounted  for,  or  The  names  of  the  unauthorized 
ibsentees,  and  without  command,  takes  his  post. 

If  the  company  can  not  be  formed  by  squads,  the  first  ser- 
geant commands:  1.  Inspection,  2,  ARMS,  3.  Right  shoulder,  4. 
IRMS,  and  calls  the  roll.  Each  man,  as  his  name  is  called, 
mswers  here  and  executes  order  arms.  The  sergeant  then 
ffects  the  division  into  squads  and  reports  the  company  as 
Drescribed  above. 

The  captain  places  himself  12  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of, 
ind  facing,  the  company  in  time  to  receive  the  report  of  the 
irst  sergeant,  whose  salute  he  returns,  and  then  draws  saber. 

The  lieutenants  take  their  posts  when  the  first  sergeant  has 
/eported  and  draw  saber  with  the  captain.  The  company,  if  not 
under  arms,  is  formed  in  like  manner  omitting  reference  to 
irms. 

173.  For  the  instruction  of  platoon  leaders  and  guides,  the 
company,  when  small,  may  be  formed  in  single  rank.  In  this 
formation  close  order  movements  only  are  executed.  The  single 
rank  executes  all  movements  as  explained  for  the  front  rank  of 
a  company. 

TO  DISMISS  THE  COMPANY. 

174.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  +he  captain  directs  the  first 
sergeant:  Dismiss  the  company.  The  officers  fall  out;  the  first 
sergeant  places  himself  faced  to  the  front,  3  paces  to  the  front 
and  2  paces  from  the  nearest  flank  of  the  company,  salutes, 
faces  toward  opposite  flank  of  the  company,  and  commands :  1, 
Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Port,  4.  ARMS,  5.  DISMISSED. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

175.  The  alignments  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  School 
of  the  Squad,  the  guide  being  established  instead  of  the  flank 


94       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

file.  The  rear-rank  man  of  the  flank  file  keeps  his  head  and 
eyes  to  the  front  and  covers  his  file  leader. 

At  each  alignment  the  captain  places  himself  in  prolongation 
of  the  line,  2  paces  from  and  facing  the  flank  toward  which 
the  dress  is  made,  verifies  the  alignment,  and  commands : 
FRONT. 

Platoon  leaders  take  a  like  position  when  required  to  verify 
alignments.  ♦ 

MOVEMENTS  ON  THE  FIXED  PIVOT. 

176.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  the  company:  1.  Company  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT;  or,  3.  Forward,  4. 
MARCH. 

At  the  second  command  the  right-flank  man  in  the  front  rank 
faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  marks  time ;  the  other  front- 
rank  men  oblique  to  the  right,  place  themselves  abreast  of  the 
pivot,  and-mark  time ;  in  the  rear  rank  the  third  man  from  the 
right,  followed  in  column  by  the  second  and  first,  moves  straight 
to  the  front  until  in  rear  of  his  front-rank  man,  when-  all  face 
to  the  right  in  marching  and  mark  time ;  the  remaining  men  of 
the  rear  rank  move  straight  to  the  front  4  paces,  oblique  to  the 
right,  place  themselves  abreast  of  the  third  man,  cover  their  file 
leaders,  and  mark  time;  the  right  guide  steps  back,  takes  post 
on  the  flank,  and  marks  time. 

The  fourth  command  is  given  when  the  last  man  is  1  pace  in 
rear  of  the  new  line. 

The  command  halt  may  be  given  at,  any  time  after  the  move- 
ment begins;  only  those  halt  who  are  in  the  new  position. 
Each  of  the  others  halt  upon  arriving  on  the  line,  aligns  him- 
self to  the  right,  and  executes  front  without  command. 

177.  Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  platoons,  or  the 
reverse:  1.  Platoons  right  (left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4. 
HALT;  or,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company. 

Before  forming  line  the  captain  sees  that  the  guides  on  the 
flank  toward  which  the  movement  is  to  be  executed  are  cover- 
ing. This  is  effected  by  previously  announcing  the  guide  to 
that  flank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  95 

178.  Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  squads,  or  the  reverse; 
or,  being  in  line  of  platoons,  to  form  columo  of  platoons,  or  the 
reverse:  1.  Squads  right  (left),  2.  MAECH.  *>r,  1.  Squads  right 
(left),  2.  MAECH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT. 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  the  School  of  the 
Squad. 

If  the  company  or  platoons  be  formed  in  line  toward  the  side 
of  the  file  closers,  they  dart  through  the  column  and  take  posts 
in  rear  of  the  company  at  the  second  command.  If  the  column 
of  squads  be  formed  from  line,  the  file  closers  take  posts  on 
the  pivot  flank,  abreast  of  and  4  inches  from  the  nearest  rank. 

MOVEMENTS  ON   THE  MOVING  PIVOT. 

179.  Being  in  line,  to  change  direction :  1.  Eight  (Left)  turn, 
2.  MAECH,  3.  Forward,  4.  MAECH. 

Executed  as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  except 
that  the  men  do  not  glance  toward  the  marching  flank  and  that 
all  take  the  full  step  at  the  fourth  command.  The  right  guide 
is  the  pivot  of  the  front  rank.  Each  rear-rank  man  obliques 
on  the  same  ground  as  his  file  leader. 

180.  Being  in  column  of  platoons,  to  change  direction:  1. 
Column  right  (left),  2.  MAECH. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  platoon  com- 
mands :  Eight  turn.  At  the  command  march  the  leading  platoon 
turns  to  the  right  on  moving  pivot;  its  leader  commands: 
1.  Forward,  2.  MAECH,  on  completion  of  the  turn.  Rear  pla- 
toons march  squarely  up  to  the  turning  point  of  the  leading 
platoon  and  turn  at  command  of  their  leaders. 

181.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  change  direction :  1.  Col- 
umn right  (left),  2.  MAECH. 

At  the  second  command  the  front  rank  of  the  leading  squad 
turns  to  the  right  on  moving  pivot,  as  in  the  School  of  the 
Squad;  the  other  ranks,  without  command,  turn  successively 
on  the  same  ground  and  in  a  similar  manner. 

182.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  line  of  platoons  or 
the  reverse:  1.  Platoons,, column  right  (left),  2.  MAECH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company. 


96   EXTRACT^  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

183.  Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  squads  and  change 
direction:  1.  Squads  right  (left),  column  right  (left),  2. 
MARCH;  or,  1.  Right  (Left)  by  squads,  2.  MARCH. 

In  the  first  case  the  right  squad  initiates  the  column  right  as 
soon  as  it  has  completed  the  squad  right. 

In  the  second  case,  at  the  command  march,  the  right  squad 
marches  forward;  the  remainder  of  the  company  executes  squads 
right,  column  left,  and  follows  the  right  squad.  The  right 
guide,  when  he  has  posted  himself  in  front  of  the  right  squad, 
takes  four  short  steps,  then  resumes  the  full  step;  the  right 
squad  conforms. 

184.  Being  in  line,  to  form  line  of  platoons:  1.  Squads  right 
(left),  platoons,  column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH;  or,  1.  Platoons, 
right  (left)  by  squads,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company  in 
the  preceding 'paragraph. 

FACING  OE  MARCHING  TO  THE  EEAB. 

185.  Being  in  line,  line  of  platoons,  or  in  column  of  platoons 
or  squads,  to  face  or  march  to  the  rear:  1.  Squads  right  (left) 
about,  2.  MARCH;  or,  1.  Squads  right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH, 
3.  Company,  4.  HALT. 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  the  School  of  the 
Squad. 

If  the  company  or  platoons  be  in  column  of  squads,  the  file 
closers  turn  about  toward  the  column,  and  take  their  posts;  if 
in  line,  each  darts  through  the  nearest  interval  between  squads. 

186.  To  march  to  the  rear  for  a  few  paces:  1.  About,  2.  FACE, 
3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

If  in  line,  the  guides  place  themselves  in  the  rear  rank,  now 
>nt  rank;  the  file  closers,  on  facing  about,  maintain  their 
relative  positions.    No  other  movement  is  executed  until  the 
line  is  faced  to  the  original  front. 

ON  EIGHT   (LEFT)    INTO  LINE. 

187.  Being  in  column  of  platoons  or  squads,  to  form  line  on 
right  or  left:  1.  On  right  (left)  into  line,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Com- 
pany. 4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  97 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  unit  commands: 
Eight  turn.  The  leaders  of  the  other  units  command  :  Forward, 
if  at  a  halt.  At  the  second  command  the  leading  unit  turns  to 
the  right  on  moving  pivot.  The  command  halt  is  given  when 
the  leading  unit  has  advanced  the  desired  distance  in  the  new 
direction ;  it  halts ;  its  leader  then  commands :  Right  dress. 

The  units  in  rear  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front; 
each,  when  opposite  the  right  of  its  place  in  line,  executes  right 
tarn  at  the  command  of  its  leader;  each  is  halted  on  the  line 
at  the  command  of  its  leader,  who  then  commands :  Right  dress. 
All  dress  on  the  first  unit  in  line. 

If  executed  in  double  time,  the  leading  squad  marches  in 
double  time  uitil  halted. 

FBONT   INTO   LINE. 

188.  Being  in  column  of  platoons  or  squads,  to  form  line  to 
the  front:  1.  Right  (Left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Com- 
pany, 4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

At  the  first  command  the  leaders  of  the  units  in  rear  of 
the  leading  one  command:  Right  oblique.  If  at  a  halt,  the 
leader  of  the  leading  unit  commands :  Forward.  At  the  second 
command  the  leading  unit  moves  straight  forward;  the  rear 
units  oblique  as  indicated.  The  command  halt  is  given  when 
the  leading  unit  has  advanced  the  desired  distance ;  it  halts ;  its 
leader  then  commands:  Left  dress.  Each  of  the  rear  units, 
when  opposite  its  place  in  line,  resumes  the  original  direction 
at  the  command  of  its  leader ;  each  is  halted  on  the  lin$  at  the 
command  of  its  leader,  who  then  commands:  Left  dress.  All 
dress  on  the  first  unit  in  line. 

189.  Being  in  column  of  squads  to  form  column  of  platoons, 
or  being  in  line  of  platoons,  to  form  the  company  in  line: 
1.  Platoons,  right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company, 
4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company.  In 
forming  the  company  in  line,  the  dress  is  on  the  left  squad  of 
the  left  platoon.  If  forming  column  of  platoons,  platoon  leaders 
verify  the  alignment  before  taking  their  posts;  the  captain  com- 
mands front  when  the  alignments  have  been  verified. 


98       EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

When  front  into  line  is  executed  in  double  time  the  commands1; 
ior  halting  and  aligning  are  omitted  and  the  guide  is  toward 
the  side  of  the  first  unit  in  line. 

AT  EASE  AND  EOUTE  STEP. 

190.  The  column  of  squads  is  the  habitual  column  of  route, 
but  route  step  and  at  ease  are  applicable  to  any  marching 
formation. 

191.  To  march  at  route  step:  1.  Route  step,  2.  MARCH. 
Sabers  are  carried  at  will  or  in  the  scabbard ;  the  men  carry 

their  pieces  at  will,  keeping  the  muzzles  elevated;  they  are  not 
required  to  preserve  silence,  nor  to  keep  the  step.  The  ranks 
cover  and  preserve  their  distance.  If  halted  from  route  step, 
the  men  stand  at  rest. 

192.  To  march  at  ease:  1.  At  ease,  2.  MARCH. 

The  company  marches  as  in  route  step,  except  that  silence  is 
preserved;  when  halted,  the  men  remain  at  ease. 

193.  Marching  at  route  step  or  at  ease:*l.  Company,  2.  AT- 
TENTION. 

At  the  command  attention  the  pieces  are  brought  to  the  right 
shoulder  and  the  cadenced  step  in  quick  time  is  resumed. 

TO  DIMINISH  THE  FEONT  OF  A  COLUMN  OF  SQUADS. 

194.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Right  (Left)  by  twos, 
2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  all  files  except  the  two  right  files  of 
the  leading  squad  execute  in  place  halt;  the  two  left  files  of  the 
leading  squad  oblique  to  the  right  when  disengaged  and  follow 
the  right  files  at  the  shortest  practicable  distance.  The  remain- 
ing squads  follow  successively  in  like  manner. 

195.  Being  in  column  of  squads  or  twos:  1.  Right  (Left)  by 
file.  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  all  files  execute  in  place  halt  except 
the  right  file  of  the  leading  two  or  squad.  The  left  file  or  files 
of  the  leading  two  or  squad  oblique  successively  to  the  right 
when  disengaged  and  each  follows  the  file  on  its  right  at  the 
shortest  practicable  distance.  The  remaining  twos  or  squads 
follow  successively  in  like  manner. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  99 

196.  Being  in  column  of  files  or  twos,  to  form  column  of 
squads ;  or  being  in  column  of  files,  to  form  column  of  twos :  1. 
Squads  (Twos),  right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  file  or  files  halt.  The 
remainder  of  the  squad,  or  two,  obliques  to  the  right  and  halts 
on  line  with  the  leading  file  or  files.  The  remaining  squads 
or  twos  close  up  and  successively  form  in  rear  of  the  first  in 
like  manner. 

The  movement  described  in  this  paragraph  will  be  ordered 
right  or  left,  so  as  to  restore  the  files  to  their  normal  relative 
positions  in  the  two  or  squad. 

197.  The  movements  prescribed  in  the  three  preceding  para- 
graphs are  difficult  of  execution  at  attention  and  have  no  value 
as  disciplinary  exercises. 

198.  Marching  by  twos  or  files  can  not  be  executed  without 
serious  delay  and  waste  of  road  space.  Every  reasonable  pre- 
caution will  be  taken  to  obviate  the  necessity  for  these  forma- 
tions. 

EXTENDED  OEDER. 
EULES  FOB  DEPLOYMENT. 

199.  The  command  guide  right  (left  or  center)  indicates  the 
base  squad  for  the  deployment ;  if  in  line  it  designates  the  actual 
right  (left  or  center)  squad;  if  in  column  the  command  guide 
right  (left)  designates  the  leading  squad,  and  the  command 
guide  center  designates  the  center  squad.  After  the  deployment 
is  completed,  the  guide  is  center  without  command,  unless  other- 
wise ordered. 

200.  At  the  preparatory  command  for  forming  skirmish 
line,  from  either  column  of  squads  or  line,  each  squad  leader 
(except  the  leader  of  the  base  squad,  when  his  squad  does  not 
advance),  cautions  his  squad,  follow  me  or  by  the  right  (left) 
flank,  as  the  case  may  be;  at  the  command  march,  he  steps  in 
front  of  his  squad  and  leads  it  to  its  place  in  line. 

201.  Having  given  the  command  for  forming  skirmish  line, 
the  captain,  if  necessary,  indicates  to  the  corporal  of  the  base 
squad  the  point  on  which  the  squad  is  to  march;  the  corporal 
habitually  looks  to  the  captain  for  such  directions. 

202.  The  base  squad  is  deployed  as  soon  as  it  has  sufficient 
interval.    The  other  squads  are  deployed  as  they  arrive  on  the 


100     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

general  line;  each  corporal  halts  in  his  place  in  line  and  com- 
mands or  signals,  as  skirmishers;  the  squad  deploys  and  halts 
abreast  of  him. 

If  tactical  considerations  demand  it,  the  squad  is  deployed 
before  arriving  on  the  line. 

203.  Deployed  lines  preserve  a  general  alignment  toward  the 
guide.  Within  their  respective  fronts,  individuals^  or  units 
march  so  as  best  to  secure  cover  or  to  facilitate  the  advance, 
but  the  general  and  orderly  progress  of  the  whole  is  paramount. 

On  halting  a  deployed  line  faces  to  the  front  (direction  of 
the  enemy)  in  all  cases  and  takes  advantage  of  cover,  the  men 
lying  down  if  necesssary. 

204.  The  company  in  skirmish  line  advances,  halts,  moves  by. 
the  flank,  or  to  the  rear,  obliques,  resumes  the  direct  march, 
passes  from  quick  to  double  time  and  the  reverse  by  the  same 
commands  and  in  a  similar  manner  as  in  close  order;  if  at  a 
halt,  the  movement  by  the  flank  or  to  the  rear  is  executed  by 
the  same  commands  as  when  marching.  Company  right  (left, 
half  right,  half  left)  is  executed  as  explained  for  the  front 
rank,  skirmish  intervals  being  maintained. 

205.  A  platoon  or  other  part  of  the  company  is  deployed  and 
marched  in  the  same  manner  as  the  company,  substituting  in 
the  commands,  platoon  (detachment,  etc.)  for  company. 

DEPLOYMENTS. 

206.  Being  in  line,  to  form  skirmish  line  to  the  front:  1. 
As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left  or  center),  2.  MARCH. 

If  marching,  the  corporal  of  the  base  squad  moves  straight  to 
the  front ;  when  that  squad  has  advanced  the  desired  distance, 
the  captain  commands :  1.  Company,  2.  HALT.  If  the  guide  be 
right  (left),  the  other  corporals  move  to  the  left  (right)  front, 
and,  in  succession  from  the  base,  place  their  squads  on  the  line; 
if  the  guide  be  center,  the  other  corporals  move  to  the  right  or 
left  front,  according  as  they  are  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  center 
squad,  and  in  succession  from  the  center  squad  place  their 
squads  on  the  line. 

If  at  a  halt,  the  base  squad  is  deployed  without  advancing; 
the  other  squads  may  be  conducted  to  their  proper  places  by  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  101 

flank ;  interior  squads  may  be  moved  when  squads  more  distant 
from  the  base  have  gained  comfortable  marching  distance. 

207.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  skirmish  line  to  the 
front:  1.  As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left  or  center),  2. 
MARCH. 

If  marching,  the  corporal  of  the  base  squad  deploys  it  and 
moves  straight  to  the  front;  if  at  a  halt,  he  deploys  his  squad 
without  advancing.  If  the  guide  be  right  (left),  the  other  cor- 
porals move  to  the  left  (right)  front,  and,  in  succession  from  the 
base,  place  their  squads  on  the  line ;  if  the  guide  be  center,  the 
corporals  in  front  of  the  center  squad  move  to  the  right  (if  at  a 
halt,  to  the  right  rear),  the  corporals  in  rear  of  the  center  squad 
move  to  the  left  front,  and  each,  in  succession  from  the  base, 
places  his  squad  on  the  line. 

The  column  of  twos  or  files  is  deployed  by  the  same  commands 
and  in  like  manner. 

208.  The  company  in  line  or  in  column  of  squads  may  be 
deployed  in  an  oblique  direction  by  the  same  commands.  The 
captain  points  out  the  desired  direction;  the  corporal  of  the 
base  squad  moves  in  the  direction  indicated ;  the  other  corporals 
conform. 

209.  To  form  skirmish  line  to  the  flank  or  rear  the  line  or 
the  column  of  squads  is  turned  by  squads  to  the  tlank  or  rear 
and  then  deployed  as  described. 

210.  The  intervals  between  men  are  increased  or  decreased 
as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  adding  to  the  prepara- 
tory command,  guide  right  (left  or  center)  if  necessary. 

THE  ASSEMBLY. 

211.  The  captain  takes  his  post  in  front  of,  or  designates. 
the  element  on  which  the  company  is  to  assemble  and  com- 
mands: 1.  Assemble,  2-.  MARCH. 

If  in  skirmish  line  the  men  move  promptly  toward  the  desig- 
nated point  and  the  company  is  re-formed  in  line.  If  assembled 
by  platoons,  these  are  conducted  to  the  designated  point  by 
platoon  leaders,  and  the  company  is  re-formed  in  line. 

Platoons  may  be  assembled  by  the  command :  1.  Platoons, 
assemble,  2.  MARCH. 


102     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company. 

One  or  more  platoons  may  be  assembled  by  the  command: 
1.  Such  platoon(s),  assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  the  designated  platoon  or  platoons  as  described 
for  the  company. 

THE    ADVANCE. 

212.  The  advance  of  a  company  into  an  engagement  (whether 
for  attack  or  defense)  is  conducted  in  close  order,  preferably 
column  of  squads,  until  the  probability  of  encountering  hostile 
fire  makes  it  advisable  to  deploy.  After  deployment,  and  before 
opening  fire,  the  advance  of  the  company  may  be  -continued  in 
skirmish  line  or  other  suitable  formation,  depending  upon  cir- 
cumstances. The  advance  may  often  be  facilitated,  or  better- 
advantage  taken  of  -cover,  or  losses  reduced  by  the  employment 
of  the  platoon  or  squad  columns  or  by  the  use  of  a  succession  of 
thin  lines.  The  selection  of  the  method  to  be  used  is  made  by 
the  captain  or  major,  the  choice  depending  upon  conditions  aris- 
ing during  the  progress  of  the  advance.  If  the  deployment  is 
found  to  be  premature,  it  will  generally  be  best  to  assemble  the 
company  and  proceed  in  close  order. 

Patrols  are  used'  to  provide  the  necessary  security  against 
surprise. 

213.  Being  in  skirmish  line:  1.  Platoon  columns,  2.  MARCH. 
The  platoon  leaders  move  forward  through  the  center  of  their 

respective  platoons ;  men  to  the  right  of  the  platoon  leader  march 
to  the  left  and  follow  him  in  file;  those  to  the  left  march  in  like 
manner  to  the  right;  each  platoon  leader  thus  conducts  the 
march  of  his  platoon  in  double  column  of  files :  platoon  guides 
follow  in  rear  of  their  respective  platoons  to  insure  prompt  and 
orderly  execution  of  the  advance. 

214*  Being  in  skirmish  line:  1.  Squad  columns,  2.  MARCH. 

Eaqh  squad  leader  moves  to  the  front ;  the  members  of  each 
squad  oblique  toward  and  follow  their  squad  leader  in  single  file 
at  easy  marching  distances. 

215.  Platoon  columns  are  profitably  used  where  the  ground  is 
so  difficult  or  cover  so  limited  as  to  make  it  desirable  to  take 
advantage  of  the  few  favorable  routes ;  no  two  platoons  should 
march  within  the  area  of  burst  of  a  single  shrapnel.1     Squad 

1  Ordinarily  about  20  yards  wide. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  103 

columns  are  of  value  principally  in  facilitating  the  advance  over 
rough  or  brush-grown  ground  ;  they  afford  no  material  advantage 
in  securing  cover. 

216.  To  deploy  platoon  or  squad  columns:  1.  As  skirmishers, 
2.  MARCH. 

Skirmishers  move  to  the  right  or  left  front  and  successively 
place  themselves  in  their  original  positions  on  the  line. 

217.  Being  in  platoon  or  squad  columns:  1.  Assemble,  2. 
MARCH. 

The  platoon  or  squad  leaders  signal  assemble.  The  men  of 
each  platoon  or  squad,  as  the  case  may  be,  advance  and,  moving 
to  the  right  and  left,  take  their  proper  places  in  line,  each  unit 
assembling  on  the  leading  element  of  the  column  and  re-forming 
in  line.  The  platoon  or  squad  leaders  conduct  their  units  toward 
the  element  or  point  indicated  by  the  captain,  and  to  their  places 
in  line;  the  company  is  re-formed  in  line. 

218.  Being  in  skirmish  line,  to  advance  by  a  succession  of 
thin  lines:  1.   (Such  numbers),  forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  captain  points  out  in  advance  the  selected  position  in 
front  of  the  line  occupied.  The  designated  number  of  each  squad 
moves  to  the  front;  the  line  thus  formed  preserves  the  original 
intervals  as  nearly  as  practicable ;  when  this  line  has  advanced  a 
suitable  distance  (generally  from  100  to  250  yards,  depending 
upon  the  terrain  and  the  character  of  the  hostile  fire),  a  second 
is  sent  forward  by  similar  commands,  and  so  on  at  irregular 
distances,  until  the  whole  line  has  advanced.  Upon  arriving  at 
the  indicated  position,  the  first  line  is  halted.  Successive  lines, 
upon  arriving,  halt  on  line  with  the  first  and  the  men  take  their 
proper  places  in  the  skirmish  line. 

Ordinarily  each  line  is  made  up  of  one  man  per  squad  and  the 
men  of  a  squad  are  sent  forward  in  order  from  right  to  left  as 
deployed.  The  first  line  is  led  by  the  platoon  leader  of  the  right 
platoon,  the  second  by  the  guide  of  the  right  platoon,  and  so  on 
in  order  from  right  to  left. 

The  advance  is  conducted  in  quick  time  unless  conditions  de- 
mand a  faster  gait. 

The  company  having  arrived  at  the  indicated  position,  a  fur- 
ther advance  by  the  same  means  may  be  advisable. 

219.  The  advance  in  a  succession  of  thin  lines  is  used  to 
cross  a  wide  stretch  swept,  or  likely  to  be  swept,  by  artillery 


104     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

fire  or  heavy,  long-range  rifle  fire  which  can  not  profitably  be 
returned.  Its  purpose  is  the  building  up  of  a  strong  skirmish 
line  preparatory  to  engaging  in  a  fire  fight.  This  method  of 
advancing  results  in  serious  (though  temporary)  loss  of  control 
over  the  company.  Its  advantage  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  offers 
a  less  definite  target,  hence  is  less  likely  to  draw  fire. 

220.  The  above  are  suggestions.  Other  and  better  forma- 
tions may  be  devised  to  fit  particular  cases.  The  best  formation 
is  the  one  which  advances  the  line  farthest  with  the  least  loss 
of  men,  time,  and  control. 

THE  FIRE  ATTACK. 

221.  The  principles  governing  the  advance  of  the  firing  line 
in  attack  are  considered  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion. 

When  it  becomes  impracticable  for  the  company  to  advance 
as  a  whole  by  ordinary  means,  it  advances  by  rushes. 

222.  Being  in  skirmish  line:  1.  By  platoon  (two  platoons, 
squad,  four  men,  etc.),  from  the  right  (left),  2.  RUSH. 

The  platoon  leader  on  the  indicated  flank  carefully  arranges 
the  details  for  a  prompt  and  vigorous  execution  of  the  rush 
and  puts  it  into  effect  as  soon  as  practicable.  If  necessary,  he 
designates  the  leader  for  the  indicated  fraction.  When  about  to 
rush,  he  causes  the  men  of  the  fraction  to  cease  firing  and  to 
hold  themselves  flat,  but  in  readiness  to  spring  forward  in- 
stantly. The  leader  of  the  rush  (at  the  signal  of  the  platoon 
leader,  if  the  latter  be  not  the  leader  of  the  rush)  commands: 
Follow  mej  and,  running  at  top  speed,  leads  the  fraction  to  the 
new  line,  where  he  halts  it  and  causes  it  to  open  fire.  The 
leader  of  the  rush  selects  the  new  line  if  it  has  not  been  pre- 
viously designated. 

The  first  fraction  having  established  itself  on  the  new  line, 
the  next  like  fraction,  is  sent  forward  by  its  platoon  leader, 
without  further  command  of  the  captain,  and  so  on,  successively, 
until  the  entire  company  is  on  the  line  established  by  the  first 
rush. 

If  more  than  one  platoon  is  to  join  in  one  rush,  the  junior 
platoon  leader  conforms  to  the  action  of  the  senior. 

A  part  of  the  line  having  advanced,  the  captain  may  increase 
or  decrease  the  size  of  the  fractions  to  complete  the  movement. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  105 

223.  When  the  company  forms  a  part  of  the  firing  line,  the 
i  rush  of  the  company  as  a  whole  is  conducted  by  the  captain,  as 
( 'described  for  a  platoon  in  the  preceding  paragraph.    The  cap- 
I  tain  leads  the  rush ;  platoon  leaders  lead  their  respective  pla- 
toons;  platoon  guides  follow  the  line  to  insure  prompt  and 
orderly  execution  of  the  advance. 

224.  When  the  foregoing  method  of  rushing,  by  running,  be- 
'  comes  impracticable,  any  method  of  advance  that  brings  the 
i attack  closer  to  the  enemy,  such  as  crawling,  should  be  em- 
ployed. 

For  regulations  governing  the  charge,  see  paragraphs  318 
;and  319. 

THE  COMPANY  IN  SUPPORT. 

225.  To  enable  it  to  follow  or  reach  the  firing  line,  the  sup- 
port adopts  suitable  formations,  following  the  principles  ex- 
plained in  paragraphs  212-218. 

The  support  should  be  kept  assembled  as  long  as  practicable. 
If  after  deploying  a  favorable  opportunity  arises  to  hold  it  for 
some  time  in  close  formation,  it  should  be  reassembled.  It  is 
redeployed  when  necessary. 

226.  The  movements  of  the  support  as  a  whole  and  the  dis- 
patch of  reenforcements  from  it  to  the  firing  line  are  controlled 
by  the  major. 

A  reenforcement  of  less  than  one  platoon  has  little  influence 
and  will  be  avoided  whenever  practicable. 

The  captain  of  a  company  in  support  is  constantly  on  the 
alert  for  the  major's  signals  or  commands. 

227.  A  reenforcement  sent  to  the  firing  line  joins  it  deployed 
as  skirmishers.  The  leader  of  the  reenforcement  places  it  in  an 
interval  in  the  line,  if  one  exists,  and  commands  it  thereafter 
as  a  unit.  If  no  such  suitable  interval  exists,  the  reenforce- 
ment is  advanced  with  increased  intervals  between  skirmishers ; 
each  man  occupies  the  nearest  interval  in  the  firing  line,  and 
each  then  obeys  the  orders  of  the  nearest  squad  leader  and 
platoon  leader. 

228.  A  reenforcement  joins  the  firing  line  as  quickly  as  pos- 
sible without  exhausting  the  men. 


106     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

229.  The  original  platoon  division  of  the  companies  in  the 
firing  line  should  be  maintained  and  should  not  be  broken  up  by 
the  mingling  of  reenforcements. 

Upon  joining  the  firing  line,  officers  and  sergeants  accompany- 
ing a  reenforcement  take  over  the  duties  of  others  of  like  grade 
who  have  been  disabled,  or  distribute  themselves  so  as  best  to 
exercise  their  normal  functions.  Conditions  will  vary  and  no 
rules  can  be  prescribed.  It  is  essential  that  all  assist  in  master- 
ing the  increasing  difficulties  of  control. 

THE  COMPANY  ACTING  ALONE. 

230.  In  general,  the  company,  when  acting  alone,  is  employed 
according  to  the  principles  applicable  to  the  battalion  acting 
alone;  the  captain  employs  platoons  as  the  major  employs  com- 
panies, making  due  allowance  for  the  difference  in  strength. 

The  support  may  be  smaller  in  proportion  or  may  be  dis- 
pensed with. 

231.  The  company  must  be  well  protected  against  surprise. 
Combat  patrols  on  the  flanks  are  specially  important.  Each 
leader  of  a  flank  platoon  details  a  man  to  watch  for  the  signals 
of  the  patrol  or  patrols  on  his  flank. 

FIRE. 

232.  Ordinarily  pieces  are  loaded  and  extra  ammunition  is 
issued  before  the  company  deploys  for  combat. 

In  close  order  the  company  executes  the  firings  at  the  com- 
mand of  the  captain,  who  posts  himself  in  rear  of  the  center  of 
the  company. 

Usually  the  firings  in  close  order  consist  of  saluting  volleys 
only. 

233.  When  the  company  is  deployed,  the  men  execute  the 
firings  at  the  command  of  their  platoon  leaders ;  the  latter  give 
such  commands  as  are  necessary  to  carry  out  the  captain's 
directions,  and,  from  time  to  time,  add  such  further  commands 
as  are  necessary  to  continue,  correct,  and  control  the  fire 
ordered. 

234.  The  voice  is  generally  inadequate  for  giving  commands 
during  fire  and  must  be  replaced  by  signals  of  such  character 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  107 

that  proper  fire  direction  and  control  is  assured.  To  attract 
attention,  signals  must  usually  be  preceded  by  the  whistle  signal 
(short  blast).  A  fraction  of  the  firing  line  about  to  rush  should, 
if  practicable,  avoid  using  the  long  blast  signal  as  an  aid  to 
cease  firing.  Officers  and  men  behind  the  firing  line  can  not 
ordinarily  move  freely  along  the  line,  but  must  depend  on  mutual 
watchfulness  and  the  proper  use  of  the  prescribed  signals.  All 
should  post  themselves  so  as  to  see  their  immediate  superiors 
and  subordinates. 

235.  The  musicians  assist  the  captain  by  observing  the  enemy, 
the  target,  and  the  fire  effect  by  transmitting  commands  or 
signals  and  by  watching  for  signals. 

236.  Firing  with  blank  cartridges  at  an  outlined  or  represented 
enemy  at  distances  less  than  100  yards  is  prohibited. 

237.  The  effect  of  fire  and  the  influence  of  the  ground  in  rela- 
tion thereto,  and  the  individual  and  collective  instruction  in 
marksmanship,  are  treated  in  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Manual. 

RANGES. 

238.  For  convenience  of  reference  ranges  are  classified  as 
follows : 

0  to  600  yards,  close  range. 
600  to  1,200  yards,  effective  range. 
1,200  to  2,000  yards;  long  range. 
2,000  yards  and  over,  distant  range. 

239.  The  distance  to  the  target  must  be  determined  as  accu- 
rately as  possible  and  the  sights  set  accordingly.  Aside  from 
training  and  morale,  this  is  the  most  important  single  factor  in 
securing  effective  fire  at  the  longer  ranges. 

240r  Except  in  a  deliberately  prepared  defensive  position,  the 
most  accurate  and  only  practicable  method  of  determining  the 
range  will  generally  be  to  take  the  mean  of  several  estimates. 

Five  or  six  officers  or  men,  selected  from  the  most  accurate 
estimators  in  the  company,  are  designated  as  range  estimators 
and  are  specially  trained  in  estimating  distances. 

Whenever  necessary  and  practicable,  the  captain  assembles 
the  range  estimators,  points  out  the  target  to  them,  and  adopts 
the  mean  of  their  estimates.  The  range  estimators  then  take 
their  customary  posts. 


108     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

CLASSES    OF   FIBIXG. 

241.  Volley  firing  has  limited  application.  In  defense  it  may 
be  used  in  the  early  stages  of  the  action  if  the  enemy  presents 
;i  Large,  compact  target.  It  may  be  used  by  troops  executing 
fire  of  position.  When  the  ground  near  the  target  is  such  that 
the  strike  of  bullets  can  be  seen  from  the  firing  line,  ranging 
volleys  may  be  used  to  correct  the  sight  setting. 
In  combat,  volley  firing  is  executed  habitually  by  platoon. 
242.  Fire  at  will  is  the  class  of  fire  normally  employed  in 
attack  or  defense. 

243.  Clip  fire  has  limited  application.  It  is  principally  used: 
1.  In  the  early  stages  of  combat,  to  steady  the  men  by  habitu- 
ating them  to  brief  pauses  in  firing.  2.  To  produce  a  short  burst 
of  fire. 

THE  TARGET. 

244.  Ordinarily  the  major  will  assign  to  the  company  an 
objective  in  attack  or  sector  in  defense;  the  company's  target 
will  lie  within  the  limits  so  assigned.  In  the  choice  of  target, 
tactical  considerations  are  paramount ;  the  nearest  hostile  troops 
within  the  objective  or  sector  will  thus  be  the  usual  target. 
This  will  ordinarily-  be  the  hostile  firing  line ;  troops  in  rear 
are  ordinarily  proper  targets  for  artillery,  machine  guns,  or,  at 
times,  infantry  employing  fire  of  position. 

Change  of  targets  should  not  be  made  without  excellent  reasons 
therefor,  such  as  the  sudden  appearance  of  hostile  troops  under 
conditions  which  make  them  more  to  be  feared  than  the  troops 
comprising  the  former  target. 

245.  The  distribution  of  fire  over  the  entire  target  is  of  special 
importance. 

The  captain  allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon,  or 
each  platoon  leader  takes  as  his  target  that  part  which  corre- 
sponds to  his  position  in  the  company.  Men  are  so  instructed 
that  each  fires*  on  that  part  of  the  target  which  is  directly 
opposite  him. 

246.  All  parts  of  the  target  are  equally  important.  Care  must 
be  exercised  that  the  men  do  not  slight  its  less  visible  parts.     A 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  109 

section  of  the  target  not  covered  by  fire  represents  a  number  of 
the  enemy  permitted  to  fire  cooly  and  effectively. 

247.  If  the  target  can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye,  platoon 
leaders  select  an  object  in  front  of  or  behind  it,  designate  this 
as  the  aiming  target,  and  direct  a  sight  setting  which  will  carry 
the  cone  of  fire  into  the  target. 

FIRE   DIRECTION. 

248.  When  the  company  is  large  enough  to  be  divided  into 
platoons,  it  is  impracticable  for  the  captain  to  command  it 
directly  in  combat.  .  His  efficiency  in  managing  the  firing  line 
is  measured  by  his  ability  to  enforce  his  will  through  the  platoon 
leaders.  Having  indicated  clearly  what  he  desires  them  to  do, 
he  avoids  interfering  except  to  correct  serious  errors  or  omis- 
sions. 

249.  The  captain  directs  the  fir.e  of  the  company  or  of  desig- 
nated platoons.  He  designates  the  target,  and,  when  practi- 
cable, allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon.  Before  begin- 
ning the  fire  action  he  determines  the  range,  announces  the 
sight  setting,  and  indicates  the  class  of  fire  to  be  employed,  and 
the  time  to  open  fire.  Thereafter,  he  observes  the  fire  effect, 
corrects  material  errors  in  sight  setting,  prevents  exhaustion  of 
the  ammunition  supply,  and  causes  the  distribution  of  such 
extra  ammunition  as  may  be  received  from  the  rear. 

FIRE    CONTROL. 

250.  In  combat  the  platoon  is  the  fire  unit.  From  20  to  35 
rifles  are  as  many  as  one  leader  can  control  effectively. 

251.  Each  platoon  leader  puts  into  execution  the  commands 
or  directions  of  the  captain,  having  first  taken  such  precautions 
to  insure  correct  sight  setting  and  clear  description  of  the  target 
or  aiming  target  as  the  situation  permits  or  requires ;  thereafter 
he  gives  such  additional  commands  or  directions  as  are  neces- 
sary to  exact  compliance  with  the  captain's  will.  He  corrects 
the  sight  setting  when  necessary.  He  designates  an  aiming 
target  when  the  target  can"  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye. 

252.  In  general,  platoon  leaders  observe  the  target  and  the 
effect  of  their  fire  and  are  on  the  alert  for  the  captain's  com- 


110     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

mantis  or  signals;  they  observe  and  regulate  the  rate  of  fire. 
The  platoon  guides  watch  the  firing  line  and  check  every  breach 
of  fire  discipline.  Squad  leaders  transmit  commands  and  signals 
when  necessary,  observe  the  conduct  of  their  squads  and  abate 
tment,  assist  in  enforcing  fire  discipline  and  participate  in 
the  firing. 

253.  The  best  troops  are  those  that  submit  longest  to  fire 
control.  Loss  of  control  is  an  evil  which  robs  success  of  its 
greatest  results.  To  avoid  or  delay  such  loss  should  be  the  con- 
stant aim  of  all. 

Fire  control  implies  the  ability  to  stop  firing,  change  the 
sight  setting  and  target,  and  resume  a  well  directed  fire. 

FIEE  DISCIPLINE. 

254.  "  Fire  discipline  implies,  besides  a  habit  of  obedience,  a 
control  of  the  rifle  by  the  soldier,  the  result  of  training,  which 
will  enable  him  in  action  to  make  hits  instead  of  misses.  It 
embraces  taking  advantage  of  the  ground;  care  in  setting  the 
sight  and  delivery  of  fire;  constant  attention  to  the  orders  of 

Eiders,  and  careful  observation  of  the  enemy;  an  increase 
of  lire  when  the  target  is  favorable,  and  a  cessation  of  fire  when 
the  enemy  disappears;  economy  of  ammunition."  (Small- Arms 
Firing  Manual.) 

In  combat,  shots  which  graze  the  enemy's  trench  or  position 
nnd  thus  reduce  the  effectiveness  of  his  fire  have  the  approxi- 
mate value  of  hits;  such  shots  only,  or  actual  hits,  contribute 
toward  fire  superiority. 

Fire  discipline  implies  that,  in  a  firing  line  without  leaders, 
each  man  retains  his  presence  of  mind  and  directs  effective  fire 
upon  the  proper  target. 

255.  To  create  a  correct  appreciation  of  the  requirements  of 
Hi'"  discipline,  men  are  taught  that  the  rate  of  fire  should  be  as 
rapid  as  is  consistent  with  accurate  aiming;  that  the  rate  will 

I  upon  the  visibility,  proximity,  and  size  of  the  target ;  and 
that  the  proper  rate  will  ordinarily  suggest  itself  to  each  trained 
man,  usually  rendering  cautions  or  commands  unnecessary. 

In  attack  the  highest  rate  of  fire  is  employed  at  the  halt  pre- 
ceding the  assault,  and  in  pursuing  fire. 


COMPANY  INSPECTION.  Ill 

256.  In  an  advance  by  rushes,  leaders  of  troops  in  firing  posi- 
tions are  responsible  for  the  delivery  of  heavy  fire  to  cover 
the  advance  of  each  rushing  fraction.  Troops  are  trained  to 
change  slightly  the  direction  of  fire  so  as  not  to  endanger  the 
flanks  of  advanced  portions  of  the  firing  line. 

257.  In  defense,  when  the  target  disappears  behind  cover, 
platoon  leaders  suspend  fire,  prepare  their  platoons  to  fire  upon 
the  point  where  it  is  expected  to  reappear,  and  greet  its  re- 
appearance instantly  with  vigorous  fire. 

Section  7.  Company  inspection. 

745.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt :  1.  Open  ranks,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  the  front  rank  executes  right  dress ; 
the  rear  rank  and  the  file  closers  march  backward  4  steps,  halt, 
and  execute  right  dress;  the  lieutenants  pass  around  their 
respective  flanks  and  take  post,  facing  to  the  front,  3  paces  in 
front  of  the  center  of  their  respective  platoons.  The  captain 
aligns  the  front  rank,  rear  rank,  and  file  closers,  takes  post 
3  paces  in  front  of  the  right  guide,  facing  to  the  left,  and  com- 
mands :  1.  FRONT,  2.  PREPARE  FOR  INSPECTION. 

At  the  second  command  the  lieutenants  carry  saber;  the 
captain  returns  saber  and  inspects  them,  after  which  they  face 
about,  order  saber,  and  stand  at  ease;  upon  the  completion  of 
the  inspection  they  carry  saber,  face  about,  and  order  saber. 
The  captain  may  direct  the  lieutenants  to  accompany  or  assist 
him,  in  which  case  they  return  saber  and,  at  the  close  of  the 
inspection,  resume  their  posts  in  front  of  the  company,  draw 
and  carry  saber. 

Having  inspected  the  lieutenants,  the  captain  proceeds  to  the 
right  of  the  company.  Each  man,  as  the  captain  approaches 
him,  executes  inspection  arms. 

The  captain  takes  the  piece,  grasping  it  with  his  right  hand 
just  above  the  rear  sight,  the  man  dropping  his  hands.  The 
captain  inspects  the  piece,  and,  with  the  hand  and  piece  in  the 
same  position  as  in  receiving  it,  hands  it  back  to  the  man,  who 
takes  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  balance  and  executes  order 
arms. 


112     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

As  the  captain  returns  the  piece  the  next  man  executes 
inspection  arms,  and  so  on  through  the  company. 

Should  the  piece  be  inspected  without  handling,  each  man 
executes  order  arms  as  soon  as  the  captain  passes  to  the  next 
man. 

The  inspection  is  from  right  to  left  in  front,  and  from  left  to 
right  in  rear,  of  each  rank  and  of  the  line  of  file  closers. 

When  approached  by  the  captain  the  first  sergeant  executes 
inspection  saber.  Enlisted  men  armed  with  the  pistol  execute 
inspection  pistol  by  drawing  the  pistol  from  the  holster  and  hold- 
ing it  diagonally  across  the  body,  barrel  up,  and  6  inches  In 
front  of  the  neck,  muzzle  pointing  up  and  to  the  left.  The 
pistol  is  returned  to  the  holster  as  soon  as  the  captain  passes. 

Upon  completion  of  the  inspection  the  captain  takes  post 
facing  to  the  left  in  front  of  the  right  guide  and  on  line  with 
the  lieutenants  and  commands :  1.  Close  ranks,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  the  lieutenants  resume  their  posts  in 
line :  the  rear  rank  closes  to  40  inches,  each  man  covering  his 
file  leader ;  the  file  closers  close  to  2  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

746.  If  the  company  is  dismissed,  rifles  are  put  away.  In 
quarters,  headdress  and  accouterments  are  removed  and  the  men 
stand  near  their  respective  bunks ;  in  camp  they  stand  covered, 
but  without  accourterments,  in  front  of  their  tents. 

If  the  personal  field  equipment  has  not  been  inspected  in  ranks 
and  its  inspection  in  quarters  or  camp  is  ordered,  each  man  will 
arrange  the  prescribed  articles  on  his  bunk,  if  in  quarters  or 
permanent  camp,  or  in  front  of  his  half  of  the  tent,  if  in  shelter 
tent  camp,  in  the  same  relative  order  as  directed  in  paragraph 
747. 

The  captain,  accompanied  by  the  lieutenants,  then  inspects  the 
quarters  or  camp.  The  first  sergeant  precedes  the  captain  and 
calls  the  men  to  attention  on  entering  each  squad  room  or  on 
approaching  the  tents;  the  men  stand  at  attention  but  do  not 
salute.     (C.  J.  D.  R.,  No.  16,  Aug.  25, 1916.) 

747.  (Edition  approved  Aug.  19, 1911,  and  edition  corrected  to 
November,  1913. )  If  the  inspection  is  to  include  an  examination 
of  the  equipment  while  in  ranks,  the  captain,  after  closing  ranks, 
causes  the  company  to  stack  arms,  to  march  backward  until  4 


COMPANY  INSPECTION.  118 

paces  in  rear  of  the  stacks  and  to  take  intervals.  He  then  com- 
mands :  1.  tTNSUNG  EQTTIPMENT,  2.  OPEN  PACKS. 

At  the  first  command,  each  man  unslings  his  equipment  and 
places  it  on  the  ground  at  his  feet,  haversack  to  the  front  end  of 
the  pack  1  foot  in  front  of  toes. 

At  the  second  command,  pack  carriers  are  unstrapped,  packs 
removed  and  unrolled,  the  longer  edge  of  the  pack  along  the 
lower  edge  of  the  cartridge  belt.  Each  man  exposes  shelter  tent 
pins,  removes  meat  can,  knife,  fork,  and  spoon  from  the  meat- 
can  pouch,  and  places  them  on  the  right  of  the  haversack,  knife, 
fork,  and  spoon  in  the  open  meat  can ;  removes  the  canteen  and 
cup  from  the  cover  and  places  them  on  the  left  side  of  the  haver- 
sack; unstraps  and  spreads  out  haversack  so  as  to  expose  its 
contents ;  folds  up  the  carrier  to  uncover  the  cartridge  pockets ; 
opens  same ;  unrolls  toilet  articles  and  places  them  on  the  outer 
flap  of  the  haversack ;  places  underwear  carried  in  pack  on  the 
left  half  of  the  open  pack,  with  round  fold  parallel  with  front 
edge  of  pack ;  opens  first-aid  pouch  and  exposes  contents  to  view. 
Special  articles  carried  by  individual  men,  such  as  flag  kit,  field 
glasses,  compass,  steel  tape,  notebook,  etc.,  will  be  arranged  on 
the  right  half  of  the  open  pack.  Each  man  then  resumes  the 
attention.  Plate  VI  shows  the  relative  position  of  all  articles 
except  underwear  and  special  articles. 

The  captain  then  passes  along  the  ranks  and  file  closers  as  be- 
fore, inspects  the  equipment,  returns  to  the  right,  and  com- 
mands: CLOSE  PACKS. 

Each  man  rolls  up  his  toilet  articles  and  underwear,  straps  up 
his  haversack  and  its  contents,  replaces  the  meat  can,  knife, 
fork,  and  spoon,  and  the  canteen  and  cup;  closes  cartridge 
pockets  and  first-aid  pouch;  restores  special  articles  to  their 
proper  receptacles;  rolls  up  and  replaces  pack  in  carrier;  and, 
leaving  the  equipment  in  its  position  on  the  ground,  resumes  the 
attention. 

All  equipments  being  packed,  the  captain  commands:  SLING 
EQUIPMENT. 

The  equipments  are  slung  and  belts  fastened. 

The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  assemble  and  take 
arms.    The  inspection  is  completed  as  already  explained. 


114     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

748.  Should  the  inspector  be  other  than  the  captain,  the 
latter,  after  commanding  front,  adds  REST,  and  faces  to  the 
front.  When  the  inspector  approaches,  the  captain  faces  to  the 
left,  brings  the  company  to  attention,  faces  to  the  front,  and 
salutes.  The  salute  acknowledged,  the  captain  carries  saber, 
to  the  left,  commands:  PREPARE  FOR  INSPECTION,  and 
again  faces  to  the  front. 

The  inspection  proceeds  as  before;  the  captain  returns  saber 
nnd  accompanies  the  inspector  as  soon  as  the  latter  passes  him. 

Section  8.  Manual  of  Tent  Pitching. 

SHELTER   TENTS. 

[For  Infantry  Equipment,  model  of  1910.] « 

782.  Beinc  in  line  or  in  column  of  platoons,  the  captain 
commands:  FORM  FOR  SHELTER  TENTS. 

The  officers,  first  sergeant,  and  guides  fall  out;  the  cooks 
form  a  file  on  the  flank  of  the  company  nearest  the  kitchen,  the 
first  sergeant  and  right  guide  fall  in,  forming  the  right  file  of 
the  company ;  blank  files  are  filled  by  the  file  closers  or  by 
men  taken  from  the  front  rank ;  the  remaining  guide,  or  guides, 
and  file  closers  form  on  a  convenient  flank. 

Before  forming  column  of  platoons,  preparatory  to  pitching 
tents,  the  company  may  be  redivided  into  two  or  more  platoons, 
regardless  of  the  size  of  each. 

793.  The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  take  intervals 
as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad  and  commands:  PITCH 
TENTS. 

At  the  command  pitch  tents,  each  man  steps  off  obliquely  to 
the  right  with  the  right  foot  and  lays  his  rifle  on  the  ground,  the 
butt  of  the  rifle  near  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  muzzle  to  the 
front,  barrel  to  the- left,  and  steps  back  into  his  place;  each 
front  rank  man  then  draws  his  bayonet  and  sticks  it  in  the 
ground  by  the  outside  of  the  right  heel. 

Equipments  are  unslung,  packs  opened,  shelter  half  and  pins 

ed :  each  man  then  spreads  his  shelter  half,  small  triangle 

rear,  flat  upon  the  ground  the  tent  is  to  occupy,  the  rear 

0  For  method  of  pitching  shelter  tents  with  old  model  Infantry  equip- 
ment or  old  model  shelter  tent,  ree  page  121. 


MANUAL  OF  TENT  PITCHING.  115 

rank  man's  half  on  the  right.  The  halves  are  then  buttoned  to- 
gether ;  the  guy  loops  at  both  ends  of  the  lower  half  are  passed 
through  the  buttonholes  provided  in  the  lower  and  upper  halves ; 
the  whipped  end  of  the  guy  rope  is  then  passed  through  both 
guy  loops  and  secured,  this  at  both  ends  of  the  tent.  Each 
front  rank  man  inserts  the  muzzle  of  his  rifle  under  the  front 
end  of  the  ridge  and  holds  the  rifle  upright,  sling  to  the  front, 
heel  of  butt  on  the  ground  beside  the  bayonet.  His  rear  rank 
man  pins  down  the  front  corners  of  the  tent  on  the  line  of  bayo- 
nets, stretching  the  tent  taut ;  he  then  inserts  a  pin  in  the  eye  of 
the  front  guy  rope  and  drives  the  pin  at  such  a  distance  in  front 
of  the  rifle  as  to  hold  the  rope  taut ;  both  men  go  to  the  rear  of 
the  tent,  each  pins  down  a  corner,  stretching  the  sides  and  rear 
of  the  tent  before  securing ;  the  rear  rank  man  then  inserts  an 
intrenching  tool,  or  a  bayonet  in  its  scabbard,  under  the  rear 
end  of  the  ridge  inside  the  tent,  the  front  rank  man  pegging 
down  the  end  of  the  rear  guy  ropes;  the  rest  of  the  pins  are 
then  driven  by  both  men,  the  rear  rank  man  working  on  the 
right. 

Note. — The  use  of  the  hand  ax  and  the  pick  mattock  in  organ- 
izations equipped  with  the  intrenching  tool  is  authorized  for  the 
purpose  of  driving  shelter  tent  pins.  The  use  of  the  bayonet  for 
that  purpose  is  prohibited. 

The  front  flaps  of  the"  tent  are  not  fastened  down,  but  thrown 
back  on  the  tent 

As  soon  as  the  tent  is  pitched  each  man  arranges  his  equip- 
ment and  the  contents  of  his  pack  in  the  tent  and  stands  at  at- 
tention in  front  of  his  own  half  on  line  with  the  front  guy- 
rope  pin.  • 

To  have  a  uniform  slope  when  the  tents  are  pitched,  the  guy 
ropes  should  all  be  of  the  same  length. 

In  shelter-tent  camps,  in  localities  where  suitable  material  is 
procurable,  tent  poles  may  be  improvised  and  used  in  lieu  of  rhr 
rifle  and  bayonet  or  intrenching  tool  as  supports  for  the  shelter 
tent. 

794.  When  the  pack  is  not  carried  the  company  is  forn. 
shelter  tents,  intervals  are  taken,  arms  are  laid  aside  or  on  the 
ground,  the  men  are  dismissed  and  proceed  to  the  wagon,  secure 
their  packs,  return  to  their  places,  and  pitch  tents  as  heretofore 
described. 


116     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

795.  Double  shelter  tents  may  be  pitched  by  first  pitching 
one  tent  as  heretofore  described,  then  pitching  a  second  tent 
against  the  opening  of  the  first,  using  one  rifle  to  support  both 
tents,  and  passing  the  front  guy  ropes  over  and  down  the  sides 
of  the  opposite  tents.  The  front  corner  of  one  tent  is  not  pegged 
down,  but  is  thrown  back  to  permit  an  opening  into  the  tent. 

SINGLE    SLEEPING   BAG. 

796.  Spread  the  poncho  on  the  ground,  buttoned  end  at  the 
feet,  buttoned  side  to  the  left ;  fold  the  blanket  once  across  its 
short  dimension  and  lay  it  on  the  poncho,  folded  side  along  the 
right  side  of  the  poncho ;  tie  the  blanket  together  along  the  left 
side  by  means  of  the  tapes  provided;  fold  the  left  half  of  the 
poncho  over  the  blanket  and  button  it  together  along  the  side 
and  bottom. 

DOUBLE  SLEEPING  BAG. 

797.  Spread  one  poncho  on  the  ground,  buttoned  end  at  the 
feet,  buttoned  side  to  the  left ;  spread  the  blankets  on  top  of  the 
poncho ;  tie  the  edges  of  the  blankets  together  with  the  tapes 
provided ;  spread  a  second  poncho  on  top  of  the  blankets,  but- 
toned end  at  the  feet,  buttoned  side  to  the  right ;  button  the  two 
ponchos  together  along  both  sides  and  across  the  end. 

TO  STRIKE  SHELTER  TENTS. 

793.  The  men  standing  in  front  of  their  tents:  STRIKE 
TENTS. 

Equipments  and  rifles  are  removed  from  the  tent;  the  tents 
are  lowered,  packs  made  up,  and  equipments  slung,  and  the 
men  stand  at  attention  in  the  places  originally  occupied  after 
taking  intervals. 

TO  PITCH  ALL  TYPES  OF  ARMY  TENTS,  EXCEPT  SHELTER  AND  CONICAL 
WALL  TENTS. 

799.  To  pitch  all  types  of  Army  tents,  except  shelter  and 
conical  wall  tents:  Mark  line  of  tents  by  driving  a  wall  pin  on 
the  spot  to  be  occupied  by  the  right  (or  left)  corner  of  each 
tent.     For  pyramidal  tents  the  interval  between  adjacent  pins 


MANUAL  OF  TENT  PITCHING.  117 

should  be  about  30  feet,  which  will  give  a  passage  of  2  feet 
between  tents.  Spread  tripod  on  the  ground  where  the  center 
of  tent  is  to  be,  if  tripod  is  used.  Spread  the  tent  on  the 
ground  to  be  occupied,  door  to  the  front,  and  place  the  right  (or 
left)  front  wall  loop  over  the  pin.  The  door  (or  doors,  if  more 
than  one)  being  fastened  and  held  together  at  the  bottom,  the 
left  (or  right)  corner  wall  loop  is  carried  to  the  left  (or 
right)  as  far  as  it  will  go  and  a  wall  pin  driven  through  it,  the 
pin  being  placed  in  line  with  the  right  (or  left)  corner  pins 
already  driven.  At  the  same  time  the  rear  corner  wall  loops 
are  pulled  to  the  rear  and  outward  so  that  the  rear  wall  of  the 
tent  is  stretched  to  complete  the  rectangle.  Wall  pins  are 
then  driven  through  these  loops.  Each  corner  pin  should  be 
directly  in  rear  of  the  corresponding  front  corner  pin,  making  a 
rectangle.  Unless  the  canvas  be  wet,  a  small  amount  of  slack 
should  be  allowed  before  the  corner  pins  are  driven.  According 
to  the  size  of  the  tent,  one  or  two  men,  crawling  under  the  tent 
if-necessary,  fit  each  pole  or  ridge  or  upright  into  the  ring  or 
ridge-pole  holes,  and  such  accessories  as  hood,  fly,  and  brace 
ropes  are  adjusted.  If  a  tripod  be  used  an  additional  man  will 
go  under  the  tent  to  adjust  it.  The  tent,  steadied  by  the  re- 
maining men,  one  at  each  corner  guy  rope,  will  then  be  raised. 
If  the  tent  is  a  ward  or  storage  type,  corner  poles  will  now  be 
placed  at  the  four  corners.  The  four  corner  guy  ropes  are  then 
placed  over  the  lower  notches  of  the  large  pins  driven  in  pro- 
longation of  the  diagonals  at  such  distance  as  to  hold  the  walls 
and  ends  of  the  tent  vertical  and  smooth  when  the  guy  ropes 
are  drawn  taut.  A  wall  pin  is  then  driven  through  each  re- 
maining wall  loop  and  a  large  pin  for  each  guy  rope  is  driven  in 
line  with  the  corner  guy  pins  already  driven.  The  guy  ropes  of 
the  tent  are  placed  over  the  lower  notches,  while  the  guy  ropes 
of  the  fly  are  placed  over  the  upper  notches,  and  are  then  drawn 
taut.  Brace  ropes  when  used,  are  then  secured  to  stakes  or 
pins  suitably  placed. 

800.  Rescinded. 

CONICAL  WALL  TENT. 

801.  Drive  the  door  pin  and  center  pin  S  feet  3  inches  apart. 
Using  the  hood  lines,  with  center  pin  as  center,  describe  two 


118     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

concentric  circles  with  radii  8  feet  3  inches  and  11  feet  3  inches. 
In  the  outer  circle  drive  two  door  guy  pins  3  feet  apart.  At 
intervals  of  about  3  feet  drive  the  other  guy  pins. 

In  other  respects  conical  tents  are  erected  practically  as  in 
the  case  of  pyramidal  tents. 

TO  STRIKE  COMMON,   WALL,   PYRAMIDAL,   AND  CONICAL  WALL  TENTS. 

802.  STRIKE  TENTS. 

The  men  first  remove  all  pins  except  those  of  the  four  corner 
guy  ropes,  or  the  four  quadrant  guy  ropes  in  the  case  of  the 
conical  wall  tent.  The  pins  are  neatly  piled  or  placed  in  their 
receptacle. 

( >ne  man  holds  each  guy,  and  when  the  ground  Is  clear  the 
tent  Is  lowered,  folded,  or  rolled  and  tied,  the  poles  or  tripod 
and  pole  fastened  together,  and  the  remaining  pins  collected. 

TO   FOLD   TENTS. 

803.  For  folding  common,  wall,  hospital,  and  storage  tents: 
Spread  the  rent  flat  on  the  ground,  folded  at  the  ridge  so  that 
bottoms  of  side  walls  are  even,  ends  of  tent  forming  triangles 
to  the  right  and  left;  fold  the  triangular  ends  of  the  tent  in 
toward  the  middle,  making  it  rectangular  in  shape;  fold  the  top 
over  about  0  inches;  fold  the  tent  in  two  by  carrying  the  top 
fold  over  clear  to  the  foot ;  fold  again  in  two  from  the  top  to  the 
foot;  throw  all  guys  on  tent  except  the  second  from  each  end; 
fold  the  ends  in  so  as  to  cover  about  two-thirds  of  the  second 

:  fold  the  left  end  over  to  meet  the  turned-in  edge  of  the 
right  end,  then  fold  the  right  end  over  the  top,  completing  the 
bundle;  tie  with  the  two  exposed  guys*. 

METHOD    OF   FOLDING   PYRAMIDAL   TENT. 

The  tent  is  thrown  toward  the  rear  and  the  back  wall  and 
roof  canvas  pulled  out  smooth.  This  may  be  mosfeasily  accom- 
plished by  leaving  the  rear-corner  wall  pins  in  the  ground  with 
the  wall  loops  attached,  one  man  at  each  rear-corner  guy,  and 


MANUAL  OF  TENT  PITCHING.  110 

one  holding  the  square  iron  in  a  perpendicular  position  and 
pulling  the  canvas  to  its  limit  -away  from  the  former  front  of 
.the  tent.  This  leaves  the  three  remaining  sides  of  the  tent  on 
top  of  the  rear  side,  with  the  door  side  in  the  middle. 

Now  carry  the  right-front  corner  over  and  lay  it  on  the  left- 
rear  corner.  Pull  all  canvas  smooth,  throw  guys  toward  square 
iron,  and  pull  bottom  edges  even.  Then  take  the  right-front 
corner  and  return  to  the  right,  covering  the  right-rear  corner. 
This  folds  the  right  side  of  the  tent  on  itself,  with  the  crease 
in  the  middle  and  under  the  front  side  of  tent. 

Next  carry  the  left-front  corner  to  the  right  and  back  as  de- 
scribed above;  this  when  completed  will  leave  the  front  and 
rear  sides  of  the  tent  lying  smooth  and  flat  and  the  two  side 
walls  folded  inward,  each  on  itself. 

Place  the  hood  in  the  square  iron  which  has  been  folded  down- 
ward toward  the  bottom  of  tiie  tent,  and  continue  to  fold  around 
the  square  iron  as  a  core,  pressing  all  folds  down  flat  and 
smooth  and  parallel  with  the  bottom  of  the  tent.  If  each  fold 
is  compactly  made  and  the  canvas  kept  smooth,  the  last  fold 
will  exactly  cover  the  lower  edge  of  the  canvas.  Lay  all  ex- 
posed guys  along  the  folded  canvas  except  the  two  on  the 
center  width,  which  should  be  pulled  out  and  away  from  bot- 
tom edge  to  their  extreme  length  for  tying.  Now,  beginning 
at  one  end,  fold  toward  the  center  on  the  first  seam  (that 
joining  the  first  and  second  widths)  and  fold  again  toward  the 
center,  so  that  the  already  folded  canvas  will  come  to  within 
about  3  inches  of  the  middle  width.  Then  fold  over  to  the 
opposite  edge  of  middle  width  of  canvas.  Then  begin  folding 
from  opposite  end,  folding  the  first  width  in  half,  then  making 
a  second  fold  to  come  within  about  4  or  5  inches  of  that  al- 
ready folded ;  turn  this  fold  entirely  over  that  already  folded. 
Take  the  exposed  guys  and  draw  them  taut  across  ench  other, 
turn  bundle  over  on  the  under  guy,  cross  guys  on  top  of  bundle, 
drawing  tight.  Turn  bundle  over  on  the  crossed  guys  and  tie 
lengthwise. 

When  properly  tied  and  pressed  together  this  will  make  a 
package  11  by  23  by  34  inches,  requiring  about  8,855  cubic 
inches  to  store  or  pack. 


120     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Stencil  the  organization  designation  on  the  lower  half  of  the 
middle  width  of  canvas  in  the  back  wall. 

War  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff, 

Washington,  December  2,  1911. 
Paragraphs  747,  792,  793,  794,  795,  796,  797,  and  798,  Infantry 
Drill  Regulations,  1911,  apply  only  to  troops  equipped  with  the 
Infantry  Equipment,  model  1910.  For  troops  equipped  under 
General  Orders,  No.  23,  War  Department,  1906,  and  orders 
amendatory  thereof,  the  alternative  paragraphs  published  here- 
with will  govern. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War : 

Leonard  Wood, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

747.  If  the  inspection  is  to  include  an  examination  of  the 
blanket  rolls  the  captain,  before  dismissing  the  company  and 
after  inspecting  the  file  closers,  directs  the  lieutenants  to  remain 
in  place,  closes  ranks,  stacks  arms,  dresses  the  company  back  to 
four  paces  from  the  stacks,  takes  intervals,  and  commands: 
1.  Unsling,  2.  PACKS,  3.  Open,  4.  PACKS. 

At  the  second  command  each  man  unslings  his  roll  and  places 
it  on  the  ground  at  his  feet,  rounded  end  to  the  front,  square 
end  of  shelter  half  to  the  right. 

At  the  fourth  command  the  rolls  are  untied,  laid  perpendicu- 
lar to  the  front,  with  the  triangular  end  of  the  shelter  half  to 
the  front,  opened,  and  unrolled  to  the  left;  each  man  prepares 
the  contents  of  his  roll  for  inspection  and  resumes  the  attention. 

The  captain  then  returns  saber,  passes  along  the  ranks  and 
file  closers  as  before,  inspects  the  rolls,  returns  to  the  right, 
draws  saber  and  commands:  1.  Close,  2.  PACKS. 

At  the  second  command  each  man,  with  his  shelter  half 
smoothly  spread  on  the  ground  with  buttons  up  and  triangular 
end  to  the  front,  folds  his  blanket  once  across  its  length  and 
places  it  upon  the  shelter  half,  fold  toward  the  bottom,  edge  one- 
half  inch  from  the  square  end,  the  same  amount  of  canvas  un- 
covered at  the  top  and  bottom.  He  then  places  the  parts  of  the 
pole  on  the  side  of  the  blanket  next  the  square  end  of  shelter 
half,  near  and  parallel  to  the  fold,  end  of  pole  about  6  inches 


MANUAL  OF  TENT  PITCHING.  121 

from  the  edge  of  the  blanket ;  nests  the  pins  similarly  near  the 
opposite  edge  of  the  blanket  and  distributes  the  other  articles 
carried  in  the  roll;  folds  the  triangular  end  and  then  the  ex- 
posed portion  of  the  bottom  of  the  shelter  half  over  the  blanket. 

The  two  men  in  each  file  roll  and  fasten  first  the  roll  of  the 
front  and  then  of  the  rear  rank  man.  The  file  closers  work  simi- 
larly two  and  two,  or  with  the  front  rank  man  of  a  blank  file. 
Each  pair  stands  on  the  folded  side,  rolls  the  blanket  roll  closely 
and  buckles  the  straps,  passing  the  end  of  the  strap  through 
both  keeper  and  buckle,  back  over  the  buckle  and  under  the 
keeper.  With  the  roll  so  lying  on  the  ground  that  the  edge  of 
the  shelter  half  can  just  be  seen  when  looking  vertically  down- 
ward one  end  is  bent  upward  and  over  to  meet  the  other,  a  clove 
hitch  is  taken  with  the  guy  rope  first  around  the  end  to  which 
it  is  attached  and  then  around  the  other  end,  adjusting  the 
length  of  rope  between  hitches  to  suit  the  wearer. 

As  soon  as  a  file  completes  its  two  rolls  each  man  places  his 
roll  in  the  position  it  was  in  after  being  unslung  and  stands  at 
attention. 

All  the  rolls  being  completed,  the  captain  commands :  1.  Sling, 
2.  PACKS. 

At  the  second  command  the  rolls  are  slung,  the  end  containing 
the  pole  to  the  rear. 

The  company  is  assembled,  takes  arms,  and  the  captain  com- 
pletes the  inspection  as  before. 

792.  Being  in  line  or  in  column  of  platoons,  the  captain  com- 
mands: FORM  FOR  SHELTER  TENTS. 

The  officers,  first  sergeant,  and  guides  fall  out;  the  cooks 
form  a  file  on  the  flank  of  the  company  nearest  the  kitchen,  the 
first  sergeant  and  right  guide  fall  in,  forming  the  right  file  of 
the  company;  blank  files  are  filled  by  the  file  closers  or, by  men 
taken  from  the  front  rank ;  the  remaining  guide  or  guides,  and 
file  closers  form  on  a  convenient  flank.  Before  forming  column 
of  platoons,  preparatory  to  pitching  tents,  the  company  may  be 
redivided  into  two  or  more  platoons,  regardless  of  the  size  of 
each. 

793.  The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  take  intervals 
as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  and  commands :  PITCH 
TENTS. 


1*2  EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

At  the  command  pitch  tents,  each  man  steps  off  obliquely  to 
the  right  with  the  right  foot  and  lays  his  rifle  on  the  ground,  the 
butt  of  the  rifle  near  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  muzzle  to  the 
front,  barrel  to  the  left,  and  steps  back  into  his  place ;  each  front 
rank  man  then  draws  his  bayonet  and  sticks  it  in  the  ground  by 
the  outside  of  the  right  heel.  All  unsling  and  open  the  blanket 
rolls  and  take  out  the  shelter  half,  poles,  and  pins.  Each  then 
spreads  his  shelter  half,  triangle  to  the  rear,  flat  upon  the  ground 
the  tent  is  to  occupy,  rear  rank  man's  half  on  the  right.  The 
halves  are  then  buttoned  together.  Each  front  rank  man  joins 
his  pole,  inserts  the  top  in  the  eyes  of  the  halves,  and  holds  the 
pole  upright  beside  the  bayonet  placed  in  the  ground;  his  rear 
rank  man,  using  the  pins  in  front,  pins  down  the  front  corners 
of  the  tent  on  the  line  of  bayonets,  stretching  the  canvas  taut ; 
he  then  inserts  a  pin  in  the  eye  of  the  rope  and  drives  the  pin 
at  such  distance  in  front  of  the  pole  as  to  hold  the  rope  taut. 
Both  then  go  to  the  rear  of  the  tent ;  the  rear  rank  man  adjusts 
the  pole  and  the  front  rank  man  drives  the  pins.  The  rest  of  the 
pins  are  then  driven  by  both  men,  the  rear  rank  man  working 
on  the  right. 

Note. — The  use  of  the  hand  ax  and  the  pick  mattock  in  organ- 
izations equipped  with  the  intrenching  tool  is  authorized  for  the 
purpose  of  driving  shelter  tent  pins.  The  use  of  the  bayonet  for 
that  purpose  is  prohibited. 

As  soon  as  the  tent  is  pitched  each  man  arranges  the  contents 
of  the  blanket  roll  in  the  tent  and  stands  at  attention  in  front 
of  his  own  half  on  line  with  the  front  guy-rope  pin. 

The  guy  ropes,  to  have  a  uniform  slope  when  the  shelter  tents 
are  pitched,  shouuld  all  be  of  the  same  length. 

794.  When  the  blanket  roll  is  not  carried,  intervals  are  taken 
as  described  above ;  the  position  of  the  front  pole  is  marked  with 
a  bayonet  and  equipments  are  laid  aside.  The  men  then  pro- 
ceed to  the  wagon,  secure  their  rolls,  return  to  their  places,  and 
pitch  tents  as  heretofore  described. 

795.  To  pitch  double  shelter  tent,  the  captain  gives  the  same 
commands  as  before,  except  Take  half  interval  is  given  instead 
of  Take  interval.  In  taking  interval  each  man  follows  the 
preceding  man  «t  2  paces.  The  captain  then  commands:  PITCH 
DOUBLE  TENTS. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  123 

The  first  sergeant  places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  right 
guide  and  with  him  pitches  a  single  shelter  tent. 

Only  the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  mark  the  line  with 
the  bayonet 

The  tent  is  formed  by  buttoning  together  the  square  ends  of 
two  single  tents.  Two  complete  tents,  except  one  pole,  are  used. 
Two  guy  ropes  are  used  at  each  end,  the  guy  pins  being  placed 
in  front  of  the  corner  pins. 

The  tents  are  pitched  by  numbers  1  and  2,  front  and  rear 
rank ;  and  by  numbers  3  and  4,  front  and  rear  rank ;  the  men 
falling  in  on  the  left  are  numbered,  counting  off  if  necessary. 

All  the  men  spread  their  shelter  halves  on  the  ground  the 
tent  is  to  occupy.  Those  of  the  front  rank  are  placed  with  the 
triangular  ends  to  the  front.  All  four  halves  are  then  buttoned 
together,  first  the  ridges  and  then  the  square  ends.  The  front 
corners  of  the  tent  are  pinned  by  the  front  rank  men,  the  odd 
number  holding  the  poles,  the  even  number  driving  the  pins. 
The  rear  rank  men  similarly  pin  the  rear  corners. 

While  the  odd  numbers  steady  the  poles,  each  even  number  of 
the  front  rank  takes  his  pole  and  enters  the  tent,  where,  assisted 
by  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank,  he  adjusts  the  pole  to  the 
center  eyes  of  the  shelter  halves  in  the  following  order  :  (1)  The 
lower  half  of  the  front  tent;  (2)  the  lower  half  of  the  rear 
tent;  (3)  the  upper  half  of  the  front  tent;  (4)  the  upper  half 
of  the  rear  tent.    The  guy  ropes  are  then  adjusted. 

The  tents  having  been  pitched,  the  triangular  ends  are  turned 
back,  contents  of  the  rolls  arranged,  and  the  men  stand  at 
attention,  each  opposite  his  own  shelter  half  and  facing  out 
from  the  tent. 

796.  Omitted. 

797.  Omitted. 

798.  Omitted. 

Section   9.  Manual  of  the   Bayonet. 

1.  The  infantry  soldier  relies  mainly  on  fire  action  to  disable 
the  enemy,  but  he  should  know  that  personal  combat  i^  <>n<>n 
necessary  to  obtain  success.  Therefore,  he  must  be  Instructed 
in  the  use  of  the  rifle  and  bayonet  in  hand-to-hand  encounters. 

2.  The  object  of  this  instruction  is  to  teach  the  soldier  how  to 
make  effective  use  of  the  rifle  and  bayonet  in  personal  combat; 
to  make  him  quick  and  proficient  in  handling  his  rifle;  to  give 


124     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

him  an  accurate  eye  and  a  steady  hand ;  and  to  give  him  con- 
fidence in  the  bayonet  in  offense  and  defense.  When  skill  in 
these  exercises  has  been  acquired,  the  rifle  will  still  remain  a 
most  formidable  weapon  at  close  quarters  should  the  bayonet 
be  lost  or  disabled. 

3.  Efficiency  of  organizations  in  bayonet  fighting  will  be 
judged  by  the  skill  shown  by  individuals  in  personal  combat. 
For  this  purpose  pairs  or  groups  of  opponents,  selected  at  ran- 
dom from  among  recruits  and  trained  soldiers,  should  engage 
In  assaults,  using  the  fencing  equipment  provided  for  the  pur- 
pose. 

4.  Officers  and  specially  selected  and  thoroughly  instructed 
noncommissioned  officers  will  act  as  instructors. 

5.  Instruction  in  bayonet  combat  should  begin  as  soon  as  the 
soldier  is  familiar  with  the  handling  of  his  rifle  and  will  pro- 
gvess,  as  far  as  practicable,  in  the  order  followed  in  the  text. 

6.  Instruction  is  ordinarily  given  on  even  ground;  but  prac- 
tice should  also  be  had  on  uneven  ground,  especially  in  the  at- 
tack and  defense  of  intrenchments. 

7.  These  exercises  will  not  be  used  as  a  calisthenic  drill. 

8.  The  principles  of  the  commands  are  the  same  as  those  given 
in  paragraphs  9,  15,  and  38,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations.  Inter- 
vals and  distances  will  be  taken  as  in  paragraphs  109  and  111, 
Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  except  that,  in  formations  for  bayo- 
net exercises,  the  men  should  be  at  least  four  paces  apart  in 
every  direction. 

9.  Before  requiring  soldiers  to  take  a  position  or  execute  a 
movement  for  the  first  time,  the  instructor  executes  the  same 
for  the  purpose  of  illustration,  after  which  he  requires  the  sol- 
diers to  execute  the  movement  individually.  Movements  pre- 
scribed in  this  manual  will  not  be  executed  in  cadence  as  the 
attempt  to  do  so  results  in  incomplete  execution  and  lack  of 
vigor.  Each  movement  will  be  executed  correctly  as  quickly 
as  possible  by  every  man.  As  soon  as  the  movements  are  ex- 
ecuted  accurately,  the  commands-are  given  rapidly,  as  expert- 
ness  with  the  bayonet  depends  chiefly  upon  quickness  of  motion. 

10.  The  exercises  will  be  interrupted  at  first  by  short  and  fre- 

rests.  The  rests  will  be  less  frequent  as  proficiency  is 
attained.  Fatigue  and  exhaustion  will  be  specially  guarded 
against,  as  they  prevent  proper  interest  being  taken   in   the 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  125 

exercises  and  delay  the  progress  of  the  instruction.  Rests  will 
be  given  from  the  position  of  order  arms  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed in  Infantry  Drill  Regulations. 

THE  BAYONET. 

NOMENCLATURE    AND    DESCRIPTION. 

11.  The  bayonet  is  a  cutting  and  thrusting  weapon  consisting 
of  three  principal  parts,  viz,  the  blade,  guard,  and  grip. 

12.  The  blade  has  the  following  parts:  Edge,  false  edge,  back, 
grooves,  point,  and  tang.  The  length  of  the  blade  from  guard 
to  point  is  16  inches,  the  edge  14.5  inches,  and  the  false  edge 
5.6  inches.  Length  of  the  rifle,  bayonet  fixed,  is  59.4  inches. 
The  weight  of  the  bayonet  is  1  pound;  weight  of  rifle  without 
bayonet  is  8.69  pounds.  The  center  of  gravity  of  the  rifle,  with 
bayonet  fixed,  is  just  in  front  of  the  rear  sight. 

Note. — The  use  of  the  hand  ax  and  the  pick  mattock  in  organi- 
zations equipped  with  the  intrenching  tool  is  authorized  for  the 
purpose  of  driving  shelter-tent  pins.  The  use  of  the  bayonet 
for  that  purpose  is  prohibited. 

I.  INSTRUCTION  WITHOUT  THE  EIFLE. 

13.  The  instructor  explains  the  importance  of  good  footwork 
and  impresses  on  the  men  the  fact  that  quickness  of  foot,  and 
suppleness  of  body  are  as  important  for  attack  and  defense  as 
is  the  ability  to  parry  and  deliver  a  strong  point  or  cut. 

14.  All  foot  movements  should  be  made  from  the  position  of 
guard.  As  far  as  practicable,  they  will  be  made  on  the-  balls  of 
the  feet  to  insure  quickness  and  agility.  No  hard  and  fast  rule 
can  be  laid  down. as  to  the  length  of  the  various  foot  movements  ; 
this  depends  entirely  on  the  situations  occurring  in  combat. 

15.  The  men  having  taken  intervals  or  distances,  the  in- 
structor commands: 

1.  Bayonet  exercise,  2.  GUARD. 

At  the  command  guard,  half  face  to  the  right,  carry  back  and 
place  the  right  foot  about  once  and  a  half  its  length  to  the  rear 
and  about  3  inches  to  the  right,  the  feet  forming  with  each 
other  an  angle  of  about  60°,  weight  of  the  body  balanced  equally 
on  the  balls  of  the  feet,  knees  slightly  bent,  palms  of  hands  on 
hips,  fingers  to  the  front,  thumbs  to  the  rear,  head  erect,  head 
and  eyes  straight  to  the  front. 


126     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

16.  To  resume  the  attention,  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION.  The 
men  take  the  position  of  the  soldier  and  fix  their  attention. 

17.  ADVANCE.  Advance  the  left  foot  quickly  about  once  its 
length,  follow  immediately  with  the  right  foot  the  same  dis- 
tance. 

18.  RETIRE.  Move  the  right  foot  quickly  to  the  rear  about 
once  its  length,  follow  immediately  with  the  left  foot  the  same 
distance. 

19.  1.  Front,  2.  PASS.  Place  the  right  foot  quickly  about  once 
its  length  in  front  of  the  left,  advance  the  left  foot  to  its  proper 
position  in  front  of  the  right. 

20.  1.  Rear,  2.  PASS.  Place  the  left  foot  quickly  about  once 
Its  length  in  rear  of  the  right,  retire  the  right  foot  to  its  proper 
position  in  rear  of  the  left. 

The  passes  are  used  to  get  quickly  within  striking  distance  or 
to  withdraw  quickly  therefrom. 

21.  1.  Right,  2.  STEP.  Step  to  the  right  with  the  right  foot 
about  once  its  length  and  place  the  left  foot  In  its  proper  rela- 
tive position. 

22.  1.  Left,  2.  STEP.  Step  to  the  left  with  the  left  foot  about 
once  its  length  and  place  the  right  foot  In  its  proper  relative 
position. 

These  steps  are  used  to  circle  around  an  enemy,  to  secure  a 
more  favorable  line  of  attack,  or  to  avoid  the  opponent's  attack. 
Better  ground  or  more  favorable  light  may  be  gained  in  this 
way.  In  bayonet  fencing  and  in  actual  combat  the  foot  first 
moved  in  stepping  to  the  right  or  left  is  the  one  which  at  the 
moment  bears  the  least  weight. 

II.  INSTRUCTION  WITH  THE  RIFLE. 

23.  The  commands  for  and  the  execution  of  the  foot  move- 
ments are  the  same  as  already  given  for  movements  without  the 
rifle. 

24.  The  men  having  taken  intervals  or  distances,  the  in- 
structor commands: 

1.  Bayonet  exercise,  2.  GUARD. 

At  the  second  command  take  the  position  of  guard  (see  par. 
15)  ;  at  the  same  time  throw  the  rifle  smartly  to  the  front,  grasp 


MANUAL  OP  THE  BAYONET.  127 

the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  just  below  the  lower  band,  fingers 
between  the  stock  and  gun  sling,  barrel  turned  slightly  to  the 
left,  the  right  hand  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock  about  6 
inches  in  front  of  the  right  hip,  elbows  free  from  the  body, 
bayonet  point  at  the  height  of  the  chin. 

25.  1.  Order,  2.   ARMS. 

Bring  the  right  foot  up  to  the  left  and  the  rifle  to  the  posi- 
tion of  order  arms,  at  the  same  time  resuming  the  position  of 
attention. 

26.  During  the  preliminary  instruction,  attacks  and  defenses 
will  be  executed  from  guard  until  proficiency  is  attained,  after 
which  they  may  be  executed  from  any  position  in  which  the 
rifle  is  held. 

.    ATTACKS. 

27.  1.  THRUST. 

Thrust  the  rifle  quickly  forward  to  the  full  length  of  the  left 
arm,  turning  the  barrel  to  the  left,  and  direct  the  point  of  the 
bayonet  at  the  point  to  be  attacked,  butt  covering  the  right  fore- 
arm. At  the  same  time  straighten  the  right  leg  vigorously  and 
throw  the  weight  of  the  body  forward  and  on  the  left  leg,  the 
ball  of  the  right  foot  always  on  the  ground.  Guard  is  resumed 
immediately  without  command. 

The  force  of  the  thrust  is  delivered  principally  with  the  right 
arm,  the  left  being  used  to  direct  the  bayonet.  The  points  at 
which  the  attack  should  be  directed  are,  in  order  of  their  im- 
portance, stomach,  chest,  head,  neck,  and  limbs. 

28.  1.  LTTNGE. 

Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  thrust,  except  that  the 
left  foot  is  carried  forward  about  twice  its  length.  The  left 
heel  must  always  be  in  rear  of  the  left  knee.  Guard  is  re- 
sumed immediately  without  command.  Guard  may  also  be  re- 
sumed by  advancing  the  right  foot  if  for  any  reason  it  is  de- 
sired to  hold  the  groundcgained  in  lunging.  In  the  latter  case 
the  preparatory  command  forward  will  be  given.  Each  method 
should  be  practiced. 

29.  1.  Butt,   2.   STRIKE. 

Straighten  right  arm  and  right  leg  vigorously  and  swing  butt 
of  rrfle  against  point  of  attack,  pivoting  the  rifle  in  the  left  hand 


128     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

at  about  the  height  of  the  left  shoulder,  allowing  the  bayonet 
to  pass  to  the  rear  on  the  left  side  of  the  head.     Guard  is 


resumed      without 
mand. 

The  points  of  attack  in 
their  order  of  importance 
are  head,  neck,  stomach, 
and  crotch. 

30.  1.  Cut,  2.  DOWN. 

Execute  a  quick  down- 
ward stroke,  edge  of 
bayonet  directed  at  point 
of  attack.  Guard  is  re- 
sumed without  command. 


Pas.  24. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 


129 


31.  1.  Cut,  2.  RIGHT   (LEFT). 

With  a  quick  extension  of  the  arms  execute  a  cut  to  the  right 
(left),  directing  the  edge  toward  the  point  attacked.  Guard  is 
resumed  without  command. 

The  cuts  are  especially  useful  against  the  head,  ,neck,  and 
hands  of  an  enemy.  In  executing  left  cut  it  should  be  remem- 
bered that  the  false,  or  back  edge,  is  only  5.6  inches  long.     The 


Par.  2S. 


cuts  can  be  executed  in  continuation  of  strokes,  thrusts,  lunges, 
and  parries. 

32.  To  direct  an  attack  to  the  right,  left,  or  rear  the  soldier 
will  change  front  as  quickly  as  possible  in  the  most  convenient 
manner,  for  example:  1.  To  the  right  rear,  2.  Cut,  3.  DOWN; 
1.  To  the  right,  2.  LUNGE;  1.  To  the  left,  2.  THRUST,  etc. 


130     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


Whenever  possible  the  impetus  gained  by  the  turning  move- 
ment of  the  body  should  be  thrown  into  the  attack.   In  general  this 
will  be  best  accomplished  by  turning  on  the  ball  of  the  right  foot. 
These  movements  constitute  a  change  of  front  in  which  the 

position  of  guard  is  re- 
sumed at  the  completion  of 
the  movement. 

33.  Good  judgment  of  dis- 
tance is  essential.  Accu- 
racy in  thrusting  and  lung- 
ing is  best  attained  by  prac- 
ticing these  attacks  against 
rings  or  other  convenient 
openings,  about  3  inches  in 
diameter,  suitably  suspend- 
ed at  desired  heights. 

34.  The  thrust  and  lunges 
at  rings  should  first  be 
practiced  by  endeavoring  to 
hit  the  opening  looked  at. 
This  should  be  followed  by 
directing  the  attack  against 
one  opening  while  looking 
at  another. 

35.  The  soldier  should 
also  experience  the  effect  of 
actual  resistance  offered  to 
the  bayonet  and  the  butt 
of  the  rifle  in  attacks.  This 
will  be  taught  by  practic- 
ing attacks  against  a 
dummy. 

36.  Dummies  should  be  constructed  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
permit  the  execution  of  attacks  without  injury  to  the  point  or" 
edge  of  the  bayonet  or  to  the  barrel  or  stock  of  the  rifle.  A 
suitable  dummy  can  be  made  from  pieces  of  rope  about  5  feet  in 
length  plaited  closely  together  into  a  cable  between  6  and  12 


Par.  29. 


Par.  36. 


inches  in  diameter.  Old 
rope  is  preferable.  Bags 
weighted  and  stuffed 
with  hay,  straw,  shav- 
ings, etc.,  are  also  suit- 
able. 

DEFENSES. 

37.  In  the  preliminary 
drills  in  the  defenses 
the  position  of  guard  is^ 
resumed,  by  command, 
after  each  parry.  When 
the  men  have  become 
proficient  the  instructor 
will  cause  them  to  re- 
sume the  position  of 
guard  instantly  without 
command  after  the  exe- 
cution of  each  parry. 

38.  1.  P  a  r  r  y,  2. 
RIGHT. 

Keeping  the  right 
hand  in  the  guard  posi- 
tion, move  the  rifle 
sharply  to  the  right 
with  the  left  arm,  so 
that  the  bayonet  point 
is  about  G  inches  to  the 
right. 

39.  1.  Parry,  2.  LEFT. 

Move  the  rifle  sharp- 
ly to  the  left  front  with 
both  hands  so  as  to 
cover  the  point  at- 
tacked. 

40.  1.  Parry,  2.  HIGH. 
Raise   the   rifle    with 

both  hands  high  enough 
to       clear       the       line 


Par. 


131 


132     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


of  vision,  barrel  downward,  point  of  the  bayonet  to  the  left 
front. 

Winn  necessary  to  raise  the  rifle  well  above  the  head,  it  may 
be  supported  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand. 


Pae.  40. 


Par. 


This  position  will  be  necessary  against  attacks  from  higher  ele- 
vations, such  as  men  mounted  or  on  top  of  parapets. 

41.  1.  Low  parry,  2.  RIGHT   (LEFT). 

Carry  the  point  of  the  bayonet  down  until  it  is  at  the  height 
of  the  knee,  moving  the  point  of  the  bayonet  sufficiently  to  the 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 


133 


right   (left)  to  keep  the  opponent's  attacks  clear  of  the  point 
threatened. 

These  parries  are  rarely  used,  as  an  attack  below  the  waist 
leaves  the  head  and  body  exposed. 


Par.  41. 


Pah.  44. 


42.  Parries  must  not  be  too  wide  or  sweeping,  but  sharp, 
short  motions,  finished  with  a  jerk  or  quick  catch.  The  hands 
should,  as  far  as  possible,  be  kept  in  the  line  of  attack.  Parries 
against  butt  strike  are  made  by  quickly  moving  the  guard  so  as 
to  cover  the  point  attacked. 


1S4     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


43.  To  provide  against  attack  from  the  right,  left,  or  rear  the 
soldier  will  change  front  as  quickly  as  possible  in  the  most  con^ 
veuient  manner;  for  example:  1.  To  the  left  rear,  2.  Parry, 
3.  HIGH;  J.  To  the  right,  2.  Parry.  3.  RIGHT,  etc. 

These  movements  constitute  a  change  of  front  in  which  the 

position  of  guard  is  resumed 
at  the  completion  of  the  move- 
ment. 

In  changing  front  for  the 
purpose  of  attack  or  defense, 
if  there  is  danger  of  wounding 
a  comrade,  the  rifle  should 
first  be  brought  to  a  vertical 
position. 

III.   INSTRUCTION  WITHOUT 
THE  BAYONET. 

44.  1.  Club  rifle,  2.  SWING. 
Being  at  order  arms,  at  the 
preparatory  command  quickly 
raise   and .  turn   the   rifle,    re- 
grasping   it   with   both   hands 
between    the    rear    sight    and 
muzzle,   barrel   down,  thumbs 
arourfd  the  stock  and  toward 
the   butt;    at    the   same  time 
raise  the  rifle  above  the  shoul- 
der  farthest   from   the   oppo- 
nent, butt  elevated  and  to  the 
rear,  elbows  slightly  bent  and 
knees  straight.     Each  individ- 
ual takes  such  position  of  the 
feet,  shoulders,  and  hands  as 
best  accords  with  his  natural 
Lty.     SWING.     Tighten  the  grasp  of  the  hands  and  swing, 
the  rifle  to  the  front  and  downward,  directing  it  at  the  head  of 
it,  and  immediately  return  to  the  position  of  club  rifle 
ing  the  swing  of  the  rifle  downward  and  to  the  rear. 
Repeat  by  the  command,  SWING. 


Par.  44. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  135 

The  rifle  should  be  swung  with  sufficient  force  to  break 
through  any  guard  or  parry  that  may  be  interposed. 

Being  at  club  rifle,  order  arms  is  resumed  by  command. 

The  use  of  this  attack  against  dummies  or  in  fencing  is  pro- 
hibited. 

45.  The  position  of  club  rifle  may  be  taken  from  any  position 
of  the  rifle  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Arms.  It  will  not  be 
taken  in  personal  combat  unless  the  emergency  is  such  as  to 
preclude  the  use  of  the  bayonet. 

IV.  COMBINED  MOVEMENTS. 

46.  The  purpose  of  combined  movements  is  to  develop  more 
vigorous  attacks  and  more  effective  defenses  than  are  obtained 
by  the  single  movements;  to  develop  skill  in  passing  from  at- 
tack to  defense  and  the  reverse.  Every  movement  to  the  front 
should  be  accompanied  by  an  attack,  which  is  increased  in 
effectiveness  by  the  forward  movement  of  the  body.  Every 
movement  to  the  rear  should  ordinarily  be  accompanied  by  a 
parry  and  should  always  be  followed  by  an  attack.  Movements 
to  the  right  or  left  may  be  accompanied  by  attacks  or  defenses. 

47.  Not  more  than  three  movements  will  be  used  in  any  com- 
bination. The  instructor  should  first  indicate  the  number  of 
movements  that  are  to  be  combined  as  two  movements  or  three 
movements.  The  execution  is  determined  by  one  command  of 
execution,  and  the  position  of  guard  is  taken  upon  the  comple- 
tion of  the  last  movement  only. 

EXAMPLES. 

Front  pass  and  LUNGE. 
Eight  step  and  THRUST. 
Left  step  and  low  parry  RIGHT. 
Bear  pass,  parry  left  and  LUNGE. 
Lunge  and  cut  RIGHT. 
Parry  right  and  parry  HIGH. 
Butt  strike  and  cut  DOWN. 
Thrust  and  parry  HIGH. 
Parry  high  and  LUNGE. 
Advance,  thrust  and  cut  RIGHT. 


136     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Right  step,  parry  left  and  cut  Down. 

To  the  left,  butt  strike  and  cut  DOWN. 

To  the  right  rear,  cut  down  and  butt  STRIKE. 

48.  Attacks  against  dummies  will  be  practiced.  The  approach 
will  be  made  against  the  dummies  both  in  quick  time  and 
double  time. 

V.  PRACTICAL  BAYONET  COMBAT. 

49.  The  principles  of  practical  bayonet  combat  should  be 
taught  as  far  as  possible  during  the  progress  of  instruction  in 
bayonet  exercises. 

50.  The  soldier  must  be  continually  impressed  with  the  ex- 
treme importance  of  the  offensive  due  to  its  moral  effect.  Should 
an  attack  fail,  it  should  be  followed  immediately  by  another 
attack  before  the  opponent  has  an  opportunity  to  assume  the 
offensive.  Keep  the  opponent  on  the  defensive.  If,  due  to  cir- 
cumstances, it  is  necessary  to  take  the  defensive,  constantly 
watch  for  an  opportunity  to  assume  the  offensive  and  take  im- 
mediate advantage  of  it. 

51.  Observe  the  ground  with  a  view  to  obtaining  the  best  foot- 
ing. Time  for  this  will  generally  be  too  limited  to  permit  more 
than  a  single  hasty  glance. 

52.  In  personal  combat  watch  the  opponent's  eyes  if  they  can 
be  plainly  seen,  and  do  not  fix  the  eyes  on  his  weapon  nor  upon 
the  point  of  your  attack.  If  his  eyes  can  not  be  plainly  seen, 
as  in  night  attacks,  watch  the  movements  of  his  weapon  and 
of  his  body. 

53.  Keep  the  body  well  covered  and  deliver  attacks  vigorously. 
Tbe  point  of  the  'bayonet  should  always  be  kept  as  nearly  as 
possible  in  the  line  of  attack.  The  less  the  rifle  is  moved  up- 
ward/ downward,  to  the  right,  or  to  the  left,  the  better  prepared 
the  soldier  is  for  attack  or  defense. 

54.  Constantly -watch  for  a  chance  to  attack  the  opponent's 
left  hand.  His  position  of  guard'will  not  differ  materially  from 
that  described  in  paragraph  24.  If  his  bayonet  is  without  a 
cutting  edge,  he  will  be  at  a  great  disadvantage. 

55.  The  butt  is  used  for  close  and  sudden  attacks.  It  is  par- 
ticularly useful  in  riot  duty.  From  the  position  of  port  arms  a 
sentry  can  strike  a  severe  blow  with  the  butt  of  the  rifle. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  187 

56.  Against  a  man  on  foot,  armed  with  a  sword,  be  careful 
that  the  muzzle  of  the  rifle  is  not  grasped.  All  the  swordsman's 
energies  will  be  directed  toward  getting  past  the  bayonet.  At- 
tack him  with  short,  stabbing  thrusts,  and  keep  him  beyond 
striking  distance  of  his  weapon. 

57.  The  adversary  may  attempt  a  greater  extension  in  the 
thrust  and  lunge  by  quitting  the  grasp  of  his  piece  with  the  left 
hand  and  advancing  the  right  as  far  as  possible.  When  this 
is  done,  a  sharp  parry  may  cause  him  to  lose-  control  of  his 

I   rifle,  leaving  him  exposed  to  a  counter  attaek,  which  should 
j   follow  promptly. 

58.  Against  odds  a  small  number  of  men  can  fight  to  best 

[   advantage  by  grouping  themselves  so  as  to  prevent  their  being 
attacked  from  behind. 

59.  In  fighting  a  mounted  man  armed  with  a  saber  every 
effort  must  be  made  to  get  on  his  near  or  left  side,  because  here 
his  reach  is  much  shorter  and  his  parries  much  weaker.  If  not 
possible  to  disable  such  an  enemy,  attack  his  horse  and  then 
renew  the  attack  on  the  horseman. 

60.  In  receiving  night  attacks  the  assailant's  movements  can 
be  best  observed  from  the  kneeling  or  prone  position,  as  his 
approach  generally  brings  him  against  the  sky  line.  When  he 
arrives  within  attacking  distance  rise  quickly  and  lunge  well 
forward  at  the  middle  of  his  body. 

VI.  FENCING  EXERCISES. 

61.  Fencing  exercises  in  two  lines  consist  of  combinations  of 
thrusts,  parries,  and  foot  movements  executed  at  command  or 
at  will,  the  opponent  replying  with  suitable  parries  and  returns. 

62.  The  instructor  will  inspect  the  entire  fencing  equipment 
before  the  exercise  begins  and  assure  himself  that  everything  is 
in  such  condition  as  will  prevent  accidents. 

63.  The  men  equip  themselves  and  form  in  two  lines  at  the 
order,  facing  each  other,  with  intervals  of  about  4  paces  between 
files  and  a  distance  of  about  2  paces  between  lines.  One  line 
is  designated  as  number  1 ;  the  other,  number  2.  Also  as  attack 
and  defense. 

64.  The  opponents  being  at  the  order  facing  each  other,  the 
instructor  commands:  SALUTE. 


138     EXTRACTS  PROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Each  man,  with  eyes  on  his  opponent,  carries  the  left  hand 
smartly  to  the  right  side,  palm  of  the  hand  clown,  thumb  and 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  forearm  horizontal,  forefinger 
touching  the  bayonet.  (Two.)  Drop  the  arm  smartly  by  the 
side. 

This  salute  is  the  fencing  salute. 

All  fencing  exercises  and  all  fencing  at  will  between  indi- 
viduals will  begin  and  terminate  with  the  formal-  courtesy  of 
the  fencing  salute. 

65.  After  the  fencing  salute  has  been  rendered  the  instructor 
commands:  1.  Fencing  exercise,  2.  GUARD. 

At  the  command  guard  each  man  comes  to  the  position  of 
guard,  heretofore  defined,  bayonets  crossed,  each  man's  bayonet 
bearing  lightly  to  the  right  against  the  corresponding  portion 
of  the  opponent's  bayonet.  This  position  is  known  as  the 
engage  or  engage  right. 

66.  Being  at  the  engage  right:  ENGAGE  LEFT. 

The  attack  drops  the  point  of  his  bayonet  quickly  until  clear 
of  his  opponent's  rifle  and  describes  a  semicircle  with  it  upward 
and  to  the  right ;  bayonets  are  crossed  similarly  as  in  the  en- 
gaged position,  each  man's  bayonet  bearing  lightly  to  the  left 
against  the  corresponding  portion  of  the  opponent's  bayonet. 

67.  Being  at  engage  left:   ENGAGE  RIGHT. 

The  attack  quickly  drops  the  point  of  his  bayonet  until  clear 
of  his  opponent's  rifle  and  describes  a  semicircle  with  it  upward 
and  to  the  left  and  engages. 

68.  Being  engaged:  ENGAGE  LEFT  AND  RIGHT. 

The  attack  engage  left  and  then  immediately  engages  right. 

69.  Being  engaged  left:  ENGAGE  RIGHT  AND  LEFT. 

The  attack  engages  right  and  then  immediately  engages  left. 

70.  1.  Number  one,  ENGAGE  RIGHT  (LEFT) ;  2.  Number  two, 
COUNTER. 

Number  one  executes  the  movement  ordered,  as  above;  num- 
ber two  quickly  drops  the  point  of  his  bayonet  and  circles  it 
upward  to  the  original  position. 

71.  In  all  fencing  while  maintaining  the  pressure  in  the  en- 
gage a  certain  freedom  of  motion  of  the  rifle  is  allowable,  con- 
sisting of  the  play,  or  up-and-down  motion,  of  one  bayonet 
against  the  other.  This  is  necessary  to  prevent  the  opponent 
from  divining  the  intended  attack.     It  also  prevents  his  using 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  139 

the  point  of  contact  as  a  pivot  for  his  assaults.  In  changing 
from  one  engage  to  the  other  the  movement  is  controlled  by  the 
left  hand,  the  right  remaining  stationary. 

72.  After  some  exercise  in-  engage,  engage  left,  and  counter, 
exercises  will  be  given  in  the  assaults. 

ASSAULTS. 

73.  The  part  of  the  body  to  be  attacked  will  be  designated  by 
name,  as  head,  neck,  chest,  stomach,  legs.  No  attacks  will  be 
made  below  the  knees.  The  commands  are  given  and  the  move- 
ments for  each  line  are  first  explained  thoroughly  by  the  in- 
structor; the  execution  begins  at  the  command  assault.  Num- 
ber one  executes  the  attack,  and  number  two  parries;  conversely, 
at  command,  number  two  attacks,  and  number  one  parries. 

74.  For  convenience  in  instruction  assaults  are  divided  into 
simple  attacks,  counter  attacks,  attacks  on  the  rifle,  and  feints. 

SIMPLE  ATTACKS. 

75.  Success  in  these  attacks  depends  on  quickness  of  move- 
ment. There  are  three  simple  attacks — the  straight,  the  disen- 
gagement, and  the  counter  disengagement.  They  are  not  pre- 
ceded by  a  feint. 

76.  In  the  straight  the  bayonet  is  directed  straight  at  an  open- 
ing from  the  engaged  position.  Contact  with  the  opponent's 
rifle  may  or  may  not  be  abandoned  while  making  it.  If  the 
opening  be  high  or  low,  contact  with  the  rifle  will  usually  be 
abandoned  on  commencing  the  attack.  If  the  opening  be  near 
his  guard,  the  light  pressure  used  in  the  engage  may  be  con- 
tinued in  the  attack. 

Example :  Being  at  the  engage  right,  1.  Number  one,  at  neck 
(head,  chest,  right  leg,  etc.),  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry 
right;  3.  ASSAULT. 

77.  In  the  disengagement  contact  with  the  opponent's  rifle  is 
abandoned  and  the  point  of  the  bayonet  is  circled  under  or  over 
his  bayonet  or  .rifle  and  directed  into  the  opening  attacked.  This 
attack  is  delivered  by  one  continuous  spiral  movement  of  the 
bayonet  from  the  moment  contact  is  abandoned. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage  right,  1.  Number  one,  at  stom- 
ach (left  chest,  left  leg,  etc.),  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry 
left  (etc.)  ;  3.  ASSAULT. 


140      EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

78.  In  the  counter  disengagement  a  swift  attack  is  made  into 
the  opening  disclosed  while  the  opponent  is  attempting  to  change 
the  engagement  of  his  rifle.  It  is  delivered  by  one  continuous 
spiral  movement  of  the  bayonet  into  the  opening. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage  right,  1.  Number  two,  engage 
left;  2.  Number  one,  at  chest,  thrust;  3.  Number  two,  parry 
left;   4.  ASSAULT. 

Number  two  initiates  the  movement,  number  one  thrusts  as 
soon  as  the  opening  is  made,  and  number  two  then  attempts  to 
parry. 

79.  A  counter  attack  or  return  is  one  made  instantly  after  or 
in  continuation  of  a  parry.  The  parry  should  be  as  narrow  as 
possible.  This  makes  it  more  difficult  for  the  opponent  to  re- 
cover and  counter  parry.  The  counter  attack  should  also  be 
made  at  or  just  before  the  full  extension  of  the  opponent's 
attack,  as  when  it  is  so  made  a  simple  extension  of  the  arms 
will  generally  be  sufficient  to  reach  the  opponent's  body. 

Example:  Being  at  engage,  1.  Number  two,  at  chest  lunge; 
2.  Number  one,  parry  right  and  at  stomach  (chest,  head,  etc.), 
thrust;   3.  ASSAULT. 

ATTACKS  ON  THE  RIFLE. 

80.  These  movements  are  made  for  the  purpose  of  forcing  or 
disclosing  an  opening  into  which  an  attack  can  be  made.  They 
are  the  press,  the  beat,  and  the  twist. 

81.  In  the  press  the  attack  quickly  presses  against  the  oppo- 
nent's bayonet  or  rifle  with  his  own  and  continues  the  pressure 
as  the  attack  is  delivered. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  l.^Number  one,  press,  and  at 
chest,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  right;  3.  ASSAULT. 

82.  The  attack  by  disengagement  is  particularly  effective  fol- 
lowing the  press. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one.  press,  and  at 
stomach,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  low  parry  left;  3.  ASSAULT. 

83.  The  beat  is  an  attack  in  which  a  sharp  blow  is  struck 
against  the  opponent's  rifle  for  the  purpose  of  forcing  him  to 
expose  an  opening  into  which  an  attack  immediately  follows. 
It  is  used  when  there  is  but  slight  opposition  or  no  contact  of 
rifles. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  141 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  beat,  and  at 
stomach  (chest,  etc.),  thrust;  2.  Number  two.  parry  left;  3.  AS- 
SAULT. 

84.  In  the  twist  the  rifle  is  crossed  over  the  opponent's  rifle 
or  bayonet  and  his  bayonet  forced  downward  with  a  circular 
motion  and  a  straight  attack  made  into  the  opening.  It  requires 
superior  strength  on  the  part  of  the  attack. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  twist,  and  at 
stomach,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  low  parry  left;  3.  ASSAULT. 

FEINTS. 

85.  Feints  are  movements  which  threaten  or  simulate  attacks 
and  are  made  with  a  view  to  inducing  an  opening  or  parry  that 
exposes  the  desired  point  of  attack.  They  are  either  single  or 
double,  according  to  the  number  of  such  movements  made  by 
the  attack. 

86.  In  order  that  the  attack  may  be  changed  quickly,  as  little 
force  as  possible  is  put  into  a  feint. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  feint  head 
thrust;  at  stomach,  lunge;  2.  Number  two,  parry  right  and  low 
parry   right;    3.    ASSAULT. 

Number  one  executes  the  feint  and  then  the  attack.  Number 
two  executes  both  parries. 

87.  In  double  feints  first  one  part  of  the  body  and  then  an- 
other is  threatened  and  a  third  attacked. 

Example :  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  feint  straight 
thrust  at  chest ;  disengagement  at  chest ;  at  stomach,  lunge ; 
2.  Number  two,  parry  right,  parry  left,  and  low  parry  left;  3. 
ASSAULT. 

88.  An  opening  may  be  offered  or  procured  by  opposition,  as 
in  the  press  or  beat. 

89.  In  fencing  exercises  every  feint  should  at  first  be  parried. 
When  the  defense  is  able  to  judge  or  divine  the  character  of 
the  attack  the  feint  is  not  necessarily  parried,  but  may  be  nulli- 
fied by  a  counter  feint. 

90.  A  counter  feint  is  a  feint  following  the  opponent's  feint  or 
following  a  parry  of  his  attack  and  generally  occurs  in  com- 
bined movements. 


142     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 
COMBINED  MOVEMENTS. 

91.  When  the  men  have  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  the 
various  foot  movements,  parries,  guards,  attacks,  feints,  etc., 
the  instructor  combines  several  of  them  and  gives  the  commands 
in  quick  succession,  increasing  the  rapidity  and  number  of  move- 
ments as  the  men  become  more  skillful.  Opponents  will  be 
changed  frequently. 

1.  Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  by  disen- 
gagement at  chest,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  left,  right  step 
(left  foot  first),  and  lunge;  3.  ASSAULT. 

2.  Example:  Being  at  engage  left,  1.  Number  one,  press  and 
lunge;  2.  Number  two,  parry  right,  left  step,  and  thrust;  3. 
ASSAULT. 

3.  Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  by  disen- 
gagement at  chest,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  left,  front  pass, 
and  at  head  butt  strike;  3.  Number  one,  right  step;  4.  AS- 
SAULT. 

92.  Examples  1  and  2  are  typical  of  movements  known  as 
cross  counters,  and  example  No.  3  of  movements  known  as  close 
counters. 

93.  A  chancery  is  an  attack  by  means  of  which  the  opponent  is 
disarmed,  which  causes  him  to  lose  control  of  his  rifle,  or  which 
disables  his  weapon. 

94.  When  the  different  combinations  are  executed  with  suffi- 
cient skill  the  instructor  will  devise  series  of  movements  to  be 
memorized  and  executed  at  the  command  assault.  The  accuracy 
and  celerity  of  the  movements  will  be  carefully  watched  by  the 
instructor,  with  a  view  to  the  correction  of  faulty  execution. 

95.  It  is  not  intended  to  restrict  the  number  of  movements, 
but  to  leave  to  the  discretion  of  company  commanders  and  the 
ingenuity  of  instructors  the  selection  of  such  other  exercises  as 
accord  with  the  object  of  the  drill. 

VII.  FENCING  AT  WILL. 

96.  As  satisfactory  progress  is  made  the  instructor  will  pro- 
ceed to  the  exercises  at  will,  by  which  is  meant  assaults  between 
two  men,  each  endeavoring  to  hit  the  other  and  to  avoid  being 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  148 

hit  himself.     Fencing  at  will  should  not  be  allowed  to  degenerate 
into  random  attacks  and  defenses. 

97.  The  instructor  can  supervise  but  one  pair  of  combatants 
at  a  time.  Frequent  changes  should  be  made  so  that  the  men 
may  learn  different  methods  of  attack  and  defense  from  each 
other. 

98.  The  contest  should  begin  with  simple,  careful  movements, 
with  a  view  to  forming  a  correct  opinion  of  the  adversary; 
afterwards  everything  will  depend  on  coolness,  rapid  and  cor- 
rect execution  of  the  movements,  and  quick  perception  of  the 
adversary's  intentions. 

99.  Continual  retreat  from  the  adversary's  attack  and  fre- 
quent dodging  to  escape  attacks  should  be  avoided.  The  offen- 
sive should  be  continually  encouraged. 

100.  In  fencing  at  will,  when  no  commands  are  given,  oppo- 
nents facing  each  other  at  the  position  of  order  arms,  salute. 
They  then  immediately  and  simultaneously  assume  the  position 
of  guard  rifles  engaged.  Neither  man  may  take  the  position 
of  guard  before  his  opponent  has  completed  his  salute.  The 
choice  of  position  is  decided  before  the  salute. 

101.  The  opponents  being  about  two  paces  apart  and  the  fenc- 
ing salute  having  been  rendered,  the  instructor  commands  1.  At 
will,  2.  ASSAULT,  after  which  either  party  has  the  right  to 
attack.  To  interrupt  the  contest  the  instructor  will  command 
HALT,  at  which  the  combatants  will  immediately  come  to  the 
order.  To  terminate  the  contest,  the  instructor  will  command, 
1.  Halt,  2.  SALUTE,  at  which  the  combatants  will  immediately 
come  to  the  order,  salute,  and  remove  their  masks. 

102.  When  men  have  acquired  confidence  in  fencing  at  will, 
one  opponent  should  be  required  to  advance  upon  the  other  in 
quick  time  at  charge  bayonet,  from  a  distance  not  to  exceed  10 
yards,  and  deliver  an  attack.  As  soon  as  -a  hit  is  made  by 
either  opponent  the  instructor  commands,  HALT,  and  the  assault 
terminates.  Opponents  alternate  in  assaulting.  The  assailant 
is  likewise  required  to  advance  at  double  time  from  a  distance 
not  exceeding  20  yards  and  at  a  run  from  a  distance  not  exceed- 
ing 30  yards. 

103.  The  instructor  will  closely  observe  the  contest  and  decide 
doubtful  points.    He  will  at  once  stop  the  contest  upon  the 


144     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

slightest  indication  of  temper.  After  conclusion  of  the  combat 
life  will  comment  on  the  action  of  both  parties,  point  out  errors 
and  deficiencies  and  explain  how  they  may  be  avoided  in  the 
future. 

104.  As  additional  instruction,  the  men  may  be  permitted  to 
wield  the  rifle  left  handed,  that  is  on  the  left  side  of  the  body, 


Par.  104. 


left  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock.  Many  men  will  be  able  to 
ush  this  method  to  advantage.  It  is  also  of  value  in  case  the 
left  hand  is  wounded. 

105.  After  men  have  fenced  in  pairs,  practice  should  be  given 
In  fencing  between  groups,  equally  and  unequally  divided. 
When  practicable,  intrenchments  will  be  used  in  fencing  of  this 
character. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  145 

In  group  fencing  it  will  be  necessary  to  have  a  sufficient  num- 
ber of  umpires  to  decide  hits.  An  individual  receiving  a  hit  is 
withdrawn  at  once  from  the  bout,  which  is  decided  in  favor  of 
the  group  having  the  numerical  superiority  at  the  end.  The 
fencing  salute  is  not  required  in  group  fencing. 

RULES  FOH  FENCING  AT    WILL.      • 

106.  1.  Hits  on  the  legs  below  the  knees  will  not  be  counted. 
No  hit  counts  unless,  in  the  opinion  of  the  instructor,  it  has 
sufficient  force  to  disable. 

2.  Upon  receiving  a  hit,  call  out  "  hit." 

3.  After  receiving  a  fair  hit  a  counter  attack  is  not  permitted. 
A  position  of  engage  is  taken. 

4.  A  second  or  third  hit  in  a  combined  attack  will  be  counted 
only  when  the  first  hit  was  not  called. 

5.  When  it  is  necessary  to  stop  tl^e  contest — for  example,  be- 
cause of  breaking  of  weapons  or  displacement  of  means  of  pro- 
tection— take  the  position  of  the  order. 

6.  When  it  is  necessary  to  suspend  the  assault  for  any  cause, 
it  will  not  be  resumed  until  the  adversary  is  ready  and  in  con- 
dition to  defend  himself. 

7.  Attacks  directed  at  the  crotch  are  prohibited  in  fencing. 

8.  Stepping  out  of  bounds,  when  established,"  counts  as  a  hit. 

SUGGESTIONS  FOE  FENCING   AT  WILL. 

107.  When  engaging  in  an  assault,  first  study  the  adversary's 
position  and  proceed  by  false  attacks,  executed  with  speed,  to 
discover,  if  possible,  his  instinctive  parries.  In  order  to  draw 
the  adversary  out  and  induce  him  to  expose  that  part  of  the 
body  at  which  the  attack  is  to  be  made,  it  is  advisable  to  simu- 
late an  attack  by  a  feint  and  then  make  the  real  attack. 

108.  Return  attacks  should  be  frequently  practiced,  as  they 
are  difficult  to  parry,  and  the  opponent  is  within  easier  reach 
and  more  exposed.  The  return  can  be  made  a  continuation  of 
the  parry,  as  there  is  no  previous  warning  of  its  delivery,  al- 
though it  should  always  be  expected.  Returns  are  made  with- 
out lunging  if  the  adversary  can  be  reached  by  thrusts  or  cuts. 


146     EXTRACTS  FROM  INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

109.  Endeavor  to  overcome  the  tendency  to  make  a  return 
without  knowing  where  it  will  hit.  Making  returns  blindly  is 
a  bad  habit  and  leads  to  instinctive  returns — that  is,  habitual 
returns  with  certain  attacks  from  certain  parries— a  fault  which 
the  skilled  opponent  will  soon  discover. 

110.  Do  not  draw  the  rifle  back  preparatory  to  tnrusting  and 
lunging. 

111.  The  purpose  of  fencing  at  will  is  to  teach  the  soldier  as 
many  forms  of  simple,  effective  attacks  and  defenses  as  pos- 
sible. Complicated  and  intricate  movements  should  not  be  at- 
tempted. 

HINTS    FOB    INSTBUCTOES. 

112.  The  influence  of  the  instructor  is  great.  He  must  be 
master  of  his  weapon,  not  only  to  show  the  various  movements, 
but  also  to  lead  in  the  exercises  at  will.  He  should  stimulate 
the  zeal  of  the  men  and  arouse  pleasure  in  the  work.  Officers 
should  qualify  themselves  as  instructors  by  fencing  with  each 
other. 

113.  The  character  of  each  man,  his  bodily  conformation,  and 
his  degree  of  skill  must  always  be  taken  into  account.  When 
the  instructor  is  demonstrating  the  combinations,  feints,  re- 
turns, and  parries  the  rapidity  of  his  attack  should  be  regu- 
lated by  the  skill  of  the  pupil  and  no  more  force  than  is  neces- 
sary should*  be  used.  If  the  pupil  exposes  himself  too  much  in 
the  feints  and  parries,  the  instructor  will,  by  an  attack,  con- 
vince him  of  his  error;  but  if  these  returns  be  too  swiftly  or 
too  strongly  made  the  pupil,  will  become  overcautious  and  the 
precision  of  his  attack  will  be  impaired.  The  object  is  to  teach 
the  pupil,  not  to  give  exhibitions  of  superior  skill. 

114.  Occasionally  the  instructor  should  leave  himself  uncov- 
ered and  fail  to  parry,  in  order  tc  teach  the  pupil  to  take  quick 
advantage  of  such  opportunities. 

SUGGESTIONS. 

Instruction  m  oayonet  exercise  and  bayonet  fencing  should 
be  conducted  with  a  view  to  teaching  the  aggressive  use  of  the 
bayonet.    Unless  troops  are  so  thoroughly  trained  with  the  bayo- 


MANTJAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  147 

net  that  they  believe  that  with  it  they  are  superior  to  their 
opponents  it  will  be  difficult  or  impossible  to  develop  that 
morale  which  is  necessary  for  a  successful  assault.  Men  should 
be  impressed  with  the  importance  of  acting  always  on  the  of- 
fensive in  bayonet  combat,  of  pushing  their  attack  with  all 
their  might.  Troops  which  are  successful  in  their  first  few 
bayonet  encounters  will  seldom  thereafter  be  called  upon  to 
use  the  bayonet— their  opponents  will  not  await  the  assault. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

FIELD  SERVICE. 


Section  1.  Principles  of  infantry  training. 

Inaction  gives  every  advantage  to  the  enemy. 

The  offensive  alone  gives  decisive  results. 

A  quick  and  energetic  offensive  minimizes  losses. 

An  advance  against  the  enemy's  position  once  entered  upon 
must  be  continued.    To  go  back  under  fire  is  to  die. 

The  best  way  to  hold  down  the  fire  of  the  enemy  and  V> 
diminish  his  power  to  inflict  losses  is  to  bring  the  position  he 
occupies  under  well  conducted  and  continued  fire. 

Present  as  small  a  target  as  possible  to  thi  enemy  by  utiliz- 
ing every  bit  of  cover  the  ground  affords. 

Individual  skill  in  marksmanship  is  an  advantage  in  battle 
only  when  united  with  fire  discipline  and  control. 

Constant  movement  to  the  front  lessens  the  effect  of  the 
enemy's  lire.  Modern  battles  fought  in  the  open  show  that  the 
heaviest  losses  are  in  the  mid  and  long  ranges.  When  close 
range  is  reached  the  losses  diminish  rapidly. 

The  best  protection  against  artillery  fire  is  a  constant  but 
Irregular  movement  to  the  front.  When  close  to  the  enemy's 
position  his  fire  is  least  effective. 

A  knowledge  of  how  to  use  the  bayonet  and  the  will  to  use 
it  must  often  be  the  deciding  factors  in  battle. 

Finally  : 

In  infantry  training  we  can  not  go  far  wrong  or  fail  to  ac- 
complish the  best  results  if  we  keep  before  our  minds  the  spirit 
1  as  the  wording  of  paragraph  352  of  the  Infantry  Drill 
Regulations:  "The  duties  of  infantry  are  many  and  difficult. 
All  infantry  must  be  fit  to  cope  with  all  conditions  that  may 
mist-.  Modern  war  requires  but  one  kind  of  infantry — good 
infantry." 
148 


COMBAT.  149 

Section  2.  Combat. 

The  field  of  battle  is  the  final  test  of  the  instruction,  disci- 
pline, and  efficiency  of  the  fighting  force  of  any  array. 

The  battalion  is  the  attack  unit  or  the  defense  unit,  whether 
operating  alone  or  as  part  of  n  regiment.  The  companies  con- 
stitute the  firing  line  and  the  support. 

An  individual  soldier  is  concerned  only  with  the  enemy  in  his 
immediate  front,  in  obeying  orders,  and  instinctively  doing  what 
he  has  been  trained  to  do. 

The  one  requisite  necessary  to  win  the  battle  is  intelligent 
team  work.  The  army  is  handled  just  like  a  football  team.  A 
part  is  on  the  first  line  facing  the  enemy.  Another  part,  like 
the  half  backs,  is  held  back  as  supports.  Another  part,  like  the 
full  backs,  is  held  as  a  reserve.  Bach  unit,  like  each  player, 
has  a  certain  duty  to  perform.  When  the  signal  is  given,  all 
work  together — all  play  the  game — team  work.  The  players 
consist  of  all  branches  of  the  service. 

The  same  rule  holds  true  down  to  the  smallest  unit  and  even 
to  the  individual  enlisted  man."  Each  regiment  is  a  team  com- 
posed of  three  players — each  a  battalion.  Each  battalion  is  a 
team  of  four  players — each  a  company.  In  the  same  manner 
each  company  is  a  team  of  two  or  more  platoons ;  each  platoon 
a  team  of  two  or  more  squads;  and  last,  but  not  least,  each 
squad  is  a  team  of  eight  players. 

The  one  question  that  always  presents  itself  on  the  battle 
field  every  minute  of  the  time  to  every  person,  whether  he  be 
a  general  or  a  private,  is  "  What  play  has  my  team  captain  or- 
dered, and  how  best  may  I  act  so  as  to  work  in  conjunction  with 
the  other  players  to  bring  about  the  desired  result?  " — team  play. 

To  the  Infantry  private  this  means — 

First.  Prompt  and  loyal  obedience  to  the  squad  leader.  Every 
squad  always  has  a  team  captain.  If  the  squad  leader  is  killed 
or  disabled,  another  player  previously  designated  takes  his 
place.  If  no  one  was  designated,  then  the  private  with  the 
longest  service  takes  command.  When  the  squad  leader  gives 
the  command  for  a  certain  play,  don't  stop  to  think  if  the  play 
is  a  good  one,  but  do  your  very  best  to  carry  out  the  play  as 
ordered.  A  poor  play  in  which  every  player  enters  with  his 
whole  heart   (team  work)   will  often  win.  while,  on  the  other 


160  FIELD  SERVICE. 

hand,  the  best  play  in  which  some  of  the  players  are  skulkers 
and  shirkers  will  probably  fail. 

Second.  Never  lose  touch  with  your  squad.  Every  individual, 
as  well  as  every  unit,  should  always  be  acting  under  the  con- 
trol of  some  higher  commander.  This  is  necessary  if  there  is 
to  be  any  unity  of  action.  Therefore  if  you  lose  your  squad, 
or  it  becomes  broken  up,  join  the  first  squad  you  can  find  and 
obey  your  new  squad  leader  as  loyally  and  as  cheerfully  as  you 
did  your  own. 

Infantry  approaches  the  battle  field  in  columns  of  squads. 
While  yet  several  miles  from  the  enemy's  position  the  troops 
may  come  under  artillery  fire.  On  green  men  entering  upon 
their  fight,  the  sound  of  the  projectile  whistling  through  the 
air,  the  noise,  flash,  a  Ad  smoke  on  the  burst  of  the  shrap- 
nel, and  the  hum  of  the  various  pieces  thereafter,  all  produce  a 
very  terrifying  effect,  but  old  soldiers  soon  learn  to  pay  little 
attention  to  this,  as  the  danger  is  not  great. 

As  the  troops  advance,  the  column  breaks  up  into  smaller 
columns,  which  form  oh  an  irregular  line  with  more  or  less 
interval  between.  As  the  advance  continues  each  column  breaks 
up  into  smaller  columns  until  finally  a  line  of  skirmishers  is 
formed. 

Firing  is  delayed  as  long  as  possible  for  three  reasons,  viz: 
(a)  At  the  extreme  ranges  little  damage  can  be  done  on  the 
enemy,  and  ineffective  firing  always  encourages  him;  (6)  halt- 
ing to  fire  delays  the  advance,  and  the  great  object  to  be  accom- 
plished is  to  close  in  on  the  enemy  where  you  can  meet  him  on 
better  terms;  (c)  plenty  of  ammunition  will  be  required  at  the 
decisive  stage  of  the  fight,  and  it  is  very  difficult  to  send  extra 
ammunition  up  to  the  firing  line.  Therefore  never  fire  until  or- 
dered to  do  so,  and  then  never  fire  more  than  the  number  of 
rounds  designated.  Never  fire  after  the  command  "  cease  firing  " 
is  given. 

Ammunition  in  the  bandoleers  will  ordinarily  be  expended 
first.  Thirty  rounds  in  the  right  pocket  section  of  the  belt 
will  be  held  as  a  reserve,  to  bo  expended  only  when  ordered  by 
an  officer. 

Soon,  however,  it  will  be  necessary  to  halt  and  open  fire  on 
the  enemy  in  order  to  cause  him  some  loss,  to  make  his  riflemen 


COMBAT.  161 

keep  down  in  their  trenches,  and  to  make  them  fire  wildly.  It 
is  probable  that  at  this  time  and  until  you  arrive  much  closer 
you  will  not  see  any  of  the  enemy  to  fire  at.  You  may  not  even 
see  any  trenches  nor  know  just  where  the  enemy  is.  Your 
higher  officers,  however,  with  their  field  glasses  and  the  mes- 
sages they  receive,  will  know.  Each  company  will  be  assigned 
a  certain  front  to  cover  with  its  fire.  Therefore  be  careful  to 
fix  your  sights  at  the  designated  range  and  fire  only  at  the 
designated  target.  This  means  team  work  in  firing,  which  is 
one  of  the  most  important  elements  of  success. 

The  firing  line  advances  from  position  to  position  by  means 
of  rushes.  At  long  range  the  entire  line  may  rush  forward  at 
the  same  time,  but  as  the  range  decreases  one  part  of  the  line 
rushes  forward  while  the  remainder  keeps  up  a  hot  fire  on  the 
enemy.  The  number  taking  part  in  each  rush  decreases  as  the 
fire  of  the  enemy  becomes  warmer,  until  perhaps  only  one 
squad,  or  even  less,  rushes  or  crawls  forward  at  a  time,  pro- 
tected by  the  fire  of  the  rest  of  the  company.  The  distance 
covered  by  each  rush  also  becomes  less  and  less.  After  any 
rush  no  part  of  the  line  again  advances  until  the  rest  of  the 
line  is  up.  In  making  a  rush,  the  leader  of  the  unit  gives  the 
signal  and  leads  the  way.  The  rest  follow.  No  attempt  is  made 
to  keep  a  line,  but  each  man  rushes  forward  at  a  run,  seeking 
only  to  reach  the  new  halting  position  as  quickly  and  with 
as  little  exposure  as  possible.  When  halted,  the  skirmishers 
need  not  be  in  a  perfect  line,  but  every  advantage  should  be 
taken  of  the  ground  for  concealment  and  protection.  It  is 
necessary  only  that  no  man  or  group  of  men  should  interfere 
with  the  fire  of  other  parts  of  the  firing  line. 

The  noise  on  the  firing  line  will  be  great.  Leaders  will  be  dis- 
abled and  new  men  will  take  their  places.  Reinforcements 
coming  up  will  cause  units  to  become  mixed.  To  the  green  man 
everything  may  appear  to  be  in  confusion,  but  this  is  not  so. 
This  is  war  as  it  really  is.  If  you  have  lost  your  squad  or  your 
squad  leader,  join  the  leader  nearest  to  you.  This  is  the  way  the 
game  is  played. 

As  long  as  the  fight  lasts  every  available  rifleman  must  be 
kept  in  the  firing  line.  The  first  and  last  consideration  is  to 
win  the  battle.    Therefore,  under  no  circumstances  will  any  sol- 


152  FIELD  SERVICE. 

dier  be  permitted  tx>  go  to  the  rear,,  either  for  ammunition  or  to 
assist  the  wounded. 

If  the  attacking  force  can  no  longer  advance,  it  is  much  safer 
to  throw  up  hasty  intrenchments  and  await  the  arrival  of  re- 
inforcements or  darkness  than  it  is  to  retreat.  Retreating 
troops  are  the  one  that  suffer  the  greatest.  This  lesson  is 
taught  by  every  great  war.  Therefore,  always  remember  that 
the  safest  thing  to  -do  is  to  stick  to  firing  line. 

Troops  on  the  firing  line,  when  not  actually  engaged  in  firing 
at  the  enemy,  busy  themselves  throwing  up  shelter  trenches. 
It  only  requires  a  few  minutes  to  construct  a  trench  that. gives 
great  protection.  Therefore,  never  get  separated  from  your  in- 
trenching tool. 

Concealment  is  no  less  important  than  protection.  There- 
fore, when  conditions  permit,  as  is  generally  the  case  when  on 
the  defensive,  every  effort  should  be  made  to  hide  intrench- 
ments  by  the  use  of  sod,  grass,  weeds,  bushes,  etc. 

Ifi  making  an  attack  the  infantry  is  always  -supported  when 
possible  by  its  own  artillery,  which  continues  to  fire  over  its 
head  until  the  infantry  arrives  very  close  to  the  enemy's 
trenches.  This  fire  is  helping  you  a  great  deal  by  keeping  down 
the  fire  of  the  enemy's  infantry  and  artillery.  Therefore,  don't 
think  you  are  being  fired  into  by  your  own  artillery  because 
you  hear  their  shells  and  shrapnel  singing  through  the  air  or 
bursting  a  short  tjistance  in  your  front,  but  rather  be  thankful 
you  are  receiving  their  help  up  to  the  very  last  minute. 

In  the  last  rush  which  carries  the  enemy's  position  there  is 
always  much  mixing  of  units.  The  firing  line  does  not  con- 
tinue rushing  madly  as  individuals  after  the  enemy,  but  halts 
and  fires  on  .him  until  he  gets  out  of  good  range.  The  pursuit 
is  taken  up  by  formed  troops  held  in  reserve  or  by  the  firing 
line  only  after  its  units  are  again  gotten  together. 

As  the  fighting  often  lasts  all  day,  and  great  suffering  is 
caused  from  thirst,  don't  throw  away  your  canteen  when  the 
fight  commences.  It  may  also  be  impossible  to  get  rations  up  to 
the  line  during  the  night.  Therefore,  it  is  advisable  to  hold  onto 
at  least  one  ration. 

As  the  recent  war  has  shown  the  possibility  of  hand-to-hand 
fighting,  especially  at  night,  each  soldier  should  be  schooled  in 
the  use  of  the  bayonet. 


COMBAT.  153 

The  following  has  particular  reference  to  the  duties  of 
platoon  and  squad  leaders  and  to  the  team  work  of  the  platoon 
in  combat : 

Attacking  troops  must  first  gain  fire  superiority  in  order  to 
reach  the  hostile  position.  By  gaining  fire  superiority  is  meant 
making  one's  fire  superior  to  that  of  the  enemy  in  volume  and 
accuracy,  and  it  depends  upon  the  number  of  rifles  employed, 
the  rate  of  fire,  the  character  of  the  target,  training  and  dis- 
cipline, and  fire  direction  and  control.  When  the  fire  of  the 
attackers  becomes  effective  and  superior  to  that  of  the  defenders 
the  latter  are  no  longer  able  to  effectively  and  coolly  aim  and 
fire  at  the  former,  and,  as  a  consequence,  the  attackers  are  able 
to  inaugurate  a  successful  rush  or  advance  which  carries  them 
nearer  to  the  enemy's  position. 

When  a  trained  organization  has  been  committed  to  the  attack, 
the  gaining  of  fire  superiority  depends  upon  the  way  in  which 
fire  direction  and  fire  control  are  exercised. 

The  captain  directs  the  fire  of  the  company.  He  indicates 
to  the  platoon  commanders  the  target  (enemy)  which  the  com- 
pany is  to  fire  and  advance  upon,  and  tells  each  upon  which  part 
of  this  target  he  is  to  direct  the  fire  of  his  platoon.  When  he 
desires  the  fire  to  be  opened  he  gives  the  necessary  commands  or 
signals,  including  the  range  at  which  the  sights  are  to  be  set. 

When  the  fire  fight  has  once  started  it  becomes  to  a  greaj; 
extent  a  fight  of  a  number  of  platoons.  The  platoon  is  the 
largest  organization  which  can  be  controlled  by  a  single  leader 
in  action.  The  platoon  commander  (lieutenant  or  sergeant) 
controls  its  fire  in  order  to  gain  the  maximum  fire  effect  and 
to  avoid  wasting  ammunition.  He  must  try  his  best  to  make 
the  fire  of  his  platoon  effective,  to  get  it  forward,  and  to  sup- 
port neighboring  platoons  in  their  effort  to  advance.  At  the 
same  time  he  must  hold  himself  subject  to  his  captain's  direc- 
tions. He  should  take  advantage  of  every  chance  to  carry  his 
platoon  forward  unless  otherwise  ordered.  In  all  this  he  is 
assisted  by  his  platoon  guide  ( sergeant )  and  by  his  corporals. 

At  the  commencement  of  .an  engagement  the  platoon  com- 
mander will  give  the  objective  (part  of  the  enemy's  line  or 
aiming  target)  at  which  his  platoon  is  to  direct  its  fire.  Non- 
commissioned officers  must  be  sure  that  they  see  and  understand 


154  FIELD  SERVICE, 

the  objective,  and  that  all  the  men  in  their  squads  do  likewise.  1 
Fire  is  then  directed  at  this  objective  without  further  command 
until  the  platoon  commander  gives  a  new  objective. 

Men  should  be  instructed  to  aim  at  that  part  of  the  target 
assigned  to  their  platoon  which  corresponds  with  their  own  posi- 
tion in  their  own  platoon,  so  that  there  will  be  no  portion  of 
the  target  which  is  not  covered  by  fire.  A  portion  of  the 
enemy's  line  not  covered  by  fire  means  that  that  portion  is  able 
to  coolly  aim  and  fire  at  their  opponents. 

In  an  engagement  the  voice  can  seldom  be  heard  over  a  few 
feet,  and  the  platoon  commander  will  generally  have  to  convey 
his  orders  by  signals.  A  corporal  may  be  able  to  shout  orders 
to  his  squad,  and  orders  may  be  repeated  along  a  skirmish  line 
by  shouting.  Care  should  be  taken  that  orders  intended  for 
one  platoon  only  are  not  thus  conveyed  to  another  platoon. 

A  short  blast  on  the  whistle,  given  by  the  platoon  commander, 
means  "Attention  to  Orders."  All  noncommissioned  officers  at 
once  suspend  firing  and  glance  toward  the  platoon  commander 
to  see  if  the  latter  has  any  signals  or  orders  for  them.  If  not, 
they  resume  tiring.  A  long  blast  on  the  whistle  means  "Sus- 
pend Firing."  When  a  noncommissioned  officer  hears  this  sig- 
nal from  his  platoon  commander  he  should  at  once  shout  "  Sus- 
pend Firing."  Upon  receiving  a  signal,  the  noncommissioned 
officer  for  whom  it  is  intended  should  at  once  repeat  it  back,  to 
be  sure  that  it  is  correctly  understood. 

When  a  leader  in  command  of  a  platoon  or  squad  receives  an 
order  or  signal  to  rush,  he  should  cause  his  men  to  suspend 
tiring  and  to  hold  themselves  flat  but  ready  for  a  sprinter's 
start.  He  selects  the  point,  as  far  as  possible  with  reference 
to  cover,  to  which  he  intends  to  carry  his  unit  forward.  He 
then  gives  the  command  "RUSH,"  springs  forward,  and  run- 
ning at  full  speed  about  three  paces  ahead  of  his  men,  leads 
them  in  the  rush.  Arriving  at  the  position  he  has  selected,  he 
throws  himself  prone,  and  the  men  drop  on  either  side  of  him. 
All  crawl  forward  to  good  firing  positions,  considering  the  cover 
also,  aud  the  leader  gives  the  necessary  orders  for  resuming  the 
fire.  The  latter  will  include  giving  the  range  again,  the  length 
of  the  rush  being  subtracted  from  the  sight  setting  ordered  at 
the  last  position. 


COMBAT.  155 

As  a  rule,  rushes  should  be  started  by  a  unit  on  one  flank, 
and  should  be  followed  in  succession  by  the  other  units  to  the 
opposite  flank.  Each  succeeding  unit  should  halt  on  the  line 
established  by  the  unit  which  first  rushed.  When  a  unit  is 
about  to  rush,  leaders  in  charge  of  adjacent  units  should  caution 
their  men  to  be  careful  not  to  fire  into  the  rusliing  unit  as  it 
bounds  forward. 

When  one  unit  suspends  fire  for  the  purpose  of  rushing,  ad- 
jacent leaders  should  arrange  to  have  a  portion  of  their  men 
turn  their  fire  on  the  target  of  the  rushing  unit,  to  the  end  that 
there  may  be  no  portion  of  the  enemy's  line  not  under  fire  and 
able  to  fire  coolly  on  the  rushing  unit. 

Rushes  should  be  made  for  as  long  a  distance  as  possible,  due 
regard  being  had  for  the  wind  of  the  men  and  not  to  get  beyond 
supporting  distance  of  the  other  units.  Long  rushes  facilitate 
an  advance,  and  quickly  place  a  skirmish  line  close  to  the 
enemy's  position,  where  its  fire  will  have  more  effect.  An  at- 
tacking line  suffers  less  from  casualties  at  short  ranges  than  it 
does  at  mid  range. 

Every  advantage  should  be  taken  to  utilize  the  cover  avail- 
able. The  best  kind  of  cover  is  that  which,  while  it  masks  the 
skirmishers  from  the  sight  and  fire  of  the  enemy,  affords  favor- 
able condiiions  fpr  firing  and  for  readily  advancing.  In  order 
to  allow  men  to  regain  their  wind,  or  should  the  fire  of  the 
enemy  be  so  effective  as  to  prevent  a  further  advance  without 
reinforcement,  advantage  may  be  taken  to  lie  close  in  cover,  or 
hasty  fire  trenches  may  be  thrown  up  in  order  to  allow  the  line 
to  maintain  its  position.     "  To  go  back  under  fire  is  to  die." 

When  a  platoon  is  firing,  all  noncommissioned  officers  watch 
every  opportunity  to  make  the  fire  more  effective.  The  platoon 
guide  should  constantly  watch  the  men  to  see  that  they  do  not 
become  excited,  fire  too  hastily  or  without  aim,  that  their  sights 
are  set  at  the  correct  range,  that  they  are  obviously  firing  at 
the  designated  target,  and  that  they  assume  steady  firing  posi- 
tions and  take  advantage  of  cover.  In  performing  these  duties 
it  may  be  necessary  for  the  guides  to  be  constantly  crawling 
along  the  line.  A  corporal  in  like  manner  supervises  his  squad, 
firing  with  it  when  he  is  not  actively  engaged  in  controlling  it. 

Bayonets  are  fixed  preparatory  to  a  charge.  This  command 
is  usually  given  by  the  bugle.     Only  one  or  two  men  in  each 


156  FIELD  SERVICE. 

squad  should  fix  their  bayonets  at  the  same  time,  in  order  that 
there  may  be  no  .marked  pause  or  diminution  in  the  lire  at 
tliis  critical  stage  of  the  engagement. 

In  order  to  be  effective  in  combat,  the  platoon  must  be  thor- 
oughly trained  to  work  as  a  team.  Each  noncommissioned  offi- 
cer must  be  conversant  with  the  signals  and  commands  and 
the  proper  methods  for  instantly  putting  into  effect  the  orders 
of  his  platoon  commander.  Each  private  must  be  trained  until 
he  instinctively  does  the  right  thing  in  each  phase  of  the  action. 

Section  3.  Patrolling. 

The  designation  of  a  patrol  indicates  the  nature  of  the  duty 
for  which  it  is  detailed,  as.  for  example,  visiting,  reconnoitering, 
exploring,  flanking,  combat,  harassing,  pursuing,  etc.  An  In- 
fantry patrol  consists,  as  a  rule,  of  from  3  to  16  men. 

Reconnoitering  patrols  are  habitually  small  and  seek  safety 
in  concealment  or  flight,  righting  only  when  their  mission  de- 
mands it.  The  most  skillful  reconnoissance  is  where  patrols  ac- 
complish their  mission  and  return  without  being  discovered  by 
the  enemy.  When  resistance  is  expected  stronger  detachments 
are  required.  These  cover  themselves  with  small  patrols  of  two 
to  four  men,  the  remainder  acting  ns  support. 

The  commander  determines  the  number  and  strength  of  pa- 
trols and  when  they  are  to  be  sent  out.  It  is  a  cardinal  prin- 
ciple to  send  out  patrols  of  such  strength  only  as  will  accom- 
plish the  object. 

The  officer  sending  out  the  patrol  verifies  the  detail,  desig- 
nates a  second  in  command,  and  gives  the  necessary  instruction. 
The  orders  or  instructions  for  a  patrol,  or  for  any  detachment 
going  on  reconnoissance,  must  state  clearly  where  the  enemy 
is  or  is  supposed  to  be,  what  information  is  desired,  what  fea- 
tures are  of  special  importance,  the  general  direction  to  be 
followed,  whether  friendly  patrols  are  liable  to  be  encountered, 
and  where  messages  are  to  be  sent  or  the  patrol  is  to  report. 
Important  and  comprehensive  instructions  should  be  in  writing, 
but  precautions  against  capture  of  papers  must  be  taken.  An 
officer  sending  out  a  patrol  must  be  certain  that  his  orders  are 
understood.  Detailed  instructions  are,  as  a  rule,  avoided.  When 
necessary  the  time  of  return  is  stated. 


PATROLLING.  157 

The  patrol  leader  should  be  selected  with  care.  He  should 
have  good  judgment,  courage,  be  able  to  read  maps,  make 
sketches,  and  send  clear  and  concise  messages.  In  addition  to 
his  ordinary  equipment,  he  should  have  a  map  of  the  country,  a 
watch,  field  glass,  compass,  whistle,  message  blanks,  and  pencils. 

The  leader  of  a  patrol  should  carefully  inspect  it  before  start- 
ing out  and  see  that  each  member  is  in  good  physical  condition, 
has  serviceable  shoes,  a  full  canteen,  one  ration,  a  first-aid 
packet,  and  that  his  rifle  and  ammunition  are  in  good  condi- 
tion. He  will  see  that  the  equipment  is  arranged  so  as  not  to 
rattle;  that  nothing  bright  is  exposed  so  as  to  glitter  in  the 
sunlight ;  that  nothing  is  taken  along  that  will  give  informa- 
tion to  the  enemy  should  any  member  fall  into  his  hands,  as,  for 
example,  copies  of  orders,  maps  with  position  of  troops  marked 
thereon,  letters,  newspapers,  or  collar  ornaments.  Blanket  rolls 
should  generally  be  left  behind,  in  order  that  the  patrol  may 
travel  as  light  as  possible. 

The  leader  then  gives  his  patrol  information  and  instructions. 
These  embrace  instructions  from  higher  authority ;  his  detailed 
plans ;  information  of  the  country  and  enemy ;  the  countersign, 
if  any ;  the  point  where  the  patrol  will  assemble  if  scattered. 
He  will  see  that  the  men  understand  the  prescribed  signals. 

It  must  always  be  remembered  that  it  makes  no  difference 
how  valuable  may  be  the  information  that  the  patrol  gets,  it  is 
worthless  if  not  sent  back  in  time  .to  be  of  service.  Herein  is 
where  most  patrols  fail.  This  applies  particularly  to  the  infor- 
mation obtained  by  patrols  acting  as  a  point  or  flankers  of  ad- 
vance, rear,  and  flank  guards.  Whenever  the  patrol  gets  any 
information,  the  leader  must  think  whether  the  commanding 
officer  would  change  his  plans  or  issue  new  orders  if  he  had  the 
information.  If  he  would,  the  information  should  be  sent  back 
at  once.  If  the  distance  is  great  or  the  inhabitants  are  hostile, 
it  is  well  to  send  two  men  with  the  message.  These  men  should 
not  travel  side  by  side,  but  as  a  patrol  of  two  men.  If  the  infor- 
mation is  very  important,  and  the  danger  of  capture  is  con- 
siderable, the  message  should  be  sent  by  two  parties,  each  trav- 
eling by  a  different  route. 

A  message  from  a  patrol  should  always  show  (a)  the  place- 
from  which  it  is  sent;  lb)  the  time  it  is  sent  (date,  hour,  and 
minute)  ;   (c)  to  whom  it  is  sent;   (d)  the  message  itself;  (e) 


168  FIELD  SERVICE. 

what  the  patrol  intends  doing  after  sending  the  message;  (f) 
the  name  of  the  sender.  Under  (*)  care  must  be  taken  to 
separate  what  has  actually  been  seen  by  the  patrol  from  infor- 
n  received  from  other  sources.  Care  must  also  be  taken 
.  exaggerate  what  is  seen,  but  to  report  only  the  exact 
facts. 

In  their  conduct  patrols  exercise  the  greatest  vigilance  to 
prevent  discovery.  No  formal  formation  is  or  should  be  pre- 
scribed. Under  the  leader's  guidance  it  moves  so  as  to  guard 
against  surprise,  usually  with  point  and  flankers.  To  extend 
the  sphere  of  its  observation,  still  smaller  patrols  (one  or  two 
men)  may  be  sent  out  for  short  distances,  communication  with 
the  loader  being  maintained  by  signals.  Whatever  the  forma- 
tion adopted,  it  should  favor  the  escape  of  at  least  one  man  in 
case  of  surprise. 

In  patrols  of  two  to  five  men  the  commander  generally  leads. 
In  this  formation  few  signals  are  necessary,  the  men  simply 
regulating  their  movements  by  his. 

In  questioning  civilians  caution  is  observed  not  to  disclose 
information  that  may  be  of  value  to  the  enemy.  Strangers  are 
not  allowed  to  precede  the  patrol.  Patrol  leaders  are  author- 
ized to  seize  telegrams  and  mail  matter,  and  to  arrest  individ- 
uals, reporting  the  facts  as  soon  as  possible. 

Patrols  should  observe  everything  for  signs  of  the  enemy. 
Even  apparent  trifles  may  be  of  great  value.  The  finding  of  a 
collar  ornament  showing  a  man's  regiment  may  enable  the  chief 
of  stalf  to  determine  that  the  enemy  has  been  reenforced. 

Patrols  should  not  travel  on  the  main  roads  if  they  can  ob- 
serve them  and  at  the  same  time  make  the  necessary  progress 
by  moving  some  distance  to  the  side  of  the  roads. 

Unless  in  case  of  attack  or  of  great  personal  danger,  no  mem- 
ber of  the  patrol  should  fire  on  hostile  troops  without  orders 
from  the  patrol  leader.     When  sent  out  to  gain  information, 
aid  avoid  fighting  unless  it  is  absolutely  necessary 
carry  out  their  orders. 

and    inelosures    involving    danger    of    surprise    are 

and  for  brief  periods  only      Halts  are 

vi  ;w,  and  the  country  is  studied 

in  all  '  irks  to  the  rear  being  impressed  on  the 


PATROLLING.  159 

minds  of  the  men  so  that  the  way  back  can  be  readily  found ; 
the  leader  consults  his  map  and  locates  himself  thereon. 

When  a  patrol  is  scattered  it  reassembles  at  some  place  pre- 
viously selected  ;  if  checked  in  one  direction,  it  takes  another ;  if 
cut  off,  it  returns  by  a  detour  or  forces  its  way  through.  As 
a  last  resort,  it  scatters  so  that  at  least  one  man  may  return 
with  information.  Patrols  Hearing;  their  own  lines  should  march 
at  a  walk  unless  pressed  by  the  enemy. 

Occasionally  it  is  advisable  for  the  leader  to  conceal  his 
patrol  and  continue  the  reconnoissance  with  one  or  two  com- 
panions. 

Patrols  far  from  their  commands  or  in  contact  with  the  enemy 
often  remain  out  overnight.  In  such  cases  they  seek  a  place  of 
concealment,  proceeding  thereto  after  nightfall  or  under  cover. 

When  the  enemy  is  encountered  it  is  very  necessary  to  locate 
his  main  force.  Information  is  particularly  desired  of  his 
strength,  whether  he  has  infantry,  cavalry,  and  artillery,  the 
route  and  direction  of  his  march,  or  the  location  of  his  camp 
anil  line  of  outposts. 

Dust  clouds  indicate  moving  bodies.  Infantry  raises  a  low, 
thick  cloud ;  cavalry  a  high  thin  cloud ;  artillery  and  wagons 
a  broken  cloud.  The  kind  of  troops,  direction  of  march,  and 
approximate  strength  may  thus  sometimes  be  roughly  esti- 
mated. If  from  some  position  a  body  of  troops  can  be  seen 
marching  along  in  column,  the  exact  time  in  minutes  and  sec- 
onds it  requires  for  them  to  pass  a  certain  point  should  be 
noted,  together  with  the  formation  they  are  in,  thus :  Infantry, 
column  of  squads,  three  minutes  and  twelve  seconds ;  cavalry, 
columns  of  twos  at  a  trot,  one  minute  and  twenty  seconds; 
wagons,  four-mule,  five  minutes.  From  this  information  the 
strength  can  be  determined  by  the  following  rule : 

Assuming  that  infantry  in  column  of  squads  occupy  half  a 
yard  per  man,  cavalry  in- column  of  fours  1  yard  per  man,  and 
artillery  and  wagons  in  single  column  20  yards  per  gun,  caisson, 
or  wagon,  a  given  point  would  be.  passed  in  one  minute  by 
about — 

175  infantry. 
110  cavalry  at  a  walk. 
200  cavalry  at  a  trot. 
5  guns,  caissons,  or  wagons. 


160  FIELD  SERVICE. 

For  troops  in  column  of  twos,  take  one-half  of  the  above  esti- 
mate. 

Patrols  should  always  observe  the  country  marched  over,  with 
a  view  to  making  a  report  on  the  same.  The  following  informa- 
tion is  always  of  value: 

Roads.— Direction  ;  kind,  whether  dirt,  gravel,  macadam,  etc.; 
width,  whether  suitable  for  column  of  squads,  etc. ;  border, 
whether  fenced  with  stone,  barbed  wire,  rails,  etc. ;  steepness 
in  crossing  hills  and  valleys;  where  they  pass  through  defiles 
and  along  commanding  heights,  etc.;  crossroads. 

Surrounding  country. — Whether  generally  open  and  passable 
for  infantry,  cavalry,  and  artillery,  or  whether  broken  and  im- 
passable, due  to  fences,  woods,  crops,  ravines,  etc. 

Railroads. — Single  or  double  track,  narrow  or  broad  gauge, 
tunnels,  bridges,  cuts,  direction,  stations,  etc. 

Bridges. — Material,  wood,  stone,  steel,  etc.;  length  and 
breadth;  number  and  kind  of  piers  or  supports. 

Rivers. — Direction  ;  width,  depth  ;  kind  of  bottom,  such  'as 
nni'l.  sand,  rocky,  etc.;  banks,  steep  or  gentle,  open  or  wooded; 
rapidity  of  current ;  variations  in  depth  at  different  times  as 
indicated  by  driftwood  and  high-water  marks;  islands;  heights 
in  vicinity  commanding  streams. 

Woods. — Extent  and  shape;  kind  of  trees;  free  from  under- 
brush or  not ;  clearings,  roads,  swamps,  ravines,  etc. 

Telegraph  lines. — Number  of  wires,  along  roads  or  railroads, 
stations,  etc. 

Villages. — Size,  kind  of  houses,  nature  of  streets,  means  of 
defense,  etc. 

Hills  and  ridges. — Whether  slopes  are  gentle  or  steep;  whether 
top  is  narrow  or  wide;  whether  ground  is  broken  or  smooth, 
wooded  or  clear;  whether  difficult  or  easy  to  cross,  etc.;. 
whether  commanded  by  other  hills. 

Defiles. — Their  direction,  length,  and  width ;  whether  sur- 
rounding heights  are  passable  for  infantry- and  artillery;  kind, 
of  country  at  each  opening  of  the  defile,  etc. 

Ravines,  ditches,  etc.— Width  and  depth ;  banks,  whether  pass- 
able for  infantry,  cavalry,  and  wagons;  whether  suitable  for 
trenches,  or  for  movement  of  troops  therein,  etc. 

In  general,  every  soldier  should  be-  constantly  on  the  lookout 
to  obtain  information  that  might  be  of  some  military  value. 


PATROLLING.  161 

Remember  that  information  of  the  enemy  and  of- the  country  is 
worthless  unless  made  known  to  the  proper  officials  in  time  to 
be  of  use. 

Every  soldier  should  be  able  to  find  his  way  in  a  strange 
country ;  should  know  how  to  use  a  compass ;  should  know  how 
to  locale  the  North  Star;  should  be  able  to  travel  across  coun- 
try, keeping  a  given  direction,  both  by  day  and  by  night,  and  by 
observing  landmarks  he  should  be  able  to  return  to  the  starting 
point  either  over  the  same  route  or  by  a  more  circuitous  one. 
This  can  easily  be  learned  by  a  little  practice. 

It  adds  a  great  deal  to  the  value  of  a  soldier  if  he  knows  how 
to  use  a  map  to  hud  his  way.  If  he  knows  how  to  make  a 
rough  sketch  of  the'  country,  showing  the  position  of  roads, 
streams,  woods,  railroads,  bridges,  houses,  villages,  fields, 
fences,  hills,  etc.,  he  has  added  to  his  value  as  a  soldier  very 
much,  indeed,  because  a  rough  sketch  of  a  country  will  give 
more  and  better  information  at  a  glance  than  can  be  obtained 
by  reading  many  pages  of  written  description. 

Patrolling  is  one  of  the  most  important  duties  a  soldier  can 
learn.  Any  enlisted  man  who  understands  thoroughly  his  du- 
ties as  a  member  of  a  patrol  will  understand  also  most  of  his 
duties  when  with  advance  or  rear  guards  or  when  on  outpost 
duty.  Patrolling  can  not  be  learned  merely  by  reading  books 
nor  by  work  indoors.  Thoroughness  comes  only  by  actually 
going  out  in  the  country  and  acting  as  a  patrol. 

In  carrying  out  this  idea  the  following  scheme  is  recom- 
mended : 

I>et  four  or  more  men  and  a  noncommissioned  officer  act  as 
a  patrol.  They  assemble  at  a  certain  time,  at  a  convenient 
point  on  some  country  road.  An  officer,  whom  we  will  call 
Captain  A,  acts  as  the  director;  the  noncommissioned  officer, 
whom  we  will  call  Sergeant  B,  acts  as  patrol  leader;  and  the 
others  (Privates  C,  D,  E,  etc.)  act  as  members  of  Sergeant  B's 
patrol. 

Assume  that  the  company  (battalion,  etc.)  has  just  made 
camp  in  this  vicinity  and  that  the  inhabitants  are  friendly  (or 
hostile). 

Captain  A  indicates  to  the  rest  of  the  men  where  the  camp  is 
situated  and  points  out  where  the  various  sentinels  are  posted. 


162  FIELD  SERVICE. 

(This  in  irself  affords  an  opportunity  for  much  discussion  and 
celling  many  valuable  lessons.) 
Captain  A  then  calls  up  Sergeant  B  and  tells  him — 
(a)   Just  what  information  Captain  A  has  of  the  enemy,  and 
ay  information  of  the  country  or  of  friendly  troops  in 
the  vicinity  that  might  be  of  service  to  Sergeant  B. 

(6)   How  many  men  he  shall   take  for  the  patrol    fthis  is 

another  problem  for  Captain  A  to  solve).    Any  men  present  not 

us  part  of  the  patrol  go  along  with  Captain  A  as  ob- 

(c)  How  far  he  shall  go  and  what  country  he  shall  cover 
with  the  patrol. 

i  d )  Just  what  information  it  is  particularly  desired  he  shall 
obtain. 

(e)  Where  he  shall  send  his  messages  and  when  he  shall 
return. 

Example  1: 

'•  Sergeant  B,  it  has  just  been  reported  to  me  that  a  company 
of  hostile  infantry  was  in  camp  last  night  at  X,  about  5  miles 
from  here  on  this  road.  Take  5  men  and  proceed  toward  X 
and  find  out  whether  the  enemy  is  still  there,  and  if  not,  when 
he  left  and  where  he  went.  Send  messages  to  me  here,  and 
return  by  8  o'clock  this  evening." 

Example   2: 

"  Sergeant  B,  I  think  I  heard  the  firing  of  field  guns  over  in 
that  direction  a  short  while  ago.  Take  6  men  and  proceed  to 
that  high  hill  you  see  over  there  about  4  miles  away.  Send  a 
message  to  me  here  when  you  reach  there.  You  may  go  tartner 
if  you  then  think  it  advisable,  but  return  before  daylight.  I  de- 
sire particularly  to  know  if  there  are  any  hostile  troops  in  this 
vicinity,  especially  artillery.  I  shall  send  Sergeant  X  with  3 
men  to  observe  the  country  from  that  hill  you  see  over  there 
farther  to  the  south.  He  will  remain  there  till  dark.  Send 
ges  to  me  here.  If  the  company  is  not  here  on  your 
return  you  will  find  a  note  for  you  underneath  this  rail." 

Example  3: 

"  Sergeant  B,  this  friendly  country  boy  has  just  reported  that 
four  hostile  cavalrymen  stopped  about  half  an  hour  ago  at  his 
father's  house,  which  he  says  is  about  2  miles  up  this  road. 
One  of  the  men  seemed  to  be  very  sick.  You  will  select  eight 
men  from  your  section  and  endeavor  to  capture  these  men.     If, 


PATROLLING.  163 

they  have  disappeared  you  will  reconnoiter  in  that  vicinity 
until  dark.  This  boy  will  accompany  you  as  a  guide.  I  desire 
particularly  to  learn  the  position,  strength,  and  composition 
of  any  hostile  troops  in  this  vicinity.  Send  reports  to  me  here. 
Return  before  daylight." 

Example  4: 

"  Sergeant  B,  here  is  a  map  of  the  country  in  this  vicinity 
on  a  scale  of  1  inch  to  the  mile.  Here  is  where  we  are  camped 
[indicating  position  on  map].  I  have  just  learned  that  forag- 
ing parties  of  the  enemy  are  collecting  supplies  over  here  at  X 
[indicating  point  on  map],  which  is  10  miles  off  in  that  direc- 
tion [pointing  across  country  toward  X].  It  is  reported  that 
this  bridge  over  this  stream  [indicating  same  on  the  map], 
which  is  about  3  miles  down  this  road  [indicating  road  and  di- 
rection on  the  ground],  has  been  destroyed.  You  will  take  three 
men  from  your  platoon  and  verify  this  report.  You  will  also 
reconnoiter  the  stream  for  a  distance  of  1  mile  both  above  and 
below  the  bridge  for  fords  suitable  for  infantry.  Messages  will 
reach  me  here.     Return  by  8  o'clock  to-night." 

Sergeant  B  then  inspects  his  men  and  gives  them  their  in- 
structions. The  patrol  is  then  formed  and  moves  out  exactly 
as  it  would  under  actual  war  conditions. 

Captain  A  may  halt  (and  assemble  if  desirable)  the  patrol  at 
intervals  in  order  to  discuss  the  formation  used  and  the  move- 
ment of  any  members  of  the  patrol,  their  ronte.  use  of  cover, 
etc.,  with  the  reasons  therefor,  and  compare  the  same  with 
suggested  modifications  of  the  formations,  etc.  After  the  dis- 
cussion, the  patrol  is  again  set  in  motion.  Captain  A  may  ac- 
company any  part  of  the  patrol.  From  time  to  time  he  pre- 
sents certain  situations  to  some  member  of  the  patrol,  being 
very  careful  to  assume  only  such  situations  as  might  naturally 
occur. 

Thus,  take  Example  1 : 

Captain  A  is  with  Sergeant  B,  who,  with  Private  C,  is  march- 
ing along  the  road  as  the  point  of  the  patrol.  The  other  mem- 
bers of  the  patrol  are  distributed  to  suit  the  nature  of  the 
country  over  which  the  patrol  is  marching.  The  point  has 
just  reached  a  ridge  beyond  which  the  country  is  open  and 


164  FIELD  SERVICE. 

cultivated  for  about  half  a  mile.  Beyond  this  the  road  enters 
a  woods.  Captain  A  now  says :  "  Sergeant  B.  from  this  point 
you  see  two  soldiers  in  khaki  on  the  road  there  at  the  begin- 
oing  of  that  cornfield  about  200  yards  from  the  woods  [points 
out  same].  They  arc  moving  in  this  direction.  About  200 
yards  to  the  right  of  these  and  somewhat  farther  to  their  rear 
you  see  two  more  men  moving  along  that  rail  fence." 

Sergeant  B  now  does  exactly  as  he  would  do  in  actual  war. 

How  does  he  signal  to  his  patrol?    Does  he  assemble  his  men? 

how  and  where?    Does  he  send  a  message  back  to  camp; 

and  if  so,  by  whom,  and  is  it  written  or  verbal?     (If  written, 

Sergeant  B  actually  writes  it  and  delivers  it  to  Private , 

with  the  necessary  instructions.     If  verbal,'  it  is  actually  given 

to  Private  • with  instructions.)     Captain  A  must  in  this  case 

make  notes  of  what  the  message  was.     In  either  case,  Private 

ceases  to  be  a  member  of  the  patrol  and  joins  Captain  A 

as  an  observer.  He  should,  however,  at  some  later  time  be  re- 
quired to  repeat  his  message  to  Captain  A,  on  the  assumption 
that  he  had.  reached  camp  with  the  same.  The  message, 
whether  oral  or  WTitten,  should  be  thoroughly  analyzed  and  dis- 
cussed. Was  it  proper  to  send  a  message  at  this  time?  Does 
Sergeant  B  intend  to  remain  in  observation  ;  if  so,  how  long? 
(Captain  A  can  give  such  information  from  time  to  time  con- 
cerning the  hostile  patrol  as  Sergeant  B  might  reasonably  be 
supposed  to  learn  in  view  of  his  dispositions.  In  order  that 
Captain  A  may  present  natural  assumptions,  it  is  very  essential 
that  in  his  own  mind  he  should,  at  the  outset,  assume  a  situa- 
tion for  the  hostile  forces  and  that  he  should  consider  himself 
as  in  command  of  all  hostile  troops.  In  this  particular  case  he 
should  assume  himself  to  be  in  command  of  the  hostile  patrol, 
acting  under  certain  specified  orders  similar  to  examples  given, 
and  he  should  conduct  this  patrol  in  his  own  mind  in  accord- 
ance with  these  orders,  giving  Sergeant  B  only  such  information 
as  he  might  reasonably  be  expected  to  obtain  in  view  of  what- 
ever action  Sergeant  B  takes.)  Will  Sergeant  B  attempt  to 
capture  this  patrol?  If  so,  how?  Will  he  avoid  fighting  and 
attempt  to  pass  it  unobserved;  and  if  so,  how  and  why? 

In  tli is  manner  the  exercise  is  continued.    Care  must  be  taken 
not  to  have  the  patrol  leader  or  members  state  what  they  would 


PATROLLING.  165 

do,  but  they  must  actually  do  it.  Explanations  and  discussions 
may  take  place  later. 

In  a  similar  manner  the  director  may  inform  Sergeant  B  (or 
any  member  of  the  patrol)  that  this  hostile  patrol  is  followed 
by  a  squad  (on  the  assumption  that  it  is  the  leading  unit  of  an 
advance  guard),  and  the  exercise  is  then  continued  along  these 
lines. 

The  following  are  examples  of  assumption  that  might  be 
made  and  carried  out: 

(a)  That  the  patrol  is  unexpectedly  fired  upon. 

(b)  That  one  or  more  of  the  patrol  is  wounded. 

(c)  That  a  prisoner  is  captured  (let  an  observer  act  as 
prisoner ) . 

(d)  That  a  friendly  inhabitant  gives  certain  information. 

(e)  That  a  dust  cloud  is  seen  in  the  distance  over  the  trees. 
(/)  That  a  column  of  troops  can  be  seen  marching  along  a 

distant  road. 

(g)  That  an  abandoned  camp  is  discovered  and  certain  signs 
noted. 

(h)  That  the  patrol  is  attacked  by  a  superior  force  and  com- 
pelled to  scatter. 

There  is  practically  no  end  to  the  number  of  reasonable  as- 
sumptions that  may  be  made. 

Company  officers  may  use  this  method  of  instructing  non- 
commissioned officers  in  patrolling,  advance  and  rear  guard 
duty,  outposts,  and  in  squad  leading,  in  writing  messages,  in 
selecting  positions  for  trenches,  and  in  constructing  and  con- 
cealing same.  This  form  of  instruction  is  called  "  a  tactical 
walk."  It  is  very  greatly  used  by  all  foreign  armies.  Exercises 
along  the  same  general  lines  are  conducted  for  field  and  staff 
officers  and  even  general  officers,  and  are  called  "tactical 
rides  "  and  "  strategical  rides,"  depending  upon  their  object. 

After  some  proficiency  has  been  attained  as  a  result  of  these 
tactical  walks,  the  greatest  interest  and  enthusiasm  can  be 
awakened  in  this  work  by  sending  out  two  patrols  the  same  day, 
one  to  operate  against  the  other.  Each  should  wear  a  dis- 
tinctive uniform.  The  strength  of  each  patrol,  its  starting  point, 
route  to  be  followed,  and  its  orders  should  all  be  unknown  to  the 
other  patrol.     If  blank  ammunition  is  used,  an  officer  should 


166  FIELD  SERVICE. 

supervise  irs  issue  and  carefully  inspect  to  see  that  no  man 
carries  any  ball  cartridges.  One  umpire  should  accompany  the 
commander  of  each  party.  Each  umpire  should  be  fully  in- 
formed of  the  strength,  orders,  and  route  of  both  patrols.  He 
must,  however,  carefully  avoid  giving  suggestions  or  offering 
any  information  to  the  commander.  Observers  in  these  small 
maneuver  problems  are  generally  in  the  way  and  none  should 
I*.'  permitted  to  be  along. 

These  small  maneuvers  may  be  gradually  developed  by  hav- 
ing one  side  establish  an  outpost  or  fight  a  delaying  action,  etc. 

it  should  always  be  remembered  that  there  is  no  hard  and 
fast  rule  prescribing  how  a  patrol  of  three,  five,  or  any  number 
of  men  should  march.  The  same  is  equally  true  of  advance 
guards,  dnd  applies  also  to  the  establishment  of  outposts.  It 
is  simply  a  question  of  common  sense  based  on  military  knowl- 
edge. Don't  try  to  remember  any  diagrams  in  a  book.  Think 
only  of  what  you  have  been  ordered  to  do  and  how  best  you 
can  handle  your  men  to  accomplish  your  mission,  and  at  the 
same  time  save  the  men  from  any  unnecessary  hardships. 
Never  use  two  or  more  men  to  do  what  one  can  do  just  as  well, 
and  don't  let  your  men  get  beyond  your  control. 

In  addition  to  the  signals  prescribed  in  the  Infantry  Drill 
Regulations,  the  following  should  be  clearly  understood  by  the 
members  of  a  patrol. 

Enemy  in  sight  in  small  numbers,  hold  rifle  above  the  head 
horizontally ;  enemy  in  force,  same  proceeding,  raising  and 
lowering  the  rifle  several  times;  take  cover,  a  downward  motion 
of  the  hand. 

<  >ther  signals  may  be  agreed  upon,  but  they  must  be  familiar 
to  the  men;  complicated  signals  are  avoided.  Signals  must  be 
used  cautiously  so  as  not  to  convey  information  to  the  enemy. 

Section  4.  Advance  Guards. 

The  advance  guard  is  a  detachment  of  the  main  body  which 
nd  rovers  it  on  the  march.     The  primary  duty  of  an 
Is  to  insure  the  safe  and  uninterrupted  march 
Sp     ifically  its  duties  are  : 

irprise  and  furnish  information  by  re- 
conn   /. 


ADVANCE  GUARDS.  167 

2.  To  push  back  small  parties  of  the  enemy  and  prevent  their 
observing,  firing  upon,  or  delaying  the  main  body. 

3.  To  check  the  enemy's  advance  in  force  long  enough  to  per- 
mit the  main  body  to  prepare  for  action. 

4.  When  the  enemy  is  encountered  on  the  defensive,  to 
seize  a  good  position  and  locate  his  lines,  care  being  taken  not 
to  bring  on  a  general  engagement  unless  the  advance  guard  com- 
mander is  empowered  to  do  so. 

5.  To  remove  obstacles,  repair  the  road,  and  favor  in  every 
way  the  steady  march  of  the  column. 

The  strength  of  the  advance  guard  will  vary  with  the  prox- 
imity of  the  enemy  and  character  of  the  country;  for  a  regi- 
ment it  will  generally  consist  of  from  two  companies  to  a  bat- 
talion, for  a  battalion  of  one  company ;  for  a  company  of  from 
a  squad  to  a  platoon.  The  advance  guard  commander  is  re- 
sponsible for  the  proper  performance  of  the  duties  with  which 
it  is  charged  and  for  its  conduct  and  formation. 

The  advance  guard  provides  for  its  security  and  gains  infor- 
mation by  throwing  out  to  the  front  and  flanks  smaller  bodies. 
Each  part  must  keep  in  touch  with  the  unit  from  which  it  is 
sent  out.  An  advance  guard  is  generally  divided  into  a  reserve 
and  a  support;  where  it  consists  of  less  than  a  battalion,  the 
|  reserve  is  generally  omitted. 

The  support  sends  forward  an  advance  party,  which,  in  turn, 

|  sends  forward  a  point.    In  small  advance  guards  the  point  pre- 

;  cedes  the  advance  party  about  150  yards,  the  advance  party 

j  the  support  about  300  -yards,  and  the  support  the  main  body 

about  400  yards.     Where  advance  guards  are  large  enough  to 

1  require  a  reserve  these  distances  are  increased  about  one-fourth. 

the  reserve  following  the  support,  the  main  body  following  the 

reserve  at  a  distance  varying  from  500  to  800  yards. 

Unless  the  country  to  the  flanks  is  distinctly  visible  from  the 
roads  for  a  distance  of  what  may  be  said  to  be  effective  rifle 
fire,  approximately  1,000  yards,  flanking  patrols  of  two  or 
three  men  each  should  be  sent  out  from  the  advance  party,  and, 
when  in  proximity  of  the  enemy,  in  addition  from  the  support. 
When  the  nature  of  the  country  is  such  that  patrols  may  move 
across  country  without  undue  effort  and  fatigue  these  partols 
Should  march  at  a  distance  of  from  200  to  300  yards  from 


168  FIELD  SERVICE. 


the  flank  of  the  body  from  which  detached.     For  the  exam 
(nation   of   any   object,   such   as   a   wood,   buildings,   etc.,   ex 


amlning  patrols  should  be  sent  out  from  the  main  body.  The 
usual  method  of  protecting  the  flanks,  particularly  when  thei 
country  is  at  all  cut  up  or  difficult,  is  to  send  out  patrols  from: 
time  to  time  to  some  point  from  which  a  good  outlook  can  be| 
obtained,  or  which  will  afford  protection  to  the  enemy.  These 
patrols  remain  in  observation  until  the  advance  guard  has' 
'.  when  they  rejoin  the  nearest  subdivision,  as  quickly  as 
possible  working  their  way  to  that  to  which  they  belong  during 
the  halts.  By  sending  out  a  succession  of  small  patrols  in  this 
manner  the  flanks  are  protected.  Should  the  advance  party 
become  depleted,  it  must  be  reenforced  from  the  support. 

A  battalion  acting  as  advance  guard  would  have  two  compa-i 
nies  in  reserve  and  two  in  support.  The  support  would  send 
forward  as  advance  party  two  platoons,  the  advance  party  in 
turn  sending  forward  as  point  one  squad.  A  company  acting  as 
advance  guard  would  have  no  reserve  and  would  send  forward 
as  advance  party  one  platoon. 

Cases  may  arise  when  the  best  means  of  covering  the  head 
and  flank's  of  the  column  will  be  by  a  line  of  skirmishers  ex- 
tended at  intervals  of  from  5  to  50  yards,  as,  for  instance,  when 
passing  through  high  corn,  underbrush,  etc. 

It  must  always  be  remembered  that,  the  principal  duty  of  the 
advance  guard  is  to  secure  the  uninterrupted  march  of  the  main 
body.  If  the  point  is  tired  upon,  it  should  at  once  deploy  and 
endeavor  to  advance  fighting.  The  flankers  should  assist  in  this 
and  endeavor  to  locate  the  enemy's  flank  should  there  be  such 
resistance  that  advance  was  impossible.  Each  succeeding  body 
should  march  promptly  forward,  and  in  turn  be  placed  in 
action,  with  the  idea  of  clearing  the  way  for  the  advance  of  the 
main  body.  Should  this  be  impossible,  the  commander  of  the 
entire  body  must  determine  what  measures  he  will  take. 

Section   5.  Hear  guards 

A  rear  guard  is  a  detachment  detailed,  to  protect  the  main 
body  from  attack  in  rear.  In  a  retreat  it  checks  pursuit  and 
enables  the  main  body  to  increase  the  distance  between  it  and 
the  enemy  and  to  re-form  if  disorganized.  The  general  forma- 
tion is  that  of  an  advance  guard  reversed. 


FLANK  GUARDS,  OUTPOSTS. 


{      Its  commander  should  take  advantage  of  every  favorable  op- 
portunity to  delay  the  pursuers  by  obstructing  the  road  or  by 
i,|  taking  up  specially  favorable  positions  from  which  to  force  the 
e  enemy  to  deploy.     In  this  latter  case  care  must  be  taken  not 
)|  to  become  so  closely  engaged  as  to  render  withdrawal  unneces- 
sarily difficult.    The  position  taken  should  be  selected  with  ref- 
erence to  ease  of  withdrawal  and  ability  to  bring  the  enemy 
under  fire  at  long  range. 

Section  6.  Flank  guards. 

.  A  flank  guard  is  a  detachment  detailed  to  cover  the  flank  of 
(  a  column  marching  past,  or  across  the  front  of,  an  enemy.  It 
;  may  be  placed  in  position  to  protect  the  passage,  or  it  may  be 
{  so  marched  as  to  cover  the  passage.  The  object  of  the  11a nk 
j  guard  is  to  hold  the  enemy  in  check  long  enough  to  enable  the 
1  main  body  to  pass,  or,  like  the  advance  guard,  to  enable  the 
,  main  body  to  deploy.  Like  all  other  detachments,  it  should  bo 
no  larger  than  is  necessary,  and  should  not  be  detailed  except 
when  its  protection  is  required. 

When  a  flank  guard  consists  of  a  regiment  or  less,  its  dis- 
tance from  the  main  body  should  not  exceed  a  mile  and  a  half 
Practicable  communication  must  exist  between  it  and  the  main 
body.  The  flank  guard  is  marched  as  a  separate  command ; 
that  is,  with  advance  or  rear  guards,  or  both,  as  circumstances 
demand,  and  with  patrolling  on  the  exposed  flank. 

Section  7.  Outposts. 

Troops  not  on  the  march  provide  for  their  security  by  out- 
posts. The  general  duties  of  an  outpost  are  reconnoissance. 
observation,  and  resistance. 

The  specific  duties  are : 

1.  To  protect  the  main  body,  so  that  the  troops  may  rest  un- 
disturbed. 

2.  In  case  of  attack,  to  check  the  enemy  long  enough  to  enable 
the  main  body  to  make  the  necessary  dispositions. 

During  an  advance  the  outposts  are  usually  detailed  from  the 
advance  guard.  During  the  retreat  the  outpost  for  the  night 
usually  forms  the  rear  guard  the  next  day.     If  the  command 


170  FIELD  SERVICE. 

remains  in  bivouac,  the  new  outpost  generally  goes  on  duty  at 
daybreak. 

The  vigilance  of  outpost  troops  must  be  unceasing,  but  they 
should  avoid  bringing  on  combats  or  unnecessarily  alarming 
the  command.  Firing  disturbs  the  rest  of  troops  and,  if  fre- 
quently indulged  in.  ceases  to  be  a  warning. 

No  trumpet  signals  except  "  to  arms "  or  "  to  horse "  are 
sounded,  and  all  unnecessary  noises  must  be  avoided. 

As  a  rule  an  outpost  will  not  exceed  one-sixth  the  strength 
of  a  command.  For  a  single  company  a  few  sentinels  and 
patrols  will  suffice;  for  a  larger  command  a  more  elaborate 
system  must  be  devised.  The  troops  composing  the  outpost  are 
generally  divided  into  a  reserve  and  several  supports. 

At  a  proper  distance  in  front  of  the  camp  of  the  main  body  a 
line  which  offers  a  good  defensive  position  is  selected.  This  is 
called  the  line  of  resistance,  and  should  be  so  located  that  an 
advancing  enemy  will  be  held  in  check  beyond  effective  rifle 
range  in  case  of  a  small  force,  artillery  range  in  case  of  a  large 
force,  of  the  main  body  until  the  latter  can  deploy.  The  re- 
serve is  stationed  at  some  point  in  rear  of  this  line,  where  it 
can  be  moved  quickly  to  reinforce  any  point  as  needed.  The 
line  of  resistance  is  divided  into  sections,  the  limits  of  each  of 
which  are  clearly  defined.  A  support  is  assigned  to  each  sec- 
tion, which  are  numbered  from  right  to  left,  and  occupies  a 
position  on  or  near  the  line,  having  special  regard  to  covering 
avenues  of  approach.  The  position  occupied  should  always  be 
intrenched.  The  reserve  and  supports  proceed  to  their  re- 
spective positions  by  the  shortest  routes,  providing  for  their 
own  protection  by  sending  out  covering  detachments. 

Generally  speaking,  about  one-half  the  Infantry  of  the  ad- 
vance guard  should  be  in  the  supports.  As  each  support  arrives 
at  its  position  it  sends  out  observation  groups,  varying  in  size 
from  four  men  to  a  platoon,  to  watch  the  country  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  enemy.  These  groups  are  called  outguards.  For 
convenience  they  are  classified  as  pickets,  sentry  squads,  and 
oossack  posts,  and  should  be  sufficient  in  number  to  cover  the 
fr«>nt  of  the  section  occupied  by  the  support  and  connect  with 
the  neighboring  supports. 

A  picket  is  a  group  consisting  of  two  or  more  squads,  ordi- 
narily not  exceeding  half  a  company,  posted  in  the  line  of  out- 


OUTPOSTS.  171 

posts  to  cover  a  given  sector.  It  furnishes  patrols  and  one  or 
more  sentinels,  sentry  squads  or  cossack  posts  for  observation. 
Pickets  are  placed  at  the  more  important  points  in  the  line  of 
outguards,  such  as  road  forks.  The  strength  of  each  depends 
upon  the  number  of  small  groups  required  to  observe  properly 
its  sector. 

A  sentry  squad  is  a  squad  (eight  men)  posted  in  observation 
at  an  indicated  point.  It  posts  a  double  sentinel  in  observation, 
the  remaining  men  resting  near  by  and  furnishing  the  reliefs 
of  sentinels.  In  some  cases  rt  may  be  required  to  furnish  a 
patrol. 

A  cossack  post  consists  of  four  men.  It  is  an  observation 
group  similar  to  a  sentry  squad,  but  employs  a  single  sentinel. 

As  a  rule  not  more  than  one-third  of  the  support  should  be 
on  outguard  duty.  As  soon  as  they  are  sent  out  to  their  posi- 
tions the  support  commander  selects  a  defensive  position  on 
the  line  of  resistance;  gives  instruction  for  intrenching  same; 
establishes  a  sentinel  to  watch  for  and  transmit  signals  from 
outguards ;  sends  out  patrols  to  reconnoiter  the  country  to  the 
front  of  his  section  and,  if  on  the  flank  of  the  line,  the  flank ; 
and  then  proceeds  to  make  a  careful  reconnoissance  of  the  sec- 
tion, assigned  him,  rectifying  the  position  of  outguards  if  neces- 
sary, seeing  that  they  understand  their  instructions  in  case  of 
attack  or  when  strangers  approach  their  posts,  and  pointing  out 
their  lines  of  retreat  in  case  they  are  compelled  to  fall  back  on 
the  support 

When  the  outguards  are  established,  the  members  of  the  sup- 
port may  stack  arms  and  remove  equipment  except  cartridge 
belts  No  fires  will  be  built  or  smoking  permitted  unless  spe- 
cially authorized,  or  no  loud  talking  or  other  noise.  All  patrol- 
ling to  the  front  will  be  done,  as  a  rule,  from  the  support.  The 
support  commander  should  locate  the  position  of  the  adjacent 
supporcs  and  make  arrangements  with  the  commanders  for  the 
joint  defense  of  the  line  of  resistance.  At  nights  all  roads  and 
trails  should  be  carefully  covered  and  the  country  to  the  front 
and  between  adjacent  outguards  well  patrolled. 

The  line  occupied  by  the  outguards  is  called  the  line  of  ob- 
servation. Outguards  move  to  their  positions  providing  for 
their  own  protection  and  so  as  to  conceal  the  movement  from 


172  FIELD  SERVICE. 

the  enemy.  These  positions  are  intrenched  and  are  numbered 
from  right  to  left  in  each  support. 

The  duties  of  the  outguard  are  to  observe  the  enemy,  to  guard 
the  outpost  from  surprise,  and  to  make  a  preliminary  resistance 
to  the  enemy's  advance.  The  strength  of  the  outguard  will  vary 
according  to  its  object.  When  an  important  road  which  at 
night  will  afford  a  line  of  advance,  or  a  bridge  is  to  be  covered, 
or  when  several  posts  are  established  from  an  outguard  it 
should  be  of  considerable  strength,  two  squads  or  a  platoon. 
When  mere  observation  and  alarm  are  all  that  is  required  four 
men  will  suffice.  A  squad  is  a  good  unit  to  use  as  an  outguard ; 
this  will  allow  one  double  sentry  post  of  three  reliefs  and  one 
man  in  addition  to  the  commander,  who  may  be  used  for 
messenger  service.    The  outguard  should  be  carefully  concealed. 

The  utmost  quiet  should  be  observed,  and  there  should  be  no 
cooking  or  smoking.  The  intervals  between  outguards  will 
depend  upon  the  situation  and  the  terrain.  The  line  of  observa- 
tion is  not  necessarily  continuous,  but  all  avenues  of  approach 
must  be  carefully  guarded.  The  distance  of  the  outguard  from 
the  support  likewise  is  governed  by  the  terrain,  but  in  general 
may  be  said  to  be  from  300  to  400  yards.  In  thick  country  or  at 
night  outguards  patrol  along  the  line  of  observation  between 
posts.  Communication  between  outguards  and  the  support  is 
by  signal  and  messenger,  in  special  cases  by  wire.  Members  of 
the  outguard  retain  possession  of  their  weapons  and  do  not 
remove  their  equipment. 

Sentinels  from  the  outguard  are  posted  so  as  to  avoid  obser- 
vation, but  so. that  they  may  have  a  clear  lookout  and  be  able 
to  see,  if  possible,  by  day,  the  sentinels  of  the  adjacent  out- 
guards. Double  sentinels  are  always  posted  near  enough  to 
each  other  to  communicate  easily  in  ordinary  voice.  Sentinels 
are  generally  on  post  two  hours  out  of  six.  For  every  sentinel 
and  every  patrol  there  should  be  three  reliefs,  and  outguards 
should  be  of  a  strength  sufficient  to  allow  this.  The  position 
of  a  sentinel  should  be  selected  with  reference  to  observation. 
It  may  be  advantageous  to  place  a  sentinel  in  a  tree.  Sentinels 
furnished  by  cossack  posts  or  sentry  squads  are  kept  near  their 
group.  Those  furnished  by  their  pickets  may  be  kept  as  far  as 
100  yards  away. 


OUTPOSTS.  173 

Reliefs,  visiting  patrols,  and  inspecting  officers  approach  senti- 
nels from  the  rear. 

A  sentinel  on  the  line  of  observation  should  always  have  the 
following  instructions:  The  names  of  villages,  streams,  and 
prominent  features  in  sight  and  where  the  roads  lead.  The 
number  (if  any)  of  his  post,  and  the  number  of  his  and  of  the 
adjoining  outguards :  the  position  of  the  support;  the  line  of 
retreat  to  be  followed  if  the  outguard  is  compelled  to  fall  back; 
the  position  of  advance  'detachments  and  whether  friendly 
patrols  are  operating  in  front ;  to  watch  to  the  front  and  flanks 
\ythout  intermission  and  devote  special  attention  to  unusual 
or  suspicious  occurrences ;  if  he  sees  indications  of  the  enemy, 
to  at  once  notify  his  immediate  superior;  in  case  of  imminent 
danger,  or  when  an  attack  is  made,  to  give  the  alarm  by  firing 
rapidly ;  by  day  to  pass  in  or  out  officers,  noncommissioned 
officers,  and  detachments  recognized  as  part  of  the  outposts, 
and  officers  known  to  have  authority  to  do  so;  to  detain  all 
others  and  notify  the  outguard  commander;  at  night,  when 
persons  approach  his  post,  to  come  to  a  ready,  halt  them,  and 
notify  the  outguard  commander;  the  latter  challenges,  ascer- 
tains their  identity,  and  acts  accordingly.  When  individuals 
fail  to  halt,  or  otherwise  disobey,  to  fire  upon  them  after  a 
second  warning,  or  sooner  if  they  attempt  to  attack  or  escape; 
to  require  deserters  to  lay  down  their  arms,  and  remain  until  a 
patrol  is  sent  out  to  bring  them  in ;  to  order  deserters  pursued 
by  the  enemy  to  drop  their  arms  and  to  give  an  alarm ;  if  they 
fail  to  obey  they  are  fired  upon;  to  require  bearers  of  flags  of 
truce  and  their  escorts  to  halt  and  to  face  outward;  to  permit 
them  to  hold  no  conversation  and  to  see  that  they  are  then  blind- 
folded and  disposed  of  in  accordance  with  instructions  from  the 
support  commander;  if  they  fail  to  obey  to  fire  upon  them;  at 
night,  to  remain  practically  stationary,  moving  about  for  pur- 
poses of  observation  only ;  not  to  sit  or  lie  down  unless  author- 
ized to  do  so ;  in  the  daytime,  to  make  use  of  natural  or  artificial 
cover  and  assume  such  positions  as  to  give  him  the  best  field  of 
view ;  to  inform  passing  patrols  of  what  he  has  seen ;  to  carry 
his  weapon  habitually  loaded  and  locked  and  at  will. 

Outpost  patrols  are  divided  into  those  which  operate  beyond 
the  lines  and  those  whose  duty  lies  principally  within  the  lines. 


174  FIELD  SERVICE. 

The  former,  called  reconnoitering  patrols,  scout  in  the  direction 
of  the  enemy;  the  latter,  called  visiting  patrols,  maintain  com- 
munication between  the  parts  of  the  outpost  and  supervise  the 
performance  of  duty  on  the  line  of  observation.  Reconnois- 
sance  should  be  continuous.  Though  scouts  and  detachments 
of  cavalry  remain  in  contact  with  the  enemy,  or  at  least  push 
forward  to  a  considerable  distance,  more  detailed  reconnois- 
sance  by  infantry  patrojs  in  the  foreground  must  not  be  neg- 
lected. Reconnoitering  patrols  are  composed  of  at  least  two 
men  and  a  skillful  leader,  who.  in  important  cases,  would  be 
nn  officer.  They  obtain  information,  ascertain  the  presence  of 
the  enemy,  or  discover  his  approach.  All  patrols,  when  they 
cross  the  line  of  observation,  inform  the  nearest  sentinel  of 
the  direction  in  which  they  are  to  advance;  on  their  return 
they  similarly  report  what  they  have  seen  of  the  enemy ;  signals 
are  agreed  upon  so  that  they  can  be  recognized  when  returning. 
Any  ground  near  the  line  of  observation  which  might  afford 
cover  for  troops,  or  for  scouts  or  spies,  and  the  approach  to 
which  can  not  be  observed  by  sentinels,  is  searched  frequently 
by  patrols.  Definite  information  concerning  the  enemy  is  re- 
ported at  once.  Patrols  fire  only  in  self-defense  or  to  give  the 
alarm.  Supports  on  the  flank  of  an  outpost  position  patrol  the 
country  on  the  exposed  flank.  Visiting  patrols  and  reliefs 
should  not  march  in  the  open,  and  thereby  expose  the  position 
of  sentinels* 

During  a  march  in  the  vicinity  of  the  enemy  when  halts  are 
made,  special  measures  for  protection  are  taken.  When  the 
halt  is  for  a  short  period,  less  than  half  an  hour,  the  advance 
party  and  support  remain  at  ease,  the  point  and  flankers  move 
to  positions  from  which  they  can  obtain  a  good  lookout,  and 
additional  patrols  may  be  sent  out  from  advance  parties  and 
supports.  Where  the  halt  is  for  a  period  exceeding  half  an 
hour  a  march  outpost  should  be  formed.  With  an  advance 
guard  consisting  of  a  battalion,  2  companies  in  the  reserve,  2 
in  the  support,  the  latter  having  as  advance  party  one-half  a 
company,  a  typical  march  outpost  would  be  formed  as  follows : 
The  advance  party  would  send  one  platoon,  four 'or  five  hundred 
yards  to  the  right  as  outguard  No.  1,  the  remaining  platoon 
constituting  outguard  No.  2.  A  platoon  from  the  head  of  the 
support  would  be  sent  a  similar  distance'to  the  left  as  outguard 


RIFLE  TRENCHES.  175 

No.  3.  The  balance  of  the  support  would  constitute  the  support 
of  the  march  outpost,  the  reserve  of  the  advance  guard  acting  as 
reserve.  On  signal  being  given  to  resume  the  march,  the  various 
units  would  close  in,  and  as  soon  as  the  advance  party  had 
assembled  the  march  would  be  taken  up. 

Section  8.  P.iSe  Trenches. 

Soldiers  should  remember  that  only  by  acting  vigorously  on 
the  offensive  can  an  army  hope  to  gain  the  victory.  The  de- 
fensive may  delay  or  stop  the  enemy,  but  it  can  never  destroy 
him.  "Troops  dig  because  they  are  forced  to  halt;  they  do  not 
halt  to  dig." 

Trenches  will  frequently  be  constructed,  without  being  used, 
and  soldiers  must  expect  this  as  a  feature  of  campaigning  and 
accept  cheerfully  what  at  .times  may  appear  as  unnecessary 
labor. 

When  intrenching  under  fire  cover  is  first  secured  in  the 
lying  position,  each  man  scooping  out  a  depression  for  his  body 
and  throwing  the  earth  to  the  front.  In  this  position  no  ex- 
cavation can  be  conveniently  made  for  the  legs,  but  if  time  per- 
mits the  original  excavation  is  enlarged  and  deepened  until  it 
is  possible  to  assume  a  sitting  position,  with  the  legs  crossed 
and  the  shoulder  to  the  parapet.  In  such  a  position  a  man  pre- 
sents a  smaller  target  to  shrapnel  bullets  than  in  the  lying 
trench  and  can  fire  more  comfortably  and  with  less  exposure 
than  in  the  kneeling  trench.  From  the  sitting  position  the  ex- 
cavation may  be  continued  until  a  standing  trench  is  secured. 

The  accompanying  plate  shows  some  of  the  more  common 
forms  of  trenches  in  profile.  Figure  1  is  the  simplest  form  of 
standing  trench.  Figure  2  shows  the  same  trench  deepened  in 
rear,  so  as  to  allow  men  to  walk  along  in  the  rear  (deeper) 
portion  pf  the  trench  without  exposing  their  heads  above  the 
parapet.  Figure  3  shows  a  cover  and  firing  trench,  with  a  cham- 
ber in  which  men  can  find  shelter  when  under  heavy  artillery 
fire.  When  the  excavated  earth  is  easily  removed  figure  4 
shows  a  good  profile.  The  enemy's  infantry,  as  well  as  his 
artillery,  will  generally  have  great  difficulty  in  seeing  this  type 
of  trench. 


176  FIELD  SERVICE. 

The  mound  or  bank  of  earth  thrown  up  for  shelter  in  front 
of  a  trench  is  called  the  parapet.  It  should  be  at  least  30 
inches  thick  on  top,  and  the  front  should  slope  gradually,  as 
shown  in  the  plate,  so  that  shells  will  tend  to  glance  from  it, 
rather  than  penetrate  and  explode.  The  top  should  be  covered 
with  sod,  grass,  or  leaves,  so  as  to  hide  the  newly  turned  earth, 
which  could  be  easily  seen  and  aimed  at  by  the  enemy.  There 
should  be  no  rocks,  loose  stones,  or  pebbles  on  top,  which  might 
be  struck  by  the  bullets,  splintering  and  flying,  thus  adding 
greatly  to  the  number  of  dangerous  projectiles,  and  ofteu  de- 
flecting bullets  downward  into  the  trench.  A  stone  wall  is  a 
very  dangerous  thing  to  be  behind  in  a  fight. 

The  portion  of  the  ground  in  rear  of  the  parapet  and  between 
the  parapet  and  the  trench  not  covered  by  the  parapet  is  to  rest 
the  elbows  on  when  firing,  the  rifle  being  rested  on  top  of  the 
parapet. 

To  obtain  head  cover  in  a  trench  fill  a  gunny  sack  or  other  bag 
with  sand  or  soil  and  place  it  on  top  of  the  parapet,  aiming, 
around  the  right-hand  side  of  it,  or  dig  a  small  lateral  trench  in 
the  parapet  large  enough  to  hold  the  rifle.  Roof  it  over  with 
boards,  small  logs,  or  brush,  and  heap  dirt  on  top,  aiming 
through  the  small  trench  or  resulting  loophole. 

Figure  5  shows  the  plan  of  a  section  of  a  rifle  trench.1  Be- 
tween the  portions  occupied  by  each  squad  there  is  often  placed 
a  mound  of  earth  as  high  as  the  top  of  the  parapet  and  pro- 
jecting back  into  the  trench.  This  is  called  a  traverse  and 
protects  the  occupants  of  the  trench  from  fire  from  a  flank. 
Bullets  from  this  direction  hit  a  traverse,  instead  of  flying  down 
into  the  trench  and  wounding  several  men. 

Trenches  are  seldom  continuous,  but  are  made  in  sections 
placed  at  the  most  advantageous  points,  as  shown  in  figure  6. 
A  company  or  battalion  may  occupy  a  single  section.  The  fir- 
ing trenches  have  cover  trenches  in  rear  of  them,  where  the 
supports  Can  rest  undisturbed-  by  the  hostile  fire  until  they 
are  needed  in  the  firing  trench  to  repel  a  serious  assault  or 
to  take  part  in  a  counter  attack.    Passages  consisting  of  deep 

1  The  traverse  should  be  at  least  6  feet  wide  instead  of  3  feet,  as 
shown  in  bgure  5. 


KIFLE  TRENCHES.  177 

communicating  trenches  facilitate  passage  from  the  cover 
trenches  to  the  firing  trenches  when  under  fire.  These  com- 
municating trenches  are  usually  zigzag  or  traversed  to  prevent 
their  being  swept  by  hostile  fire. 

When  troops  are  likely  to  remain  in  trenches  for  a  consid- 
erable time  drainage  should  be  arranged  for,  and  latrines  and 
dressing  stations  should  be  constructed  in  trenches.  Water 
should  be  brought  into  the  trenches  and  holes  excavated  in  the 
front  wall  of  the  trench  for  extra  ammunition. 

In  digging  trenches  men  usually  work  in  reliefs,  one  relief 
digging  while  the  others  rest,  the  proportion  of  shovelers  to 
pick  men  being  about  3  to  1.  If  a  plow  can  be  obtained  to  turn 
the  sod,  it  will  greatly  facilitate  the  initial  work  of  digging. 


Foathdd 


Plate  V 


Plonks  or  poles  ani 
bush  laid  before  any  > 
other  work  on  Fig.  f/ 
Chamber  mined  after  cony  it 
cnFigZ 


Pockets  may  be  exca- 
vated forammuntion 


Fig.3. 


f necessary  excaxrie 
for feet when 
S/tting. 

Nopompet-wasterhe  earth 
FigA 


TRA 
SQUAD  TRENCH       VERSE 


PARAPET 


SQUAD  TRENCH 


TRA 
>ERSE\      SQUAD  TRENCH 


V        PASSAGE    J  fyS  V         PASSAGE    J 


I     '—JZ        -A         A 


^^<*, 


Possible  arrangement  of  2  Bns.  cf  Inf.  intrenched  (Regimental  Reserve  of  t  Bn.nol.slmt* 
A      Firing  trenches. 
B     Cover  trenches, 

C      Communicating  trench ';  D ]same  traversed ';  £ 'communicating  way     - 
F      Closed  supporting  point  for  Flank  protection 
MC.  Possible  posdfon  for  machine  guns,  concealed  from  front 
F,g6 
178 


CHAPTER  VII. 

MARCHING  AND  CAMPING. 


Section  1.  Breaking  Camp  and  Preparation  for  a  March. 

THE   EVENING    BEFORE   THE   MARCH. 

When  a  command  learns  that  it  is  to  make  a  march  on  the 
following  day,  presumably  starting  early  in  the  morning,  cer- 
tain details  should  be  attended  to  the  evening  before. 

All  men  should  fill  their  canteens  as  there  will  probably  be 
no  time  for  this  in  the  morning. 

The  mess  sergeant  should  find  out  whether  lunch  or  the  re- 
serve ration  will  be  carried  on  the  march  and  should  attend  to 
these  details  in  the  evening  in  order  that  the  issue  can  be  made 
promptly  in  the  morning. 

The  commander  of  the  guard  should  be  given  a  memorandum 
as  to  what  time  to  awaken  the  cooks  and  where  their  tent  is. 
The  member  of  the  guard  who  does  this  should  awaken  them 
without  noise  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  rest  of  the  remainder  of 
the  command. 

The  cooks  should  be  instructed  as  to  what  time  breakfast  is 
to  be  served  and  what  time  to  awaken  the  first  sergeant. 

The  cooks  or  cook's  police  must  cut  and  split  all  firewood  for 
the  morning  before  9  p.  m.  There  must  be  no  chopping,  talk- 
ing, or  rattling  of  pans  before  reveille  which  will  disturb  the 
rest  of  the  command,     This  applies  to  every  morning  in  camp. 

THE    MORNING    OF   THE    MARCH. 

Cooks  arise  when  called  by  the  guard  and  start  the  prepara- 
tion of  breakfast  without,  noise.     The  first  sergeant  is  usually 

179 


180  MARCHING  AND  CAMPING. 

awakened  by  one  of  the  cooks  about  half  an  hour  before  reveille 
in  order  that  he  may  complete  his  toilet  and  breakfast  early 
and  be  able  to  devote  all  his  time  to  supervising  the  details  of 
the  morning's  work.  If  the  officers  desire  to  be  awakened  be- 
fore reveille  they  will  notify  the  first  sergeant  accordingly. 

At  first  call  the  men  turn  out,  perform  their  toilets,  strike 
their  shelter  tents  (unless  it  has  been  directed  to  await  the 
sounding  of  the  general  for  this),  and  make  up  their  packs. 

At  the  sounding  of  assembly  immediately  after  reveille  each 
man  must  be  in  his  proper  place  in  ranks.  This  assembly  is 
under  arms.  The  first  sergeant  starts  to  call  the  roll  or  com- 
mands "Keport"  at  the  last  note  of  assembly.  Arms  are 
stacked  before  the  company  is  dismissed. 

Breakfast  is  served  to  the  company  immediately  after  roll 
calL  Immediately  after  breakfast  each  man  will  wash  his  mess 
kit  in  the  hot  water  provided  for  that  purpose  at  the  kitchen  and 
will  at  once  pack  the  mess  kit  in  his  haversack. 

The  cooks  will  provide  hot  water  for  washing  mess  kits  at  the 
same  time  that  breakfast  is  served. 

Immediately  after  breakfast  the  company  proceeds  to  the 
work  of  breaking  camp  and  packing  in  accordance  with  a  pre- 
arranged system  similar  to  the  following: 

One  squad  assists  the  cooks  in  packing  the  kitchen. 

One  squad  strikes  and  folds  the  officers'  tents  and  brings 
them  to  the  kitchen. 

One  squad  fills  in  the  sink.  The  sink  should  not  be  filled  in 
earlier  than  is  absolutely  necessary. 

One  squad  polices  the  camp  within  the  company  police  limits. 

One  squad  is  available  for  possible  details  from  regimental 
headquarters. 

Officers  and  first  sergeant  supervise  the  work. 

A  permanent  assignment  of  squads  to  these  duties  lightens 
the  labor  and  decreases  the  time  necessary  for  breaking  camp. 
After  the  breaking  of  camp  the  entire  company  is  used  to  police 
camp. 

Men  should  not  start  from  camp  thirsty,  but  should  drink  all 
the  water  rhey  want  immediately  after  breakfast.  All  canteens 
should  be  filled  before  marching,  one  man  in  each  squad  being 
detailed  to  fill  the  canteens  for  his  squad. 


MARCHING.  181 

At  assembly  for  the  march  the  men  fall  in  in  rear  of  the 
stacks  fully  equipped  for  marching. 

Section  2.  Marching. 

The  principal  work  of  troops  in  the  field- consists  of  marching. 
Battles  take  place  only  at  indefinite  intervals,  but  marches  are 
of  daily  occurrence.  It  is  only  by  good  marching  that  troops 
can  arrive  at  a  given  point  at  a  given  time  and  in  good  con- 
dition for  battle. 

The  rate  of  march  depends  greatly  upon  the  condition  of  the 
roads  and  the  weather,  but  the  average  rate  for  infantry  is 
about  2\  miles  per  hour.  This  allows  for  a  rest  of  10  minutes 
each  hour.  The  total  distance  marched  in  a  day  depends  not 
only  on  the  rate  of  march,  but  upon  the  size  of  the  command, 
large  commands  often  covering  only  about  10  miles  a  day,  while 
small  commands  easily  cover  double  that  distance. 

In  order  to  make  the  march  with  the  greatest  comfort  and 
the  least  danger,  it  is  necessary  that  each  unit  be  kept  well  in 
hand.  Each  man  is  permitted  and  encouraged  to  make  himself 
as  comfortable  as  possible  at  all  times,  excepting  only  that  he 
must  not  interfere  with  the  comfort  of  others  or  with  the  march 
of  the  column. 

Infantry  generally  marches  in  column  of  squads,  but  on  nar- 
row roads  or  trails  column  of  twos  or  files  is  used.  The  route 
step  is  habitually  used  when  silence  is  not  required.  In  large 
commands,  in  order  that  the  column  be  kept  in  hand,  it  is  very 
necessary  that  each  man  keep  his  place  in  ranks  and  follow  his 
file  leader  at  the  prescribed  distance.  This  is  one  of  the  best 
tests  for  determining  the  discipline  and  efficiency  of  troops. 
The  equipment  should  be  carefully  adjusted  before  starting  out, 
and  any  part  that  is  not  comfortable  should  be  rearranged  at 
the  first  opportunity.  The  rifle  is  carried  at  will,  except  that 
the  muzzle  must  be  pointed  up  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the 
other  men. 

Under  no  circumstances  will  any  man  leave  the  ranks  with- 
out permission  from  his  company  or  higher  commander.  If  the 
absence  is  to  be  for  more  than  a  short  while,  he  must  be  given 
a  pass  showing  his  name,  rank,  and  organization,  and  the  rea- 


182  MARCHING  AND  CAMPING. 

son  he  is  permitted  to  be  absent.  If  sick,  it  is  better  to  wait; 
by  the  roadside  at  some  comfortable  place  for  the  arrival  of  thet 
surgeon  or  the  ambulance.  In  any  case,  the  soldier  keeps  hisj 
rifle  and  equipment  with  him,  if  possible.  Soldiers  absent  fromj 
their  organization  without  a  pass  will  be  arrested  and  returned! 
to  their  command  for  punishment. 

Marches  in  hot  weather  are  particularly  trying.  Green  leaves' 
or  a  damp  cloth  carried  in  the  hat  lessens  the  chance  of  sun-i 
stroke.  The  hat  should  have  ventilators,  and  when  not  exposed; 
to  the  direct  rays  of  the  sun  it  should  be  removed  from  the 
head.  It  is  well  to  keep  the  clothing  about  the  neck  and  throat 
open,  and  sometimes  to  turn  up  the  shirt  sleeves  so  as  to  leave 
the  wrists  free. 

The  canteen  should  always  be  filled  before  starting  out:  Use 
the  water  very  sparingly.  None  at  all  should  be  drunk  during 
the  first  three  or  four  hours  of  the  march.  After  that  take  only 
a  few  mouthfuls  at  a  time  and  wash  out  the  mouth  and  throat. 
Except  possibly  in  very  hot  weather,  one  canteen  of  water 
should  last  for  the  entire  day's  march.  Excessive  water  drink- 
ing on  the  march  will  play  a  man  out  very  quickly.  Old  sol- 
diers never  drink  when  marching.  A  small  pebble  carried  in 
the  mouth  keeps  it  moist  and  therefore  reduces  thirst.  Or  a 
small  piece  of  chocolate  may  occasionally  be  eaten.  Smoking 
is  very  depressing  during  a  march. 

Canteens  will  not  be  refilled  on  the  march  without  authority 
from  an  officer,  as  the  clearest  water,  whether  from  a  well, 
spring,  or  running  stream,  may  be  very  impure  and  the  source 
of  many  camp  diseases.  If- canteens  are  to  be  refilled,  it  should 
be  done  by  order,  and  a  detail  is  generally  made  for  this 
purpose. 

Entering  upon  private  property  without  permission,  or  steal- 
ing fruit,  etc.,  from  gardens  and  orchards,  is  a  serious  military 
offense,  as  well  as  a  violation  of  the  civil  laws. 

When  a  cooked  meal  is  carried,  it  should  not  be  eaten  until 
the  proper  time. 

A  command  ordinarily  marches  for  50  minutes  and  halts  for 
10  minutes.  The  first  halt  in  a  day's  march  is  for  about  15 
minutes,  is  made  after  about  30  minutes'  marching,  and  is  for 
the  express  purpose  of  allowing  the  men  to  relieve  themselves. 


MAKING  CAMP.  183 

Men  who  wish  to  do  this  should  attend  to  it  at  once  and  not 
wait  until  the  command  is  almost  ready  to  march  again. 

At  every  halt  get  all  the  rest  possible  and  don't  spend  the 
time  wandering  around  or  standing  about.  Only  green  recruits 
do  this.  If  the  ground  is  dry,  stretch  out  at  full  length,  remov- 
ing the  pack  or  blanket  roll  and  belt,  and  get  in  as  comfortable 
position  as  possible.  The  next  best  way  is  to  sit  down  with  a 
good  back  rest  against  a  tree  or  a  fence  or  some  other  object. 
Never  sit  down  or  lie  down,  however,  on  wet  or  damp  ground. 
Sit  on  your  pack  or  blanket  roll,  or  on  anything  else  that  is  dry. 
At  a  halt  it  is  very  refreshing  to  adjust  the  underclothing. 

Section  3.  Making  Camp. 

On  reaching  the  camp  site  the  men  should  be  allowed  to  fall 
out  and  rest  as  soon  as  the  arms  have  been  stacked  and  the 
shelter  tents  pitched.  If  the  blanket  rolls  have  been  carried  on 
the  wagons,  then  the  location  of  the  front  poles  of  the  shelter 
tents  should  be  marked  before  they  are  allowed  to  fall  out.  The 
men  will  not  be  allowed  to  relieve  themselves  until  sinks  are 
(hag.  Temporary  sinks  may  be  dug  with  intrenching  tools,  if 
carried.  A  guard  should  be  placed  over  the  water  supply  at 
once. 

As  soon  as  the  shelter  tents  are  pitched  the  company  proceeds 
to  the  remainder  of  the  camp  work  in  accordance  with  a  perma- 
nent assignment  similar  to  the  following: 

One  squad  helps  arrange  the  kitchen. 

One  squad  pitches  the  officers'  tents. 

One  squad  digs  the  sink. 

One  squad  procures  wood  and  water. 

One  squad  is  held  available  for  details  from  regimental  head- 
quarters. 

The  officers  and  first  sergeant  supervise  the  work. 

The  sinks  are  located  by  the  commanding  officer.  The  detail 
to  dig  them  should  wait  until  informed  of  the  location.  An 
officer  should  inspect  the  sink  as  soon  as  the  detail  reports  it  as 
completed. 

After  the  camp  has  been  put  in  order  the  first  sergeant  makes 
the  details  from  roster  for  kitchen  police  and  noncommissioned 


184  MARCHING  AND  CAMPING. 

officer  in  charge  of  quarters  for  the  next  day  and  for  such 
guard  as  may  be  ordered  for  that  day. 

The  details  called  for  by  regimental  headquarters  for  pitch- 
ing the  headquarters  camp  for  the  quartermaster,  etc.,  should 
be  reported  to  the  adjutant  without  delay. 

The  cooks  pitch  their  tent  at  that  end  of  the  company  street 
nearest  the  kitchen.  Space  must  be  left  for  this  tent  if  the 
cooks  are  not  in  ranks  when  the  company  pitches  tents.  Unless 
lunch  has  been  carried  or  cooked  during  the  march,  the  cooks 
should  get  to  work  on  a  hot  meal  as  soon  as  possible.  The 
kitchen  police  rep6rt  at  the  kitchen  as  soon  as  their  tent  is 
pitched.    Wood  and  water  will  be  required  at  once. 

Officers  should  avoid  keeping  the  men  unnecessarily  under 
arms  or  on  their  feet  after  a  hard  day's  march. 

When  the  details  of  making  camp  have  been  completed,  all 
men  should  at  once  care  for  their  rifles  and  feet.  (For  details 
as  to  the  care  of  the  rifle  see  page  20,  for  the  care  of  the  feet 
see  page  46.) 

Section  4.  Camp  Service  and  Duties. 

In  camp  "  Reveille  "  is  preceded  by  "  First  call,"  and  a  march 
played  by  the  band  or  field  music,  and  is  followed  immediately 
by  "Assembly."  If  there  is  a  reveille  gun,  it  is  fired  at  the  first 
note  of  the  march  and  is  the  signal  for  all  to  arise.  The  roll  is 
called  at  the  last  notes  of  assembly  after  reveille.  At  this  forma- 
tion men  should  fall  in  in  the  proper  uniform — rifle  and  belt, 
service  hat,  olive-drab  flannel  shirt,  service  breeches,  leggings, 
and  shoes.  The  regimental  commander  may  prescribe  that 
coats  are  to  be  worn  and  will  prescribe  the  exact  uniform  for 
all  drills,  parades,  and  other  formations,  as  well  as  for  men 
going  on  pass. 

Immediately  after  reveille  roll  call  the  sergeant  next  in  rank 
to  the  first  sergeant  takes  command  of  the  company  and  deploys 
it  for  a  general  police  of  the  camp  within  the  limits  assigned 
to  the  company.  Men  pick  up  all  scraps  of  paper  and  rubbish 
of  all  kinds,  depositing  it  in  the  company  incinerator  or  place 
designated  for  the  purpose.  The  police  limits  of  each  company 
are  usually  designated  as  extending  from  head  to  rear  of  camp 


CAMP  SERVICE  AND  DUTIES.  185 

within  the  space  occupied  by  the  company  street,  including  the 
ground  occupied  by  the  tents  of  the  company,  no  unassigned 
space  being  left  between  companies. 

Immediately  after  breakfast  men  police  their  tents  and  raise 
walls  of  same.  If  the  day  is  fair,  all  bedding  should  be  spread 
on  the  tents  for  several  hours'  airing. 

At  sick  call  all  men  who  are  sick  fall  in  and  are  marched  to 
the  regimental  infirmary,  under  charge  of  the  noncommissioned 
officer  in  charge  of  quarters.  The  noncommissioned  officer  takes 
with  him  the  company  sick  report  previously  filled  in  and  signed 
by  the  company  commander.  The  surgeon  examines  all  those 
reporting  and  indicates  their  status  on  the  sick  report.  This 
status  may  be  "Duty"  (available  for  all  duty),  "Quarters" 
(patient  to  remain  in  tent  or  company  street),  and  "Hospital  " 
(patient  to  be  sent  to  the  hospital).  The  noncommissioned  offi- 
cer then  returns  to  the  company  with  all  the  men  not  marked 
"  Hospital "  and  hands  the  sick  report  to  the  first  sergeant. 

At  "  Drill  call "  the  company  prepares  for  drill  and  falls  in 
so  that  it  will  be  completely  formed  at  assembly,  which  is 
usually  sounded  10  minutes  after  drill  call.  All  men  are  re- 
quired to  attend  drill  except  those  excused  by  sick  report  and 
those  specially  excused  from  headquarters.  The  excused  list 
should  include  in  each  company  only  the  mess  sergeant,  the  two 
cooks,  one  kitchen  police,  and  men  on  regimental  guard.  Dur- 
ing drill  hours  the  guard  to  be  excused  should  be  limited  to  a 
small  patrol  to  guard  against  fire  and  thieves  in  camp. 

If  the  bedding  has  been  aired,  it  should  be  taken  in  imme- 
diately after  drill  and  placed  in  the  tents  neatly  folded. 

Some  time  during  the  morning,  at  a  time  designated  by  him, 
the  company  commander  inspects  the  entire  company  camp.  At 
this  inspection  the  entire  street  should  be  policed,  kitchen  in 
order,  and  tents  policed,  as  follows : 

In  permanent  camp,  when  pyramidal,  conical,  or  wall  tents 
are  used :  Bedding  folded  neatly  and  placed  on  the  head  of  the 
cot.  (If  bed  sacks  are  used,  they  will  be  folded  in  three  folds 
and  the  bedding  placed  on  top.)  Hats  on  top  of  ttie  bedding. 
Shoes  under  foot  of  cot.  Surplus  kit  bag  at  side  of  squad 
leader's  cot.  Equipment  suspended  neatly  from  a  frame  ar- 
ranged around  the  tent  pole.  Rifles  in  rack  constructed  around 
the  tent  pole. 


186  MARCHING  AND  CAMPING. 

In  shelter-tent  camp:  Bedding  neatly  folded  and  placed  at 
rear  of  tent,  ponchos  underneath.  Equipment  arranged  on  the 
bedding.     Rifles  laid  on  bedding  except  when  used  as  tent  poles. 

The  regimental  commander  prescribes  the  exact  scheme  to  be 
followed  in  the  police  of  tents. 

Should  there  be  no  parade,  retreat  roll  call  is  held  at  the  same 
hour.  This  roll  call  is  under  arms  and  is  supervised  by  an  officer 
of  the  company.  After  the  roll  call  and  at  the  sounding  of  "  Re- 
treat," the  officer  brings  the  company  to  parade  rest  and  keeps 
it  in  this  position  during  the  sounding  of  this  call.  At  the  first 
note  of  the  National  Anthem  ("  The  Star-Spangled  Banner  ")  or 
"  To  the  Color  "  the  company  is  brought  to  attention  and  so 
stands  until  the  end  of  the  playing.  The  officer  then  reports 
the  result  of  the  roll  call  to  the  adjutant  or  officer  of  the  day, 
returns  to  the  company,  inspects  the  arms,  and  dismisses  it. 

At  the  sounding  of  "  Call  to  quarters  "  all  men  will  repair 
to  their  company  street. 

After  taps  has  sounded  all  talking  must  cease  and  all  lights 
must  be  extinguished,  and  so  remain  until  first  call  for  reveille. 

In  camp  all  enlisted  men  are  prohibited  from  crossing  the 
officers'  street,  or  from  visiting  officers'  tents  unless  actually  en- 
gaged in  some  duty  requiring  them  to  do  so,  or  sent  for  by  an 
officer. 

Men  are  not  allowed  to  leave  camp  without  a  pass  signed  by 
the  company  commander  and  countersigned  by  the  regimental 
adjutant.  The  first  sergeant  is  sometimes  allowed  to  give  men 
permission  to  leave  camp  from  retreat  to  taps. 

The  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  of  quarters,  detailed 
for  24  hours  goes  on  duty  each  day  at  reveille.  He  is  respon- 
sible that  the  grounds  around  the  company  are  kept  in  proper 
police;  that  no  loud  noise,  disturbance,  or  disorder  occurs  in 
the  company  street ;  that  men  confined  to  the  company  street  do 
not  leave  the  same  without  proper  authority.  He  reports  men 
who  are  sick  to  the  surgeon.  He  may  be  required  to  report 
all  other  details  called  for.  He  accompanies  the  captain  in  his 
daily  inspection  of  the  company.  He  will  not  leave  the  company 
street  during  his  tour  of  duty  except  as  provided  above. 

One  or  two  privates  are  detailed  daily  as  kitchen  police. 
They  go  on  duty  at  reveille.     It  is  their  duty  to  assist  the  cooks 


CAMP  SERVICE  AND  DUTIES.  IS1, 

in  the  kitchen.  They  assist  in  the  preparation  of  meals,  wait 
on  the  table,  wash  dishes,  procure  water  and  wood,  chop  fire- 
wood, and  keep  the  kitchen,  mess  tent,  and  surrounding  around 
policed.  They  are  under  the  orders  of  the  mess  sergeant  and 
the  cooks. 

Rifles  need  careful  attention  in  camp.  They  should  be  cleaned 
and  oiled  daily,  preferably  just  before  retreat  or  parade.  It  is 
advisable  for  each  man  to  have  a  canvas  cover  to  keep  off  the 
dust  and  dampness.  In  a  shelter-tent  camp  tie  the  rifle,  muzzle 
up,  to  the  pole  of  the  tent,  placing  a  chip  of  wood  under  the 
butt  plate  and  an  oily  rag  over  (never  inside)  the  muzzle. 

Wet  shoes  should  be  filled  with  oats  or  dry  sand,  and  set  in 
a  cool  place  to  dry.    Never  dry  them  by  a  fire. 

Uniforms  need  special  care,  as  camp  service  is  very  hard  on 
them.  In  a  permanent  camp  every  man  should  have  two  pair 
of  breeches.  The  coat  will  seldom  be  worn  except  at  parade 
or  retreat.  One  pair  of  breeches  and  the  coat  should  be  kept 
neat,  clean,  and  pressed  for  use  on  ceremonies,  inspections,  and 
when  going  on  pass.  Woolen  uniforms  may  be  cleaned  and 
freed  from  spots  by  rubbing  with  a  flannel  rag  saturated  with 
gasoline.  Cotton  uniforms  may  be  washed  with  water,  soap, 
and  a  scrubbing  brush,  wrung  out,  and  stretched,  properly 
creased,  on  a  flat  wood  surface  in  the  sun  to  dry.  Leggings  can 
be  similarly  washed.  Hats  should  be  cleaned  with  gasoline,  and 
dampened  and  ironed  to  restore  their  shape. 

Enlisted  men  should  be  very  careful  to  observe  all  the  sani- 
tary regulations  of  the  camp.  Flies  are  the  greatest  spreaders 
of  camp  disease.  All  fecal  matter  and  food  should  be  care- 
fully guarded  from  them.  In  camps  extreme  precautions  are 
taken  to  screen  the  sinks  and  kitchens  from  flies,  and  all  en- 
listed men  should  cooperate  in  the  effort  to  make  these  pre- 
cautions successful.  One  fly  carrying  germs  on  his  feet  from 
the  sinks  to  the  food  can  start  a  serious  and  fatal  epidemic 
:n  a  camp.  Defecating  on  the  ground  in  the  vicinity  of  camp 
)r  urinating  in  camp,  are  extremely  dangerous  to  the  health  of 
:he  command,  and  afe  serious  military  offenses.  At  night  a 
irinal  can  is  provided  in  each  company  street. 

In  a  permanent  camp  cots  or  bed  sacks  are  u 
or  the  men  to  sleep  on.     In  a  shelter  tent  camp  beds  should  be 


188  MARCHING  AND  CAMPING. 

made  of  hay,  grass,  leaves,  pine  or  spruce  boughs,  or  pine 
needles,  on  top  of  which  the  poncho  and  blanket  are  spread, 
thus  softening  the  ground  and  keeping  the  sleeper  away  from 
the  cold  and  dampness.  Neglect  to  prepare  the  bed  when  sleep- 
ing without  cot  or  bed  sack  means  a  loss  of  sleep,  and  may  lead 
to  colds,  bowel  disorders,  and  rheumatism. 

In  wet  weather  tents  should  be  ditched,  and  in  windy  or  cold 
weather  dirt  may  be  banked  around  them.  A  place  for  wash- 
ing the  person  and  clothes  should  be  arranged  for  in  each 
company  street,  and  the  waste  water  disposed  of  by  means  of 
drainage  or  rock-filled  pits.  In  dry  weather  the  streets  in 
camp  should  frequently  be  sprinkled  with  water  to  keep  down 
the  dust.    This  is  specially  necessary  around  the  kitchen. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

TARGET  PRACTICE. 


Section  1.  Preliminary  training  in  markmanship. 

Effective  rifle  fire  is  generally  what  counts  most  in  battle. 
To  have  effective  rifle  fire,  the  men  on  the  firing  line  must  be 
able  to  HIT.  what  they  are  ordered  to  shoot  at.  There  is  no 
man  who  can  not  be  taught  how  to  shoot.  It  is  not  necessary 
or  e-  en  desirable  to  begin  instruction  by  firing  on  a  rifle  range. 
A  perfectly  green  recruit  Who  has  never  fired  a  rifle  may  be 
made  into  a  good  shot  by  a  little  instruction  and  some  prelimi- 
nary drills  and  exercises. 

Before  a  man  goes  on  the  range  to  fire  it  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary that  he  should  know — 

1.  How  to  set  the  rear  sight. 

2.  How  to  sight  or  aim. 

3.  How  to  squeeze  the  trigger. 

4.  How  to  hold  the  rifle  in  all  positions. 

If  he  does  not  know  these  things  it  is  worse  than  useless  for 
him  to  fire.  He  will  not  improve ;  the  more  he  shoots  the  worse 
he  will  shoot,  and  it  will  become  more  difficult  to  teach  him. 

Section  2.  Sight  adjustment. 

Men  must  be  able  to  adjust  their  sights  correctly  and  quickly. 
An  error  in  adjustment  so  small  that  one  can  scarcely  see  it 
on  the  sight  leaf  is  sufficient  to  cause  a  miss  at  an  enemy  at 
500  yards  and  over. 

Notice  your  rear  sight.  When  the  leaf  is  laid  down  the  battle 
sight  appears  on  top.     This  sight  is  set  for  547  yards  and   Is 

189 


190  TARGET  PRACTICE. 

not  adjustable.  When  the  leaf  is  raised  four  sights  come  into 
view.  The  extreme  range  sight  for  2,850  yards  at  the  top  of 
the  leaf  is  seldom  used.  The  open  sight  at  the  upper  edge  of 
the  drift  slide  is  adjustable  from  1.400  to  2.750  yards.  To  set 
it  the  upper  edge  of  the  slide  is  made  to  correspond  with  the 
range  reading  on  the  leaf,  and  the  slide  is  then  clamped  with 
the  slide  screw.  This  sight  also  is  seldom  used.  The  open  sight 
at  the  bottom  of  the  triangular  opening  in  the  drift  slide  Is 
adjustable  from  100  to  2,450  yards.  To  set  it  the  index  line  at 
the  lower  corners  of  the  triangle  is  set  opposite  the  range  gradua- 
tion on  the  leaf  and  the  slide  clamped.  This  and  the  peep  sight 
just  below  it  are  the  sights  most  commonly  used.  To  set  the 
peep  sight,  the  index  lines  on  either  side  of  the  peephole  are  set 
opposite  the  range  desired  and  the  slide  clamped. 

Notice  the  scales  for  the  various  ranges  on  either  side  of 
the  face  of  the  leaf.  The  odd-numbered  hundreds  of  yards 
are  on  the  right  and  the  even  on  the  left.  The  line  below  the 
number  is  the  index  line  for  that  range.  Thus  to  set  the  sight 
for  500  yards  the  index  line  of  the  slide  is  brought  in  exact 
line  with  the  line  on  the  leaf  below  the  figure  5  and  the  slide 
clamped.  To  set  for  550  yards  the  index  lines  of  the  slide 
are  set  half  way  between  the  index  lines  on  the  leaf  below  the 
figure  5  on  the  right  side  and  the  figure  6  on  the  left  side. 
Look  at  your  sight  carefully  when  setting  it  and  take  great 
pains  to  get  it  exact.  An  error  in  setting  the  width  of  one  of 
the  lines  on  the  leaf  will  cause  an  error  of  about  8  inches  in 
where  your  bullet  will  strike  at  500  yards. 

The  wind  gauge  is  adjusted  by  means  of  the  windage  screw 
at  the  right  front  end  of  the  base  of  the  sight.  Each  graduation 
on  the  wind-gauge  scale  is  called  a  "  point."  For  convenience 
in  adjusting  the  line  of  each  third  point  on  the  scale  is  longer 
than  the  others.  If  you  turn  the  windage  screw  so  that  the 
movable  base  moves  to  the  right,  you  are  taking  right  windage, 
which  will  cause  your  rifle  to  shoot  more  to  the  right. 

It  is  seldom  that  a  rifle  will  shoot  correctly  to  the  point  aimed 
at  at  a  given  range  with  the  sights  adjusted  exactly  to  the 
scale  graduations  for  that  range.  If  your  sight  is  not  cor- 
rectly adjusted  for  your  shooting  and  you  wish  to  move  it 
slightly  to  make  it  correct,  remember  to  move  it  in  the  direc- 
tion you  wish  your  shot  to  hit.     If  you  wish  to  shoot  higher 


SIGHT  CORRECTIONS,  AIMING. 


191 


raise  your  sight.  If  to  the  right,  move  the  wind  gauge  to  the 
right.  Always  move  your  sight  the  correct  amount  in  accord- 
ance with  the  following  table: 


Section  3.  Table  of  sight  corrections. 

Showing  to   what   extent   the  point   of   impact   is   moved   by  a 
change  of  25  yards  in  elevation  or  1  point  in  windage. 


Correction 

Correction 

Range. 

by  a change 

I>y  a  change 

in  elevation 

in  windage 

of  25  yards. 

of  1  point. 

Yards. 

Inches. 

Inches. 

100 

0.72 

4 

200 

1.62 

K 

300 

2.79 

12 

400 

4.29 

1G 

500 

6.22 

20 

600 

8.59 

21 

800 

15.43 

I,  GOO 

25.  08 

An  easy  rule  to  remember  the  windage  correction  by  is:  "A 
change  of  1  point  of  wind  changes  the  point  of  impact  4  inches 
for  every  100  yards  of  range." 

Copy  this  table  and  take  it  to  the  range  with  you. 

Example  of  sight  adjustment:  Suppose  you  are  firing  at  500 
yards.  The  first  two  or  three  shots  show  you  that  your  shots 
are  hitting  about  a  foot  below  and  a  foot  to  the  right  of  the 
center  of  the  bull's-eye.  From  the  above  table  you  will  see  that 
if  you  will  raise  your  sight  50  yards  and  move  the  wind  gauge 
half  a  point  to  the  left  the  rifle  will  be  sighted  so  that,  if  you 
aim  correctly  the  bullets  will  hit  well  inside  the  bull's-eye. 

Section  4.  Aiming. 

Open   sight:   Always  align  your  sights  with   the  front 
squarely  in  the  middle  of  the  "U"  or  notch  of  the  rear 


192  TARGET  PRACTICE. 

and  the  top  of  the  front  sight  even  with  the  upper  corners  of  the! 
"U."  (See  tig.  1.)  AH  the  sights  on  the  rifle  except  the  peepi 
sight  are  open  sights. 

Peep  sight:  Always  center  the  tip  of  the  front  sight  in  the 
center  of  the  peephole  when  aiming  with  this  sight.  (See 
fig.  2.) 

Always  aim  below  the  bull's-eye.  Never  let  your  front  sight 
appear  to  touch  the  bull's-eye  in  aiming.  Try  to  see  the  same 
amount  of  white  target  between  the  top  of  the  front  sight  and 


Figure  1. 

the  bottom  of  the  bull's-eye  each  time.    The  eye  must  be  focused 
on  the  bull's-eye  or  mark  and  not  on  the  front  or  rear  sight. 

Look  at  figures  1  and  2  until  your  eye  retains  the  memory  of 
them,  then  try  to  duplicate  the  picture  every  time  you  aim.  Aim 
consistently,  always  the  same.  Never  change  your  aim ;  change 
your  sight  adjustment  if  your  shots  are  not  hitting  in  the  right 
place. 

Section  5.  Battle  sight. 

The  battle  sight  is  the  open  sight  seen  when  the  leaf  is  laid 
flat.  It  is  adjusted  for  a  range  of  547  yards.  It  is  intended  to 
be  used  in  battle  when  you  get  nearer  to  the  enemy  than  600 


TRIGGER  SQUEEZE, 


193 


yards.  Always  aim  at  the  belt  of  a  standing  enemy,  or  just  be- 
low him  if  he  is  kneeling,  sitting,  or  lying.  On  the  target  range 
this  sight  is  used  for  rapid  fire.  With  it  the  rifle  shoots  about 
2  feet  high  at  ranges  between  200  and  400  yards,  so  you  must 
aim  below  the  figure  on  the  target  "  D."  Find  out  in  your  in- 
struction practice  just 

how  much  you  must 
aim  below  to  hit  the 
figure. 

Section  6.  Trigger 
squeeze. 

Use  the  first  joint  of 
the  fore  finger  to 
squeeze  the  trigger.  It 
is  the  most  sensitive 
and  best  controlled 
portion  of  the  body. 
As  you  place  the  rifle 
to  your  shoulder 
squeeze  the  trigger  so 
as  to  pull  it  back  about 
one-eighth  of  an  inch, 
thus  taking  up  the 
safety  portion,  or  slack, 
of  the  pull.  Then  con- 
tract the  trigger  finger 

gradually,  slowly  and  steadily  increasing  the  pressure  on  the 
trigger  while  the  aim  is  being  perfected.  Continue  the  grad- 
ual increase  of  pressure  so  that  when  the  aim  has  become 
exact  the  additional  pressure  required  to  release  the  point  of 
the  sear  can  be  given  almost  insensibly  and  without  causing 
any  deflection  of  the  rifle.  Put  absolutely  all  your  mind  and 
will  power  into  holding  the  rifle  steady  and  squeezing  the  trig- 
ger off  without  disturbing  the  aim.  Practice  squeezing  the 
trigger  in  this  way  every  time  you  have  your  rifle  in  your  hand 
until  you  can  surely  and  quickly  do  it  without  a  suspicion  of  a 
jerk. 


Figure  2. 


194  TARGET  PRACTICE. 

By  practice  the  soldier  becomes  familiar  with  the  trigger 
squeeze  of  his  rifle,  and  knowing  this,  he  is  able  to  judge  at 
any  time,  within  limits,  what  additional  pressure  is  required 
for  its  discharge.  By  constant  repetition  of  this  exercise  he 
should  be  able  finally*  to  squeeze  the  trigger  to  a  certain  point 
beyond  which  the  slightest  movement  will  release  the  sear. 
Having  squeezed  the  trigger  to  this  point,  the  aim  is  corrected, 
and,  when  true,  the  additional  pressure  is  applied  and  the  dis- 
charge follows  and  the  bullet  flies  true  to  the  mark. 

Section  7.  Firing  positions. 

When  in  ranks  at  close  order  the  positions  are  those  de- 
scribed in  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations.  When  in  extended 
order,  or  when  firing  alone,  these  positions  may  be  modified 
somewhat  to  better  suit  the  individual.  The  following  re- 
marks on  the  various  positions  are  offered  as  suggestions 
whereby  steady  positions  may  be  learned  by  the  soldier. 

Standing  position:  Face  the  target,  then  execute  right  half 
face.  Plant  the  feet  about  12  inches  apart.  As  you  raise  the 
rifle  to  the  shoulder  lean  very  slightly  backward  just  enough 
to  preserve  the  perfect  balance  on  both  feet  which  the  raising 
of  the  rifle  has  somewhat  disturbed.  Do  not  lean  far  back, 
and  do  not  lean  forward  at  all.  If  your  body  is  out  of  balance 
it  will  be  under  strain  and  you  will  tremble.  The  right  elbow 
should  be  at  about  the  height  of  the  shoulder.  The  left  hand 
should  grasp  well  around  the  stock  and  handguard  in  front 
of  the  rear  sight,  and  the  left  elbow  should  be  almost  directly 
under  the  rifle.  The  right  hand  should  do  more  than  half  the 
work  of  holding  the  rifle  up  and  against  the  shoulder,  the  left 
hand  only  steadying  and  guiding  the  piece.  Do  not  try  to  meet 
the  recoil ;  let  the  whole  body  move  back  with  it.  Do  not  be 
afraid  to  press  the  jaw  hard  against  the  stock;  this  steadies 
the  position,  and  the  head  goes  back  with  the  recoil  and  in- 
sures that  your  face  is  not  hurt. 

Kneeling  position:  Assume  the  position  very  much  as  de- 
scribed in  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations.  Sit  on  the  right 
heel.  The  right  knee  should  point  directlv  to  the  risrht,  that 
Is,  along  the  tiring  line.  The  point  of  the  left  elbow  should 
rest  over  the  left  knee.    There  is  a  flat  place  under  the  elbow 


FIRING  POSITIONS.  195 

which  fits  a  flat  place  on  the  knee  and  makes  a  solid  rest. 
Lean  the  body  well  forward.  This  position  is  uncomfortable 
until  practiced,  when  it  quickly  ceases  to  be  uncomfortable. 

Sitting  position:  Sit  down  half  faced  to  the  right,  feet  from 
6  to  8  inches  apart,  knees  bent,  right  knee  slightly  higher  than 
the  left,  left  leg  pointed  toward  the  target  Rest  both  elbows 
on  the  knees,  hands  grasping  the  piece  the  same  as  in  the 
prone  position.  This  is  a  very  steady  position,  particularly  if 
holes  can  be  found  or  made  in  the  ground  for  the  heels. 

Prone  position  and  use  of  the  gun  sling:  To  adjust  the  sling 
for  firing,  unhook  the  straight  strap  of  the  sling  and  let  it  out 
as  far  as  it  will  go.  Adjust  the  loop  so  that  When  stretched 
along  the  bottom  of  the  stock  its  rear  end  (bight)  comes  about 
opposite  the  comb  of  the  stock.  A  small  man  needs  a  longer 
loop  than  a  tall  man.  Lie  down  facing  at  an  angle  of  about 
60°  to  the  right  of  the  direction  of  the  target.  Spread  the 
legs  as  wide  apart  as  they  will  go  with  comfort.  Thrust  the 
left  arm  through  between  the  rifle  and  the  sling,  and  then  back 
through  the  loop  of  the  sling,  securing  the  loop,  by  means  of  the 
keeper,  around  the  upper  left  arm  as  high  up  as  it  will  go. 
Pass  the  hand  under  and  then  over  the  sling  from  the  left  side, 
and  grasp  the  stock  and  handguard  just  in  rear  of  the  lower 
band.  Raise  the  right  elbow  off  the  ground,  rolling  slightly 
over  on  the  left  side.  Place  the  butt  to  the  shoulder  and  roll 
back  into  position,  clamping  the  rifle  hard  and  steady  in  the 
firing  position.  The  rifle  should  rest  deep  down  in  the  palm  of 
the  left  hand  with  fingers  almost  around  the  handguard.  Shift 
the  left  palm  a  little  to  the  right  or  left  until  the  rifle  stands 
perfectly  upright  (no  cant)  without  effort.  The  left  elbow 
should  rest  on  the  ground  directly  under  the  rifle,  and  right 
elbow  on  the  ground  about  5  inches  to  the  right  of  a  point  di- 
rectly under  the  stock.  In  this  position  the  loop  of  the  sling, 
starting  at  the  lower  band,  passes  to  the  right  of  the  left  wrist, 
and  thence  around  the  left  upper  arm.  The  loop  should  be  so 
tight  that  about  50  pounds  tension  is  placed  on  it  when  the  po- 
sition is  assumed.  This  position  is  uncomfortable  until  prac- 
ticed, when  it  quickly  ceases  to  be  uncomfortable.  It  will  be 
steadier  if  small  holes  can  be  found  or  dug  in  the  ground  for 
the  elbows.  In  this  position  the  sling  binds  the  left  forearm  to 
the  rifle  and  to  the  ground  so  that  it  forms  a  dead  rest  for  the 


196  TARGET  PRACTICE. 

rifle,  with  a  universal  joint,  the  wrist,  at  its  upper  end.  Also 
the  rifle  is  so  bound  to  the  shoulder  that  the  recoil  is  not  felt 
at  all.    This  is  the  steadiest  of  all  firing  positions. 

The  gun  sling  can  also  be  used  in  this  manner  with  advantage 
in  the  other  positions. 

Section  8.  Calling  the  shot. 

It  is  evident  that  the  sights  should  be  so  adjusted  at  each 
range  that  the  rifle  will  hit  where  you  aim.  In  order  to  de- 
termine that  the  sights  are  so  adjusted  it  is  necessary  that  you 
shall  know  each  time  just  where  you  were  aiming  on  the  target 
at  the  instant  your  rifle  was  discharged.  If  you  know  this  and 
your  rifle  hits  this  point  your  rifle  is  correctly  sighted.  If  your 
shot  does  not  hit  near  this  point,  you  should  change  your  sight 
adjustment  in  accordance  with  the  table  of  sight  corrections 
on  page  191. 

No  man  can  hold  absolutely  steady.  The  rifle  trembles 
slightly,  and  the  sights  seem  to  wobble  and  move  over  the  tar- 
get. You  try  to  squeeze  off  the  last  ounce  of  the  trigger  squeeze 
just  as  the  sights  move  to  the  desired  alignment  under  the 
bull's-eye.  At  this  instant,  just  before  the  recoil  blots  out  a 
view  of  the  sights  and  target,  you  should  catch  with  your  eye  a 
picture,  as  it  were,  of  just  where  on  the  target  your  sights 
were  aligned,  and  call  to  yourself  or  to  the  coach  this  point. 
This  point  is  where  your  shot  should  strike  if  your  sights  are 
correctly  adjusted,  and  if  you  have  squeezed  the  trigger  with- 
out disturbing  your  aim.  Until  a  man  can  call  his  shots  he  is 
not  a  good  shot,  for  he  can  never  tell  if  his  rifle  is  sighted  right 
or  not,  or  if  a  certain  shot  is  a  good  one  or  only  the  result  of 
luck. 

Section  9.  Coordination. 

Good  marksmanship  consists  in  learning  thoroughly  the  de- 
tails of — 

Holding  the  rifle  in  the  various  positions. 

Aiming. 

Squeezing  the  trigger. 

Calling  the  shot. 

Adjusting  the  sights. 


ADVICE  TO  RIFLEMEN.  197 

And,  when  these  have  been  mastered  in  detail,  then  the  co- 
ordination of  them  in  the  act  of  firing.  This  coordination  con- 
sists in  putting  absolutely  all  of  one's  will  power  into  an  effort 
to  hold  the  rifle  steadily,  especially  in  getting  it  to  steady  down 
when  the  aim  is  perfected ;  in  getting  the  trigger  squeezed  off 
easily  at  the  instant  the  rifle  is  steadiest  and  the  aim  perfected ; 
in  calling  the  shot  at  this  instant ;  and,  if  the  shot  does  not  hit 
near  the  point  called,  then  in  adjusting  the  sights  the  correct 
amount  so  that  the  rifle  will  be  sighted  to  hit  where  you  aim. 

Section  10.  Advice  to  riflemen. 

Before  going  to  the  range  clean  the  rifle  carefully,  removing 
every  trace  of  oil  from  the  bore.  This  can  best  be  done  with  a 
rag  saturated  with  gasoline.  Put  a  light  coat  of  oil  on  the  bolt 
and  cams.  Blacken  the  front  and  rear  sights  with  smoke  from 
a  burning  candle  or  camphor  or  with  liquid  sight  black. 

Look  through  the  bore  and  see  that  there  is  no  obstruction 
in  it. 

Keep  the  rifle  off  the  ground;  the  stock  may  absorb  damp- 
ness, the  sights  may  be  injured,  or  the  muzzle  filled  with  dirt. 

Watch  your  hold  carefully  and  be  sure  to  know  where  the 
line  of  sight  is  at  discharge.  It  is  only  in  this  way  that  the 
habit  of  calling  shots,  which  is  essential  to  good  shooting,  can 
be  acquired. 

Study  the  conditions,  adjust  the  sling,  and  set  the  sight  before 
going  to  the  firing  point. 

Look  at  the  sight  adjustment  before  each  shot  and  see  that  it 
has  not  changed. 

If  sure  of  your  hold  and  if  the  hit  is  not  as  called,  determine 
and  make  FULL  correction  in  elevation  and  windage  to  put  the 
next  shot  in  the  bull's-eye. 

Keep  a  written  record  of  the  weather  conditions  and  the 
corresponding  elevation  and  windage  for  each  day's  firing. 

Less  elevation  will  generally  be  required  on  hot  days ;  on  wet 
days;  in  a  bright  sunlight;  with  a  6  o'clock  wind;  or  with  a 
cold  barrel. 

More  elevation  will  generally  be  required  on  cold  days;  on 
rery  dry  days ;  with  a  12  o'clock  wind ;  with  a  hot  barrel ;  in  a 
dull  or  cloudy  light. 


198  TARGET  PRACTICE. 

The  upper  band  should  not  be  tight  enough  to  bind  the  barrel. 

at  a  cartridge  into  the  chamber  until  ready  to  fire. 

place  cartridges  in  the  sun.    They  will  get  hot  and  shoot 

Do  not  rub  the  eyes— especially  the  sighting  eye. 

In  cold  weather  warm  the  trigger  hand  before  shooting. 

ooting,  clean  the  rifle  carefully  and  then  oil  it  to 
prevent  rust. 

Have  a  strong,  clean  cloth  that  will  not  tear  and  jam,  prop- 
erly cut  to  size,  for  use  in  cleaning. 

Always  clean  the  rifle  from  the  breech,  using  a  brass  cleaning 
rod  when  available.  An  injury  to  the  rifling  at  the  muzzle 
causes  the  piece  to  shoot  very  irregularly. 

Regular  physical  exercise,  taken  systematically,  will  cause  a 
marked  improvement  in  shooting. 

Frequent  practice  of  the  "Position  and  aiming  drills"  is 
of  the  greatest  help  in  preparing  for  shooting  on  the  range. 

Rapid  firing:  Success  is  rapid  firing  depends  upon  catching 
a  quick  and  accurate  aim.  holding  the  piece  firmly  and  evenly, 
and  in  squeezing  the  trigger  without  a  jerk. 

In  onfer  to  give  as  much  time  as  possible  for  aiming  accu- 
rately, the  soldier  must  practice  taking  position,  loading  with 
the  clip,  and  working  the  bolt,  so  that  no  time  will  be  lost  in 
these  operations.  With  constant  practice  all  these  movements 
may  he  made  quickly  and  without  false  motions. 

When  the  bolt  handle  is  raised,  it  must  be  uune  with  enough 
force  to  start  the  shell  from  the  chamber;  and  when  the  bolt  is 
pulled  hack,  it  must  be  with  sufficient  force  to  throw  the  empty 
shell  well  away  from  the  chamber  and  far  enough  to  engage  the 
next  cartridge. 

In  loading,  use  force  enough  to  load  each  cartridge  with  one 
motion. 

The  aim  must  be  caught  quickly,  and.  once  caught,  must  be 
held  and  the  trigger  squeezed  steadily.  Rapid  firing,  as  far  as 
holding,  aim,  and  squeezing  the  trigger  are  concerned,  should 
be  done  with  all  the  precision  of  slow  fire.  The  gain  in  time 
should  be  in  getting  ready  to  fire,  loading,  and  working  the 
holt. 

Firing  with  rests:  In  order  that  the  shooting  may  be  uniform 
the  piece  should  always  be  rested  at  the  same  point. 


THE  COURSE  IN  SMALL- ARMS  FIRING,   TARGETS.      199 

Section  11.  The  course  in  small-arms  firing. 

The  course  in  small-arms  firing  consists  of — 
(a)  Nomenclature  and  care  of  rifle. 
(&)   Sighting  drills. 

(c)  Position  and  aiming  drills. 

(d)  Deflection  and  elevation  correction  drills. 

(e)  Gallery  practice. 

(/)  Estimating  distance  drill. 

(g)   Individual  known-distance  firing,  instruction  practice. 

(h)  Individual  known-distance  firing,  record  practice. 

(i)  Long-distance  practice. 

(j)  Practice  with  telescopic  sights. 

(fc)  Instruction  combat  practice. 

(0  Combat  practice. 
,(m)  Proficiency  test. 

The  regulations  governing  these  are  found  in  Small  Arms  Fir- 
ing Manual.  1913.  There  should  be  several  copies  of  this 
manual  in  every  company. 

Section   12.  Targets. 

The  accompanying  plates  show  the  details  and  size  of  the  tar- 
gets: 


200 


TARGET  PRACTICE. 


TARGET  A, 


TARGET  B. 


1 

* so* 

. 

1 

1 
1 

^~y^~^\ 

1 

1 

i  /^t^\^\ 

1 
1 

1 

1 

|  \^B^/_i 

1 

1 

t  ^^  ^/ 

J 

TARGET  C 

—  *'— 

TARGETS. 


201 


TARGET   D. 


202  TARGET  PEACTICE. 

Section  13.  Pistol  and  Revolver  Practice.1 

135.s  Nomenclature  and  care  of  the  weapon;  handling  and 
precautions  against  accidents.— The  soldier  will  first  be  taught 
the  nomenclature  of  those  parts  of  the  weapon  necessary  to  an 
understanding  of  its  action  and  use  and  the  proper  measures  for 
Its  care  and  preservation.  Ordnance  pamphlets  Nos.  1866  (de- 
scription of  the  Colt's  automatic  pistol),  1919,  and  1927  (de- 
scriptions of  the  Colt's  revolver,  Calibers  .38  and  .45,  respec- 
tively) contain  full  information  on  this  subject,  and  are  fur- 
nished to  organizations  armed  with  these  weapons. 

handling  of  the  pistol  or  revolver  is  the  cause  of 
many  accidents  and  results  in  broken  parts  of  the  mechanism. 
The  following  rules  will,  if  followed,  prevent  much  trouble  of 
this  character: 

{a)  On  taking  the  pistol  from  the  armrack  or  holster,  take 
out  the  magazine  and  see  that  it  is  empty  before  replacing  it; 
then  draw  back  the  slide  and  make  sure  that  the  piece  is  un- 
loaded. Observe  the  same  precaution  after  practice  on  the  tar- 
got  range,  and  again  before  replacing  the  pistol  in  the  holster 
oi  in  the  armrack.  When  taking  the  revolver  from  the  armrack 
or  holster  and  before  returning  it  to  the  same,  open  the  cylinder 
and  e.iect  empty  shells  and  cartridges.  Before  beginning  a  drill 
arid  upon  arriving  on  the  range  observe  the  same  precaution. 

(M  Neither  load  nor  cock  the  weapon  until  the  moment  of 
tiring,  nor  until  a  run  in  the  mounted  course  is  started. 

i '  |  Always  keep  the  pistol  or  revolver  in  the  position  of 
'  Raise  pistol  "  (par.  146,  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations,  1916),  except 
when  it  is  pointed  at- the  target.  (The  position  of  "Lower 
pistol  "  is  authorized  for  mounted  firing  only.) 

{d)  Do  not  place  the  weapon  on  the  ground  where  sand  or 
earth  can  enter  the  bore  or  mechanism. 

( <  )  Before  loading  the  pistol,  draw  back  the  slide  and  look 
through  the  bore  to  see  that  it  is  free  from  obstruction.  Before 
loading  the  revolver,  open  the  cylinder  and  look  through  the  bore 

1  Whenever  in  these  regulations  the  word  "  pistol  "  appears  the  regu- 
lation  applies  with  equal  forte  to  the  revolver,  if  applicable  to  that 
weapon. 

2  The  numbers  refer  to  paragraphs  in  the  Small  Arms  Firing  Manual, 


PISTOL  AND  EEVOLVEE  PRACTICE.  203 

to  see  that  it  is  free  from  obstruction.  When  loading  the  pistol 
for  target  practice  place  five  cartridges  in  the  magazine  and 
insert  the  magazine  in  the  handle ;  draw  back  the  slide  and  insert 
the  first  cartridge  in  the  chamber  and  carefully  lower2  the 
hammer  fully  down. 

In  loading  the  revolver  place  five  cartridges  in  the  cylinder 
and  let  the  hammer  down  on  the  empty  chamber. 

(/)  Whenever  the  pistol  is  being  loaded  or  unloaded,  the  muz- 
zle must  be  kept  up. 

(g)  Do  not  point  the  weapon  in  any  direction  where  an  acci- 
dental discharge  might  do  harm. 

(h)  After  loading  do  not  cock  the  pistol  or  the  revolver  until 
ready  to  fire. 

(t)  Keep  the  working  parts  properly  lubricated. 

136.  Position,  dismounted. — Stand  firmly  on  both  feet:  body 
perfectly  balanced  and  erect  and  turned  at  such  an  angle  as  is 
most  comfortable  when  the  arm  is  extended  toward  the  target ; 
the  feet  far  enough  apart  to  insure  firmness  and  steadiness  of 
position  (about  8  to  10  inches)  ;  weight  of  body  borne  equally 
upon  both  feet;  right  arm  fully  extended,  left  arm  hanging 
naturally. 

1  TO  LOAD  PISTOL:  Being  at  raise  pistol  (right  hand  grasping  stock 
at  the  height  of  and  6  inches  in  front  of  the  point  of  the  right  shoulder, 
forefinger  alongside  barrel,  barrel  to  the  rear  and  inclined  forward 
about  30°). 

Without  deranging  position  of  the  hand,  rotate  the  pistol  so  the 
sights  move  to  the  left,  the  barrel  pointing  to  the  right  front  and  up. 

With  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand  (thumb  to  the  right) 
grasp  the  slide  and  pull  it  toward  the  body  until  it  stops,  and  then 
release  it.     The  pistol  is  thus  loaded,  and  the  hammer  at  full  cock. 

If  the  pistol  is  to  be  kept  in  the  hand  and  not  to  be  fired  at  once,  en- 
gage the  safety  lock  with  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand. 

If  the  pistol  is  to  be  carried  in  the  holster,  remove  safety  lock,  it"  <>n, 
and  lower  the  hammer  fully  down. 

2  TO  LOWER  THE  HAMMER:  Being  at  the  loading  position  at  full 
cock. 

I.  Firmly  seat  thumb  of  right  hand  on  the  hammer  ;  insert  foreiinger 
inside  trigger  guard. 

II.  With  thumb  of  left  hand  exert  a  momentary  pressure  on  the 
grip-safety  to  release  hammer  from  sear. 

III.  At  the  same  instant  exert  pressure  or  the  trigger  and  carefully 
and  slowly  lower  the  hammer  fully  down. 

IV.  Remove  finger  from  trigger. 

V.  Insert  pistol  in  holster. 

Caution. — The  pistol  must  never  be  placed  in  the  holster  until  ham- 
mer is  fully  down. 


204  TARGET  PRACTICE. 

Kkmarks.— The  right  arm  may  be  slightly  bent,  although  the 
difficulty  of  holding  the  pistol  uniformly  and  of  keeping  it  as 
well  as  the  forearm  in  the  same  vertical  plane  makes  this 
objectionable. 

137.  The  grip. — Grasp  the  stock  as  high  as  possible  with  the 
thumb  and  last  three  fingers,  the  forefinger  alongside  the  trigger 
guard,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  stock.  The  barrel,  hand, 
and  forearm  should  be  as  nearly  in  one  line  as  possible  when 
the  weapon  is  pointed  toward  the  target.  The  grasp  should  not 
be  so  tight  as  to  cause  tremors  of  the  hand  or  arm  to  be  com- 
municated to  the  weapon,  but  should  be  firm  enough  to  avoid 
losing  the  grip  when  the  recoil  takes  place. 

Remarks. — The  force  of  recoil  of  the  pistol  or  revolver  is 
exerted  in  a  line  above  the  hand  which  grasps  the  stock.  The 
lower  the  stock  is  grasped  the  greater  will  be  the  movement  or 
M  jump "  of  the  muzzle  caused  by  the  recoil.  This  not  only 
results  in  a  severe  strain  upon  the  wrist,  but  in  loss  of  accuracy. 

If  the  hand  be  placed  so  that  the  grasp  is  on  one  side  of  the 
stock,  the  recoil  will  cause  a  rotary  movement  of  the  weapon 
toward  the  opposite  side. 

The  releasing  of  the  sear  causes  a  slight  movement  of  the 
muzzle,  generally  to  the  left.  The  position  of  the  thumb  along 
the  stock  overcomes  much  of  this  movement.  The  soldier  should 
be  encouraged  to  practice  this  method  of  holding  until  it  becomes 
natural. 

To  do  uniform  shooting  the  weapon  must  be  held  with  exactly 
the  same  grip  for  each  shot.  Not  only  must  the  hand  grasp  the 
stock  at  the  same  point  for  each  shot,  but  the  tension  of  the 
grip  must  be  uniform. 

138.  (a)  The  trigger  squeeze. — The  trigger  must  be  squeezed 
in  the  same  manner  as  in  rifle  firing.  (See  p.  193.)  The 
pressure  of  the  forefinger  on  the  trigger  should  be  steadily 
increased  and  should  be  straight  back,  not  sideways.  The  pres- 
sure should  continue  to  that  point  beyond  which  the  slightest 
movement  will  release  the  sear.  Then,  when  the  aim  is  true, 
the  additional  pressure  is  applied  and  the  pistol  fired. 

Only  by  much  practice  can  the  soldier  become  familiar  with 
the  trigger  squeeze.  This  is  essential  to  accurate  shooting.  It 
is  the  most  important  detail  to  master  in  pistol  or  revolver 
shooting. 


PISTOL  AND  REVOLVER  PRACTICE.  205 

(&)  Self- cocking  action. — The  force  required  to  squeeze  the 
trigger  of  the  revolver  when  the  self-cocking  device  is  used  is 
considerably  greater  than  with  the  single  action.  To  accustom 
a  soldier  to  the  use  of  the  self-cocking  mechanism,  and  also  to 
strengthen  and  develop  the  muscles  of  the  hand,  a  few  minutes' 
practice  daily  in  holding  the  unloaded  revolver  on  a  mark  and 
snapping  it,  using  the  self-cocking  mechanism,  is  recommended. 
The  use  of  the  self-cocking  device  in  firing  is  not  recommended 
except  in  emergency.  By  practice  in  cocking  the  revolver  the 
soldier  can  become  sufficiently  expert  to  fire  very  rapidly,  using 
single  action,  while  his  accuracy  will  be  greater  than  when 
using  double  action. 

139.  Aiming. — Except  when  delivering  rapid  or  quick  fire,  the 
rear  and  front  sights  of  the  pistol  are  used  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  rifle  sights.  The  normal  sight  is  habitually  used  (see 
PI.  VI),  and  the  line  of  sight  is  directed  upon  a  point  just 
under  the  bull's-eye  at  "6  o'clock.'*  The  front  sight  must  be 
seen  through  the  middle  of  the  rear-sight  notch,  the  top  being 
on  a  line  with  the  top  of  the  notch.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to 
cant  the  pistol  to  either  side.1 

If  the  principles  of  aiming  have  not  been  taught,  the  soldier's 
instruction  will  begin  with  sighting  drills  as  prescribed  for  the 
rifle  so  far  as  they  may  be  applicable.  The  sighting  bar  with 
open  sight  will  be  used  to  teach  the  normal  sight  and  to  demon- 
strate errors  likely  to  be  committed. 

To  construct  a  sighting  rest  for  the  pistol  (see  PI.  VI)  take 
a  piece  of  wood  about  10  inches  long,  1£  inches  wide,  and  & 
inch  thick.  Shape  one  end  so  that  it  will  fit  snugly  in  the 
handle  of  the  pistol  when  the  magazine  has  been  removed. 
Screw  or  nail  this  stick  to  the  top  of  a  post  or  other  object  at 
such  an  angle  that  the  pistol  when  placed  on  the  stick  will  be 
approximately  horizontal.  A  suitable  sighting  rest  for  the  re- 
volver may  be  easily  improvised. 

140.  (a)  How  to  cock  the  pistol. — The  pistol  should  be  cocked 
by  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  and  with  the  least  possible  de- 
rangement of  the  grip.    The  forefinger  should  be  clear  of  the 

1  The  instructor  should  take  cognizance  of  the  fact  that  the  proper 
aiming  point  is  often  affected  by  the  personal  and  fixed  peculiarities 
of  the  firer,  and  if  unable  to  correct  such  abnormalities,  permit  firer  to 
direct  sight  at  such  point  as  promises  effective  results. 


206 


TARGET  PRACTICE. 

-A- 


Plate  VI. 


PISTOL  AND  REVOLVER  PRACTICE.  207 

trigger  when  cocking  the  pistol.  Some  men  have  difficulty  at 
first  in  cocking  the  pistol  with  the  right  thumb.  This  can  be 
overcome  by  a  little  practice.  Jerking  the  pistol  forward  while 
holding  the  thumb  on  tne  hammer  will  not  be  permitted. 

( b )  How  to  cock  the  revolver. — The  revolver  should  be  cocked 
by  putting  the  thumb  on  the  hammer  at  as  nearly  a  right  angle 
to  the  hammer  as  possible,  and  by  the  action  of  the  thumb 
muscles  alone  bringing  the  hammer  back  to  the  position  of  full 
cock.  Some  men  with  large  hands  are  able  to  cock  the  revolver 
with  the  thumb  while  holding  it  in  the  position  of  aim  or  raise 
pistol.  Where  the  soldier's  hand  is  small  this  can  not  be  done, 
and  in  this  case  it  assists  the  operation  to  give  the  revolver  a 
slight  tilt  to  the  right  and  upward  (to  the  right).  Particular 
care  should  be  taken  that  the  forefinger  is  clear  of  the  trigger 
or  the  cylinder  will  not  revolve.  Jerking  the  revolver  forward 
while  holding  the  thumb  on  the  hammer  will  not  be  permitted. 

141.  Position  and  aiming  drills,  dismounted. — For  this  instruc- 
tion the  squad  will  be  formed  with  an  interval  of  1  pace  between 
files.  Black  pasters  to  simulate  bull's-eyes  will  be  pasted  op- 
posite each  man  on  the  barrack  or  other  wall,  from  which  the 
squad  is  10  paces  distant. 

The  squad  being  formed  as  described  above,  the  Instructor 
gives  the  command :  1.  Raise,  2.  Pistol  (par.  156,  Cavalry  Drill 
Regulations),  and  cautions,  "Position  and  aiming  drill,  dis- 
mounted." The  men  take  the  positions  described  in  paragraph 
136,  except  that  the  pistol  is  held  at  "  Raise  pistol." 

The  instructor  cautions,  "  Trigger  squeeze  exercise."  At  the 
command  READY,  cock  the  weapon  as  described  in  paragraph 
140.  At  the  command,  1.  Squad,  2.  FIRE,  slowly  extend  the  arm 
till  it  is  nearly  horizontal,  the  pistol  directed  at  a  point  about  6 
inches  below  the  bull's-eye.  At  the  same  time  put  the  fore- 
finger inside  the  trigger  guard  and  gradually  "  feel  "  the  trigger. 
Inhale  enough  air  to  comfortably  fill  the  lungs  and  gradually 
raise  the  piece  until  the  line  of  sight  is  directed  at  the  point  of 
aim,  i.  e.,  just  below  the  bull's-eye  at  6  o'clock.  While  the  sights 
are  directed  upon  the  mark,  gradually  increase  the  pressure  on 
the  trigger  until  it  reaches  that  point  where  the  slightest  ad- 
ditional pressure'  will  release  the  sear.  Then,  when  the  aim  is 
true,  the  additional  pressure  necessary  to  fire  the  piece  is  given 
so  smoothly  as  not  to  derange  the  alignment  of  the  sights.  The 
weapon  will  be  held  on  the  mark  for  an  instant  after  the  ham- 


208  TAEGET  PRACTICE. 

mer  falls  and  the  soldier  will  observe  what  effect,  if  any,  the 
squeezing  of  the  trigger  has  had  on  his  aim. 

It  is  impossible  to  hold  the  arm  perfectly  still,  but  each  time 
the  line  of  sight  is  directed  on  the  point  of  aim  a  slight  ad- 
ditional pressure  is  applied  to  the  trigger  until  the  piece  is 
finally  discharged  at  one  of  the  moments  wThen  the  sights  are 
correctly  aligned  upon  the  mark. 

When  the  soldier  has  become  proficient  in  taking  the  proper 
position,  the  trigger  squeeze  should  be  executed  at  will.  The 
instructor  prefaces  the  preparatory  command  by  "At  will "  and 
gives  the  command  HALT  at  the  conclusion  of  the  exercise,  when 
the  soldier  will  return  to  the  position  of  "  Raise  pistol." 

At  first  this  exercise  should  be  executed  with  deliberation,  but 
gradually  the  soldier  will  be  taught  to  catch  the  aim  quickly 
and  to  lose  no  time  in  beginning  the  trigger  squeeze  and  bring- 
ing it  to  the  point  where  the  slightest  additional  pressure  will 
release  the  sear. 

Remarks. — In  service  few  opportunities  will  be  offered  for 
slow  aimed  fire  with  the  pistol  or  revolver,  although  use  will 
be  made  of  the  weapon  under  circumstances  when  accurate 
pointing  and  rapid  manipulation  are  of  vital  importance. 

In  delivering  a  rapid  fire,  the  soldier  must  keep  his  eyes 
fixed  upon  the  mark  and,  after  each  shot,  begin  a  steadily  in- 
creasing pressure  on  the  trigger,  trying  at  the  same  time  to 
get  the  sights  as  nearly  on  the  mark  as  possible  before  the 
hammer  again  falls.  The  great  difficulty  in  quick  firing  with 
the  pistol  lies  in  the  fact  that  when  the  front  sight  is  brought 
upon  the  mark,  the  rear  sight  is  often  found  to  be  outside  the 
line  joining  the  eye  with  the  mark.  This  tendency  to  hold  the 
pistol  obliquely  can  be  overcome  only  by  a  uniform  manner  of 
holding  and  pointing.  This  uniformity  is  to  be  attained  only 
by  acquiring  a  grip  which  can  be  taken  with  certainty  each 
time  the  weapon  is  fired.  It  is  this  circumstance  which  makes 
the  position  and  aiming  drills  so  important.  The  soldier  should 
constantly  practice  pointing  the  pistol  until  he  acquires  the 
ability  to  direct  it  on  the  mark  in  the  briefest  interval  of  time 
and  practically  without  the  aid  of  sights. 

The  soldier  then  repeats  the  exercises  with  the  pistol  in  the 
left  hand,  the  left  side  being  turned  toward  the  target. 

142.  To  draw  and  fire  quickly— Snap  shooting.— With  the 
squad  formed  as  described  in  paragraph  141  except  that  the 


PISTOL  AND  REVOLVER  PRACTICE.  209 

pistol  is  in  the  holster  .and  the  flap,  if  any,  buttoned,  the  in- 
structor cautions  "  Quick-fire  exercise."  And  gives  the  com- 
mand, 1.  SQUAD;  2.  Fire.  At  this  command  each  soldier,  keep- 
ing his  eye  on  the  target,  quickly  draws  his  pistol,  cocks  it  as 
in  paragraph  140,  thrusts  it  toward  the  target,  squeezes  the 
trigger,  and  at  the  instant  the  weapon. is  brought  in  line  with 
the  eye  and  the  objective  increases  the  pressure,  releasing  the 
sear.  To  enable  the  soldier  to  note  errors  in  pointing,  the 
weapon  will  be  momentarily  held  in  position  after  the  fall  of 
the  hammer.  Efforts  at  deliberate  aiming  in  this  exercise  must 
be  discouraged. 

Remarks  under  paragraph  141  are  specially  applicable  also  to 
this  type  of  fire.  When  the  soldier  has  become  proficient  in  the 
details  of  this  exercise,  it  should  be  repeated  at  will ;  the  in- 
structor cautions,  "At  will ;  quick  fire  exercise."  The  exercise 
should  be  practiced  until  the  mind,  the  eye,  and  trigger  finger 
act  in  unison. 

To  simulate  this  type  of  fire  mounted,  the  instructor  places 
the  squad  so  that,  the  simulated  bull's-eyes  are  in  turn,  to  the 
RIGHT,  to  the  LEFT,  to  the  RIGHT  FRONT,  to  the  LEFT  FRONT, 
to  the  RIGHT  REAR.  With  the  squad  in  one  of  these  positions, 
the  instructor  cautions,  "  Position  and  aiming  drill,  mounted." 
At  this  caution  the  right  foot  is  carried  20  inches  to  the  right 
and  the  left  hand  to  the  position  of  the  bridle  hand  (par.  246, 
Cavalry  Drill  Regulations).  The  exercise  is  carried  out  as  de- 
scribed for  the  exercise  dismounted,  using  the  commands  and 
means  laid  ((own  in  paragraphs  161  to  168,  inclusive,  Cavalry 
Drill  Regulations,  for  firing  in  the  several  directions.  The  exer- 
cise is  to  be  executed  at  will  when  the  squad  has  been  suffi- 
ciently well  instructed  in  detail. 

When  firing  to  the  left  the  pistol  hand  will  be  about  opposite 
the  left  shoulder  and  the  shoulders  turned  about  45°  to  the  left ; 
when  firing  to  the  right  rear  the  shoulders  are  turned  about  45° 
to  (he  right. 

When  the  soldier  is  proficient  in  these  exercises  with  the  pistol 
in  the  right  hand,  they  are  repeated  with  the  pistol  in  the  left 
hand. 

Revolver  or  pistol  range  practice. — The  courses  in  range  prac- 
tice are  siven  in  paragraphs  147  to  199.  Small  Arms  Firing 
Manual,  1913. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

EXTRACTS  FROM  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD 
DUTY. 


UNITED   STATES  ARMY,   1914. 


[The  numbers  refer  to   paragraphs  in  the  Manual.] 
Section  1.  Introduction. 

1.  Guards  may  be  divided  into  four  classes:  Exterior  guards, 
interior  guards,  military  police,  and  provost  guards. 

2.  Exterior  guards  are  used  only  in  time  of  war.    They  be- 

the  domain  of  tactics  and  are  treated  of  in  the  Field 
Regulations  and  in  the  drill  regulations  of  the  different 
E  the  service. 

purpose  of  exterior  guards  is  to  prevent  surprise,  to  delay 
.  and  otherwise  to  provide  for  the  security  of  the  main 

the  march  they  take  the  form  of  advance  guards,  rear 
guar'!--,  and  Hank  guards.    At  a  halt  they  consist  of  outposts. 

3.  Interior  guards  are  used  in  camp  or  garrison  to  preserve 

protect  property,  and  to  enforce  police  regulations.  In 
i  war  such  sentinels  of  an  interior  guard  as  may  be 
iry  are  placed  close  in  or  about  a  camp,  and  normally 
is  an  exterior  guard  further  out  consisting  of  outposts. 

In  time  of  peace  the  interior  guard  is  the  only  guard  in  a  camp 

or  garrison. 

4.  Military  police  differ  somewhat  from  either  of  these  classes. 

Field   Service   Regulations.)     They   are  used  in  time  of 

war  to  guard  prisoners,  to  arrest  stragglers  and  deserters,  and 

order  and  enforce  police  regulations  in  the  rear 

.    »ng  lines  of  communication,  and  in  the  vicinity  of 

• 
.ire  used  in  the  absence  of  military  police, 
in  conjunction  with  the  civil  authorities  at  or  near 
:s  or  encampments,  to  preserve  order  among  soldiers 
he  interior  guard. 


DETAILS  AND  ROSTERS.  211 

Section  2.  Classification  of  interior  guards. 

6.  The  various  elements  of  an  interior  guard  classified  ac- 
cording to  their  particular  purposes  and  the  manner  in  which 
hey  perform  their  duties  are  as  follows: 

(a  )   The  main  guard. 

(b)  Special  guards:.  Stable  guards,  park  guards,  prisoner 
guards,  herd  guards,  train  guards,  boat  guards,  watchmen,  etc. 

Section  3.  Details  and  rosters. 

7.  At  every  military  post,  and  in  every  regiment  or  separate 
command  in  the  field,  an  interior  guard  will  be  detailed  and 
Inly  mounted. 

It  will  consist  of  such  number  of  officers  and  enlisted  men 
is  the  commanding  officer  may  deem  necessary,  and  will  be 
commanded  by  the  senior  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer 
herewith,  under  the  supervision  of  the  officer  of  the  day  or 
3the.r  officer  detailed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

8.  The  system  of  sentinels  on  fixed  posts  is  of  value  in  dis- 
cipline and  training  because  of  the  direct  individual  responsi- 
bility which  is  imposed  and  required  to  be  discharged  in  a 
lefinite  and  precise  manner.  While  the  desirability  of  this  type 
:>f  duty  is  recognized,  it  should  only  be  put  in  practice  to  an 
jxtent  sufficient  to  insure  thorough  instruction  in  this  method 
j)f  performing  guard  duty  and  should  not  be  the  routine  method 
)f  its  performance.  The  usual  guard  duty  will  be  performed 
)y  watchmen,  patrols,  or  such  method  as,  in  the  opinion  of  the 
commanding  officer,  may  best  secure  results  under  the  particu- 
ar  local  conditions. 

9.  At  posts  where  there  are  less  than  three  companies  the 
nain  guard  and  special  guards  may  all  be  furnished  by  one 
company  or  by  details  from  each  company.  It  is  directed  that 
l^henever  possible  such  guards  shall  be  furnished  by  a  single 
company,  for  the  reason  that  if  guard  details  are  taken  from 
?ach  organization  at  a  post  of  two  companies,  troops,  or  bat- 
:eries  it  will  result  in  both  being  so  reduced  as  to  seriously  inter- 
fere with  drill  and  instruction,  whereas  if  details  are  taken 
from  only  one,  the  other  is  available  for  instruction  at  full 
strength. 

i    Where  there  are  three  or  more  companies,  the  main  guard 
will,  if  practicable,  be  furnished  by  a  single  company,  and,  as 


212  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

far  as  practicable,  the  same  organization  will  supply  all  de- 
tails for  that  day  for  special  guard,  overseer,  and  fatigue  duty. 
In  this  case  the  officer  of  the  day  and  the  officers  of  the  guard, 
if  there  are  any,  will,  if  practicable,  be  from  the  company  fur- 
nishing the  guard. 

10.  At  a  post  or  camp  where  the  headquarters  of  more  than 
one  regiment  are  stationed,  or  in  the  case  of  a  small  brigade 
in  the  field,  if  but  one  guard  be  necessary  for  the  whole  com- 
mand, the  details  will  be  made  from  the  headquarters  of  the 
command. 

If  formal  guard  mounting  is  to  be  held,  the  adjutant,  sergeant 
major,  and  band  to  attend  guard  mounting  will  be  designated  by 
the  commanding  officer. 

11.  When  a  single  organization  furnishes  the  guard,  a  roster 
of  organizations  will  be  kept  by  the  sergeant  major  under  the 
supervision  of  the  adjutant.     (See  Appendix  B.) 

12.  When  the  guard  is  detailed  from  several  organizations, 
rosters  will  be  kept  by  the  adjutant,  of  officers  of  the  day  and 
officers  of  the  guard  by  name ;  by  the  sergeant  major  under  the 
supervision  of  the  adjutant,  of  sergeants,  corporals,  musicians, 
and  privates  of  the  guard  by  number  per  organization;  and  by 
first  sergeants,  of  sergeants,  corporals,  musicians,  and  privates 
by  name.     (See  Appendix  A.) 

13.  When  organizations  furnish  their  own  stable,  or  stable 
and  park  guards,  credit  will  be  given  each  for  the  number  of 
enlisted  men  so  furnished  as  though  they  had  been  detailed  for 
main  guard. 

14.  Special  guards,  other  than  stable  or  park  guards,  will  be 
credited  the  same  as  for  main  guard,  credited  with  fatigue 
duty,  carried  on  special  duty,  or  credited  as  the  commanding 
officer  may  direct.     (Pars.  6,  221,  247,  and  300.) 

15.  Captains  will  supervise  the  keeping  of  company  rosters 
and  see  that  all  duties  performed  are  duly  credited.  (See  pars. 
355-3G4.  A.  R.,  for  rules  governing  rosters,  and  Form  342, 
A.  G.  ()..  lor  instructions  as  to  how  rosters  should  be  kept.) 

16.  There  will  be  an  officer  of  the  day  with  each  guard,  unless 
in  the  opinion  of  the  commanding  officer  the  guard  is  so  small 
that  his  services  are  not  needed.  In  this  case  an  officer  will  be 
detailed  to  supervise  the  command  and  instruction  of  the  guard 
for  such  period  as  the  commanding  officer  may  direct. 


DETAILS  AND  ROSTERS.  213 

17.  When  more  than  one  guard  is  required  for  a  command, 
a  field  officer  of  the  day  will  be  detailed,  who  will  receive  his 
orders  from  the  brigade  or  division  commander,  as  the  latter 
may  direct.  When  necessary  captains  may  be  placed  on  the 
roster  for  field  officer  of  the  day. 

18.  The  detail  of  officers  of  the  guard  will  be  limited  to  the 
necessities  of  the  service  and  efficient  instruction ;  inexperienced 
officers  may  be  detailed  as  supernumerary  officers  of  the  guard 
for  purposes  of  instruction. 

19.  Officers  serving  on  staff  departments  are,  in  the  discretion 
of  the  commanding  officer,  exempt  from  guard  duty. 

20.  Guard  details  will,  if  practicable,  be  posted  or  published 
the  day  preceding  the  beginning  of  the  tour,  and  officers  notified 
personally  by  a  written  order  at  the  same  time. 

21.  The  strength  of  guards  and  the  number  of  consecutive 
days  for  which  an  organization  furnishes  the  guard  will  be  so 
regulated  as  to  insure  privates  of  the  main  guard  an  interval 
of  not  less  than  five  days  between  tours. 

When  this  is  not  otherwise  practicable,  extra  and  special  duty 
men  will  be  detailed  for  night  guard  duty,  still  performing  their 
daily  duties.  When  so  detailed  a  roster  will  be  kept  by  the 
adjutant  showing  the  duty  performed  by  them. 

22.  The  members  of  main  guards  and  stable  and  park  guards 
will  habitually  be  relieved  every  24  hours.  The  length  of  the 
tour  of  enlisted  men  detailed  as  special  guards,  other  than 
stable  or  park  guards,  will  be  so  regulated  as  to  permit  of  these 
men  being  held  accountable  for  a  strict  performance  of  their 
duty. 

23.  Should  the  officer  of  the  day  be  notified  that  men  are  re- 
quired to  fill  vacancies  in  the  guard,  he  will  cause  them  to  be 
supplied  from  the  organization  to  which  the  guard  belongs.  If 
none  are  available  in  that  organization,  the  adjutant  will  be 
notified  and  will  cause  them  to  be  supplied  from  the  organization 
that  is  next  for  guard.     (Par.  63.) 

24.  The  adjutant  will  have  posted  on  the  bulletin  board  at  his 
office. all  data  needed  by  company  commanders  in  making  details 
from  their  companies. 

At  first  sergeant's  call,  first  sergeants  will  go  to  headquarters 
and  take  from  the  bulletin  board  all  data  necessary  for  making 
the  details  required  from  their  companies;  these  details  will  be 
made  from  their  company  rosters. 


214  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

25.  In  order  to  give  ample  notice,  first  sergeants  will,  when 

I  posl  on  the  company  bulletin 
ompany  for  duties  to  be  per- 

26.  Whei  are  required  to  he  kept  by  this  manual,  all 

;i  be  made  by  rosl   . 

Section  4.  Commander  of  the  guard. 

41.  The  commander  of  the  guard  is  responsible  for  the  in- 

nd  discipline  of  the  guard,    lie  will  see  that  all  of  its 

rs  are  correctly  instructed  in  their  orders  and  duties  and 

that  thcy'understand  and  properly  perform  them.    He  will  visit 

each  relict  at  least  once  while  it  is  on  post,  and  at  least  one  of 

visits  will  be  made  between  12  o'clock  midnight  and  dav- 

light. 

42.  He  receives  and  obeys  the  orders  of  the  commanding 
officer  and  the  officer  of  the  day,  and  reports  to  the  latter  with- 
out delay  all  orders  to  the  guard  not  received  from  the  officer 
of  the  day;  he  transmits  to  his  successor  all  material  instruc- 
tions and  information  relating  to  his  duties. 

43.  He  is  responsible  under  the  officer  of  the  day  for  the 
general  safety  of  the  post  or  camp  as  soon  as  the  old  guard 
marches  away  from  the  guardhouse.  In  case  of  emergency, 
while  both  guards  are  at  the  guardhouse,  the  senior  commander 
of  the  two  guards  will  be  responsible  that  the  proper  action  is 
taken. 

44.  Officers  of  the  guard  will  remain  constantly  with  their 
guards,  except  while  visiting  patrols  or  necessarily  engaged 
elsewhere  in  the  performance  of  their  duties.  The  "command- 
ing officer  will  allow  a  reasonable  time  for  meals. 

45.  A  commander  of  a  guard  leaving  his  post  for  any  purpose 
will  inform  the  next  in  command  of  his  destination  and  probable 

f  return. 

46.  Except  in  emergencies,  the  commander  of  the  guard  may 

the  night    with  the  next,  in  command,  but  retains  his 
QSibility;   ihe  one   on   watch  must  be  constantly  on  the 

any  alarm  is  raised  in  camp  or  garrison,  the  guard 
■  lined  immediately.     (Par.  234.)     If  the  case  be  seri- 
ne proper  call   will   be  sounded,   and   the  commander  of 


COMMANDER  OF  THE  GUARD.  215 

the  guard  will  cause  the  commanding  officer  and  the  officer  of 
the  day  to  be  at  once  notified. 

48.  If  a  sentinel  calls :  "  The  guard,"  the  commander  of  the 
guard  will  at  once  send  a  patrol  to  the  sentinel's  post.  If  the 
danger  be  great,  in  which  case  the  sentinel  will  discharge  his 
piece,  the  patrol  will  be  as  strong  as  possible. 

49.  When  practicable,  there  should  always  be  an  officer  or 
noncommissioned  ofiicer  and  two  privates  of  the  guard  at  the 
guardhouse  in  addition  to  the  sentinels  there  on  post. 

50.  Between  reveille  and  retreat,  when  the  guard  had  been 
turned  out  for  any  person  entitled  to  the  compliment  (see  pars. 
222  and  224),  the  commander  of  the  guard,  if  an  officer,  will 
receive  the  report  of  the  sergeant,  returning  the  salute  of  the 
latter  with  the  right  hand.  He  will  then  draw  his  saber  and 
place  himself  two  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  guard, 
When  the  person  for  whom  the  guard  has  been  turned  out 
approaches,  he  faces  his  guard  and  commands :  1.  Present,  2. 
ARMS;  faces  to  the  front  and  salutes.  When  his  salute  is 
acknowledged,  he  resumes  the  carry,  faces  about,  and  commands : 
1.  Order,  2.  ARMS;  and  faces  to  the  front. 

If  it  be  an  officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard,  after  saluting 
and  before  bringing  his  guard  to  an  order,  the  officer  of  the 
guard  reports :  "  Sir,  all  present  or  accounted  for  "j  or  "  Sir,  (so- 
and-so)  is  absent";  or,  if  the  roll  call  has  been  omitted:  "Sir, 
the  guard  is  formed,"  except  that  at  guard  mounting  the  com- 
manders of  the  guards  present  their  guards  and  salute  without 
making  any  report. 

Between  retreat  and  reveille  the  commander  of  the  guard 
salutes  and  reports  but  does  not  bring  the  guard  to  a  present. 

51.  To  those  entitled  to  have  the  guard  turned  out  but  not 
entitled  to  inspect  it,  no  report  will  be  made ;  nor  will  a  report 
be  made  to  any  officer  unless  he  halts  in  front  of  the  guard. 

52.  When  a  guard  commanded  by  a  noncommissioned  officer  is 
turned  out  as  a  compliment  or  for  inspection,  the  noncommis- 
sioned officer,  standing  at  a  right  shoulder  on  the  right  of  the 
right  guide,  commands:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS.  He  then  exe- 
cutes the  rifle  salute.  If  a  report  be  also  required,  he  will,  after 
saluting,  and  before  bringing  his  guard  to  an  order,  report  as 
prescribed  for  the  officer  of  the  guard.     (Par.  50.) 


216  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

53.  When  a  guard  is  in  line,  not  under  inspection,  and  com- 
manded by  an  officer,  the  commander  of  the  guard  salutes  his 
regimental,  battalion,  and  company  commander,  by  bringing  the 
guard  to  attention  and  saluting  in  person. 

For  all  other  officers,  excepting  those  entitled  to  the  compli- 
ment from  a  guard  (par.  224),  the  commander  of  the  guard 
salutes  in  person,  but  does  not  bring  the  guard  to  attention. 

When  commanded  by  a  noncommissioned  officer,  the  guard  is 
brought  to  attention  in  either  case,  and  the  noncommissioned 
officer  salutes. 

The  commander  of  a  guard  exchanges  salutes  with  the  com- 
manders of  all  other  bodies  of  troops;  the  guard  is  brought  to 
attention  during  the  exchange. 

"  Present  arms  "  is  executed  by  a  guard  only  when  it  has 
turned  out  for  inspection  or  as  a  compliment,  and  at  the  cere- 
monies of  guard  mounting  and  relieving  the  old  guard. 

54.  In  marching  a  guard  or  a  detachment  of  a  guard  the 
principles  of  paragraph  53  apply.  "  Eyes  right "  is  executed 
only  in  the  ceremonies  of  guard  mounting  and  relieving  the  old 
guard. 

55.  If  a  person  entitled  to  the  compliment,  or  the  regimental, 
battalion,  or  company  commander,  passes  in  rear  of  a  guard, 
neither  the  compliment  nor  the  salute  is  given,  but  the  guard  is 
brought  to  attention  while  such  person  is  opposite  the  post  of 
the  commander. 

After  any  person  has  received  or  declined  the  compliment,  or 
received  the  salute  from  the  commander  of  the  guard,  official 
recognition  of  his  presence  thereafter  while  he  remains  in  the 
vicinity  will  be  taken  by  bringing  the  guard  to  attention. 

56.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  inspect  the  guard  at 
reveille  and  retreat,  and  at  such  other  times  as  may  be  neces- 
sary, to  assure  himself  that  the  men  are  in  proper  condition  to 
perform  their  duties  and  that  their  arms  and  equipments  are 
in  proper  condition.  For  inspection  by  other  officers,  he  pre- 
pares the  guard  in  each  case  as  directed  by  the  inspecting 
officer. 

57.  The  guard  will  not  be  paraded  during  ceremonies  unless 
directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

5.8.  At  all  formations  members  of  the.  guard  or  reliefs  will 
execute  inspection  arms  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  regulations 
of  their  arm. 


COMMANDER  OF  THE  GUARD.  217 

59.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  see  that  all  sentinels 
are  habitually  relieved  every  two  hours,  unless  the  weather  or 
other  cause  makes  it  necessary  that  it  be  done  at  shorter  or 
longer  intervals,  as  directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

60.  He  will  question  his  noncommissioned  officers  and  sen- 
tinels relative  to  the  instructions  they  may  have  received  from 
the  old  guard ;  he  will  see  that  patrols  and  visits  of  inspection 
are  made  as  directed  by  the  officer  of  the  day. 

61.  He  will  see  that  the  special  orders  for  each  post  and 
member  of  the  guard,  either  written  or  printed,  are  posted  in 
the  guardhouse  and,  if  practicable,  in  the  sentry  box  or  other 
sheltered  place  to  which  the  member  of  the  guard  has  con- 
stant access. 

62.  He  will  see  ttiat  the  proper  calls  are  sounded  at  the  hours 
appointed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

63.  Should  a  member  of  the  guard  be  taken  sick,  or  be  ar- 
rested, or  desert,  or  leave  his  guard,  he  will  at  once  notify  the 
officer  of  the  day.     (Par.  23.) 

64.  He  will,  when  the  countersign  is  used  (pars.  210  to  216), 
communicate  it  to  the  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard 
and  see  that  it  is  duly  communicated  to  the  sentinels  before 
the  hour  for  challenging;  the  countersign  will  not  be  given  to 
sentinels  posted  at  the  guardhouse. 

65.  He  will  have  the  details  for  hoisting  the  flag  at  reveille 
and  lowering  it  at  retreat,  and  for  firing  the  reveille  and  re- 
treat gun,  made  in  time  for  the  proper  performance  of  these 
duties.  (See  pars.  338,  344,  345,  and  346.)  He  will  see  that  the 
flags  are  kept  in  the  best  condition  possible,  and  that  they  are 
never  handled  except  in  the  proper  performance  of  duty. 

66.  He  may  permit  members  of  the  guard  while  at  the  guard- 
house to  remove  their  head  dress,  overcoats,  and  gloves ;  if  they 
leave  the  guardhouse  for  any  purpose  whatever,  he  will  require 
that  they  be  properly  equipped  and  armed  according  to  the 
character  of  the  service  in  which  engaged,  or  as  directed  by  the 
commanding  officer. 

67.  He  will  enter  in  the  guard  report  a  report  of  his  tour  of 
duty  and,  on  the  completion  of  his  tour,  will  present  it  to  the 
officer  of  the  day.  He  will  transmit  with  his  report  all  passes 
turned  in  at  the  post  of  the  guard. 

68.  Whenever  a  prisoner  is  sent  to  the  guardhouse  or  guard 
tent  for  confinement,  he  will  cause  him  to  be  searched,  and  will. 


318  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

without  unnecessary  delay,  report  the  case  to  the  officer  of  the 

day. 

69.  Under  war  conditions,  if  anyone  is  to  be  passed  out  of 
camp  at  night,  lie  will  be  sent  to  the  commander  of  the  guard 
who  will  have  him  passed  beyond  the  sentinels. 

70.  the  commander  of  the  guard  will  detain  at  the  guard- 
house  all  suspicious  characters,  or  parties  attempting  to  pass  a 
sentinel's  post  without  authority,  reporting  his  action  to  the 
officer  of  the  day,  to  whom  persons  so  arrested  will  be  sent,  if 

sary. 

71.  lie  will  inspect  the  guardrooms  and  cells,  and  the  irons 
of  such  prisoners  as  may  be  ironed,  at  least  once  during  his 
tour,  and  at  such  other  times  as  he  may  deem  necessary. 

72.  He  will  cause  the  corporals  of  the  old  and  new  reliefs  to 
verify  together,  immediately  before  each  relief  goes  on  post,  the 
number  of  prisoners  who  should  then  properly  be  at  the  guard- 
house. 

He   will   see  that  the   sentences  of  prisoners  under  his 
]  strictly  in  accordance  with  the  action  of 
ring  authority. 

ial  prisoner  guard  has  been  detailed   (par. 

he  will,  as  far  as  practicable,  assign  as  guards  over  work- 

-  of  prisoners  sentinels  from  posts  guarded  at  night 

only. 

75.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  inspect  all  meals  sent  to 

i rd house  and  see  that  the  quantity  and  quality  of  food 

are  In  accordance  with  regulations. 

r  guard  mounting  he  will  report  to  the  old  officer  of  the 
day  all  cases  of  prisoners  whose  terms  of  sentence  expire  on 
ay,  and  also  all  cases  of  prisoners  concerning  whom  no 
s  has  been  received.     (See  par.  241.) 
.   lander    of    the    guard    is    responsible    for   the 
security  of  the  prisoners  under  the  charge  of  his  guard;   he 
becom  i    for    them    after    their   number   has   been 

•    been  turned  over  to  the  custody  of  his 
lard  or  by  the  prisoner  guard  or  overseers. 
■■■  will  be  verified  and  turned  over  to  the  new 
ading   them,  unless   the  commanding  officer 
.:     -hall  direct  otherwise. 
o  receive  the  prisoners  at  the  guardhouse  when  they  have 
paraded  and  after  they  have  been  verified  by  the  officers 


SERGEANT  OF  THE  GUARD.  219 

of  the  day,  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  directs  his 
sergeant  to  form  his  guard  with  an  interval,  and  commands: 
1.  Prisoners,  2.  Right,  3.  FACE,  4.  Forward,  5.  MARCH.  The 
prisoners  having  arrived  opposite  the  interval  in  the  new 
guard,  he  commands:  1.  Prisoners,  2.  HALT,  3.  Left,  4.  FACE, 
5.  Right  (or  left),  6.  DRESS,  7.  FRONT. 

The  prisoners  dress  on  the  line  ofi  the  new  guard. 

Section  5.  Sergeant  of  the  guard. 

80.  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard  always 
acts  as  sergeant  of  the  guard,  and  if  there  be  no  officer  of  the 
guard,  will' perform  the  duties  prescribed  for  the  commander  of 
the  guard. 

81.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  has  general  supervision  over 
the  other  noncommissioned  officers  and  the  musicians  and  pri- 
vates of  the  guard,  and. must  be  thoroughly  familiar  with  all 
of  their  orders  and  duties. 

82.  He  is  directly  responsible  for  the  property  under  charge 
of  the  guard,  and  will  see  that  it  is  properly  cared  for.  He  will 
make  lists  of  articles  taken  out  by  working  parties  and  see  that 
all  such  .articles  are  duly  returned.  If  they  are  not,  he  will 
immediately  report  the  fact  to  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

83.  Immediately  after  guard  mounting  he  will  prepare  dupli- 
cate lists  of  the  names  of  all  noncommissioned  officers,  musi- 
cians, and  privates  of  the  guard,  showing  the  relief  and  post 
or  duties  of  each.  One  list  will  be  handed  as  soon  as  possible 
to  the  commander  of  the  guard ;  the  other  will  be  retained  by 
the  sergeant. 

84.  He  will  see  that  all  reliefs  are  turned  out  at  the  proper 
time,  and  that  the  corporals  thoroughly  understand,  and  are 
prompt  and  efficient  in,  the  discharge  of  their  duties. 

:  85.  During  the  temporary  absence  from  the  guardhouse  of 
the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  the  next  in  rank  of  the  noncommis- 
sioned officers  will  perform  his  duties. 

86.  Should  the  corporal  whose  relief  is  on  post  be  called 
away  from  the  guardhouse,  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  will 
designate  a  noncommissioned  officer  to  take  the  corporal's  place 
until  his  return. 

87.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  is  responsible  at  all  times  for 
the  proper  police  of  th<-  guardhouse  or  guard  tent  iuejuding  the 
ground  about  them  and  the  prison  cells. 


220  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

88.  At  first  sergeant's  call  he  will  proceed  to  the  adjutant's 
office  and  obtain  the  guard  report  book. 

89.  When  the  national  or  regimental  colors  are  taken  from 
the  stacks  of  the  color  line,  the  color  bearer  and  guard,  or  the 
sergeant  of  the  guard,  unarmed,  and  two  armed  privates  as  a 
guard,  will  escort  the  colors  to  the  colonel's  quarters,  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  color  guard  in  the  drill  regulations  of  the  arm 
of  the  service  to  which  the  guard  belongs. 

90.  He  will  report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  any  sus- 
picious or  unusual  occurrence  that  comes  under  his  notice,  will 
warn  him  of  the  approach  of  any  armed  body,  and  will  send  to 
him  all  persons  arrested  by  the  guard. 

91.  When  the  guard  is  turned  out  its  formation  will  be  as 
follows :  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer,  if  commander  of 
the  guard,  is  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide ;  if  not  commander 
of  the  guard,  he  is  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  in  rear  of  the  right 
four  of  the  guard ;  the  next  in  rank  is  right  guide ;  the  next 
left  guide ;  the  others  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  usually  each  in 
rear  of  his  relief;  the  field  music,  with  its  left  three  paces  to 
the  right  of  the  right  guide.  The  reliefs  form  in  the  same  order 
as  whe-a  the  guard  was  first  divided,  except  that  if  the  guard 
consists  of  dismounted  cavalry  and  infantry,  the  cavalry  forms 
on  the  left. 

92.  The  sergeant  forms  the  guard,  calls  the  roll,  and,  if  not  in 
command  of  the  guard,  reports  to  the  commander  of  the  guard 
as  prescribed  in  drill  regulations  for  a  first  sergeant  forming  a 
troop  or  company ;  the  guard  is  not  divided  into  platoons  or 
sections,  and.  except  when  the  whole  guard  is  formed  prior  to 
marching  off,  fours  are  not  counted. 

93.  The  sergeant  reports  as  follows :  "  Sir,  all  present  or 
accounted  for,"  or  "Sir,  (so-and-so)  is  absent";  or  if  the  roll 
call  has  been  omitted,  "  Sir,  the  guard  is  formed."  Only  men 
absent  without  proper  authority  are  reported  absent.  He  then 
takes  his  place,  without  command. 

94.  At  night  the  rcll  may  be  called  by  reliefs  and  numbers 
instead  of  names ;  thus,  the  first  relief  being  on  post :  Second 
relief;  No.  1;  No.  2,  etc.;  Third  relief.  Corporal;  No.  1,  etc. 

95.  Calling  the  roll  will  be  dispensed  with  in  forming  the 
guard  when  it  is  turned  out  as  a  compliment,  on  the  approach  of 
an  armed  body,  or  in  any  sudden  emergency ;  but  in  such  cases 
the  roll   may  be  called  before  dismissing  the  guard.     If  the 


SERGEANT  OF  THE  GUARD.  221 

guard  be  turned  out  for  an  officer  entitled  to  inspect  it,  the  roll 
will,  unless  he  directs  otherwise,  always  be  called  before  a  re- 
port is  made. 

96.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  has  direct  charge  of  the 
prisoners,  except  during  such  time  as  they  may  be  under  the 
charge  of  the  prisoner  guard  or  overseers,  and  is  responsible  to 
the  commander  of  the  guard  for  their  security. 

97.  He  ft'ill  carry  the  keys  of  the  guardroom  and  cells,  and 
will  not  suffer  them  to  leave  his  personal  possession  while  he  is 
at  the  guardhouse,  except  as  hereinafter  provided.  (Par.  99.) 
Should  he  leave  the  guardhouse  for  any  purpose  he  will  turn 
the  keys  over  to  the  noncommissioned  officer  who  takes  his  place. 
(Par.  85.) 

98.  He  will  count  the  knives,  forks,  etc.,  given  to  the  prisoners 
with  their  food,  and  see  that  none  of  these  articles  remain  in 
their  possession.  He  will  see  that  no  forbidden  articles  of  any 
kind  are  conveyed  to  the  prisoners. 

99.  Prisoners  when  paraded  with  the  guard  are  placed  in  line, 
in  its  center.  The  sergeant,  immediately  before  forming  the 
guard,  will  turn  over  his  keys  to  the  noncommissioned  officer 
at  the  guardhouse.  Having  formed  the  guard,  he  will  divide  it 
into  two  nearly  equal  p,arts.  Indicating  the  point  of  division 
with  his  hand,  he  commands:  1.  Right  (or  left),  2.  FACE,  3. 
Forward,  4.  MARCH,  5.  Guard,  6.  HALT,  7.  Left  (or  right),  8. 
FACE. 

If  the  first  command  be  right  face,  the  right  half  of  the 
guard  only  will  execute  the  movements ;  if  left  face,  the  left 
half  only  will  execute  them.  The  command  halt  is  given  when 
sufficient  interval  is  obtained  to  admit  the  prisoners.  The  doors 
of  the  guardroom  and  cells  are  then  opened  by  the  noncommis- 
sioned officer  having  the  keys.  The  prisoners  will  file  out  under 
the  supervision  of  the  sergeant,  the  noncommissioned  officer, 
and  sentinel  on  duty  at  the  guardhouse,  and  such  other  sentinels 
as  may  be  necessary ;  they  will  form  in  line  in  the  interval  be- 
tween the  two  parts  of  the  guard. 

100.  To  return  the  prisoners  to  the  guardroom  and  cells,  the 
sergeant  commands:  1.  Prisoners^  2.  Right  <or  left),  3.  FACE, 
4.  Column  right   (or  left),  5.  MARCH. 

The  prisoners,  under  the  same  supervision  as  before,  return  to 
their  proper  rooms  or  cells. 


222  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

101.  To  close  the  guard,  the  sergeant  commands:  1.  Left  (or 
right),  2.  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH,  ".  Guard,  G.  HALT, 
7.  Right  (or  left).  S.  FACE. 

The  left  or  right  half  only  of  the  guard,  as  indicated,  executes 
the  movement. 

102.  If  there  be  but  few  prisoners,  the  sergeant  may  indicate 
the  point  of  division  as  above,  and  form  the  necessary  interval 
by  the  commands:  1.  Right  (or  left)  step,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard. 
4.*  HALT,  and  close  the  intervals  by  the  commands:  1.  Left  (or' 
right)  step.  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard,  4.  HALT. 

103.  If  sentinels  are  numerous,  reliefs  may,  at  the  discretion 
of  the  commanding  officer,  be  posted  in  detachments,  and  ser- 
geants, as  well  as  corporals,  required  to  relieve  and  post  them. 

Section  6.  Corporal  of  the  Guard. 

104.  A  corporal  of  the  guard  receives  and  obeys  orders  from 
none  but  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  senior  to  him- 
self, the  officers  of  the  guard,  the  officer  of  the  day,  and  the  com- 
manding officer. 

105.  It  is  tbe  duty  of  the  corporal  of  the  guard  to  post  and 
relieve  sentinels  and  to  instruct  the  members  of  his  relief  in 
their  orders  and  duties. 

10G.  Immediately  after  the  division  of  the  guard  into  reliefs 
the  corporals  will  assign  the  members  of  their  respective  reliefs 
to  posts  by  number,  and  a  soldier  so  assigned  to  his  post  will 
not  be  changed  to  another  during  the  same  tour  of  guard  duty, 
unless  by  direction  of  the  commander  of  the  guard  or  higher 
authority.  Usually,  experienced  soldiers  are  placed  over  the 
arms  of  the  guard,  and  at  remote  and  responsible  posts. 

107.  Each  corporal  will  then  make  a  list  of  the  members  of 
his  relief,  including  himself.  This  list  will  contain  the  number 
of  the  relief,  the  name,  the  company,  and  the  regiment  of  every 
member  thereof,  and  the  post  to  which  each  is  assigned.  The 
list  will  be  made  in  duplicate,  one  copy  to  be  given  to  the  ser- 
geant of  the  guard  as  soon  as  completed,  the  other  to  be  retained 
by  the  corporal. 

108.  When  directed  by  the  commander  of  tne  guard,  the 
corporal  of  the  first  relief  forms  his  relief,  and  then  commands : 
CALL  OFF. 

Commencing  on  the  right,  the  men  call  off  alternately  rear 
and  front  rank,   "  one,"  "  two."   "  three,"  "  four,"  and  so  on ; 


CORPORAL  OF  THE  GUARD.  223 

if  in  single  rank,  they  call  off  from  right  to  left.    The  corporal 
then  commands:  1.  Right,  2.  FACE.  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

The  corporal  marches  on  the  left,  and  near  the  rear  file,  in 
order  to  observe  the  march.  The  corporal  of  the  old  guard 
marches  on  the  right  of  the  leading  file,  and  takes  command 
when  the  last  one  of  the  old  sentinels  is  relieved,  changing 
places  with  the  corporal  of  the  new  guard. 

109.  When  the  relief  arrives  at  six  paces  from  a  sentinel 
(see  par.  168),  the  corporal  halts  it  and  commands,  according 
to  the  number  of  the  post:  No.  ( .) 

Both  sentinels  execute  port  arms  or  saber;  the  new  sentinel 
approaches  the  old,  halting  about  one  pace  from  him.  (See 
par.  172.  > 

110.  The  corporals  advance  and  place  themselves,  facing  each 
other,  a  little  in  advance  of  the  new  sentinel,  the  old  corporal 
on  his  right  the  new  corporal  on  his  left,  both  at  a  right 
shoulder,  and  observe  that  the  old  sentinel  transmits  correctly 
his  instructions. 

The  following  diagram  will  illustrate  the  positions  taken : 

A 
R  - 

I  I  I  I  I  Ci  ID 

I      I  I  I 

B 

R  is  the  relief;  A,  the  new  corporal;  B,  (he  old;  C,  the  new 
sentinel ;  D,  the  old. 

ill.  The  instructions  relative  to  the  post  having  been  com- 
municated, the  new  corporal  commands.  Post:  both  sentinels 
then  resume  the  right  shoulder,  face  toward  the  new  corporal 
and  step  back  so  as  to  allow  the  relief  to  pass  in  front  of  them. 
The  new  corporal  then  commands:  "1.  Forward,  2.  March  '*:  the 
old  sentinel  takes  his  place  in  rear  of  the  relief  as  it  passes  him, 
his  piece  in  the  same  position  as  those  of  the  relief.  The  new 
sentinel  stands  fast  at  a  right  shoulder  until  the  relief  lias 
passed  six  paces  beyond  him,  when  he  walks  his  post.  The  cor- 
porals take  their  places  as  the  relief  passes  them. 

112.  Mounted  sentinels  are  posted  and  relieved  in  accordance 
with  the  same  principles. 


224  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

113.  On  the  return  of  the  old  relief,  the  corporal  of  the  new 
guard  falls  out  when  the  relief  halts ;  the  corporal  of  the  old 
guard  forms  his  relief  on  the  left  of  the  old  guard,  salutes,  and 
reports  to  the  commander  of  his  guard :  "  Sir,  the  relief  is 
present";  or  "  Sir,  (so  and  so)  is  absent."  and  takes  his  place 
in  the  guard. 

114.  To  post  a  relief  other  than  that  which  is  posted  when 
the  old  guard  is  relieved,  its  corporal  commands : 

1.  (Such)  relief,  2.  FALL  IN;  and  ,if  arms  are  stacked,  they 
are  taken  at  the  proper  commands. 

The  relief  is  formed  facing  to  the  front,  with  arms  at  an 
order,  the  men  place  themselves  according  to  the  numbers  of 
their  respective  posts,  viz.  two,  four,  six,  and  so  on,  in  the  front 
rank,  and  one,  three,  five,  and  so  on,  in  the  rear  rank.  The 
corporal,  standing  about  two  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  his 
relief,  then  commands:  CALL  OFF. 

The  men  call-off  as  prescribed.  The  corporal  then  commands: 
1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Order,  4.  ARMS;  faces  the  commander 
of  the  guard,  executes  the  rifle  salute,  reports:  "Sir,  the  relief 
is  present";  or  "Sir,  (so  and  so)  is  absent";  lie  then  takes  his 
place  on  the  right  at  order  arms. 

115.  When  the  commander  of  the  guard  directs  the  corporal, 
Post  your  relief,  the  corporal  salutes  and  posts  his  relief  as 
prescribed  (Pars.  10S  to  111)  ;  the  corporal  of  the  relief*  on  post 
does  not  go  with  the  new  relief,  except  when  necessary  to  show 
the  way. 

116.  To  dismiss  the  old  relief,  it  is  halted  and  faced  to  the 
front  at  the  guardhouse  by  the  corporal  of  the  new  relief,  who 
then  falls  out:  the  corporal  of  the  old  relief  then  steps  in  front 
of  the  relief  and  dismisses  it  by  the  proper  commands. 

117.  Should  the  pieces  have  been  loaded  before  the  relief  was 
posted,  the  corporal  will,  before  dismissing  the  relief,  see  that 
no  <  artridges  are  left  in  the  chambers  or  magazines.  The  same 
rule  applies  to  sentinels  over  prisoners. 

118.  Each  corporal  will  thoroughly  acquaint  himself  with  all 
the  special  orders  of  every  sentinel  on  his  relief,  and  see  that 
each  understands  and  correctly  transmits  such  orders  in  detail 
to  his  successor. 

119.  There  should  be  at  least  one  noncommissioned  officer 
constantly  on  the  alert  at  the  guardhouse,  usually  the  corporal 
whose  relief  is  on  post.     This  noncommissioned   officer   takes 


CORPORAL  OF  THE  GUARD.  225 

post  near  the  entrance  of  the  guardhouse,  and  does  not  fall  in 
with  the  guard  when  it  is  formed.  He  will  have  his  rifle  con- 
stantly with  him. 

120.  Whenever  it  becomes  necessary  for  the  corporal  to  leave 
his  post  near  the  entrance  of  the  guardhouse,  he  will  notify  the 
sergeant  of  the  guard,  who  will  at  once  take  his  place,  or  desig- 
nate another  noncommissioned  officer  to  do  so. 

121.  He  will  see  that  no  person  enters  the  guardhouse  or 
guard  tent,  or  crosses  the  posts  of  the  sentinels  there  posted 
without  proper  authority. 

122.  Should  any  sentinel  cull  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard, 
the  corporal  will,  in  every  case,  at  once  and  quickly  proceed  to 
such  sentinel.  He  will  notify  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  before 
leaving  the  guardhouse. 

123.  He  will  at  once  report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard 
any  violation  of  regulations  or  any  unusual  occurrence  which 
is  reported  to  him  by  a  sentinel,  or  which  comes  to  his  notice 
in  any  other  way. 

124.  Should  a  sentinel  call  "The  Guard,"  the  corporal  will 
promptly  notify  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

125.  Should  a  sentinel  call  "  Relief,"  the  corporal  will  at 
once  proceed  to  the  post  of  such  sentinel,  taking  with  him  the 
man  next  for  duty  on  that  post.  If  the  sentinel  is  relieved  for 
a  short  time  only,  the  corporal  will  again  post  him  as  soon  as 
the  necessity  for  his  relief  ceases. 

126.  When  the  countersign  is  used",  the  corporal  at  the  post- 
ing of  the  relief  during  whose  tour  challenging  is  to  begin  gives 
the  countersign  to  the  members  of  the  relief,  excepting-  those 
posted  at  the  guardhouse. 

127.  He  will  wake  the  corporal  whose  relief  is  next  on  post 
in  time  for  the  latter  to  verify  the  prisoners,  form  his  relief, 
and  post  it  at  the  proper  hour. 

128.  Should  the  guard  be  turned  out,  each  corporal  will  call 
his  own  relief,  and  cause  its  members  to  fall  in  promptly. 

129.  Tents  or  bunks  in  the  same  vicinity  will  be  designated 
for  the  reliefs  so  that  all  the  members  of  each  relief  may,  if 
necessary,  be  found  and  turned  out  by  the  corporal  in  the  least 
time  and  with  the  least  confusion. 

130.  When  challenged  by  a  sentinel  while  posting  his  relief, 
the  corporal  commands:  1.  Relief,  2.  HALT;    to  the  sentinel's 


226  MANTTAI,  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

challenge  be  answers  "  Relief,"  and  at  the  order  of  the  sentinel 
he  advances  alone  to  give  the  countersign,  or  to  be  recognized. 
When  the  sentinel  says.  "  Advance  relief,"  the  corporal  com- 
mands: 1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

If  to  be  relieved,  the  sentinel  is  then  relieved  as  prescribed. 

131.  Between  retreat  and  reveille,  the  corporal  of  the  guard 
will  challenge  all  suspicious  looking  persons  or  parties  he  may 
observe,  first  halting  his  patrol  or  relief,  if  either  be  with  him. 
He  will  advance  them  in  the  same  manner  that  sentinels  on 
post  advance  like  parties  (pars.  191  to  197),  but  if  the  route 
of  a  patrol  is  on  a  continuous  chain  of  sentinels,  he  should  not 
challenge  persons  coming  near  him  unless  he  has  reason  to  be- 
lieve that  they  have  eluded  the  vigilance  of  sentinels. 

132.  Between  retreat  and  reveille,  whenever  so  ordered  by  an 
officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard,  the  corporal  will  call : 
"  Turn  out  the  guard,"  announcing  the  title  of  the  officer,  and 
then,  if  not  otherwise  ordered,  he  will  salute  and  return  to  his 
post. 

133.  As  a  general  rule  he  will  advance  parties  approaching 
the  guard  at  night  in  the  same  manner  that  sentinels  on  post 
advance  like  parties.  Thus,  the  sentinel  at  the  guardhouse 
challenges  and  repeats  the  answer  to  the  corporal,  as  prescribed 
hereafter  (par.  200)  ;  the  corporal,  advancing  at  port  arms, 
says:  "Advance  (so  and  so)  with  the  countersign,"  or  "to  he 
recognized,"  if  there  be  no  countersign  used;  the  countersign 
being  correctly  given,  or  the  party  being  duly  recognized,  the 
corporal  says:  "Advance  (so  and  so),"  repeating  the  answer 
to  the  challenge  of  the  sentinel. 

134.  When  officers  of  different  rank  approach  the  guardhouse 
from  different  directions  at  the  same  time,  the  senior  will  be 
advanced  first,  and  will  not  be  made  to  wait  for  his  junior. 

135.  Out  of  ranks  and  under  arms,  the  corporal  salutes  with 
the  rifle  salute.  He  will  salute  all  officers,  whether  by  day  or 
night. 

136.  The  corporal  will  examine  parties  halted  and  detained 
by  sentinels,  and.  if  he  have  reason  to  believe  the  parties  have 
no  authority  to  cross  sentinel's  posts,  will  conduct  them  to  the 
commander  of  the  guard. 

137.  The  corporal  of  the  guard  will  arrest  i  !1  auspicious  look- 
ing characters  prowling  about  the  post  or  ca  •  all  persons  of 
a  disorderly  character  disturbing  the  peact,    .nd  all  persons 


ORDERLIES  AND  COLOR  SENTINELS.  227 

taken  in  the  act  of  committing  crime  against  the  Government 
on  a  military  reservation  or  post.  All  persons  arrested  by  cor- 
porals of  the  guard  or  by  sentinels  will  at  once  be  conducted 
to  the  commander  of  the  guard  by  the  corporal. 

Section  7.  Musicians  of  the  guard. 

138.  The  musicians  of  the  guard  will  sound  calls  as  prescribed 
by  the  commanding  officer. 

139.  Should  the  guard  be  turned  out  for  national  or  regimental 
colors  or  standards,  uncased,  the  field  music  of  the  guard  will, 
when  the  guard  present  arms,  sound,  "  To  the  color  "  or  "  To  the 
standard";  or,  if  for  any  person  entitled  thereto,  the  march, 
flourishes,  or  ruffles,  prescribed  in  paragraphs  375,  376,  and  377, 
A.  R. 

Section  8.  Orderlies  and  color  sentinels. 

140.  When  so  directed  by  the  commanding  officer,  the  officer 
who  inspects  the  guard  at  guard  mounting  will  select  from  the 
members  of  the  new  guard  an  orderly  for  the  commanding 
officer  and  such  n.  mber  of  other  orderlies  and  color  sentinels 
as  may  be  required. 

141.  For  these  positions  the  soldiers  will  be  chosen  who  are 
most  correct  in  the  performance  of  duty  and  in  military  bear- 
ing, neatest  in  person  and  clothing,  and  whose  arms  and  accou- 
terments  are  in  the  best  condition.  Clothing,  arms,  and  equip- 
ments must  conform  to  regulations.  If  there  is  any  doubt  as 
to  the  relative  qualifications  of  two  or  more  soldiers,  the  in- 
specting officer  will  cause  them  to  fall  out  at  the  guardhouse 
and  to  form  in  line  in  single  rank.  He  will  then,  by  testing 
them  in  drill  regulations,  select  the  most  proficient.  The  com- 
mander of  the  guard  will  be  notified  of  the  selection. 

142.  When  directed  by  the  commander  of  the  guard  to  fall 
out  and  report  an  orderly  will  give  his  name,  company,  and 
regiment  to  the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  and,  leaving  his  rifle  in 
the  arm  rack  in  his  company  quarters,  will  proceed  at  once  to 
the  officer  to  whom  ne  is  assigned,  reporting:  "Sir,  Private 
,  Company  ,  reports  as  orderly." 

143.  If  the  orderly  selected  be  a  cavalryman,  he  will  leave 
Ids  rifle  in  the  arm  rack  of  his  troop  quarters,  and  report  with 
his  belt  on,  but  without  side  arms  unless  specially  otherwise 
ordered. 


228  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR   GUARD  DUTY. 

144.  Orderlies,  while  on  duty  as  such,  are  subject  only  to  the 
orders  of  the  commanding  officer  and  of  the  officers  to  whom 
thev  are  ordered  to  report. 

145.  When  an  orderly  is  ordered  to  carry  a  message,  he  will 
be  careful  to  deliver  it  exactly  as  it  was  given  to  him. 

146.  His  tour  of  duty  ends  when  he  is  relieved  by  the  orderly 
selected  from  the  guard  relieving  his  own. 

147.  Orderlies  are  members  of  the  guard,  and  their  name, 
company,  and  regiment  are  entered  on  the  guard  report  and 
lists  of  the  guard. 

148.  If  a  color  line  is  established,  sufficient  sentinels  are 
placed  on  the  color  line  to  guard  the  colors  and  stacks. 

149.  Color  sentinels  are  posted  only  so  long  as  the  stacks  are 
formed.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  divide  the  time 
equally  among  them. 

150.  When  stacks  are  broken,  the  color  sentinels  may  be  per- 
mitted to  return  to  their  respective  companies.  They  are  re- 
quired to  report  in  person  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  at 
reveille  and  retreat.  They  will  fall  in  with  the  guard,  under 
arms,  at  guard  mounting. 

151.  Color  sentinels  are  not  placed  on  the  regular  reliefs,  nor 
are  their  posts  numbered.  In  calling  for  the  corporal  of  the 
guard,  they  call :  "  Corporal  of  the  guard.    Color  line." 

152.  Officers  or  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased  colors  will 
render  the  prescribed  salute.  If  the  colors  are  on  the  stacks, 
the  salute  will  be  made  on  crossing  the  color  line  or  on  passing 
the  colors. 

153.  A  sentinel  placed  over  the  colors  will  not  permit  them 
to  be  moved  except  in  the  presence  of  an  armed  escort.  Unless 
otherwise  ordered  by  the  commanding  officer,  he  will  allow  no 
one  to  touch  them  but  the  color  bearer. 

He  will  not  permit  any  soldier  to  take  arms  from  the  stacks 
or  to  touch  them  except  by  order  of  an  officer  or  noncommis- 
sioned officer  of  the  guard. 

If  any  person  passing  the  colors  or  crossing  the  color  line 
fails  to  salute  the  colors,  the  sentinel  will  caution  him  to  do  so, 
and  if  the  caution  be  not  heeded  he  will  call  the  corporal  of  the 
guard  and  report  the  facts. 

Section  9.  Privates  of  the  Guard. 

154.  Privates  are  assigned  to  reliefs  by  the  commander  of  the 
guard,  and  to  posts  usually  by  the  corporal  of  their  relief.    They 


ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS.  229 

will  not  change  from  one  relief  or  post  to  another  during  the 
same  tour  of  guard  duty  unless  by  proper  authority. 

Section   10.  Orders   for   Sentinels. 

155.  Orders  for  sentinels  are  of  two  classes:  General  orders 
and  special  orders.  General  orders  apply  to  all  sentinels.  Spe- 
cial orders  relate  to  particular  posts  and  duties. 

156.  Sentinels  will  be  required  to  memorize  the  following : 
My  general  orders  are: 

1.  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government  property  in 
view. 

2.  To  walk  my  pdst  in  a  military  manner  keeping  always  on 
the  alert  and  observing  everything  that  takes  place  within  sight 
or  hearing. 

3.  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am  instructed  to  enforce. 

4.  To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant  from  the  guard 
house  than  my  own. 

5.  To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

6.  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel  who  relieves 
me  all  orders  from  the  commanding  officer ,  officer  of  the  day, 
and  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  only. 

7.  To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line'of  duty. 

S.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm. 

9.  To  allow  no  one  to  commit  a  nuisance  on  or  near  my  post. 

10.  In  any  case  not  covered  by  instructions  to  call  the  corporal 
of  the  guard. 

11.  To  salute  all  officers,  -and  all  colors  and  standards  not 
"based. 

12.  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night,  and  during  the  time 
for  challenging,  to  challenge  all  persons  on  or  near  my  post 
and  to  allow  no  one  to  pass  without  proper  authority. 

REGULATIONS    RELATING    TO    THE    GENERAL    ORDERS    FOR    SENTINELS. 

No.  1 :  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government  property 

in  view. 

157.  All  persons,  of  whatever  rank  in  the  service,  are  re- 
quired to  observe  respect  toward  sentinels  and  members  of  the 
guard  when  such  are  in  the  performance  of  their  duties. 


230  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

158.  A  sentinel  will  at  once  report  to  the  corporal  of  the  guard 
every  unusual  or  suspicious  occurrence  noted. 

159.  He  will  arrest  suspicious  persons  prowling  about  the 
post  or  camp  at  any  time,  all  parties  to  a  disorder  occurring 
on  or  near  his  post,  and  all,  except  authorized  persons,  who  at- 
tempt to  enter  the  camp  at  night,  and  will  turn  over  to  the 
corporal  of  the  guard  all  persons  arrested. 

160.  The  number,  limits,  and  extent  of  his  post  will  in- 
variably constitute  part  of  the  special  orders  of  a  sentinel  on 
post.  The  limits  of  his  post  should  be  so  defined  as  to  include 
every  place  to  which  he  is  required  to  go  in  the  performance  of 
his  duties. 

No.  2 :  To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner,  keeping  always 
on  the  alert  and  observing  everything  that  takes  place  within 
sight  or  hearing. 

161.  A  sentinel  is  not  required  to  halt  and  change  the  posi- 
tion of  his  rifle  on  arriving  at  the  end  of  his  post,  nor  to  execute 
to  the  rear,  march,  precisely  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  regula- 
tions, but  faces  about  while  walking  in  the  manner  most  con- 
venient to  him  and  at  any  part  of  his  post  as  may  be  best 
suited  to  the  proper  performance  of  his' duties.  He  carries  his 
rifle  on  either  shoulder,  and  in  wet  or  severe  weather,  when 
not  in  a  sentry  box,  may  carry  it  at  a  secure. 

162.  Sentinels  when  in  sentry  boxes  stand  at  ease.  Sentry 
boxes  will  be  used  in  wet  weather  only,  or  at  other  times  when 
specially  authorized  by  the  commanding  officer. 

163.  In  very  hot  weather,  sentinels  may  be  authorized  to 
stand  at  ease  on  their  posts,  provided  they  can  effectively  dis- 
charge their  duties  in  this  position;  but  they  will  take  advan- 
tage of  this  privilege  only  on  the  express  authority  of  the 
officer  of  the  day  or  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

164.  A  mounted  sentinel  may  dismount  occasionally  and  lead 
his  horse,  but  will  not  relax  his  vigilance. 

No.  3:  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am.  instructed  to 

enforce. 

165.  A  sentinel  will  ordinarily  report  a  violation  of  orders 
when  he  is  inspected  or  relieved,  but  if  the  case  be  urgent,  he 
will  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  and  also,  if  necessary,  will 
arrest  the  offender. 


ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS.  231 

No.  4:  To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant  from  the 
guardhouse  than  my  own. 

166.  To  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard  for  any  purpose  other 
than  relief,  fire,  or  disorder  (pars.  167  and  173).  a  sentinel  will 

call.  "  Corporal  of  the  guard,  No.   ( ),*'  adding  the  number 

of  his  post.    In  no  case  will  any  sentinel  call,  "  Never  mind  the 
corporal";  nor  will  the  corporal  heed  such  call  if  given. 

No.  5:  To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

167.  If  relief  becomes  necessary,  by  reason  of  sickness  or 
other  cause,  a  sentinel  will  call,  "  Corporal  of  the  guard,  No. 
( ),  Relief,"  giving  the  number  of  his  post. 

168.  Whenever  a  sentinel  is  to  be  relieved,  he  will  halt,  and 
with  arms  at  a  right  shoulder,  will  face  toward  the  relief, 
when  it  is  SO  paces  from  him.  He  will  come  to  a  port  arms 
with  the  new  sentinel,  and  in  a  low  tone  will  transmit  to  him 
all  the  special  orders  relating  to  the  post  and  any  other  infor- 
mation which  will  assist  him  to  better  perform  his  duties. 

No.  G :  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel  who  re- 
lieves me,  all  orders  from  the  commanding  officer,  officer  of 
the  day,  and  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  the 
guard  only. 

169.  During  his  tour  of  duty  a  soldier  is  subject  to  the  orders 
1  of  the  commanding  officer,  officer  of  the  day.  and  officers  and 
|  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  only;  but  any  officer  is 
I  competent  to  investigate  apparent  violations  of  regulations  by 

members  of  the  guard. 

i      170.  A  sentinel  will  quit  his  piece  on  an  explicit  order  from 
any  person  from  whom  he  lawfully  receives  orders  while  on 

j  post ;  under  no  circumstances  will  he  yield  it  to  any  other  per- 
son.    Unless  necessity  therefor  exists,  no  person   will   require 

I  a  sentinel  to  quit  his  piece,  even  to  allow  it  to  be  inspected. 
171.  A  sentinel  will  not  divulge  the  countersign  (pars.  209  to 

|  217)   to  anyone  except  the  sentinel  who  relieves  him,  or  to  a 
person  from  whom  he  properly  receives  orders,  on  such  person's 


232  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

verbal  order  given  personally.  Privates  of  the  guard  will  not 
use  the  countersign  except  in  the  performance  of  their  duties 
while  posted  as  sentinels. 

No.  7 :  To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line  of  duty. 

172.  When  calling  for  any  purpose,  challenging,  or  holding 
communication  with  any  person  a  dismounted  sentinel  armed 
with  a  rifle  or  saber  will  take  the  position  of  port  arms  or 
saber.  At  night  a  dismounted  sentinel  armed  with  a  pistol 
takes  the  position  of  raised  pistol  in  challenging  or  holding 
communication.  A  mounted  sentinel  does  not  ordinarily  draw 
his  weapon  in  the  daytime  when  challenging  or  holding  con- 
versation; but  if  drawn,  he  holds  it  at  advance  rifle,  raise  pis- 
tol, or  port  saber,  according  as  he  is  armed  with  a  rifle,  pistol, 
or  saber.  At  night  in  challenging  and  holding  conversation 
his  weapon  is  drawn  and  held  as  just  prescribed,  depending  on 
whether  he  is  armed  with  a  rifle,  pistol,  or  saber. 

No.  8 :  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm. 

173.  In  case  of  fire,  a  sentinel  will  call,  "  Fire,  No.   ( )," 

adding  the  number  of  his  post ;  if  possible,  he  will  extinguish 
the  fire  himself.     In  case  of  disorder  he  will  call,  "  The  Guard, 

No.   ( ),"  adding  the  number  of  his  post.     If  the  danger  be 

great,  he  will  in  either  case  discharge  his  piece  before  calling. 

No.  11 :  To  salute  all  officers  and  all  colors  and  standards  not 

cased. 

174.  When  not  engaged  in  Hie  performance  of  a  specific  duty, 
the  proper  execution  of  which  would  prevent  it,  a  member  of 
the  guard  will  salute  all  officers  who  pass  him.  This  rule 
applies  at  all  hours  of  the  day  or  night,  except  in  the  case  of 
mounted  sentinels  armed  with  a  rifle  or  pistol,  or  dismounted 
sentinels  armed  with  a  pistol,  after  challenging.     (See  par.  181.) 

175.  Sentinels  will  salute  as  follows:  A  dismounted  sentinel 
armed  with  a  rifle  or  saber,  salutes  by  presenting  arms;  if 
otherwise  armed,  he  salutes  with  the  right  hand. 


ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS.  233 

A  mounted  sentinel,  if  armed  with  a  saber  and  the  saber  be 
drawn,  salutes  by  presenting-  saber ;  otherwise  he  salutes  in  all 
cases  with  the  right  hand. 

176.  To  salute,  a  dismounted  sentinel,  with  piece  at  a  right 
shoulder  or  saber  at  a  carry,  halts  and  faces  toward  the  person 
to  be  saluted  when  the  latter  arrives  within  30  paces. 

The  limit  within  which  individuals  and  insignia  of  rank  can 
be  readily  recognized  is  assumed  to  be  about  30  paces,  and  there- 
fore at  this  distance  cognizance  is  taken  of  the  person  or  party 
to  be  saluted. 

177.  The  salute  is  rendered  at  six  paces;  if  the  person  to  be 
saluted  does  not  arrive  within  that  distance,  then  when  he  is 
nearest. 

178.  A  sentinel  in  a  sentry  box,  armed  with  a  rifle,  stands  at 
attention  in  the  doorway  on  the  approach  of  a  person  or  party 
entitled  to  salute,  and  salutes  by  presenting  arms  according  to 
the  foregoing  rules. 

If  armed  with  a  saber,  he  stands  at  a  carry  and  salutes  as 
before. 

179.  A  mounted  sentinel  on  a  regular  post,  halts,  faces,  and 
salutes  in  accordance  with  the  foregoing  rules.  If  doing  patrol 
duty,  he  salutes,  but  does  not  halt  unless  spoken  to. 

180.  Sentinels  salute,  in  accordance  with  the  foregoing  rules, 
all  persons  and  parties  entitled  to  compliments  from  the  guards 
(pars.  224,  227,  and  228)  ;  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy,  and 
Marine  Corps ;  military  and  naval  officers  of  foreign  powers ; 
officers  of  volunteers  and  militia  officers'when  in  uniform. 

181.  A  sentinel  salutes  as  just  prescribed  when  an  officer 
comes  on  his  post ;  if  the  officer  holds  communication  with  the 
sentinel,  the  sentinel  again  salutes  when  the  officer  leaves  him. 

During  the  hours  when  challenging  is  prescribed,  the  first 
salute  is  given  as  soon  as  the  officer  has  been  duly  recognized 
and  advanced.  A  mounted  sentinel  armed  with  a  rifle  or  pistol, 
or  a  dismounted  sentinel  armed  with  a  pistol,  does  not  salute 
after  challenging. 

He  stands  at  advance  rifle  or  raise  pistol  until  the  officer 
passes. 

182.  In  case  of  the  approach  of  an  armed  party  of  the  guard, 
the  sentinel  will  halt  when  it  is  about  30  paces  from  him, 


234  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

facing  toward  the  party  with  his  piece  at  the  right  shoulder. 
If  not  himself  relieved,  he.  will,  as  the  party  passes,  place  him- 
self so  that  the  party  will  pass  in  front  of  him;  he  resumes 
walking  his  post  when  the  party  has  reached  six  paces  beyond 
him. 

183.  An  officer  is  entitled  to  the  compliments  prescribed, 
whether  in  uniform  or  not. 

184.  A  sentinel  in  communication  with  an  officer  will  not 
interrupt  the  conversation  to  salute.  In  the  case  of  seniors  the 
officer  will  salute,  whereupon  the  sentinel  will  salute. 

185.  When  the  flag  is  being  lowered  at  retreat,  a  sentinel  on 
post  and  in  view  of  the  flag  will  face  the  flag,  and,  at  the  first 
note  of  the  Star  Spangled  Banner  or  to  the  color  will  come  to 
a  present  arms.  At  the  sounding  of  the  last  note  he  will  resume 
walking  his  post. 

No.  12 :  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night  and  during  the  time 
for  challenging,  to  challenge  all  persons  en  or  near  my  post, 
and  to  allow  no  one  to  pass  without  proper  authority. 

186.  During  challenging  hours,  if  a  sentinel  sees  any  person 
or  party  on  or  near  his  post,  he  will  advance  rapidly  along  his 
post  toward  such  person  or  party  and  when  within  about  30 
yards  will  challenge  sharply,  "Halt,  Who  is  there?"  He  will 
place  himself  in  the  best  possible  position  to  receive  or,  if 
necessary,  to  arrest  the  person  or  party. 

187.  In  case  a  mounted  party  be  challenged,  the  sentinel  will 
call,  "  Halt,  Dismount.    Who  is  there?  " 

188.  The  sentinel  will  permit  only  one  of  any  party  to  ap- 
proach him  for  the  purpose  of  giving  the  countersign  (pars.  209 
to  217),  or,  if  no  countersign  be  used,  of  being  duly  recognized. 
When  this  is  done  the  whole  party  is  advanced,  i.  e.,  allowed  to 
pass. 

189.  In  all  cases  the  sentinel  must  satisfy  himself  beyond  a 
reasonable  doubt  that  the  parties  are  what  they  represent  them- 
selves to  be  and  have  a  right  to  pass.  If  he  is  not  satisfied, 
he  must  cause  them  to  stand  and  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard. 
So,  likewise,  if  he  nave  no  authority  to  pass  persons  with  the 
countersign,  or  when  the  party  has  not  the  countersign,  or  gives 
an  incorrect  one. 


ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS.  235 

190.  A  sentinel  will  not  permit  any  person  to  approach  so 
close  as  to  prevent  the  proper  use  of  his  own  weapon  before 
recognizing  the  person  or  receiving  the  countersign. 

191.  When  two  or  more  persons  approach  in  one  party,  the 
sentinel,  on  receiving  an  answer  that  indicates  that  some  one 
in  the  party  has  the  countersign,  will  say,  "Advance  one  with 
the  countersign,"  and,  if  the  countersign  is  given  correctly,  will 
then  say,  "Advance  (so-and-so),"  repeating  the  answer  to  his 
challenge.  Thus  if  the  answer  be  "  Relief  (friend  with  the 
countersign,  patrol,  etc.),"  the  sentinel  will  say,  "Advance  one 
with  the  countersign";  then  "Advance,  relief  (friends,  patrol, 
etc.)." 

192.  If  a  person  having  the  countersign  approach  alone,  he 
is  advanced  to  give  the  countersign.  Thus  if  the  answer  be 
"Friend  with  the  countersign  (or  officer  of  the  day,  or  etc.)," 
the  sentinel  will  say,  "Advance,  friend  (or  officer  of  the  day, 
or  etc.)  with  the  countersign";  then  "Advance,  friend  (or 
officer  of  the  day,  or  etc.)." 

193.  If  two  or  more  persons  approach  a  sentinel's  post  from 
different  directions  at  the  same  time,  all  such  persons  are  chal- 
lenged in  turn  and  required  to  halt  and  to  remain  halted  until 
advanced. 

The  senior  is  first  advanced,  in  accordance  with  the  foregoing 
rules. 

194.  If  a  party  is  already  advanced  and  in  communication 
with  a  sentinel,  the  latter  will  challenge  any  other  party  that 
may  approach ;  if  the  party  challenged  be  senior  to  the  one 
already  on  his  post,  the  sentinel  will  advance  the  new  party  at 
once.  The  senior  may  allow  him  to  advance  any  or  all  of  the 
other  parties;  otherwise  the  sentinel  will  not  advance  any  of 
them  until  the  senior  leaves  him.  He  will  then  advance  the 
senior  only  of  the  remaining  parties,  and  so  on. 

195.  The  following  order  of  rank  will  govern  a  sentinel  in 
advancing  different  persons  or  parties  approaching  his  post: 
Commanding  officers,  officer  of  the  day,  officer  of  the  guard, 
officers,  patrols,  reliefs,  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard 
in  order  of  rank,  friends. 

196.  A  sentinel  will  never  allow  himself  to  be  surprised,  nor 
permit  two  parties  to  advance  upon  him  at  the  same  time. 


236  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

197.  If  no  countersign  be  used,  the  rules  for  challenging  are 
the  same.  The  rules  for  advancing  parties  are  modified  only 
as  follows:  Instead  of  saying  "Advance  (so-and-so)  with  the 
countersign,"  the  sentinel  will  say,  -'Advance  (so-and-so)  to  be 
recognized."  Upon  recognition  he  will  say,  "Advance  (so-and- 
so).-' 

198.  Answers  to  a  sentinel's  challenge  intended  to  confuse  or 
mislead  him  are  prohibited,  but  the  use  of  such  an  answer  as 
••  Friends  with  the  countersign,"  is  not  to  be  understood  as 
misleading,  but  as  the  usual  answer  made  by  officers,  patrols, 
etc.,  when  the  purpose  of  their  visit  makes  it  desirable  that  their 
official  capacity  should  not  be  announced. 

SPECIAL  ORDERS  FOR   SENTINELS  AT  THE  POST  OF  THE  GUARD. 

199.  Sentinels  posted  at  the  guard  will  be  required  to  mem- 
orize the  following: 

Between  reveille  and  retreat  to  turn  out  the  guard  for  all 
persons  designated  by  the  commanding  officer,  for  all  colors  or 
standards  not  cased,  and  in  time  of  war  for  all  armed  parties 
approaching  my  post,  except  troops  at  drill  and  reliefs  and  de- 
tachments of  the  guard. 

At  night,  after  challenging  any  person  or  party,  to  advance 
no  one  but  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  repeating  the  answer 
to  the  challenge. 

200.  After  receiving  an  answer  to  his  challenge,  the  sentinel 
calls,  "Corporal  of  the  guard  (so  and  so),"  repeating  the  an- 
swer to  the  challenge. 

He  does  not  in  such  cases  repeat  the  number  of  his  post. 

201.  He  remains  in  the  position  assumed  in  challenging  until 
the  corporal  has  recognized  or  advanced  the  person  or  party 
challenged,  when  he  resumes  walking  his  post,  or,  if  the  persoi: 
or  party  be  entitled  thereto,  he  salutes  and,  as  soon  as  the 
salute  has  been  acknowledged,  resumes  walking  his  post. 

202.  The  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  will  be  notified  by 
direction  of  the  commanding  officer  of  the  presence  in  camp  o?: 
garrison  of  persons  entitled  to  the  compliment.      (Par.  224.) 

203.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  manner  in  which 
ntinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  will  turn  out  the  guard 


COUNTERSIGNS  AND  PAROLES.  237 

upon  the  approach  of  persons  or  parties  entitled  to  the  compli- 
ment (pars.  224,  227,  and  22S>,  "Turn  out  the  guard,  command- 
ing officer";  "Turn  out  the  guard,  governor  of  a  Territory"; 
"Turn  out  the  guard,  national  colors";  "Turn  out  the  guard, 
armed  party";  etc. 

At  the  approach  of  the  new  guard  at  guard  mounting  the 
sentinel  will  call,  "  Turn  oiit  the  guard,  armed  party." 

204.  Should  the  person  named  by  the  sentinel  not  desire  the 
guard  formed,  he  will  salute,  whereupon  the  sentinel  will  call 
"  Never  mind  the  guard." 

205.  After  having  called  "  Turn  out  the  guard,"  the  sentinel 
will  never  call  "  Never  mind  the  guard,"  on  the  approach  of  an 
armed  party. 

206.  Though  the  guard  he  already  formed  he  will  not  fail  to 
call,  "  Turn  out  the  guard,"  as  required  in  his  special  orders, 
except  that  the  guard  will  not  be  turned  out  for  any  person 
while  his  senior  is  at  or  coming  to  the  post  of  the  guard. 

207.  The  sentinels  at  the  post  of  the  guard  will  warn  the 
commander  of  the  approach  of  any  armed  body  and  of  the  pres- 
ence in  the  vicinity  of  all  suspicious  or  disorderly  persons. 

208.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  in  sight  or  hearing,  the  sen- 
tinel at  the  guardhouse  will  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard  and 
report  the  facts  to  him. 

Section  11.  Countersigns  and  Paroles. 

209.  Seventy-seventh  article  of  war. — Any  person  subject  to 
military  law  who  makes  known  the  parole  or  countersign  to  any 
person  not  entitled  to  receive  it  according  to  the  rules  and 
discipline  of  war,  or  gives  a  parole  or  countersign  different  from 
that  which  he  received,  shall,  if  the  offense  be  committed  in 
time  of  war,  suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct.      (See  par.  171.) 

210.  The  countersign  is  a  word  given  daily  from  the  principal 
headquarters  of  a  command  to  aid  guards  and  sentinels  in 
identifying  persons  who  may  be  authorized  to  pass  at  night. 

It  is  given  to  such  persons  as  may  be  authorized  to  pass  and 
repass  sentinels'  posts  during  the  night,  and  to  officers,  noncom- 
missioned officers,  and  sentinels  of  the  guard. 


228  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

144.  Orderlies,  while  on  duty  as  such,  are  subject  only  to  the 
orders  of  the  commanding  officer  and  of  the  officers  to  whom 
they  are  ordered  to  report. 

145.  When  an  orderly  is  ordered  to  carry  a  message,  he  will 
be  careful  to  deliver  it  exactly  as  it  was  given  to  him. 

146.  His  tour  of  duty  ends  when  he  is  relieved  by  the  orderly 
selected  from  the  guard  relieving  his  own. 

147.  Orderlies  are  members  of  the  guard,  and  their  name, 
company,  and  regiment  are  entered  on  the  guard  report  and 
lists  of  the  guard. 

148.  If  a  color  line  is  established,  sufficient  sentinels  are 
placed  on  the  color  line  to  guard  the  colors  and  stacks. 

149.  Color  sentinels  are  posted  only  so  long  as  the  stacks  are 
formed.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  divide  the  time 
equally  among  them. 

150.  When  stacks  are  broken,  the  color  sentinels  may  be  per- 
mitted to  return  to  their  respective  companies.  They  are  re- 
quired to  report  in  person  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  at 
reveille  and  retreat.  They  will  fall  in  with  the  guard,  under 
arms,  at  guard  mounting. 

151.  Color  sentinels  are  not  placed  on  the  regular  reliefs,  nor 
are  their  posts  numbered.  In  calling  for  the  corporal  of  the 
guard,  they  call :  "  Corporal  of  the  guard.    Color  line.'' 

152.  Officers  or  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased  colors  will 
render  the  prescribed  salute.  If  the  colors  are  on  the  stacks, 
the  salute  will  be  made  on  crossing  the  color  line  or  on  passing 
the  colors. 

153.  A  sentinel  placed  over  the  colors  will  not  permit  them 
to  be  moved  except  in  the  presence  of  an  armed  escort.  Unless 
otherwise  ordered  by  the  commanding  officer,  he  will  allow  no 
one  to  touch  them  but  the  color  bearer. 

He  will  not  permit  any  soldier  to  take  arms  from  the  stacks 
or  to  touch  them  except  by  order  of  an  officer  or  noncommis- 
sioned officer  of  the  guard. 

If  any  person  passing  the  colors  or  crossing  the  color  line 
fails  to  salute  the  colors,  the  sentinel  will  caution  him  to  do  so, 
and  if  the  caution  be  not  heeded  he  will  call  the  corporal  of  the 
guard  and  report  the  facts. 

Section  9.  Privates  of  the  Guard. 

154.  Privates  are  assigned  to  reliefs  by  the  commander  of  the 
guard,  and  to  posts  usually  by  the  corporal  of  their  relief.    They 


ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS.  229 

will  not  change  from  one  relief  or  post  to  another  during  the 
same  tour  of  guard  duty  unless  by  proper  authority. 

Section   10.  Orders   for   Sentinels. 

155.  Orders  for  sentinels  are  of  two  classes:  General  orders 
and  special  orders.  General  orders  apply  to  all  sentinels.  Spe- 
cial orders  relate  to  particular  posts  and  duties. 

156.  Sentinels  will  be  required  to  memorize  the  following: 
My  general  orders  are: 

1.  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government  property  in 
view. 

2.  To  walk  my  pdst  in  a  military  manner  keeping  always  on 
the  alert  and  observing  everything  that  takes  place  within  sight 
or  hearing. 

3.  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am  instructed  to  enforce. 

4.  To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant  from  the  guard 
house  than  my  own. 

5.  To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

G.  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel  who  relieves 
me  all  orders  from  the  commanding  officer,  officer  of  the  day, 
and  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  only. 

7.  To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line'of  duty. 

8.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm. 

9.  To  allow  no  one  to  commit  a  nuisance  on  or  near  my  post. 

10.  In  any  case  not  covered  by  instructions  to  call  the  corporal 
of  the  guard. 

11.  To  salute  all  officers,  -and  all  colors  and  standards  not 
cased. 

12.  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night,  and  during  the  time 
for  challenging,  to  challenge  all  persons  on  or  near  my  post 
and  to  allow  no  one  to  pass  without  proper  authority. 

REGULATIONS    RELATING    TO    THE    GENERAL    ORDERS    FOR    SENTTNEL8, 

No.  1 :  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government  property 

in  view. 

157.  All  persons,  of  whatever  rank  in  the  service,  are  re- 
quired to  observe  respect  toward  sentinels  and  members  <>f  the 
guard  when  such  are  in  the  performance  of  their  duties, 


240  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

Cabinet;  Chief  Justice;  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Representa- 
tives; committees  of  Congress  officially  visiting  a  military  post; 
governors  within  their  respective  States  and  Territories;  gov- 
ernors general ;  Assistant  Secretary  of  War  officially  visiting  a 
military  post;  all  general  officers  of  the  Army;  general  officers 
of  foreign  services  visiting  a  post;  naval,  marine,  volunteer,  and 
militia  officers  in  the  service  of  the  United  States  and  holding  the 
rank  of  general  officer ;  American  or  foreign  envoys  or  minis- 
ters; ministers  accredited  to  the  United  States;  charges  d'af- 
faires accredited  to  the  United  States ;  consuls  general  accredited 
to  the  United  States ;  commanding  officer  of  the  post  or  camp ; 
officer  of  the  day. 

225.  The  relative  rank  between  officers  of  the  Army  and  Navy 
is  as  follows :  General  with  admiral,  lieutenant  general  with 
vice  admiral,  major  general  with  rear  admiral,  brigadier  general 
with  commodore.1  colonel  with  captain,  lieutenant  colonel  with 
commander,  major  with  lieutenant  commander,  captain  with 
lieutenant,  first  lieutenant  with  lieutenant  (junior  grade),  sec- 
ond lieutenant  with  ensign.     (A.  R.  12.) 

226.  Sentinels  will  not  be  required  to  memorize  paragraph 
224.  and,  except  in  the  cases  of  general  officers  of  the  Army,  the 
commanding  officer  and  the  officer  of  the  day  will  be  advised  in 
each  case  of  the  presence  in  camp  or  garrison  of  persons  en- 
titled to  the  compliment. 

227.  Guards  will  turn  out  and  present  arms  when  the  national 
or  regimental  colors  or  standards,  not  cased,  are  carried  past 
by  a  guard  or  an  armed  party.  This  rule  also  applies  when  the 
party  carrying  the  colors  is  at  drill.  If  the  drill  is  conducted  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  guardhouse,  the  guard  will  be  turned  out 
when  the  colors  first  pass,  and  not  thereafter. 

228.  In  case  the  remains  of  a  deceased  officer  or  soldier  are 
carried  past,  the  guard  will  turn  out  and  present  arms. 

229.  In  time  of  war  all  guards  will  turn  out  under  arms  when 
armed  parties,  except  troops  at  drill  and  reliefs  or  detachments 
of  the  guard,  approach  their  post.     (See  par.  53.) 

1  The  grade  of  commodore  ceased  to  exist  as  a  grade  on  the  active 
list  of  the  Navy  of  the  United  States  on  Mar.  3,  1899.  By  section  7 
of  the  act  of  Mar.  3,  1899,  the  nine  junior  rear  admirals  are  author- 
ized to  receive  the  pay  and  allowances  of  a  brigadier  general  of  the 
Army. 


PRISONERS.  241 

230.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  be  notified  of  the 
presence  in  camp  or  garrison  of  all  persons  entitled  to  the  com- 
pliment except  general  officers  of  the  Army,  the  commanding 
officer,  and  the  officer  of  the  day.  Members  of  the  guard  will 
salute  all  persons  entitled  to  the  compliment  and  all  officers  in 
the  military  or  naval  service  of  foreign  powers,  officers  of  the 
Army,  Navy,  and  Marine  Corps,  officers  of  volunteers,  and  offi- 
cers of  militia  when  in  uniform. 

GENERAL  RULES  CONCERNING  GUARD  DUTY. 

232.  Eighty-fifth  article  of  tear. —  *  *  *  Any  person  sub- 
ject to  military  law,  except  an  officer,  who  is  found  drunk  on 
duty  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

233.  All  material  instructions  given  to  a  member  of  the  guard 
by  an  officer  having  authority  will  be  promptly  communicated 
to  the  commander  of  the  guard  by  the  officer  giving  them. 

234.  Should  the  guard  be  formed,  soldiers  will  fall  in  ranks 
under  arms.  At  roll  call  each  man,  as  his  name  or  number  and 
relief  are  called,  will  answer  "  Here,"  and  come  to  an  order 
arms. 

235.  Whenever  the  guard  or  a  relief  is  dismissed,  each  mem- 
ber not  at  once  required  for  duty  will  place  his  rifle  in  the  arm 
racks,  if  they  be  provided,  and  will  not  remove  it  therefrom 
unless  he  requires  it  in  the  performance  of  some  duty. 

236.  Without  permission  from  the  commander  of  the  guard, 
members  of  the  main  guard,  except  orderlies,  will  not  leave  the 
immediate  vicinity  of  the  guardhouse.  Permission  to  leave  will 
not  be  granted  except  in  cases  of  necessity. 

237.  Members  of  the  main  guard,  except  orderlies,  will  not 
remove  their  accouterments  or  clothing  without  permission  from 
the  commander  of  the  guard.     (Par.  66.) 

Section  15.  Prisoners. 

238.  Articles  of  war  69,  70,  71,  72,  and  73  have  special  ref- 
erence to  the  confinement  of  prisoners  and  should  be  carefully 
borne  in  mind. 

239.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  place  a  civilian  in  con- 
finement on  an  order  from  higher  authority  only,  unless  such 
civilian  is  arrested  while  in  the  act  of  committing  some  crime 


342  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

within  the  limits  of  the  military  jurisdiction,  in  which  case  the 
commanding  officer  will  be  immediately  notified. 

240.  Except  as  provided  in  the  sixty-eighth  article  of  war, 
or  when  restraint  is  necessary,  no  soldier  will  be  confined  with- 
out the  order  of  an  officer,  who  shall  previously  inquire  into  his 
offense.     (A.  R.  930.) 

241.  An  officer  ordering  a  soldier  into  confinement  will  send, 
as  soon  as  practicable,  a  written  statement,  signed  by  himself, 
to  the  commander  of  the  guard,  setting  forth  the  name,  com- 
pany, and  regiment  of  such  soldier,  and  a  brief  statement  of 
the  alleged  offense.  It  is  a  sufficient  statement  of  the  offense 
to  give  the  number  and  article  of  war  under  which  the  soldier 
is  charged. 

242.  A  prisoner,  after  his  first  day  of  confinement,  and  until 
his  sentence  has  been  duly  promulgated,  is  considered  as  held  in 
confinement  by  the  commanding  officer.  After  due  promulga- 
tion of  his  sentence,  the  prisoner  is  held  in  confinement  by 
authority  of  the  officer  who  reviews  the  proceedings  of  the  court 
awarding  sentence.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  state  in 
his  report,  in  the  proper  place,  the  name  of  the  officer  by  whom 
the  prisoner  was  originally  confined. 

243.  Enlisted  men  against  whom  charges  have  been  preferred 
will  be  designated  as  "awaiting  trial"';  enlisted  men  who  have 
been  tried  will,  prior  to  the  promulgation  of  the  result,  be  desig- 
nated as  "  awaiting  result  of  trial  " ;  enlisted  men  serving  sen- 
tences of  confinement  not  involving  dishonorable  discharge,  will 
be  designated  as  "garrison  prisoners."  Persons  sentenced  to 
dismissal  or  dishonorable  discharge  and  to  terms  of  confinement 
at  military  posts  or  elsewhere  will  be  designated  as  "general 
prisoners."     (A.  R.  928.) 

244.  The  sentences  of  prisoners  will  be  read  to  them  when 
the  order  promulgating  the  same  is  received.  The  officer  of  the 
guard,  or  the  officer  of  the  day  if  there  be  no  officei  of  the  guard, 
will  read  them  unless  the  commanding  officer  shall  direct  other- 
wise. 

215.  When  the  date  for  the  commencement  of  a  term  of  con- 
finement imposed  by  sentence  of  a  court-martial  is  not  expressly 
fixed  by  sentence,  the  term  of  confinement  begins  on  the  date  of 
the  order  promulgating  it.  The  sentence  is  continuous  until  the 
term  expires,  except  when  the  person  sentenced  is  absent  with- 
out authority.     (A.  R.  969.) 


PEISONEES.  243 

246.  When  soldiers  awaiting  trial  or  the  result  of  trial,  or 
undergoing  sentence  commit  offenses  for  which  they  are  tried, 
the  second  sentence  will  be  executed  upon  the  expiration  of  the 
first. 

247.  Prisoners  awaiting  trial  by,  or  underling  sentence  of,  a 
general  court-martial  and  those  confined  ^r  serious  offenses 
will  be  kept  apart,  when  practicable,  from  those  confined  by  sen- 
tence of  an  inferior  court  or  for  minor  offenses.  Enlisted  men 
in  confinement  for  minor  offenses,  or  awaiting  trial  or  the  result 
of  trial  for  the  same,  will  ordinarily  be  sent  to  work  under 
charge  of  unarmed  overseers  instead  of  armed  sentinels  and  will 
be  required  to  attend  drills  unless  the  commanding  officer  shall 
direct  otherwise. 

248.  Prisoners,  other  than  general  prisoners,  will  be  furnished 
with  food  from  their  respective  companies  or  from  the  organiza- 
tions to  which  they  may  be  temporarily  attached. 

The  food  of  prisoners  will,  when  practicable,  be  sent  to  their 
places  of  confinement,  but  post  commanders  may  arrange  to  send 
the  prisoners,  under  proper  guard,  to  their  messes  for  meals. 

When  there  is  no  special  mess  for  general  prisoners,  they  will 
be  attached  for  rations  to  companies. 

Enlisted  men  bringing  meals  for  the  prisoners  will  not  be 
allowed  to  enter  the  prison  room.    (See  par.  289.) 

249.  With  the  exception  of  those  specially  designated  by  the 
commanding  officer,  no  prisoners  will  be  allowed  to  leave  the 
guardhouse  unless  under  charge  of  a  sentinel  and  passed  by  an 
officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard.  The  command- 
ing officer  may  authorize  certain  garrison  prisoners  and  paroled 
general  prisoners  to  leave  the  guardhouse,  not  under  the  charge 
of  a  sentinel,  for  the  purpose  of  working  outside  under  such  sur- 
veillance and  restrictions  as  he  may  impose. 

250.  Prisoners  reporting  themselves  sick  at  sick  call,  or  at  the 
time  designated  by  the  commanding  officer,  will  be  sent  to  the 
hospital  under  charge  of  proper  guard,  with  a  sick  report  kept 
for  the  purpose.  The  recommendation  of  the  surgeon  will  be 
entered  in  the  guard  report. 

251.  The  security  of  sick  prisoners  in  the  hospital  devolves 
upon  the  post  surgeon,  who  will,  if  necessary,  apply  to  the  post 
commander  for  a  guard. 


244  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

252.  Prisoners  will  be  paraded  with  the  guard  only  when 
directed  by  the  commanding  officer  or  the  officer  of  the  day. 

253.  A  prisoner  under  charge  of  a  sentinel  will  not  salute  an 
officer. 

254.  All  serviceable  clothing  which  belongs  to  a  prisoner,  and 
his  blankets,  will  accompany  him  to  the  post  designated  for 
his  confinement,  and  will  be  fully  itemized  on  the  clothing  list 
sent  to  that  post.  The  guard  in  charge  of  the  prisoner  during 
transfer  will  be  furnished  with  a  duplicate  of  this  list,  and 
will  be  held  responsible  for  the  delivery  of  all  articles  itemized 
therein  with  the  prisoner.  At  least  one  serviceable  woolen 
blanket  will  be  sent  with  every  such  prisoner  so  transferred. 
(A.  R.  939.) 

255.  Wheu  mattresses  are  not  supplied,  each  prisoner  in  the 
guardhouse  will  be  allowed  a  bed  sack  and  30  pounds  of  straw 
per  month  for  bedding.  So  far  as  practicable  iron  bunks  will 
be  furnished  to  all  prisoners  in  post  guardhouses  and  prison 
rooms.      (A.  R.  10S4.) 

256.  If  the  number  of  prisoners,  including  general  prisoners, 
confined  at  a  post  justifies  it,  the  commanding  officer  will  de- 
tail a  commissioned  officer  as' "  officer  in  charge  of  prisoners." 
At  posts  where  the  average  number  of  prisoners  continually  in 
confinement  is  less  than  12,  the  detail  of  an  officer  in  charge 
of  prisoners  will  not  be  made. 

Section    16.  Guarding   Prisoners. 

289.  The  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  has  charge  of  the 
prisoners  except  when  they  have  been  turned  over  to  the  pris- 
oner guard  or  overseers.     (Pars.  247  and  300  to  304.) 

(a)  He  will  allow  none  to  escape. 

(b)  He  will  allow  none  to  cross  his  post  leaving  the  guard- 
house except  when  passed  by  an  officer  or  noncommissioned 
officer  of  the  guard. 

(c)  He  will  allow  n6  one  to  communicate  with  prisoners  with- 
out permission  from  proper  authority. 

(d)  He  will  promptly  report  to  the  corporal  of  the  guard  any 
suspicious  noise  made  by  the  prisoners. 

(e)  He  will  be  prepared  to  tell,  whenever  asked,  how  many 
prisoners  are  in  the  guardhouse  and  how  many  are  out  at  work 
or  elsewhere. 


GUARDING  PRISONERS.  245 

Whenever  prisoners  are  brought  to  liis  post  returning  'from 
work  or  elsewhere,  he.  will  halt  them  and  call  the  corporal  of 
the  guard,  notifying  him  of  the  number  of 'prisoners  returning. 
Thus :  "  Corporal  of  the  guard,  (so  many)  prisoners."' 

He  will  not  allow  prisoners  to  pass  into  the  guardhouse  until 
the  corporal  of  the  guard  has  responded  to  the  call  and  ordered 
him  to  do  so. 

300.  Whenever  practicable,  special  guards  will  be  detailed 
for  the  particular  duty  of  guarding  working  parties  composed 
of  such  prisoners  as  can  not  be  placed  under  overseers.  (Par. 
247.) 

301.  The  prisoner  guard  and  overseers  will  be  commanded  by 
the  police  officer;  if  there  be  no  police  officer,  then  by  the  officer 
of  the  day. 

302.  The  provost  sergeant  is  sergeant  of  the  prisoner  guard 
and  overseers,  and  as  such  receives  orders  from  the  commanding 
officer  and  the  commander  of  the  prisoner  guard  only. 

303.  Details  for  prisoner  guard  are  marched  to  the  guard- 
house and  mounted  by  being  inspected  by  the  commander  of 
the  main  guard,  who  determines  whether  all  of  the  men  are  in 
proper  condition  to  perform  their  duties  and  whether  their 
arms  and  equipments  are  in  proper  condition,  and  rejects  any 
men  found  unfit. 

304.  When  prisoners  have  been  turned  over  to  the  prisoner 
guard  or  overseers,  such  guards  or  overseers  arc  responsible 
for  them  under  their  commander,  and  all  responsibility  and 
control  of  the  main  guard  ceases  until  they  are  returned  to  the 
main  guard.     (Par.  306.) 

305.  If  a  prisoner  attempts  to  escape,  the  sentinel  will  call 
"  Halt."  If  he  fails  to  halt  when  the  sentinel  has  once  repeated 
his  call,  and  if  there  be  no  other  possible  means  of  preventing 
his  escape,  the  sentinel  will  fire  upon  him. 

The  following  will  more  fully  explain  the  important  duties 
of  a  sentinel  in  this  connection : 
(Circular.)  War  Department, 

Adjutant  General  s  Office, 
Washington,  November  1,  1SS7. 
By  direction  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  the  following  is  pub- 
lished for  the  informatkm  of  the  Army : 


246  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

United  Status  Circuit  Court,  Eastern  District  of  Michigan, 
August  1,  18S7. 

THE    UNITED    STATES    V.    JAMES     CLARK. 

The  circuit  court  has  jurisdiction  of  a  homicide  committed  by  one 
soldier  unon  another  within  a  military  reservation  of  the  United  States. 

If  a  homicide  be  committed  by  a  military  guard  without  malice  and 
in  the  performance  of  his  supposed  duty  as  a  soldier,  such  homicide  is 
excusable,  unless  it  was  manifestly  beyond  the  scope  of  his  authority 
or  was  such  that  a  man  of  ordinary  sense  and '  understanding  would 
know  I  hat  it  was  illegal. 

It  seems  that  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  has  a  right  to  shoot  a  mili- 
tary convict  if  there  be  no  other  possible  means  of  preventing  his 
escape. 

The  common-law  distinction  between  felonies  and  misdemeanors  has 
no  application  to  military  offenses. 

While  the  finding  of  a  court  of  inquiry  acquitting  the  prisoner  of  all 
blame  is  not  a  legal  bar  to  a  prosecution,  it  is  entitled  to  weight  as  an 
expression  of  the  views  of  the  military  court  of  the  necessity  of  using 
a  musket  to  prevent  the  escape  of  the  deceased. 

******* 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War : 

R.  C.  Drum,  Adjutant  General. 

The  following  is  taken  from  Circular  No.  3,  of  1883,  from 
Headquarters  Department  of  the  Columbia : 

Vancouver  Barracks,  W.  T.,  April  20,  1883. 
To  the  Assistant  Adjutant  General, 

Department  of  the  Columbia. 
Sir: 
******* 

A  sentinel  is  placed  as  guard  over  prisoners  to  prevent  their 
escape,  and,  for  this  purpose,  -he  is  furnished  a  musket,  with  am- 
munition. To  prevent  escape  is  his  first  and  most  important 
duty. 

******* 

I  suppose  the  law  to  be  this:  That  a  sentinel  shall  not  use 
more  force  or  violence  to  prevent  the  escape  of  a  prisoner  than 
is  necessary  to  effect  that  object,  but  if  the  prisoner,  after 
being  ordered  to  halt,  continues  his  flight  the  sentinel  may 
maim  or  even  kill  him,  and  it  is  his  duty  to  do  so. 

A  sentinel  who  allows  a  prisoner  to  escape  without  firing 
upon  him,  and  firing  to  hit  him,  is,  in  my  judgment,  guilty  of 


GUARDING  PRISONERS.  247 

a  most  serious  military  offense,  for  which  he  should  and  would 
be  severely  punished  by  a  general  court-martial. 

*  *  *  *  *  *  * 

(Signed)  Henry  A.  Mobbow, 

Colonel  Ticenty-ftrst  Infantry,  Commanding  Post. 
[Third  indorsement.] 

Office  Judge  Advocate, 
Military  Division  of  the  Pacific, 

May  11,  1888. 
Respectfully  returned  to  the  assistant  adjutant  general,  Mili- 
tary Division  of  the  Pacific,  concurring  fully  in  the  views  ex- 
pressed by  Col.  Morrow.  I  was  not  aware  that  such  a  view 
had  ever  been  questioned.  That  the  period  is  a  time  of  peace 
does  not  affect  the  authority  and  duty  of  the  sentinel  or  guard 
to  fire  upon  the  escaping  prisoner,  if  this  escape  can  not  other- 
wise be  prevented.  He  should,  of  course,  attempt  to  stop  the 
prisoner  before  firing  by  ordering  him  to  halt,  and  will  prop- 
erly warn  him  by  the  words  "  Halt,  or  I  fire,"'  or  words  to  such 
effect. 

W,  Winthbop,  Judge  Advocate. 
[Fourth  indorsement.] 

*    Headquarters  Military  Division  of  the  Pacific, 

May  11,  1883. 
Respectfully  returned  to  the  commanding  general,  Department 
of  the  Columbia,  approving  the  opinion  of  the  commanding 
officer,  Twenty-first  Infantry,  and  of  the  judge  advocate  of  the 
division,  in  respect  to  the  duty  of  and  method  to  be  adopted  by 
sentinels  in  preventing  prisoners  from  escaping. 

******* 

By  command  of  Maj.  Gen.  §chofield : 

J.  C.  Kelton, 
Assistant  Adjutant  General. 
See  also  Circular  No.  53,  A.  G.  O.,  December  22, 1900. 

306.  On  approaching  the  post  of  the  sentinel  at  the  guard- 
house, a  sentinel  of  the  prisoner  guard  or  an  overseer  in  charge 
of  prisoners  will  halt  them  and  call,  "  No.  1,  (so  many)  pris- 
oners.'' He  will  not  allow  them  to  cross  the  post  of  the  sentinel 
until  so  directed  by  the  corporal  of  the  guard. 


248  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

307.  Members  of  the  prisoner  guard  and  overseers  placed  over 
prisoners  for  work  will  receive  specific  and  explicit  instructions 
covering  the  required  work;  they  will  be  held  strictly  respon- 
sible that  the  prisoners  under  their  charge  properly  and  satis- 
factorily perform  the  designated  work. 

Section  17.  Flags. 

337.  The  garrison,  post,  and  storm  flags  are  national  flags 
and  shall  be  of  bunting.  The  union  of  each  is  as  described  in 
paragraph  216,  Army  Regulations,  and  shall  be  of  the  follow- 
ing proportions:  Width,  seven-thirteenths  of  the  hoist  of  the 
flag ;  length,  seventy-six  one-hundredths  of  the  hoist  of  the  flag. 

The  garrison  flag  will  have  38  feet  fly  and  20  feet  hoist.  It 
will  be  furnished  only  to  posts  designated  in  orders  from  time  to 
time  from  the  War  Department,  and  will  be  hoisted  only  on 
holidays  and  important  occasions. 

The  post  flag  will  have  19  feet  fly  and  10  feet  hoist.  It  will 
be  furnished  for  all  garrison  posts  and  will  be  hoisted  in  pleas- 
ant weather. 

The  storm  flag  will  have  9  feet  6  inches  fly  and  5  feet  hoist. 
It  will  be  furnished  for  all  occupied  posts  for  use  in  stormy 
and  windy  weather.  It  will  also  be  furnished  to  national  ceme- 
teries.    (A.  R.  223.) 

338.  At  every  military  post  or  station  the  flag  will  be  hoisted 
at  the  sounding  of  the  first  note  of  the  reveille,  or  of  the  first 
note  of  the  march,  if  a  march  be  played  before  the  reveille. 
The  flag  will  be  lowered  at  the  sounding  of  the  last  note  of  the 
retreat,  and  while  the  flag  is  being  lowered  the  band  will  play 
"  The  Star-Spangled  Banner,"  or,  if  there  be  no  band  present, 
the  field  music  will  sound  "  to  the  color.*'  When  "  to  the  color  " 
is  sounded  by  the  field  music  while  the  flag  is  being  lowered  the 
same  respect  will  be  observed  as  when  "  The  Star-Spangled  Ban- 
ner "  is  played  by  the  band,  and  in  either  case  officers  and  en- 
listed men  out  of  ranks  will  face  toward  the  flag,  stand  at 
attention,  and  render  the  prescribed  salute  at  the  last  note  of 
the;music.      (A.  Ii.  437.) 

The  lowering  of  the  flag  will  be  so  regulated  as  to  be  completed 
at  the  last  note  of  "  The  Star-Spangled  Banner  "  or  "  to  the 
color." 


REVEILLE  AND  RETREAT  GUN.  249 

339.  The  national  flag  will  be  displayed  at  a  seacoast  or  lake 
fort  at  the  beginning  of  and  during  an  action  in  which  a  fort 
may  be  engaged,  whether  by  day  or  by  night.     (A.  R.  437.) 

340.  The  national  flag  will  always  be  displayed  at  the  time 
of  firing  a  salute.     (A.  R.  397.) 

341.  The  flag  of  a  military  post  will  not  be  dipped  by  way 
of  salute  or  compliment.     (A.  R.  405.) 

342.  On  the  death  of  an  officer  at  a  military  post  the  flag  is 
displayed  at  halfstaff  and  so  remains  between  reveille  and 
retreat  until  the  last  salvo  or  volley  is  fired  over  the  grave; 
or  if  the  remains  are  not  interred  at  the  post  until  they  are 
removed  therefrom.     (A.  R.  422.) 

343.  During  the  funeral  of  an  enlisted  man  at  a  military  post 
the  flag  is  displayed  at  halfstaff.     It  is  hoisted  to  the  top  after 
the  final  volley  or  gun  is  fired  or  after  the  remains  are  ta1  »i 
from  the  post.    The  same  honors  are  paid  on  the  occasion  of  Aw. 
funeral  of  a  retired  enlisted  man.     (A.  R.  423.) 

344.  When  practicable,  a  detail  consisting  of  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer  and  two  privates  of  the  guard  will  raise  or  lower 
the  flag.  This  detail  wears  side  arms  or  if  the  special  equip- 
ments do  not  include  side  arms  then  belts  only. 

The  noncommissioned  officer,  carrying  the  flag,  forms  the  de- 
tail in  line,  takes  his  post  in  the  center  and  marches  it  to  the 
staff.  The  flag  is  then  securely  attached  to  the  halyards  and 
rapidly  hoisted  The  halyards  are  then  securely  fastened  to 
the  cleat  on  the  staff  and  the  detail  marched  to  the  guard- 
house. 

345.  When  the  flag  is  to  be  lowered,  the  halyards  are  loosened 
from  the  staff  and  made  perfectly  free.  At  retreat  the  flag  is 
lowered  at  the  last  note  of  retreat.  It  is  then  neatly  folded  and 
the  halyards  made  fast.  The  detail  is  then  re-formed  and 
marched  to  the  guardhouse,  where  the  flag  is  turned  over  to  the 
commander  of  the  guard. 

The  flag  should  never  be  allowed  to  touch  the  ground  and 
should  always  be  hoisted  or  lowered  from  the  leeward  side  of 
the  staff,  the  halyards  being  held  by  two  persons. 

Section  18.  Reveille  and  Retreat  Gun. 

346.  The  morning  and  evening  gun  will  be  fired  by  a  detach- 
ment of  the  guard,  consisting,  when  practicable,  of  a  corporal 


260  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

and  two  privates.  The  morning  gun  is  fired  at  the  first  note  of 
reveille,  or,  if  marches  be  played  before  the  reveille,  it  is  fired 
at  the  beginning  of  the  first  march.  The  retreat  gun  is  fired  at 
the  last  note  of  retreat. 

The  corporal  marches  the  detachment  to  and  from  the  piece, 
which  is  tired,  sponged  out,  and  secured  under  his  direction. 

Section  19.  Guard  Mounting. 

347.  Guard  mounting  will  be  formal  or  informal  as  the  com- 
manding officer  may  direct.  It  will  be  held  as  prescribed  in  the 
drill  regulations  of  the  arm  of  the  service  to  which  the  guard 
belongs.  If  none  is  prescribed,  then  as  for  infantry.  In  case 
the  guard  is  composed  wholly  of  mounted  organizations,  guard 
mounting  may  be  held  mounted. 

348.  When  infantry  and  mounted  troops  dismounted  are 
united  for  guard  mounting,  all  details  form  as  prescribed  for 
infantry. 

Section  20.  Formal  Guard  Mounting  for  Infantry. 

349.  Formal  guard  mounting  will  ordinarily  be  held  only  in 
posts  or  camps  where  a  band  is  present. 

350.  At  the  assembly,  the  men  designated  for  the  guard  fall 
in  on  their  company  parade  grounds  as  prescribed  in  paragraph 
luG,  I.  D.  It.  The  first  sergeant  then  verifies  the  detail,  inspects 
it.  replaces  any  man  unfit  to  go  on  guard,  turns  the  detail  over 
to  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer,  and  retires.  The  band 
takes  its  place  on  the  parade  ground  so  that  the  left  of  its  front 
rank  shall  be  12  paces  to  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  guard 
when  the  latter  is  formed. 

351.  At  adjutants  call,  the  adjutant,  dismounted,  and  the 
sergeant  major  on  hi.s  left,  inarches  to  the  parade  ground.  The 
adjutant  halts  and  takes  post  so  as  to  be  12  paces  in  front 
of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  guard  when  formed;  the  ser- 
geant major  continues  on,  moves  by  the  left  flank  and  takes 
post  facing  to  the  left,  32  paces  to  the  left  of  the  front  rank 
ot  tiie  band;  the  band  plays  in  quick  or  double  time;  the  Tie- 
tails  are  inarched  to  the  parade  ground  by  the  senior  noncom- 

aed    officers;    the   detail    that    arrives    first    is    marched 

•  line  so  that,  upon  halting,  the  breast  of  the  front  rank 

ail  be  near  to  and  opposite  the  left  arm  of  the  sergeant 

major ;  the  commander  of  the  detail  halts  his  detail,  places  him- 


FORMAL  GUARD  MOUNTING.  251 

self  in  front  of  and  facing  the  sergeant  major,  at  .a  distance 
equal  to  or  a  little  greater  than  the  front  of  his  detail,  and 
commands:  1.  Right,  2.  DRESS.  The  detail  dresses  up  to  the 
line  of  the  sergeant  major  and  its  commander,  the  right  front 
rank  man  placing  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  the  ser- 
geant major ;  the  noncommissioned  officers  take  post  two  paces 
in  rear  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  detail.  The  detail  aligned,  the 
comander  of  the  detail  commands:  FRONT,  salutes,  and  then 
reports,  "The  detail  is  correct,"  or  "(So  many)  sergeants,  cor- 
porals, or  privates  are  absent";  the  sergeant  major  returns  the 
salute  with  the  right  hand  after  the  report  is  made.  The  com- 
mander then  passes  by  the  right  of  the  guard  and  takes  post 
in  the  line  of  noncommissioned  officers  in  rear  of  the  right  file 
of  his  detail. 

Should  there  be  more  than  one  detail,  it  is  formed  in  like 
manner  on  the  left  of  the  one  preceding.  The  privates,  noncom- 
missioned officers,  and  commander  of  each  detail  dress  on  those 
of  the  preceding  details  in  the  same  rank  or  line.  Each  detail 
commander  closes  the  rear  rank  to  the  right  and  tills  blank 
files  as  far  as  practicable  with  the  men  from  his  front  rank. 

Should  the  guard  from  a  company  not  include  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer,  one  will  be  detailed  to  perform  the  duties  of  com- 
mander of  the  detail.  In  this  case  the  commander  of  the  detail, 
after  reporting  to  the  sergeant  major,  passes  around  the  right 
flank  between  the  guard  and  the  band  and  retires. 

352.  When  the  last  detail  has  formed,  the  sergeant  major 
takes  a  side  step  to  the  right,  draws  sword,  verifies  the  detail, 
takes  post  two  paces  to  the  right  and  two  paces  to  the  front  of 
the  guard,  facing  to  the  left,  causes  the  guard  to  count  off. 
completes  the  left  squad,  if  necessary,  as  in  the  School  of  the 
Company,  and  if  there  be  more  than  three  squads,  divides  the 
guard  into  two  platoons,  again  takes  post  as  described  above 
and  commands:  1.  Open  ranks,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  and  file  closers  march 
backward  four  steps,  halt,  and  dress  to  the  right.  The  sergeant 
major  aligns  the  ranks  and  file  closers  and  again  taking  post 
as  described  above,  commands:  FRONT,  moves  parallel  to  the 
front  rank  until  opposite  the  center,  turns  to  the  right,  halts 
midway  to  the  adjutant,  salutes  and  reports:  "Sir,  the  details 
are  correct,"  or  "  Sir,  (so  many)  sergeants,  corporals,  or  privates 
are  absent ";  the  adjutant  returns  the  salute,  directs  the  ser- 


252  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

scant  major:  Take  your  post,  and  tbeu  draws  saber:  the  ser- 
geant major  faces  about,  approaches  to  within  two  paces  of  the 
center  of  the  front  rank,  turns  to  the  right,  moves  three  paces 
beyond  the  h?ft  of  the  front  rank,  turns  to  the  left,  halts  on  the 
line  of  the  front  rank,  faces  about,  and  brings  his  sword  to  the 
order.  When  the  sergeant  major  has  reported  the  officer  of  the 
guard  takes  post,  facing  to.  the  front  three  paces  in  front  of  the 
center  of  the  guard,  and  draws  saber. 

The  adjutant  then  commands :  1.  Officer  (or  officers)  and  non- 
commissioned officers,  2.  Front  and  center,  3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  center,  the  officers  carry  saber.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  the  officer  advances  and  halts  three  paces  from 
the  adjutant,  remaining  at  the  carry ;  the  noncommissioned 
officers  pass  by  the  Hanks,  along  the  front,  and  form  in  order 
uf  rank  from  right  to  left,  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  officer, 
remaining  at  the  right  shoulder ;  if  there  is  no  officer  of  the 
guard  the  noncommissioned  officers  halt  on  a  line  three  paces 
from  the  adjutant;  the  adjutant  then  assigns  the  officers  and 
noncommissioned  officers  according  to  rank^  as  follows:  Com- 
mander of  the  guard,  leader  of  first  platoon,  leader  of  second 
platoon,  right  guide  of  first  platoon,  left  guide  of  second  platoon, 
left  guide  of  first  platoon,  right  guide  of  second  platoon,  and 
file  closers,  or.  if  the  guard  is  not  divided  into  platoons:  Com- 
mander of  the  guard,  right  guide,  left  guide,  and  file  closers. 

The  adjutant  then  commands:  1.  Officer  (or  officers)  and  non- 
commissioned officers,  2.  POSTS,  3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  posts,  all.  except  the  officer  commanding  the 
gUard,  face  about.  At  the  command  march,  they  take  the  posts 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  with  open  ranks.  The 
adjutant  directs:  Inspect  your  guard,  sir;  at  which  the  officer 
commanding  the  guard  faces  about,  commands :  Prepare  for  in- 
spection, returns  saber  and  inspects  the  guard. 

During  the  inspection  the  band  plays;  the  adjutant  returns 
saber,  observes  the  general  condition  of  the  guard,  and  falls  out 
any  man  who  is  unfit  for  guard  duty  or  does  not  present  a 
creditable  appearance.  Substitutes  will  report  to  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard  at  the  guardhouse. 

353.  The  adjutant,  when  so  directed,  selects  orderlies  and 
color  sentinels,  as  prescribed  in  paragraphs  140  and  141,  and 
notifies  the  commander  of  the  guard  of  his  selection. 


FORMAL  GUARD  MOUNTING.  263 

354.  If  there  be  a  junior  officer  of  the  guard  he  takes  post  at 
the  same  time  as  the  senior,  facing  to  the  front,  three  paces  in 
front  of  the  center  of  the  first  platoon ;  in  going  to  the  front  and 
center  he  follows  and  takes  position  on  the  left  of  the  senior 
and  is  assigned  as  leader  of  the  first  platoon;  he  may  be  di- 
rected by  the  commander  of  the  guard  to  assist  in  inspecting  the 
guard. 

If  there  be  no  officer  of  the  guard,  the  adjutant  inspects  the 
guard.  A  noncommissioned  officer  commanding  the  guard  takes 
post  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide  when  the  guard  is  in  line, 
and  takes  the  post  of  the  officer  of  the  guard  when  in  column 
or  passing  in  review. 

355.  The  inspection  ended,' the  adjutant  faces  himself  about 
thirty  paces  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  guard  and 
draws  saber ;  the  new  officer  of  the  day  takes  post  in  front  of  and 
facing  the  guard,  about  thirty  paces  from  the  adjutant ;  the  old 
officer  of  the  day  takes  post  three  paces  to  the  right  of  and  one 
pace  to  the  rear  of  the  new  officer  of  the  day ;  the  officer  of  the 
guard  takes  post  three  paces  in  front  of  its  center,  draws  saber 
with  the  adjutant,  and  comes  to  the  order ;  thereafter  he  takes 
the  same  relative  position  as  a  captain  of  a  company. 

The  adjutant  then  commands:  1.  Parade,  2.  REST,  3.  SOUND 
OFF,  and  comes  to  the  order  and  parade  rest. 

The  band,  playing,  passes  in  front  of  the  officer  of  the  guard 
to  the  left  of  the  line  and  back  to  its  post  on  the  right,  when  it 
ceases  playing. 

The  adjutant  then  comes  to  attention,  carries  saber  and  com- 
mands: 1.  Guard,  2.  ATTENTION,  3.  Close  ranks,  4.  MARCH. 

The  ranks  are  opened  and  closed  as  in  paragraph  745,  I.  D.  R. 

The  adjutant  then  commands:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS,  faces  to- 
ward' the  new  officer  of  the  day,  salutes,  and  then  reports : 
Sir,  the  guard  is  formed.  The  new  officer  of  the-  day,  after  the 
adjutant  has  reported,  returns  the  salute  with  the  hand  and 
directs  the  adjutant :  March  the  guard  in  review,  sir. 

The  adjutant  carries  saber,  faces  about,  brings  the  guard  to 
an  order,  and  commands :  1.  At  trail,  platoons  (or  guard)  right, 
2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard,  4.  HALT. 

The  platoons  execute  the  movement;  the  band  turns  to  the 
right  and  places  itself  12  paces  in  front  of  the  first  platoon. 


264  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

The  adjutant  places  himself  six  paces  from  the  flank  and; 
abreast  of  the  commander  of  the  guard ;  the  sergeant  major  six 
paces  from  the  left  flank  of  the  second  platoon. 

The  adjutant  then  commands:  1.  Pass  in  review,  2.  FOR- 
WARD, 3.  MARCH. 

The  guard  marches  in  quick  time  past  the  officer  of  the  day, 
according  to  the  principles  of  review,  and  is  brought  to  eyes 
right  at  the  proper  time  by  the  commander  of  the  guard;  the 
adjutant,  commander  of  the  guard,  leaders  of  platoons,  sergeant 
major,  and  drum  major  salute. 

The  band,  having  passed  the  officer  of  the  day,  turns  to  the 
left  of  the  column,  places  itself  opposite  and  facing  him,  and 
continues  to  play  until  the  guard  leaves  the  parade  ground. 
The  field  music  detaches  itself  from  the  band  when  the  latter 
turns  out  of  the  column,  and,  remaining  in  front  of  the  guard, 
commences  to  play  when  the  band  ceases. 

Having  passed  12  paces  beyond  the  officer  of  the  day,  the 
adjutant  halts ;  the  sergeant  major  halts  abreast  of  the  ad- 
jutant and  1  pace  to  his  left;  they  then  return  saber,  salute, 
and  retire;  the  commander  of  the  guard  then  commands:  1. 
Platoons,  right  by  squads,  2.  MARCH,  and  marches  the  guard  to 
its  post. 

The  officers  of  the  day  face  toward  each  other  and  salute; 
the  old  officer  of  the  day  turns  over  the  orders  to  the  new  officer 
of  the  day. 

While  the  band  is  sounding  off,  and  while  the  guard  is  march- 
ing in  review,  the  officers  of  the  day  stand  at  parade  rest  with 
arms  folded.  They  take  this  position  when  the  adjutant  comes 
to  parade  rest,  resume  the  attention  with  him,  again  take  the 
parade  rest  at  the  first  note  of  the  march  in  review,  and  resume 
attention  as  the  head  of  the  column  approaches. 

The  new  officer  of  the  day  returns  the  salute  of  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard  and  the  adjutant,  making  one  salute  with 
the  hand. 

356.  If  the  guard  be  not  divided  into  platoons,  the  adjutant 
commands:  1.  At  trail,  guard  right,  2.  M1RCH,  3.  Guard,  4. 
HALT,  and  it  passes  in  review  as  above ;  the  commander  of  the 
guard  is  3  paces  in  front  of  its  center;  the  adjutant  places 
himself  6  paces  from  the  left  flank  and  abreast  of  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard ;  the  sergeant  covers  the  adjutant  on  a  line 
with  the  front  rank. 


BELIEVING  THE  OLD  GUARD.  255 

Section  21.  Informal  guard  mounting  for  Infantry. 

357.  Informal  guard  mounting  will  be  held  on  the  parade 
ground  of  the  organization  from  which  the  guard  is  detailed. 
If  it  is  detailed  from  more  than  one  organization,  then  at  such 
place  as  the  commanding  officer  may  direct. 

358.  At  assembly,  the  detail  for  guard  falls  in  on  the  company 
parade  ground.  The  first  sergeant  verifies  the  detail,  inspects 
their  dress  and  general  appearance,  and  replaces  any  man  unfit 
to  march  on  guard.  He  then  turns  the  detail  over  to  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard  and  retires. 

359.  At  adjutant's  call,  the  officer  of  the  day  takes  his  place 
15  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  guard  and  commands: 
1.  Officer  (or  officers)  and  noncommissioned  officers,  2.  Front 
and  center,  3.  MARCH;  whereupon  the  officers  and  noncommis- 
sioned officers  take  their  positions,  are  assigned  and  sent  to  their 
posts  as  prescribed  in  formal  guard  mounting.     (Par.  352.) 

The  officer  of  the  day  will  then  inspect  the  guard  with  espe- 
cial reference  for  its  fitness  for  the  duty  for  which  it  is  detailed 
and  will  select,  as  prescribed  in  paragraphs  140  and  141,  the 
necessary  orderlies  and  color  sentinels.  The  men  found  unlit 
for  guard  will- be  returned  to  quarters  and  will  be  replaced  by 
others  found  to  be  suitable,  if  available  in  the  company.  If 
none  are  available  in  the  company  the  fact  will  be  reported  to 
the  adjutant  immediately  after  guard  mounting. 

When  the  inspection  shall  have  been  completed  the  officer  of 
the>  day  resumes  his  position  and  directs  the  commander  of  the 
guard  to  march  the  guard  to  its  post. 

Section  22.  Relieving  the  Old  Guard. 

360.  As  the  new  guard  approaches  the  guardhouse,  the  old 
guard  is  formed  in  line,  with  its  field  music  three  paces  to  its 
right;  and,  when  the  field  music  at  the  head  of  the  new  guard 
arrives  opposite  its  left,  the  commander  of  the  new  guard 
commands:  1.  Eyes,  RIGHT;  the  commander  of  the  old  guard 
commands:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS;  commanders  of  both  guards 
salute.  The  new  guard  marches  in  quick  time  past  the  old 
guard. 


256  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD  DUTY. 

When  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  is  opposite  the  fielc 
music  of  the  old  guard,  he  commands:  FRONT;  the  commandei 
Of  the  old  guard  commands:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS,  as  soon  as  th( 
new  guard  shall  have  cleared  the  old  guard. 

The  field  music  having  marched  three  paces  beyond  the  fielc 
music  of  the  old  guard,  changes  direction  to  the  right,  and,  fol 
lowed  by  the  guard,  changes  direction  to  the  left  when  on  a  line 
with  the  old  guard ;  the  changes  of  direction  are  without  com 
maud.  The  commander  of  the  guard  halts  on  the  line  of  th« 
front  rank  of  the  old  guard,  allows  his  guard  to  march  pas 
him,  and,  when  its  rear  approaches,  forms  it  in  line  to  the  left 
establishes  the  left  guide  three  paces  to  the  right  of  the  fielc 
music  of  the  old  guard,  and  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank,  anc 
then  dresses  his  guard  to  the  left;  the  field  music  of  the  nev 
guard  is  three  paces  to  the  right  of  its  front  rank. 

361.  The  new  guard  being  dressed  the  commander  of  eacli 
guard,  in  front  of  and  facing  its  center,  commands :  1.  Present 

2.  ARMS,   resumes  his  front,   salutes,  carries  saber,  faces  hi. 
guard,  and  commands:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Should  a  guard  be  commanded  by  a  noncommissioned  officer 
he  stands  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  front  rank,  according  as  fy 
commands  the  old  or  new  guard,  and  executes  the  rifle  salute. 

362.  After  the  new  guard  arrives  at  its  post  and  has  salutei 
the  old  guard,  each  guard  is  presented  by  its  commander  to  it. 
officer  of  the  day ;  if  there  be  but  one  officer  of  the  day  present1 
or  if  one  officer  acts  in  the  capacity  of  old  and  new  officer  o| 
the  day,  each  guard  is  presented  to  him  by  its  commander. 

363.  If  other  persons  entitled  to  a  salute  approach,  each  coml 
mander  of  the  guard  will  bring  his  own  guard  to  attention  ij 
not  already  at  attention.  The  senior  commander  of  the  tw< 
guards  will  then  command:  "1.  Old  and  new  guards,  2.  Present 

3.  Arms." 

The   junior   will   salute   at   the   command    "Present   Arms 
given  by  the  senior.     After  the  salute  has  been  acknowledged 
the  senior  brings  both  guards  to  the  order. 

364.  After  the  salutes  have  been  acknowledged  by  the  officer 
of  the  day,  each  guard  is  brought  to  an  order  by  its  com 
mander;  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  directs  th 
orderly  or  orderlies  to  fall  out  and  report  and  causes  bayonet 
to  be  fixed  if  so  ordered  by  the  commanding  officer ;  bayonet 


RELIEVING  THE  OLD  GUARD.  257 

will  not  then  be  unfixed  during  the  tour  except  in  route  marches 
while  the  guard  is  actually  marching  or  when  specially  directed 
by  the  commanding  officer. 

The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  falls  out  members  of 
the  guard  for  detached  posts,  placing  them  under  charge  of  the 
proper  noncommissioned  officers,  divides  the  guard  into  three 
reliefs,  first,  second,  and  third,  from  right  to  left,  and  directs 
a  list  of  the  guard  to  be  made  by  reliefs.  When  the  guard 
consists  of  troops  of  different  arms  combined,  the  men  are 
assigned  to  reliefs  so  as  to  insure  a  fair  division  of  duty  under 
rules  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

365.  The  sentinels  and  detachments  of  the  old  guard  are  at 
once  relieved  by  members  of  the  new  guard,  the  two  guards 
standing  at  ease  or  at  rest  while  these  changes  are  being  made. 
The  commander  of  the  old  transmits  to  the  commander  of  the 
new  guard  all  his  orders,  instructions,  and  information  con- 
cerning the  guard  and  its  duties.  The  commander  of  the  new 
guard  then  takes  possession  of  the  guardhouse  and  verifies  the 
articles  in  charge  of  the  guard. 

366.  If  considerable  time  is  required  to  bring  in  that  portion 
of  the  old  guard  still  on  post,  the  commanding  officer  may  direct 
that  as  soon  as  the  orders  and  property  are  turned  over  to  the 
new  guard  the  portion  of  the  old  guard  at  the  guardhouse 
may  be  marched  off  and  dismissed.  In  such  a  case  the  remain- 
ing detachment  or  detachments  of  the  old  guard  will  be  in- 
spected by  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  when  they  reach 
the  guardhouse.  He  will  direct  the  senior  noncommissioned 
officer  present  to  march  these  detachments  off  and  dismiss  them 
in  the  prescribed  manner. 

367.  In  bad  weather,  at  night,  after  long  marches,  or  when  the 
guard  is  very  small,  the  field  music  may  be  dispensed  with. 


CHAPTER  X. 
MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING. 


Section  1.  Military  map  reading. 

When  you  pick  up  a  map,  the  first  question  is,  Where  is  the 
north?  This  can  usually  be  told  by  an  arrow  (see  fig.  1,  p.  259) 
which  will  be  found  in  one  o*  the  corners  of  the  map,  and  which 
points  to  the  true  north — the  north  of  the  north  star. 

On  some  maps  no  arrow  is  to  be  found.  The  chances  are  a 
hundred  to  one  that  the  north  is  at  the  top  of  the  map,  as  it  is 
on  almost  all  printed  maps.  But  you  can  only  assure  yourself 
of  that  fact  by  checking  the  map  with  the  ground  it  represents. 
For  instance,  if  you  ascertain  that  the  city  of  Philadelphia  is 
due  east  of  the  city  of  Columbus,  then  the  Philadelphia-Colum- 
bus line  on  the  map  is  a  due  east-and-west  line,  and  establishes 
at  once  all  the  other  map  directions. 

Now.  the  map  represents  the  ground  as  nearly  as  it  can  be 
represented  on  a  flat  piece  of  paper.  If  you  are  standing  up, 
facing  the  north,  your  right  hand  will  be  in  the  east,  your  left 
in  the  west,  and  your  back  to  the  south.  It  is  the  same  with  a 
map;  if  you  look  across  it  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow — that  is, 
toward  its  north — your  right  hand  will  be  toward  what  is  east 
on  the  map;  your  left  hand  to  the  west;  the  south  will  be  at 
the  bottom  of  the  map. 

There  is  another  kind  of  an  arrow  that  sometimes  appears  on 
a  map.  Tt  is  like  the  one  in  figure  2.  page  259.  and  points  not  to 
the  true  north  but  to  the  magnetic  north,  which  is  the  north  of 
the  compiles.  Though  the  compass  needle,  and  therefore  the 
arrow  that  represents  it  on  the  map,  does  not  point  exactly 
north,  the  deviation  is,  from  a  military  point  of  view,  slight,  and 
appreciable  error  will  rarely  result  through  the  use  of  the  mag- 
netic instead  of  the  true  north  in  the  solution  of  any  military 
problems. 
258 


MILITARY  MAP  READING. 


259 


A 


n 

Fie.  I. 


N 


Fig.2. 


«.  o 


w  t 


%%        (I 


Fig.5 


SO    25      O 

1 I L_ 


I 


200  INCHES 


F.g.4. 


260  MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING. 

Should  you  be  curious  to  know  the  exact  deviation,  consult 
your  local  surveyor  or  any  civil  engineer. 

Both  arrows  may  appear  on  your  map.  In  that  case  disre- 
gard the  magnetic  arrow  unless  you  are  using  the  map  in 
connection  with  a  compass. 

If  a  map  is  being  used  on  the  ground,  the  first  thing  to  be 
done  is  to  put  the' lines  of  the  map  parallel  to  the  real  outlines 
of  the  ground  forms,  and  roads,  fences,  railroads,  etc.,  that  the 
map  shows;  for  the  making  of  a  map  is  no  more  than  the  draw- 
ing on  paper  of  lines  parallel  to  and  proportional  in  length  to 
real  directions  and  distances  on  the  ground. 

For  instance,  the  road  between  two  places  runs  due  north  and 
south.  Then  on  the  map  a  line  representing  the  road  will  be 
parallel  to  the  arrow  showing  the  north  and  will.be  propor- 
tional in  length  to  the  real  road.  In  this  way  a  map  is  a  pic- 
ture, or,  better,  a  bare  outline  sketch ;  and,  as  we  can  make  out 
a  picture,  though  it  be  upside  down,  or  crooked  on  the  wall, 
so  we  can  use  a  map  that  is  upside  down  or  not  parallel  to  the 
real  ground  forms.  But  it  is  easier  to  make  out  both  the  pic- 
ture and  the  map  if  their  lines  are  parallel  to  what  they  repre- 
sent. So  in  using  a  map  on  the  ground  we  always  put  the  lines 
parallel  to  the  actual  features  they  show.  This  is  easy  if  the 
map  has  an  arrow. 

If  the  map  has  no  arrow,  you  must  locate  objects  or  features 
on  the  ground,  and  on  the  map,  their  representations.  Draw  on 
the  map  a  line  connecting  any  two  of  the  features;  place  this 
line  parallel  to  an  imaginary  line  through  the  two  actual  fea- 
tures located,  and  your  map  will  be  correctly  placed.  Look  to 
it  that  you  do  not  reverse  on  the  map  the  positions  of  the  two 
objects  or  features,  or  your  map  will  be  exactly  upside  down. 

AVhen  the  map  has  been  turned  into  the  proper  position — that 
is  to  say,  "  oriented  " — the  next  thing  is  to  locate  on  the  map 
your  position.  If  you  are  in  the  village  of  Easton  and  there 
is  a  place  on  the  map  labeled  Easton,  the  answer  is  apparent. 
But  if  you  are  out  in  the  country,  at  an  unlabeled  point  that 
looks  like  any  one  of  a  dozen  other  similar  points,  the  task  is 
more  complicated.  In  this  latter  case  you  must  locate  and 
identify,  both  on  the  map  and  on  the  ground,  other  points — 
hills,   villages,   peculiar  bends  in   rivers,   forests — any   ground 


MILITARY  MAP  READING.  261 

features  that  have  some  easily  recognizable  peculiarity  aud  that 
you  can  see  from  your  position. 

Suppose,  for  instance,  you  were  near  Leavenworth  and  wanted 
to  locate  your  exact  position,  of  which  you  are  uncertain.  You 
have  the  map  shown  in  this  manual,  and,  looking  about,  you 
see  southwest  from  where  you  stand  the  United  States  Peni- 
tentiary; also,  halfway  between  the  south  and  the  southeast— 
south-southeast  a  sailor  would  say — the  reservoir  (rectangle 
west  of  "O"  in  "Missouri").  Having  oriented  your  map, 
draw  on  it  a  line  from  the  map  position  of  the  reservoir  toward 
its  actual  position  on  the  ground.  Similarly  draw  a  line  from 
the  map  position  of  penitentiary  toward  its  actual  position. 
Prolong  the  two  lines  until  they  intersect.  The  intersection 
Of  the  lines  will  mark  the  place  where  you  stand — south  Mer- 
ritt  Hill. 

This  method  consists  merely  in  drawing  on  the  map  lines 
that  represent  the  lines  of  sight  to  known  and  visible  places. 
The  lines  pass  through  the  map  position' of  the  places  you  see 
and  are  parallel  to  the  actual  lines  of  sight ;  therefore  they  are 
the  map  representations  of  the  lines  of  sight,  and  their  intersec- 
tion is  the  map  position  of  the  eye  of  the  observer. 

After  this  orientation  and  location  of  position,  one  can  deduce 
from  the"  map  everything  there  is  to  know  in  regard  to  direc- 
tions. In  this  respect,  study  of  the  ground  itself  will  show  no 
more  than  will  study  of  the  map. 

After  "What  direction?"  comes  "How  far?"  To  answer 
this,  one  must  understand  that  the  map  distance  between  any 
two  points  shown  bears  a  fixed  and  definite  relation  or  propor- 
tion to  the  real  distance  between  the  two  points. 

For  instance:  We  measure  on  a  map  arid  find  the  distance 
between  two  points  to  be  1  inch.  Then  we  measure  the  real 
distance  on  the  ground  and  find  it  to  be  10,000  inches ;  hence 
the  relation  between  the  map  distance  and  the  real  distance  is 
1  to  10,000,  o'r  loooo-  Now,  if  the  map  is  properly  drawn,  the 
same  relation  will  hold  good  for  all  distances,  and  we  can  ob- 
tain any  ground  distance  by  multiplying  by  10,000  the  corre- 
sponding map  distance. 

This  relation  need  not  be  u,ooo-  but  may  be  anything  from' -rfo 
that  ah  architect  might  use  in  making  a  map  or  plan  of  a  house 


263  MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING. 

up  to  one  over  a  billion  and  a  half,  which  is  about  the  propor- 
tion between  map  and  real  distances  in  a  pocket-atlas  repre- 
sentation of  the  whole  world  on  a  6-inch  page.  Map  makers 
call  this  relation  the  "  scale  "  of  the  map  and  put  it  down  in  a 
corner  in  one  of  three  ways. 

For  the  sake  of  an  illustration,  say  the  relation  between  map 
and  ground  distances  is  1  to  100;  that  is,  1  inch  on  the  map  is 
equal  to  100  on  the  ground.    The  scale  may  be  written: 

First.  1  inch  equals  100. 

Second,  -rfo. 

Third.  As  shown  by  figure  3  (p.  259). 

These  expressions  mean  one  and  the  same  thing.  A  variation 
of  the  first  method  on  a  map  of  different  scale  might  be :  1  inch 
equals  i  mile.  Since  a  mile  contains  63,360  inches,  then  the  real 
distance  between  any  two  points  shown  on  the  map  is  63,360 
times  the  map  distance. 

To  find  the  ground  distance  by  the  third  kind  of  scale,  copy  it 
on  the  edge  of  a  slip  of  paper,  apply  the  slip  directly  to  the  map, 
and  read  off  the  distance ;  and  so  we  answer  the  question,  "  How 
far?" 

After  direction  and  distance  comes  the  interpretation  of  the 
signs,  symbols,  and  abbreviations  on  the  map.  Those  authorized 
are  given  on  pages  272  and  273  (a  reprint  of  Appendix  4, 
Field  Service  Regulations,  1914)  ;  but  there  are  a  good  many 
other  conventional  signs  in  common  use.  A  key  to  them  is  pub- 
lished by  the  War  Department,  and  is  called  "  Conventional 
Signs.  United  States  Army."  From  these  you  read  at  once  the 
natural  and  artificial  features  of  the  country  shown  on  your 
map.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  these  conventional  signs 
are  not  necessarily  drawn  to  scale,  as  are  the  distances.  They 
show  the  position  and  outline  of  the  features  rather  than  the 
size.  This,  for  the  reason  that  many  of  the  features  shown,  if 
drawn  to  scale,  would  be  so  small  that  one  could  not  make  them 
out  except  with  a  magnifying  glass.  If  the  exact  dimensions 
are  of  any  importance,  they  will  be  written  in  figures  on  the 
map.     For  instance,  bridges. 

In  addition  to  the  above  conventional  signs,  we  have  contours 
to  show  the  elevations,  depressions,  slope,  and  shape  of  the 


MILITARY  MAP  READING.  263 

ground.  Abroad,  hachures  are  much  used,  but  they  serve  only 
to  indicate  elevation,  and,  as  compared  to  contours,  are  of  little 
value.    Contours  resemble  the  lines  shown  in  figure  4  (p.  259). 

Hachures  are  shown  in  figure  5  (p.  259),  and  may  be  found  on 
any  European  map.  They  simply  show  slopes,  and,  when  care- 
fully drawn,  show  steeper  slopes  by  heavier  shading  and  gentler 
slopes  by  the  fainter  hachures.  The  crest  of  the  mountain  is 
within  the  hachures.     (See  fig.  5,  p.  259.) 

Contour*. — A  certain  student,  when  asked  by  his  instructor  to 
define  "  space,"  said :  "  1  have  it,  sir,  in  my  head,  but  can  not 
put  it  into  words."     The  instructor  replied :  "  I  suppose  that 

under  those   circumstances,   Mr.   ,   the  definition   really 

would  not  help  much."  And  so  it  is  with  contours — the  definition 
does  not  help  much  if  you  know  a  contour  when  you  meet  it  on 
a  map.  For  examples  of  contours,  turn  to  the  map  facing 
page  274,  and,  starting  at  the  United  States  penitentiary,  note 
the  smooth,  flowing,  irregular  curved  lines  marked  880,  860,  840, 
840,  860,  etc. 

The  only  other  lines  on  the  map  that  at  all  resemble  contours 
are  stream  lines,  like  •"  Corral  Creek,"  but  the  stream  lines  are 
readily  distinguished  from  contours  by  the  fact  that  they  cross 
the  contours  squarely,  while  the  contours  run  approximately 
parallel  to  each  other.  Note  the  stream  line  just  to  the  west  of 
South  Merritt  Hill. 

The  contours  represent  lines  on  the  ground  that  are  horizontal 
and  whose  meanderings  follow  the  surface,  just  as  the  edge 
of  a  flood  would  follow  the  irregularities  of  the  hills  about  it. 
Those  lines  that  contours  stand  for  are  just  as  level  as  the 
water's  edge  of  a  lake,  but  horizontally  they  wander  back  and 
forth  to  just  as  great  a  degree. 

The  line  marked  880,  at  the  penitentiary,  passes  through  on 
that  particular  piece  of  ground  every  point  that  is  880  feet  above 
sea  level.  Should  the  Missouri  River  rise  in  flood  to  880  feet,  the 
penitentiary  would  be  on  an  island,  the  edge  of  which  is  marked 
by  the  880  contour. 

Contours  show  several  things ;  among  them  the  height  of  the 
ground  they  cross.  Usually  the  contour  has  labeled  on  it  in 
figures  the  height  above  some  starting  point,  called  the  datum 


2M  MAP  BEADING  AND  SKETCHING. 

plane— generally  sea  level.  If,  with  a  surveying  instrument,  you 
put  in  on  a  piece  of  ground  a  lot  of  stakes,  each  one  of  which 
is  exactly  tlie  same  height  above  sea  level — that  is,  run  a  line 
of  levels — then  make  a  map  showing  the  location  of  the  stakes, 
a  line  drawn  on  the  map  through  all  the  stake  positions  is  a 
contour  and  shows  the  position  of  all  points  of  that  particular 
height. 

On  any  given  map  all  contours  are  equally  spaced  in  a  vertical 
direction,  and  the  map  shows  the  location  of  a  great  number  of 
points  at  certain  hxed  levels.  If  you  know  the  vertical  interval 
between  any  two  adjacent  contours,  you  know  the  vertical  inter- 
val for  all  the  contours  on  that  map,  for  these  intervals  on  a 
given  map  are  all  the  same. 

With  reference  to  a  point  through  which  no  contour  passes,  we 
can  only  say  that  the  point  in  question  is  not  higher  than  the 
next  contour  up  the  hill,  nor  lower  than  the  next  one  down  the 
hill.  For  the  purposes  of  any  problem,  it  is  usual  to  assume  that 
the  ground  slopes  evenly  between  the  two  adjacent  contours 
and  that  the  vertical  height  of  the  point  above  the  lower  contour 
is  proportional  to  its  horizontal  distance  from  the  contour,  as 
compared  to  the  whole  distance  between  the  two  contours.  For 
instance,  on  the  map,  find  the  height  of  point  A.  The  hori- 
zontal measurements  are  as  shown  on  the  map.  The  vertical 
distance  between  the  contours  is  20  feet.  A  is  about  one-quarter 
of  the  distance  between  the  800  and  the  820  contours,  and  we 
assume  its  height  to  be  one-quarter  of  20  feet  (5  feet)  higher 
than  8(H)  (Vet.    So  the  height  of  A  is  805  feet. 

The  vertical  interval  is  usually  indicated  in  the  corner  of  the 
map  by  the  letters  "  V.  I."     For  instance:  V.  I.=20  feet. 

On  maps  of  very  small  pieces  of  ground,  the  V.  I.  is  usually 
small — perhaps  as  small  as  1  foot;  on  maps  of  large  areas  on  a 
small  scale  it  may  be  very  great — even  1,000  feet. 

Contours  also  show  slopes.  It  has  already  been  explained  that 
from  any  contour  to  the  next  one  above  it  the  ground  rises  a 
fixed  number  of  feet.,  according  to  the  vertical  interval  of  that 
map.  From  the  scale  of  distances  on  the  map  the  horizontal 
distance  between  any  two  contours  can  be  found.  For  exam- 
ple: On  the  map  the  horizontal  distance  between  D  and  E  is  90 
yards,  or  270  feet.     The  vertical  distance  is  20  feet  the  V.  I.  of 


MILITARY  HAP  READING.  265 

the  map.    The  slope  then  is  ,ft%  =  TfT=7*%=4*<\  in  all  ot 
which  different  ways  the  slope  can  be  expressed. 


270 


On  a  eood  many  contoured  maps  a  figure  like  this  will  be 
found  itrone  of  the  corners: 

i  ' 1      2       i3     >  4  1  5  1 

On  that  particular  map  contours  separated  by  the  distance 

1 i! 1 


on  the  vertical  scale  show  a  slope  of  1° ;  if  separated  by  the 

distance  2  ithey  show  a  2°  slope,  etc.     A  slope  of  1° 

Is  a  rise  of  1  foot  in  57.  To  use  this  scale  of  slopes  copy  it  on 
the  edge  of  a  piece  of  paper  just  as  you  did  the  scale  of  dis- 
tances and  apply  it  directly  to  the  map. 

You  will  notice  that  where  the  contours  lie  closest  the  slope 
is  steepest;  where  they  are  farthest  apart  the  ground  is  most 
nearly  flat. 

It  has  already  been  set  forth  how  contours  show  height  and 
slope ;  in  addition  to  this  they  show  the  shape  of  the  ground,  or 
gbound  fobms.  Each  single  contour  shows  the  shape  at  its  par- 
ticular level  of  the' hill  or  valley  it  outlines;  for  instance,  the 
880  contour  about  the  penitentiary  shows  that  the  hill  at  that 
level  has  a  shape  somewhat  like  a  horse's  head.  Similarly, 
every  contour  on  the  map  gives  us  the  form  of  the  ground  at  its 
particular  level,  and  knowing  these  ground  forms  for  many 
levels  we  can  form  a  fair  conception  of  what  the  whole  surface 
is  like. 


266  MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING. 

A  round  contour  like  the  letter  O  outlines  a  round  ground 
long  narrow  one  indicates  a  long  narrow  ground 
feature. 

Different  hills  and  depressions  have  different  shapes.     A  good 
many  of  them  have  one  shape  at  one  level  and  another  shape  at 
t  level,  all  of  which  information  will  be  given  you  by  the 
contours  on  the  map. 

of  the  ways  to  see  how  contours  show  the  shape  of  the 
ground  is  to  pour  half  a  bucket  of  water  into  a  small  depression 
in  the  ground.  The  water's  edge  will  be  exactly  level,  and  if 
the  depression  is  approximately  round  the  water's  edge  will  also 
be  approximately  round.  The  outline  will  look  something  like 
figure  6. 

Draw  roughly  on  a  piece  of  paper  a  figure  of  the  same  shape 
and  you  will  have  a  contour  showing  the  shape  of  the  bit  of 
ground  where  you  poured  your  water. 

Next,  with  your  heel  gouge  out  on  one  edge  of  your  little  pond 
a  small  round  bay.  The  water  will  rush  in  and  the  water- 
mark on  the  soil  will  now  be  shaped  something  like  figure  7. 

Alter  your  drawing  accordingly,  and  the  new  contour  will 
show  the  new  ground  shape. 

Again  do  violence  to  the  face  of  nature  by  digging  with  a  stick 
a  narrow  inlet  opening  out  of  your  miniature  ocean,  and  the 
watermark  will  now  look  something  like  figure  8. 

Alter  your  drawing  once  more  and  your  contour  shows  again 
the  new  ground  form.  Drop  into  your  main  pond  a  round  clod 
and  you  will  have  a  new  watermark,  like  figure  9,  to  add  to 
your  drawing.  This  new  contour,  of  the  same  level  with  the 
one  showing  the  limit  of  the  depression,  shows  on  the  drawing 
the  round  island. 

Drop  in  a  second  clod,  this  time  long  and  narrow,  the  water- 
mark will  be  like  figure  10,  and  the  drawing  of  it,  properly 
placed,  will  show  another  island  of  another  shape.  Your  draw- 
ing now  will  look  like  figure  11. 

It  shows  a  depression  approximately  round,  off  which  open  a 
round  bay  and  a  long  narrow  bay.  There  is  also  a  round  eleva- 
tion and  a  long,  narrow  one;  a  long,  narrow  ridge,  jutting  out 
between  the  two  bays,  and  a  short,  broad  one  across  the  neck 
of  the  round  bay. 


MIUTABY  MAP  BEADING. 


867 


268  MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING. 

Now  flood  your  lake  deeply  enough  to  cover  up  the  features 
you  have  introduced.  The  new  water  line,  about  as  shown  by 
the  dotted  line  in  figure  11,  shows  the  oblong  shape  of  the 
depression  at  a  higher  level ;  the  solid  lines  show  the  shape 
farther  down ;  the  horizontal  distance  between  the  two  con- 
tours at  different  points  shows  where  the  bank  is  steep  and 
where  the  slope  is  gentler. 

Put  together  the  information  that  each  of  these  contours  gives 
you,  and  you  will  see  how  contours  show  the  shape  of  the 
ground.  On  the  little  map  you  have  drawn  you  have  introduced 
all  the  varieties  of  ground  forms  there  are;  therefore  all  the 
contour  forms. 

The  contours  on  an  ordinary  map  seem  much  more  compli- 
cated, but  this  is  due  only  to  the  number  of  them,  their  length, 
and  many  turns  before  they  finally  close  on  themselves.  Or  they 
may  close  off  the  paper.  But  trace  each  one  out,  and  it  will 
resolve  itself  into  one  of  the  forms  shown  in  figure  11. 

Just  as  the  high-tide  line  round  the  continents  of  North  and 
South  America  runs  a  long  and  tortuous  course,  but  finally  closes 
back  on  itself,  so  will  every  contour  do  likewise.  And  just  as 
truly  as  every  bend  in  that  high-tide  mark  turns  out  around  a 
promontory,  or  in  around  a  bay,  so  will  every  bend  in  a  contour 
stand  for  a  hill  or  a  valley,  pointing  to  the  lowlands  if  it  be  a 
hill,  and  to  the  height  if  it  mark  a  valley. 

If  the  map  embrace  a  whole  continent  or  an  island,  all  the 
contours  will  be  of  closed  form,  as  in  figure  11,  but  if  it  em- 
brace only  a  part  of  the  continent  or  island,  some  of  the  con- 
tours will  be  chopped  off  at  the  edge  of  the  map,  and  we  have 
the  open  form  of  contours,  as  we  would  have  if  figure  11  were 
cut  into  two  parts. 

The  closed  form  may  indicate  a  hill  or  a  basin ;  the  open 
form,  a  ridge  or  a  valley ;  sometimes  a  casual  glance  does  not 
indicate  which. 

Take  up,  first,  the  contour  of  the  open  type.  If  the  map  show3 
a  stream  running  down  the  inside  of  the  contour,  there  is  no 
difficulty  in  saying  at  once  that  the  ground  feature  is  a  valley; 
for  instance,  V,  V,  V,  and  the  valley  of  Corral  Creek  on  the 
map.  But  if  there  is  no  stream  line,  does  the  contour  bend 
show  a  valley  or  a  ridge? 


MILITARY  MAP  READING.  269 

First  of  all,  there  is  a  radical  difference  between  the  bend  of 
a  contour  round  the  head  of  a  valley  and  its  bend  round  the  nose 
of  a  ridge. 

Compare  on  the  map  the  valleys  V  and  the  ridges  R.  The  bend 
of  the  contour  round  the  head  of  the  valley  is  much  sharper 
than  the  bend  of  the  contour  round  the  nose  of  the  ridge.  This 
fs  a  general  truth,  not  only  in  regard  to  maps,  but  also  in  regard 
to  ground  forms.  Study  any  piece  of  open  ground  and  note 
how  much  wider  are  the  ridges  than  the  valleys.  Where  you 
find  a  "  hog  back  "  or  "  devil's  backbone,"  you  have  an  excep- 
tion to  the  rule,  but  the  exceptions  are  not  frequent  enough  to 
worry  over. 

To  tell  whether  a  given  point  is  on  a  ridge  or  in  a  valley,  start 
from  the  nearest  stream  shown  on  the  map  and  work  across  the 
map  to  the  undetermined  point,  keeping  in  mind  that  in  a  real 
trip  across  the  country  you  start  from  the  stream,  go  up  the  hill 
to  the  top  of  a  ridge,  down  the  other  side  of  the  hill  to  a  water- 
course, then  up  a  hill  to  the  top  of  a  ridge,  down  again,  up 
again,  etc.  That  is  all  traveling  is — valley,  hill,  valley,  hill, 
valley,  etc.,  though  you  wander  till  the  crack  o'  doom.  And 
so  your  map.  travels  must  go — valley,  hill,  valley,  hill — till  you 
run  off  the  map  or  come  back  to  the  starting  point. 

On  the  map,  follow  the  R-V  line,  V  indicating  valley  and  R 
ridge  or  hill.  Note  first  the  difference  in  sharpness  in  the  cou- 
tour  bends ;  also  how  the  valley  contours  point  to  the  highland 
and  the  ridge  contours  to  the  lowland. 

The  contours  go  thus : 

f'&A  La/70 


lotr  £0x0 


270  MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING. 

The  streams  flow  down  the  valleys,  and  the  sharp  angle  of  the 
contour  points  always  up  stream.  Note  also  how  the  junction 
of  a  stream  and  its  tributary  usually  makes  an  angle  that  points 
down  stream. 

"Which  way  does  this  stream  run?" 

Water  flows  down  hill.  If  you  are  in  the  bed  of  a  stream, 
contours  representing  higher  ground  must  be  to  your  right  and 
to  your  left.  Get  the  elevations  of  these  contours.  Generally 
the  nearest  contour  to  the  bank  of  the  stream  will  cross  the 
stream  and  there  will  be  an  angle  or  sharp  turn  in  the  contour 
at  this  crossing.  If  the  point  of  the  angle  or  sharp  turn  is 
toward  you,  you  are  going  downstream ;  if  away  from  you,  you 
are  going  upstream. 

If  the  contours  are  numbered,  you  have  only  to  look  at  the 
numbers  to  say  where  the  low  and  where  the  high  places  are; 
but  to  read  a  map  with  any  speed  one  must  be  quite  independ- 
ent of  these  numbers.  In  ordinary  map  reading  look,  first  of 
all,  for  the  stream  lines.  The  streams  are  the  skeleton  upon 
which  the  whole  map  is  hung.  Then  pick  out  the  hilltops  and 
ridges  and  you  have  a  body  to  clothe  with  all  the  details  that 
will  be  revealed  by  a  close  and  careful  study  of  what  the  map 
maker  has  recorded. 

As  to  closed  contours,  they  may  outline  a  depression  or  a  hill. 
On  the  map,  "  881 "  or  "  885  "  might  be  hills  or  ponds,  as  far  as 
their  shape  is  concerned.  But,  clearly,  they  are  hills,  for  on 
either  side  are  small  streams  running  away  from  them.  If  they 
were  ponds,  the  stream  lines  would  run  toward  the  closed  con- 
tours. The  test  of  "  hill,  valley,  hill,"  will  always  solve  the 
problem  when  there  are  not  enough  stream  lines  shown  to  make 
evident  at  once  whether  a  closed  contour  marks  a  pond  or  a  hill. 
Look  in  the  beginning  for  the  stream  lines  and  valleys,  and,  by 
contrast,  if  for  no  other  reason,  the  hills  and  ridges  at  once 
loom  up. 

To  illustrate  the  subject  of  contours  to  aid  those  who  have 
difficulty  in  reading  contoured  maps  the  following  is  suggested : 

1.  Secure  modeling  clay  and  build  a  mound. 

2.  Use  wire  and  slice  this  mound  horizontally  at  equal  vertical 
intervals  into  zones ;  then  insert  vertical  dowels  through  the 
mound  of  clay. 


SKETCHING.  871 

3.  Remove  the  top  zone,  place  on  paper,  and  draw  outline  of 
the  bottom  edge.  Trim  your  paper  roughly  to  the  outline  drawn. 
Indicate  »vhere  the  holes  made  by  the  dowels  pierce  the  paper. 

4.  Do  the  above  with  each  zone  of  your  mound. 

5.  Place  these  papers  in  proper  order  on  dowels  similarly 
placed  to  ones  in  original  mound  at,  say,  1  inch  vertical  inter- 
val apnrt.    A  skeleton  mound  results. 

6.  Replace  the  zones  of  the  clay  mound  and  form  the  original 
clay  mound  along  the  side  of  skeleton  mound. 

7.  Now  force  all  the  paper  sheets  down  the  dowels  onto  the 
bottom  sheet,  and  we  have  a  map  of  clay  mound  with  contours. 

Note. — One-inch  or  2-inch  planks  can  be  made  into  any  de- 
sired form  by  the  use  of  dowels  and  similar  procedure  followed. 

People  frequently  ask,  "  What  should  I  see  when  I  read  a 
map?"  and  the  answer  is  given,  "The  ground  as  it  is."  .This 
is  not  true  any  more  than  it  is  true  that  the  words,  "  The  valley 
of  the  Meuse,"  bring  to  your  mind  vine-clad  hills,  a  noble  river, 
and  green  fields  where  cattle  graze.  Nor  can  any  picture  ever 
put  into  your  thought  what  the  Grand  Canyon  really  is.  What 
printed  word  or  painted  picture  can  not  do,  a  map  will  not.  A 
map  says  to  you.  "  Here  stands  a  hill,"  "  Here  is  a  valley," 
P  This  stream  runs  so."  and  gives  you  a  good  many  facts  in  re- 
gard to  them.  But  you  do  not  have  to  "  see  "  anything,  any 
more  than  you  have  to  visualize  Liege  in  order  to  learn  the  facts 
of  its  geography.  A  map  sets  forth  cold  facts  in  an  alphabet  all 
its  own,  but  an  easy  alphabet,  and  one  that  tells  with  a  few 
curving  lines  more  than  many  thousand  words  could  tell. 

Section  2.  Sketching. 

Noncommissioned  officers  and  selected  privates  should  be  able 
to  make  simple  route  sketches.  This  is  particularly  useful  in 
patrolling,  as  thereby  a  patrol  leader  is  able  to  give  his  com- 
mander a  good  idea  of  the  country  his  patrol  has  traversed. 
Sketches  should  be  made  on  a  certain  scale,  which  should  be 
indicated  on  the  sketch,  such  as  3  inches  on  the  sketch  equals 
L  mile  on  the  ground.  The  north  should  be  indicated  on  the 
sketch  by  means  of  an  arrow  pointing  in  that  direction.  Any 
piece  of  paper  may  be  used  to  make  the  sketch  on.  The  back 
)f  the  field-message  blank  is  ruled  and  prepared  for  this  pur- 
Dose.  The  abbreviations  and  conventional  signs  shown  on  the 
following  pages  should  be  used  in  making  such  simple  sketches. 


272 


MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING. 


Field  Haps  and  Sketches. 

The  following  abbreviations  and  signs  are  authorized  for  use  on  field  maps  and 
sketches.  For  more  elaborate  map  work  the  authorized  conventional  signs  as 
given  in  the  manual  of "  Conventional  Signs,  United  States  Army  Maps/!  are  used. 

Abbreviations  other  than  those  given  should  not  be  used. 


A. 

abut 
Arc 

fcs. 

bot. 

Br. 

br. 

C. 

cem. 

con. 

cov. 

Cr, 

d. 

cut. 

D.S. 


Arroyo. 

G.  S 

General  Store. 

Pt. 

Point. 

Abutment. 
Arch. 

gVm. 

Girder. 
Gristmill. 

If 

Queen-post 
River. 

Brick. 

1. 

Iron. 

R.  H. 

Roundhouse. 

Blacksmith  Shop. 

1. 

Island. 

R.  R. 

Railroad. 

Bottom. 

Jc. 

Junction. 

S. 

South. 

Branch. 

k.p. 

King-post. 

fs.H. 

Steel. 

Bridge. 

L. 

Lake. 

Schoolhouse. 

Cape. 

Lat. 

Latitude. 

S.  M. 

Sawmill. 

Cemetery. 

Ldg. 
LS.S 

Landing. 

Sta. 

Station. 

Concrete. 

.  Life-Saving  Station 

.  St. 

Stone. 

Covered. 

L.  H. 

Lighthouse 

str. 

Stream. 

Creek. 

Long. 

Longitude. 

T.  G. 

Tollgate. 
Trestle. 
Truss. 

Deep. 

Mt. 

Mountain. 

Tres. 

Culvert. 

Mts. 

Mountains. 

tr. 

Drug  Store. 
East. 

N. 

North. 

W-T. 

Water  Tank. 

n.f, 

Not  fordable. 

W,W 

Waterworks 

Estuary. 

P. 

Pier. 

W. 

West. 

Fordable. 

pk. 

Plank. 

w. 

Wood. 

Fort. 

P.O. 

Post  Office. 

Wdr 

Wide. 

SIGNS— HELD  MAPS  AND  SKETCHES. 


Telegraph  Line 

Railroads 
ftoads 

fences 


Symbol  (modified  below)  '-V  *.*■***.*  *"-T 

Along  improved  road  >      » '   ■  .<    >  ''^V'i', 

Along  unimproved  road  . * •» ■•»*7 ?„"*•  *"«*"***  *  i 
Alongtrail  *-#.T-T-r->-#«*-»"-J 

Single  track ; 

Double  track  ""  ""  "  "  'j-  inmi.-imiiiit 

Trolley  ■ ....Ely? r,J 

Improved  v  ■     ■               ■         ■          ■  ■  =^ 

Unimproved  =-=  =  =  =  =========  =  =  *==  ==J 

Trail  -.-^r-V.. __.J 

barbed  wire  «■»■»■■»»■■««  ^-. 

smooth  wire  ' 

wood 

stone  t. 

hed|e.  fc. 


FIELD  MAPS  AND  SKETCHES. 


273 


Bridge 


+ 


Indicate  character  and  span  by  abbreviations. 


Example: 


H 


■wk 


40x20 


Meaning  wooden  kingpost  bridge,40feet  long,  20  feet  wide, 
and  10  feet  above  the  water. 


Streams 


Indicate  character,  by  abbreviations. 
Example:    — -**&**%*? 

Meanin§a  stream  15  feet  wide,  8  feet  deep,  and  not  fordable. 
House  -  Church*  School  house  -S.H. 

Woods 


Brush,  com. 
grass,  etc. 


Orchards  \t  ll\  Cultivated  Lane 

If  boundary  lines  are  fences  they  are  indicated  as  such 
Brush,  crops  or  grass,  important  as  cover  or  forage 
Cemetery      ]  *+++  ++\  Trees, isolated 

;  Cut     )   •     cut  10  feet  deep 
{  Fi"     :        fill  K)  feet  high 


Cut.and  fill  - 


CHAPTER  XL 
MESSAGE  BLANKS. 


U.  S.  ARMY  FIELD 
MESSAGE. 


~Nol    |  Sent  by.  ]   Time.   iRec'd  by. I  Time.  I  Check. 
(These  spaces  for  Signal  Operators  only.) 


From. 


Communicated  by 
Buzzer,      Phone,      Tele- 
graph,    Wireless,     Lan- 
tern,    Helio,    Flag,    Cy-  j 
clist.     Foot     Messenger,  I 
Mounted         Messenger,  I 
Motor    Car,    Flying    Ma-  I   At... 
chine. 
Underscore  means  used.    I  J)aic 


[Name  of  sending  detachment.] 


[Location  of  sending  detachment.] 


Hour. 


No. 


To. 


Received. 


The  heading  "From"  is  filled  in  with  tho  name  of  the  detachment  sending  the 
information;  as  "Officer's  Patrol,  7th  Cav."  Messages  sent  on  the  same  day  from 
the  same  source  to  the  same  person  are  numbered  consecutively.  The  address  is 
written  briefly,  thus:  "Commanding  officer,  Outpost,  1st  Brigade."  In  the  signa 
ture  the  writer's  surname  only  and  rank  are  given. 

This  blank  is  four  and  a  half  by  six  and  three  quarters-inches,  including  the 
margin  on  the  left  for  binding.  The  back  is  ruled  in  squares,  the  side  of  each  square 
representing  100  yards  on  a  scale  of  3  inches  to  one  mile,  for  uso  in  making  simple 
sketches  explanatory  of  the  message.  It  is  issued  by  the  Signal  Corps  in  blocks  ol 
fortv  with  duplicating  sheets.  The  regulation  cnveloue  is  three  by  five  and  one- 
fourth  inches  and  is  printed  as  follows: 


UNITED   STATES   ARMY   FIELD    MESSAGE. 


To 


No. 


(For  signal  operator  only 


When  sent No. 

Rate  of  speed 

Name  of  messenger 

When  and  by  whom  ree'd 

This  Envelope  will  b«  Returned  to  Bearer. 
274 


CHAPTER    XII. 
SIGNALS  AND  CODES. 

(Extracts  from  Signal  Book,  United  States  Army,  1916.) 


General  Instructions  for  Army  Signaling. 

1.  Each  signal  station  will  have  its  call,  consisting  of  one  or 
two  letters,  as  Washington,  "  W  "  ;  and  each  operator  or  signalist 
will  also  have  his  personal  signal  of  one  or  two  letters,  as  Jones, 
"Jo."  These  being  once  adopted  will  not  be  changed  without 
due  authority. 

2.  To  lessen  liability  of  error,  numerals  which  occur  in  the 
body  of  a  message  should  be  spelled  out. 

3.  In  receiving  a  message  the  man  at  the  telescope  should  call 
out  each  letter  as  received,  and  "not  wait  for  the  completion  of 
a  word. 

4.  A  record  of  the  date  and  time  of  the  receipt  or  transmission 
of  every  message  must  be  kept. 

5.  The  duplicate  manuscript  of  messages  received  at,  or  the 
original  sent-from,  a  station  should  be  carefully  hied. 

6.  In  receiving  messages  nothing  should  be  taken  for  granted, 
and  nothing  considered  as  seen  until  it  has  been  positively  and 
clearly  in  view.  Do  not  anticipate  what  will  follow  from  signals 
already  given.  Watch  the  communicating  station  until  the  last 
signals  are  made,  and  be  very  certain  that  the  signal  for  the 
end  of  the  message  has  been  given. 

7.  Every  address  must  contain  at  least  two  words  and  should 
be  sufficient  to  secure  delivery. 

8.  All  that  the  sender  writes  for  transmission  after  the  word 
"  To  "  is  counted. 

9.  Whenever  more  than  one  signature  is  attached  to  a  mes- 
sage count  all  initials  and  names  as  a  part  of  the  message. 

10.  Dictionary  words,  initial  letters,  surnames  of  persons, 
names  of  cities,  towns,  villages,  States,  and  Territories,  or  names 
of  the  Canadian  Provinces  will  be  counted  each  as  one  word  ; 
e.  g.,  New  York,  District  of  Columbia,  East  St.  Louis  should  each 

275 


276  SIGNALS  AND  CODES. 

be  counted  as  one  word.  The  abbreviation  of  the  names  o| 
cities,  towns,  villages,  States,  Territories,  and  provinces  will  bij 
counted  the  same  as  if  written  in  full. 

11.  Abbreviations  of  weights  and  measures  in  common  use! 
figures,  decimal  points,  bars  of  division,  and  in  ordinal  numberl 
the  affixes  "  st,"  "  d,"  "  nd,"  "  rd,"  and  "  th  "  will  be  each  countecl 
as  one  word.     Letters  and  groups  of  letters,  when  such  group?! 
do  not  form  dictionary  words  and  arc  not  combinations  of  dicj 
tionary  words,  will  be  counted  at  the  rate  of  five  letters  oi  j 
fraction  of  five  letters  to  a  word.    When  such  groups  are  mad*  \ 
up  of  combinations  of  dictionary  words,  each  dictionary  wore  I 
so  used  will  be  counted. 

12.  The  following  are  exceptions  to  paragraph  55,  and  arc 
counted  as  shown : 

A.  M 1  word  i 

P.  M lword 

O.   K lword 

Per  cent 1  word 

13.  No  message  will  be  considered  sent  until  its  receipt  has 
been  acknowledged  by  the  receiving  station. 

The  International  Morse   or  General  Service  Code. 

18.  The  International  Morse  Code  is  the  General  Service  Code 
and  is  prescribed  for  use  by  the  Army  of  the  United  States  and 
between  the  Army  and  the  Navy  of  the  United  States.  It  will 
be  used  on  radio  systems,  submarine  cables  using  siphon 
recorders,  and  with  the  heliograph,  flash-lantern,  and  all  visual 
signaling  apparatus  usiug  the  wigwag. 
Alphabet. 

A._  N  — . 

B  — ...  O 

C  —  ._.  P . 

D  — ..  Q .__ 

E.  R._ . 

F S... 

G .  T 

H U  .  .  — 

I  .  .  V 

k-zvzt"  x  irrn- 

L .  Y 

M Z .. 


VISUAL  SIGNALING  IN  GENERAL.  277 

Numerals. 


Punctuation. 


Period 

Comma _— . .  — 

Interrogation .. 

Hyphen  or  dash..; >  —  • . . .  — 

Parentheses  (before  and  after  the  words) _.__—.  __ 

Quotation  mark  (beginning  and  ending) —  . .  — . 

Exclamation _  _  • .  _  _ 

Apostrophe — . 

Semicolon .  —  . . 

Colon ... 

Bar  indicating  fraction . .  — . 

Underline  (before  and  after  the  word  or  words  it  is  wished  to  under- 
line)   .. ._ 

Double  dash  (beteen  preamble  and  address,  between  address  and 
body  of  message,  between  body  of  message  and  signature,  and 
immediately  before  a  fraction) — . .  .— 

Cross — .  — . 

Visual  Signaling  in  General, 

21.  Methods  of  visual  signaling  are  divided  as  follows: 

(a)  By  flag,  torch,  hand  lantern,  or  beam  of  searchlight 
(without  shutter).     (General  Service  Code.) 

(6)  By  heliograph,  flash  lantern,  or  searchlight  (with  shut- 
ter).    (General  Service  Code.) 

(c)  By  Ardois.     (General  Service  Code). 

(d)  By  hand  flags  or  by  stationary  semaphore.  (Two-arm 
semaphore  Code.) 

(e)  By  preconcerted  signals  with  Coston  lights,  rockets, 
bombs,  Very  pistols,  small  arms,  guns,  etc. 

(/)  By  flag  signals  by  permanent  hoists.  (International 
Code.) 

22.  The  following  conventional  signals,  with  exceptions  noted, 
will  be  used  in  the  first  four  classes. 


278 


End  of  word. 
End  of  sentence. 
End  of  message 


SIGNALS   AND    CODES. 


Signal  separating  preamble 
from  address;  address 
from  text;  text  from  sig- 
nature. 


Interval. 
Double  interval. 
Triple  interval. 


Exceptions. 
Ardois  and  semaphore. 


Double  interval,  signature 

Preceded  also  by  "Sig." 
nterval. 


Acknowledgment. 

Error. 

Negative. 

R. 

K. 

Preparatory. 

L. 

Annulling. 

N. 

Afllrmatlve, 

P. 

Interrogatory. 

•  •  —  —  •  • 

Repeat  after  word. 

Interrogatory.  A  (word). 

Repeat  last  message. 

Interrogatory  three  times. 

Send  faster. 

QRQ 

Send  slower. 

QRS 

Cease  sending. 

QRT 

Wait  a  moment. 

•  — —  •  •  • 

Execute. 

IX,  IX 

Move  to  your  right. 

MR 

Move  to  your  left. 

ML 

Move  "up. 

MU 

Move  down. 

MD 

Finished  (end  of  work). 

..._.__ 

None. 


None. 


Visual  Signaling:   By  Flag  (Wig-Wag),  Torch,  Hand  Lantern,  or 
Beam  or  Searchlight  (Without  Shutter). 

GENEBAL    SEBVICE    CODE. 

23.  For  the  flag  used  with  the  General  Service  Code  there  are 
three  motions  and  one  position.  The  position  is  with  the 
flag  held  vertically,  the  signalman  facing  directly  toward  the 
station  with  which  it  is  desired  to  communicate.  The  first 
motion  (the  dot)  is  to  the  right  of  the  sender,  and  will  em- 
brace an  arc  of  90°,  starting  with  the  vertical  and  returning 
to  It,  and  will  be  made  in  a  plane  at  right  angles  to  the  line 
connecting  the  two  stations.  The  second  motion  (the  dash) 
is  a  similar  motion  to  the  left  of  the  sender.  The  third  mo- 
tion (front)  is  downward  directly  in  front  of  the  sender  and 
instantly  returned  upward  to  the  first  position.  Front  is  used 
to  indicate  an  interval. 


SIGNALING  WITH  HELIOGHAPH.  279 

24.  The  beam  of  the  searchlight,  though  ordinarily  used  with 
the  shutter  like  the  heliograph,  may  be  used  for  long-distance 
signaling,  when  no  shutter  is  suitable  or  available,  in  a  similar 
manner  to  the  flag  or  torch,  the  first  position  being  a  vertical 
one.  A  movement  of  the  beam  90°  to  the  right  of  the  sender- 
indicates  a  dot,  a  similar  movement  to  the  left  indicates  a  dash ; 
the  beam  is  lowered  vertically  for  front. 

25.  To  use  the  torch  or  hand  lantern,  a  foot  light  must  be 
employed  as  a  point  of  reference  to  the  motion.  The  lantern  is 
most  conveniently  swung  out  upward  to  the  right  of  the!  foot- 
light  for  a  dot,  to  the  left  for  a  dash,  and  raised  vertically 
for  front. 

Note. — To  call  a  station,  make  the  call  letter  until  acknowl- 
edged, at  intervals  giving  the  call  or  signal  of  the  calling  station. 
If  the  call  letter  of  a  station  is  unknown,  wave  flag  until  acknowl- 
edged. In  using  the  searchlight  without  shutter  throw  the 
beam  in  a  vertical  position  and  move  it  through  an  arc  of  180° 
in  a  plane  at  right  angles  to  the  line  connecting  the  two  stations 
until  acknowledged.  To  acknowledge  a  call,  signal  "Acknowl- 
edgment "  followed  by  the  call  letter  of  the  acknowledging 
station. 

Signaling    with    Heliograph,    Flash    Lantern,    a/id  Searchlight 
(With  Shatter). 

GENERAL  SERVICE  CODE. 

26.  The  first  position  is  to  turn  a  steady  flash  on  the  receiving 
station.  The  signals  are  made  by  short  and  long  flashes.  Use 
a  short  flash  for  dot  and  a  long  steady  flash  for  dash.  The  ele- 
ments of  a  letter  should  be  slightly  longer  than  in  sound  signals. 

27.  To  call  a  station,  make  its  call  letter  until  acknowledged. 

28.  If  the  call  letter  of  a  station  be  unknown,  signal  A  until 
acknowledged.  Each  station  will  then  turn  on  a  steady  flash 
and  adjust.  When  adjustment  is  satisfactory  to  the  called 
station,  it  will  cut  off  its  flash  and  the  calling  station  will  pro- 
ceed with  its  message. 

29.  If  the  receiver  sees  that  the  sender's  mirror  or  light  needs 
adjustment,  he  will  turn  on  a  steady  flash  until  answered  by  a 
steady  flash.  When  the  adjustment  is  satisfactory  the  receiver 
will  cut  off  his  flash  and  the  sender  will  resume  his  message. 


THE   TWO-ARM    SEMAPHORE   CODE. 

■»■■■ 


ERROR 


A      JK     I 


N£SA" 


PREPARATORY 


G      *    7 


C     a   3 


H     a   8 


M 


O      ifi   4 


ANNULLING 


I      »   9 


N 


E     »    5 


J    *  o 


280 


THE  TWO-ABM  SEMAPHORE  CODE. 
■   AFFIRMATIVE 


281 


ACKNOWLEDGE 


R      & 


n> 


W 


"* 


OTENTION 


INTERVAL 


NUMERALS 


282  SIGNALS   AND    CODES. 

30.  To  break  the  sending  station  for  other  purposes,  turn  oi 

a  steady  flash. 

SOUND  SIGNALS. 

56.  Sound  signals  made  by  the  whistle,  foghorn,  bugle,  trumpet 
and  drum  may  well  be  used  in  a  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  a 
night.    They  may  be  used  with  the  dot  and  dash  code. 

In  applying  the  General  Service  Code  to  whistle,  foghorn 
bugle,  or  trumpet,  one  short  blast  indicates  a  dot  and  one  Ion 
blast  a  dash.  With  the  drum,  one  tap  indicates  a  dot  and  t\v 
taps  in  rapid  succession  a  dash.  Although  these  signals  cai 
be  used  with  a  dot  and  dash  code,  they  should  be  so  used  in  con 
nection  with  a  preconcerted  or  conventional  code. 

Signaling  by  Two-Arm   Semaphore. 

HAND   FLAGS, 

43.  Signaling  by  the  two-arm . semaphore  is  the  most  rapu 
method  of  sending  spelled-out  messages.  It  is,  however,  verj 
liable  to  error  if  the  motions  are  slurred  over  or  run  togethe 
in  an  attempt  to  make  speed.  Both  arms  should  move  rapidl 
and  simultaneously,  but  there  should  be  a  perceptible  pause  a 
the  end  of  each  letter  before  making  the  movements  for  th< 
next  letter.  Rapidity  is  secondary  to  accuracy.  For  alphabe 
see  pages  following. 

Note. — In  making  the  interval  the  flags  are  crossed  down 
ward  in  front  of  the  body  (just  above  the  knees)  ;  the  double 
interval  is  the  "chop-chop"  signal  made  twice;  the  trip! 
interval  is  "  chop-chop  "  signal  made  three  times.  In  calling  i 
station  face  it  squarely  and  make  its  call.  If  there  is  no  imrae 
diate  reply  wave  the  flags  over  the  head  to  attract  attention 
making  the  call  at  frequent  intervals.  When  the  sender  make* 
"  end  of  message  "  the  receiver,  if  message  is  understood,  ex 
tends  the  flags  horizontally  and  waves  them  until  the  sendei 
does  the  same,  when  both  leave  their  stations.  Care  must  b< 
taken  with  hand  flags  to  hold  the  staffs  so  as  to  form  a  pro 
longation  of  the  arms. 


LETTER  CODES.  283 

LETTER  CODES. 

INFANTSY. 

47.  For  use  with  General  Service  Code  or  semaphore  hand  flags. 


Letter  of  alphabet. 


If  signaled  from  the  rear  to 
the  firing  line. 


If  signaled  from  the  firing  line 
to  the  rear. 


!   AM 

GCC 

CF 

DT 

F , 

FB 

FL 

G 

HHH 

K 

LT 

O 

(Ardois  and  sema- 
phore only.) 

(All  methods  but 
ardois  and  sema- 
phore.) 

P 

RN 

RT 

sss 

8UF 

T 


Ammunition  going  forward. 
Chargo   (mandatory  at  all 
times). 

Cease  firing. 

Double  time  or  "rush." 

Commence  firing. 

Fix  bayonets. 

Artillery  fire  is  causing  us 

losses. 
Move  forward. 
Halt. 
Negative. 
Left. 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 


Affirmative. 

Range. 

Right. 

Support  going  forward. 

Suspend  firing. 

Target. 


Ammunition  required. 

Am  about  to  charge  if  no 
instructions  to  the  con- 
trary. 

Cease  firing. 

Double  time  or  "rush." 


Preparing  to  move  forward. 

Negative. 
Left. 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)? 
Interrogtory. 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 


Affirmative. 
Range. 
Right. 

Support  needed. 
Suspend  firing. 
Target. 


CAVALRY. 

48.  For  use  with  General  Service  Code  or  semaphore  hand  flags. 

AM— Ammunition  going  forward  (if  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the 
front). 
Ammunition  required  (if  signaled  from  the  front). 
CCC— Charge  (if  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the  front). 

About  to  charge  if  no  instructions  to  the  contrary  (if  signaled 
from  the  front). 


284  SIGNALS  AND    CODES. 

CF— Cease  firing. 

DT— Double  time,  rush,  or  hurry. 

F— Commence  firing. 
FL— Artillerv  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 
G— Move  forward  (if  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the  front). 
Preparing  to  move  forward  (if  signaled  from  the  front). 
HHH-Halt. 
K— Negative. 
LT— Left. 
M— Bring  up  the  horses  (if  signaled  from  front  to  rear). 

Horses  going  forward  (if  signaled  from  rear  to  front). 
O— What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)?    Interrogatory.    (Ardois  and  sema- 
phore only.) 

. , .  .—What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)?    Interrogatory.    (All  methods  but 

ardois  and  semaphore.) 
P— Affirmative. 
R— Acknowledgment. 
RN— Range. 
RT— Right. 
SSS— Support  going  forward  (if  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the  front). 

Support  needed  (if  signaled  from  the  front). 
SUF— Suspend  firing. 
T— Target. 

FIELD    ARTILLERY. 

49.  For  use  with  General  Service  Code  or  semaphore  hand  flags. 
—Error.    (All  methods  but  ardois  and  semaphore.) 

A— Error.    (Ardois  and  semaphore  only.) 
AD— Additional. 
AKT— Draw  ammunition  from  combat  train. 
AL — Draw  ammunition  from  limbers. 
AM— Ammunition  going  forward. 
AMC— At  my  command. 
A P— Aiming  point. 
B  (numerals)— Battery  (so  many)  rounds. 
BS  (numerals)— (Such.)    Battalion  station. 
BL—  Battery  from  the  left. 
BR— Battery  from  the  right. 

CCC— Charge"  (mandatory  at  all  times).    Am  about  to  charge  if  not 
instructed  to  contrary. 
CF— Cease  firing. 
CS — Close  station. 
CT— Change  target. 

D — Down. 
DF— Deflection. 

DT— Double  time.    Rush.    Hurry. 
F— Commence  firing. 
FCL  (numerals)— On  1st  piece  close  by  (so  much). 
FL — Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 


LETTER  CODES.  285 

FOP  (numerals)— On  1st  piece  open  by  (so  much). 

G — Move  forward.    Preparing  to  move  forward. 
HIIII— Halt.    Action  suspended. 

IX— Execute.    Go  ahead.    Transmit. 
JI— Report  tiring  data. 
K— Negative.    No. 
KR— Corrector. 
L — Preparatory.    Attention. 
LCL  (numerals)— On  4th  piece  close  by  (so  much). 
LOP  (numerals)— On  4th  piece  open  by  (so  much). 
LT— Left. 

LL— Left  from  the  left 
LR— Left  from  the  right. 
LE  (numerals)— Less  (so  much). 
MD— Move  down. 
ML— Move  °to  your  left. 
MR— Move  to  your  right. 
MU— Move  up. 
MO  (numerals)— Move  (so  much). 
N— Annul,  cancel. 

O— What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)?    Interrogatory.    (Ardois  and  sema- 
phore only.) 

.. .  .—What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)?    Interrogatory.    (All  methods  but 

ardois  and  semaphore.) 
P— Affirmative.    Yes. 
PS— Percussion.    Shrapnel. 
QRQ— Send  faster. 
QRS— Send  slower. 
QRT— Cease  sending. 

R— Acknowledgment.    Received. 
RS—  Regimental  station. 
RL— Right  from  the  left. 
RR— Right  from  the  right. 
RN— Range. 
RT— Right. 
S— Subtract. 
SCL  (numerals)— On  2d  piece  close  by  (so  much). 
SOP  (numerals)— On  2d  piece  ODen  by  (so  much). 
SH— Shell. 
SI— Site. 
SSS — Support  needed. 
T— Target. 
TCL  (numerals)— On  3d  piece  close  by  (so  much). 
TOP  (numerals)— On  3d  piece  open  by  (so  much). 

Y  (letter)— Such  battery  station. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
FIRST  AID  RULES. 

The  bandages  and  dressings  contained  in  the  first-aid  packet 
have  been  so  treated  as  to  destroy  any  germs  thereon.  There- 
fore, when  dressing  a  wound,  be  careful  not  to  touch  or  handle 
that  part  of  the  dressing  which  is  to  be  applied  to  the  wound. 

A  sick  or  injured  person  should  always  be  made  to  lie  down 
on  his  back,  if  practicable,  as  this  is  the  most  comfortable  posi- 
tion, and  all  muscles  may 
be  relaxed. 

All  tight  articles  of  cloth- 
ing and  equipment  should 
be  loosened,  so  as  not  to 
interfere  with  breathing 
or  the  circulation  of  the 
blood.  Belts,  collars,  and 
the  trousers  at  the  waist 
should  be  opened. 

Don't  let  mere  onlookers 
crowd  about  the  patient. 
They  prevent  him  from 
Letting  fresh  air  and  also 
make  him  nervous  and 
excited. 

In    case  -of   injury    the 

heart   action   is  generally 

weak  from  shock,  and  the 

body,    therefore,    grows 

any  more  clothing  than  is 


Try  to  disturb  the 


Fig.  1. 
somewhat  cold.     So  don't  remove 
necessary  to  expose  the  injury. 

Cut  or  rip  the  clothing,  but  don't  pull  it 
patient  as  little  as  possible. 

Don't  touch  a  wound' with  your  fingers  or  a  handkerchief,  or 
with  anything  else  but  the  first-aid  dressing.     Don't  wash  the 
wound  with  water,  as  you  may  infect  it. 
286 


FIRST  AID  RULES. 


287 


Don't  administer  stimulants  (whisky,  brandy,  wine,  etc.)  un- 
less ordered  to  do  so  by  a  doctor.  While  in  a  few  cases  stimu- 
lants are  of  benefit,  in  a  great  many  cases  they  do  positive  harm, 
especially  where  there  has  been  any  bleeding. 

The  heart  may  be  considered  as  a  pump  and  the  arteries  as  a 
rubber  hose,  which  carry  the  blood  from  the  heart  to  every  part 
of  the  body.     The  veins  are  the  hose  which  carry  the  blood  back 


Fio.  2. 

to  the  heart.  Every  wound  bleeds  some,  but,  unless  a  large 
artery  or  a  large  vein  is  cut,  the  bleeding  will  stop  after  a 
short  while  if  the  patient  is  kept  quiet  and  the  first-aid  dress- 
ing is  bound  over  the  wound  »so  as  to  make  pressure  on  it. 

When  a  large  artery  is  cut  the  blood  gushes  out  in  spurts 
every  time  the  heart  beats.  In  this  case  it  is  necessary  to  stop 
the  flow  of  blood  by  pressing  upon  the  hose  somewhere  between 
the  heart  and  the  leak. 


288 


FIRST  AID  RULES. 


If  the  leak  is  in  the  arm  or  hand,  apply  pressure  as  in  fig- 
ure 1. 
If  the  leak  is  in  the  leg,  apply  pressure  as  in  figure  2. 
If  the  leak  is  in  the  shoulder  or  armpit,  apply  pressure  as  in 
figure  3. 

The  reason  for  this  is  that  at  the  places  indicated  the  arteries 
may  be  pressed  against  a  bone  more  easily  than  at  any  other 
places. 

Another  way  of  applying  pressure  (by  means  of  a  tourni- 
quet) is  shown  in  figure  4.    Place  a  pad  of  tightly  rolled  cloth 

or  paper,  or  any  suitable  object, 
over  the  artery.  Tie  a  bandage 
loosely  about  the  limb  and  then 
insert  your  bayonet,  or  a  stick, 
and  twist  up  the  bandage  until 
the  pressure  of  the  pad  on  the 
artery  stops  the  leak.  Twist  the 
bandage  slowly  and  stop  as  soon 
as  the  blood  ceases  to  flow,  in 
order  not  to  bruise  the  flesh  or 
muscles  unnecessarily. 

A  tourniquet  may  cause  pain 
and  swelling  of  the  limb,  and  if 
left  on  too  long  may  cause  the 
limb  to  die.  Therefore,  about 
every  half  hour  or  so,  loosen  the 
bandage  very  carefully,  but  if  the 
bleeding  continues  pressure  must 
be  applied  again.  In  tl.is  case 
apply  the  pressure  with  the  thumb 
for  five  or  ten  minutes,  as  this  cuts  off  only  the  main  artery 
and  leaves  some  of  the  smaller  arteries  and  the  veins  free  to 
restore  some  of  the  circulation.  When  a  tourniquet  is  pain- 
ful, it  is  too  tight  and  should  be  carefully  loosened  a  little. 

If  the  leg  or  arm  is  held  upright,  this  also  helps  to  reduce 
the  bleeding  in  these  parts,  because  the  heart  then  has  to  pump 
the  blood  uphill. 

A  broken  bone  is  called  a  fracture.  The  great  danger  in  the 
case  of  a  fracture  is  that  the  sharp,  jagged  edges  of  the  bones 


FIRST  AID  RULES. 


289 


may  stick  through  the  flesh  and  skin,  or  tear  and  bruise  the 
arteries,  veins,  and  muscles.  If  the  skin  is  not  broken,  a  frac- 
ture is  not  so  serious,  as  no  germs  can  get  in.  Therefore  never 
move  a  person  with  a  broken  bone  until  the  fracture  has  been 
so  fixed  that  the  broken  ends  of  the  bone  can  not  move. 


Fig.  4 — Improvised  tourniquet. 

If  the  leg  or  arm  is  broken,  straighten  the  limb  gently  and  if 
necessary  pull  upon  the  end  firmly  to  get  the  bones  in  place. 
Then  bind  the  limb  firmly  to  a  splint  to  hold  it  in  place.  A 
splint  may  be  made  of  any  straight,  stiff  material — a  shingle  or 
piece  of  board,  a  bayonet,  a  rifle,  a  straight  branch  of  a  tree, 
etc.     Whatever  material  you  use  must  be  well  padded  on  the 


290 


FIRST  AID  RULES. 


side  next  to  the  limb.  Be  careful  never  to  place  the  bandages 
over  the  fracture,  but  always  above  and  below.  (Figs.  5,  6, 
7  8) 
'  Many  surgeons  think  that  the  method  of  binding  a  broken  leg 
to  the  well  one,  and  of  binding  the  arm  to  the  body,  is  the  best 
plan  in  the  field  as  being  the  quickest  and  one  that  serves  the 
immediate  purpose. 


Fig.  5. 


Fig.  6. 


With  wounds  about  the  body  the  chest  and  abdomen  you 
must  not  meddle  except  to  protect  them  when  possible  without 
much  handling  with  the  materials  of  the  packet. 

FAINTING,    SHOCK,    HEAT    EXHAUSTION. 

The  symptoms  of  fainting,  shock,  and  heat  exhaustion  are 
very  similar.  The  face  is  pale,  the  skin  cool  and  moist,  the 
pulse  is  weak,  and  generally  the  patient  is  unconscious.  Keep 
the  patient  quiet,  resting  on  his  back,  with  his  head  low. 
Loosen  the  clothing,  but.  keep  the  patient  warm,  and  give-stimu- 
lants  (whisky,  hot  coffee,  tea,  etc.). 

SUNSTROKE. 

In  the  case  of  sunstroke  the  face  is  flushed,  the  skin  Is  dry 
and  very  hot    and   the  pulse  is  full  and  strong.     In  this  case 


FIRST  AID  RULES. 


291 


place  the.  patient  in  a  cool  spot,  remove  the  clothing,  and  make 
every  effort  to  lessen  the  heat  in  the  body  by  cold  applications 


Fie.  7.  Fia.  8. 

to  the  head  and  surface  generally.    Do  not,  under  any  circum- 
stances, give  any  stimulants  or  hot  drinks. 


FIRST  AID  EXILES. 


FREEZING  AND  FROSTBITE. 


The  part  frozen,  which  looks  white  or  bluish  white,  and  is 
cold,  should  be  very  slowly  raised  in  temperature  by  brisk  but 
careful  rubbing  in  a  cool  place  and  never  near  a  fire.  Stimu- 
lants are  to  be  given  cautiously  when  the  patient  can  swallow, 
and  followed  by  small  amounts  of  warm  liquid  nourishment. 
The  object  is  to  restore  the  circulation  of  the  blood  and  the 
natural  warmth  gradually  and  not  violently.  Care  and  patience 
are  necessary  to  do  this. 

RESUSCITATION   OF  THE  APPARENTLY   DBOWJTED. 

In  the  instruction  of.  the  Army  in  First  Aid  the  method  of 
resuscitation  of  the  apparently  drowned,  as  described  by 
"  Schaefer,"  will  be  taught  instead  of  the  "  Sylvester  Method," 
heretofore  used.  The  Schaefer  method  of  artificial  respiration 
is~also  applicable  in  cases  of  electric  shock,  asphyxiation  by  gas, 
and  of  the  failure  of  respiration  following  concussion  of  the 
brain.  -      i 

Being  under  water  for  four  of  five  minutes  is  generally  fatal, 
but  an  effort  to  revive  the  apparently  drowned  should  always  be 
made,  unless  it  is  known  that  the  body  has  been  under  water 
for  a  very  long  time.  The  attempt  to  revive  the  patient  should 
not  be  delayed  for  the  purpose  of  removing  his  clothes  or  plac- 
ing him  in  the  ambulance.  Begin  the  procedure  as  soon  as  he 
is  out  of  the  water,  on  the  shore  or  in  the  boat.  The  first  and 
most  important  thing  is  to  start  artificial  restoration  without 
delay. 

The  Schaefer  method  is  preferred  because  it  can  be  carried 
out  by  one  person  without  assistance,  and  because  its  procedure 
is  not  exhausting  to  the  operator,  •  thus  permitting  him,  if  re- 
quired, to  continue  it  for  one  or  two  hours.  When  it  is  known 
that  a  person  has  been  under  water  for  but  a  few  minutes  con- 
tinue the  artificial  respiration  for  at  least  one  and  a  half  to 
two  hours  before  considering  the  case  hopeless.  Once  the  pa- 
tient has  begun  to  breathe  watch  carefully  to  see  that  he  does 
not  stop  again.  Should  the  breathing  be  very  faint,  or  should 
he  stop  breathing,  assist  him  again  with  artificial  respiration. 
After  he  starts  breathing  do  not  lift  him  nor  permit  him  to 
stand  until  the  breathing  has  become  full  and  regular. 


RESUSCITATION. 


293 


As  soon  as  the  patient  is  removed  from  the  water,  turn  him 
face  to  the  ground,  clasp  your  hands  under  his  waist,  and  raise 


the  body  so  any  water  may  drain  out  of  the  air  passages  while 
the  head  remains  low.     (Figure  9.) 


SCHAEFEB  METHOD. 

The  patient  is  'aid  on  his  stomach,  arms  extended  from  his 
body  beyond  his  head,  face  turned  to  one  side  so  that  the  mouth 


and  nose  do  not  touch  the  ground.     This  position  causes  the 
tongue  to  fall  forward  of  its  own  weight  and  so  prevents  its 

5M, 


RESUSCITATION— SCHAEFER  METHOD.  295 

falltng  back  into  the  air  passages.  Turning  the  head  to  one  side 
prevents  the  face  coming  into  contact  with  mud  or  water  during 
the  operation.  This  position  also  facilitates  the  removal  from 
the  mouth  of  foreign  bodies,  such  as  tobacco,  chewing  gum, 
false  teeth,  etc.,  and  favors  the  expulsion  of  mucus,  blood, 
vomitus,  serum,  or  any  liquid  that  may  be  in  the  air  passages. 

The  operator  kn-eels,  straddles  one  or  both  of  the  patient's 
thighs,  and  ^aces  "his  head.  Locating  the  lowest  rib,  the  op- 
erator, with  his  thumbs  nearly  parallel  to  his  fingers,  places 
his  hands  so  that  the  little  finger  curls  over  the  twelfth  rib. 
If  the  hands  are  on  the  pelvic  bones  the  object  of  the  work  is 
defeated ;  hence  the  bones  of  the  pelvis  are  first  located  in  order 
to  avoid  them.  The  hands  must  be  free  from  the  pelvis  and 
resting  on  the  lowest  rib.  By  operating  on  the  bare  back  it  is 
easier  to  locate  the  lower  ribs  and  avoid  the  pelvis.  The 
nearer  the  ends  of  the  ribs  the  hands  are  placed  without  sliding 
off  the  better.  The  hands  are  thus  removed  from  the  spine,  the 
fingers  being,  nearly  out  of  sight. 

The  fingers  help  some,  but  the  chief  pressure  is  exerted  by  the 
heels  (thenar  and  hypothenar  eminences)  of  the  hands,  with  the 
weight  coming  straight  from  the  shoulders.  It  is  a  waste  of 
energy  to  bend  the  arms  at  the  elbows  and  shove  in  from  the 
sides,  because  the  muscles  of  the  back  are  stronger  than  the 
muscle's  of  the  arms. 

The  operator's  arms  are  held  straight,  and  his  weight  is 
brought  from  his  shoulders  by  bringing  his  body  and  shoulders 
forward.  This  weight  is  gradually  increased  until  at  the  end 
of  the  three  seconds  of  vertical  pressure  upon  the  lower  ribs 
of  the  patient  the  force  is  felt  to  be  heavy  enough  to  compress 
the  parts;  then  the  weight  is  suddenly  removed.  If  there  is 
danger  of  not  returning  the  hands  to  the  right  position  again, 
they  can  remain  lightly  in  place ;  but  it  is  usually  better  to  re- 
move the  hands  entirely.  If  the  operator  is  light  and  the 
patient  an  overweight  adult,  he  can  utilize  over  80  per  cent  of 
his  weight  by  raising  his  knees  from  the  ground  and  supporting 
himself  entirely  on  his  toes  and  the  heels  of  his  hands,  the  latter 
properly  placed  on  the  ends  of  the  floating  ribs  of  the  patient. 
In  this  manner  he  can  work  as  effectively  as  a  heavy  man. 

A  light  feather  or  a  piece  of  absorbent  cotton  drawn  out 
thin  and  held  near  the  nose  by  some  one  will  indicate  by  its 


296  PIKST  AID  RULES. 

movements  whether  or  not  there  is  a  current  of  air  going  and 
coming  with  each  forced  expiration  and  spontaneous  inspiration. 

The  natural  rate  of  breathing  is.  12  to  15  times  per  minute. 
The  rate  of  operation  should  not  exceed  this.  The  lungs  must 
be  thoroughly  emptied  by  three  seconds  of  pressure,  then  re- 
filling takes  care  of  itself.  Pressure  and  release  of  pressure — 
one  complete  respiration — occupies  about  five  seconds.  If  the 
operator  is  alone,  he  can  be  guided  in  each  act  by  his  own  deep, 
regular  respiration  or  by  counting  or  by  his  watch  lying  by  his 
side.     If  comrades  are  present,  he  can  be  advised  by  them. 

The  duration  of  the  efforts  as  artificial  respiration  should 
ordinarily  exceed  an  hour;  indefinitely  longer  if  there  are  any 
evidences  of  returning  animation,  by  way  of  breathing,  speaking, 
or  movements.  There  are  liable  to  be  evidences  of  life  within 
25  minutes  in  patients  who  will  recover  from  electric  shock, 
but  where  there  is  doubt  the  patient  should  be  given  the  benefit 
of  the  doubt.  In  drowning,  especially,  recoveries  are  on  record 
after  two  hours  or  more  of  unconsciousness ;  hence,  the  Schaefer 
method,  being  easy  of  operation,  is  more  likely  to  be  persisted  in. 

Aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  may  be  poured  on  a  handker- 
chief and  held  continuously  within  3  inches  of  the  face  and 
nose.  If  other  ammonia  preparations  are  used,  they  should  be 
diluted  or  held  farther  away.    Try  it  on  your  own  nose  first.  - 

When  the  operator  is  a  heavy  man  it  is  necessary  to  caution 
him  not  to  bring  force  too  violently  upon  the  ribs,  as  one  of  them 
might  be  broken. 

Do  not  attempt  to  give  liquids  of  any  kind  to  the  patient 
while  unconscious.  Apply  warm  blankets  and  hot-water  bottles 
as  soon  as  they  can  be  obtained. 


CHAPTER  XIV, 

LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

Section  1.  General  provisions. 

The  Army  of  the  United  States  is  governed  by  certain  laws 
called  "  The  Articles  of  War  "  and  certain  regulations  called 
"Army  Regulations." 

The  following  list  includes  the  offenses  most  often  committed 
by  soldiers,  generally  through  ignorance  or  carelessness  rather 
than  viciousness.  Violations  of  any  rule  or  regulation  should 
be  carefully  guarded  against,  since  they  not  only  subject  the 
offender  to  punishment,  but  also  bring  discredit  on  his  com- 
rades, his  organization,  and  on  the  military  profession : 

1.  Selling,  pawning,  or,  through  neglect,  losing  or  spoiling 
any  Government  property,  such  as  uniforms,  blankets,  equip- 
ment, ammunition,  etc. 

2.  Disobedience  of  the  orders  of  any  officer  or  noncommis- 
sioned officer. 

3.  Disrespect  to  an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer. 

4.  Absence  from  camp  without  leave. 

5.  Absence  from  any  drill,  formation,  or  other  duty  without 
authority. 

6.  Drunkenness  on  duty  or  off  duty,  whether  in  camp  or  when 
absent  either  with  or  without  leave. 

7.  Bringing  liquor  into  camp. 

8.  N6isy  or  disorderly  conduct  in  camp  or  when  absent  either 
with  or  without  leave. 

9.  Entering  on  private  property,  generally  for  the  purpose  of 
stealing  fruit,  etc. 

10.  Negligence  or  carelessness  at  drill  or  on  other  duty,  par- 
ticularly while  on  guard  or  as  a  sentinel  over  prisoners. 

11.  Wearing  an  unauthorized  uniform  or  wearing  the  uni- 
form in  an  improper  manner. 

12.  Urinating  in  or  around  camp. 
IS.  Failing  to  salute  properly. 

14.  Disrespect  or  affront  to  a  sentlneL 

15.  Abuse  or  neglect  of  his  horse. 

297 


298  LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

"The  basic  principles  of  the  combat  tactics  of  the  different 
arms  are  set  forth  in  the  Drill  Regulations  of  those  arm^.for 
units  as  high  as  brigades."    (Preface,  Field  Service  Regulations.) 

"The  Drill  Regulations  are  furnished  as  a  guide.  They. pro- 
vide the  principles  for  training  and  for  increasing  the  probability 
of  success  in  battle.  In  the  interpretation  of  the  regulations  the 
spirit  must  be  sought.  Quibbilng  over  the  minutice  of  form  is 
indicative  of  failure  to  grasp  the  spirit."  {Paragraph  Jh  Infantry 
Drill  Regulations.) 

Field  Service  Regulations  govern  all  arms  of  the  Army  of  the 
United  States. 

Section  2.  The  Army  of  the  United  States. 

The  Army  of  the  United  States  shall  consist  of  the  Regular 
Army,  the  Volunteer  Army,  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps,  the  En- 
listed Reserve  Corps,  the  National  Guard  while  in  the  service 
of  the  United  States,  and  such  other  land  forces  as  are  now 
or  may  hereafter  be  authorized  by  law.  (Sec.  1,  act  of  June 
3,  1916.) 

Section  3.  Rank  and  precedence  of  officers  and  noncommissioned 

officers. 

The  following  are  the  grades  of  rank  of  officers ,  and  non- 
commissioned officers: 

1.  Lieutenant  general. 

2.  Major  general. 

3.  Brigadier  general. 

4.  Colonel. 

5.  Lieutenant  colonel. 

6.  Major. 

7.  Captain. 

8.  First  lieutenant. 

9.  Second  lieutenant. 

10.  Aviator,  Signal  Corps. 

11.  Cadet. 

12.  (a)  Sergeant  major,  regimental;  sergeant  major,  senior 
grade,  Coast  Artillery  Corps;  (6)  quartermaster  sergeant, 
senior  grade,  Quartermaster  Corps;  master  hospital  sergeant, 
Medical  Department ;  master  engineer,  senior  grade,  Corps  of 
Engineers;  master  electrician,   Coast  Artillery  Corps;   master 


INSIGNIA  OF  OFFICERS,  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEKS.     29& 

signal  electrician;  band  leader;  (c)  hospital  sergeant,  Medical 
Department ;  master  engineer,  junior  grade,  Corps  of  Engineers ; 
engineer,  Coast  Artillery  Corps. 

13.  Ordnance  sergeant;  Quartermaster  sergeant,  Quartermas- 
ter Corps;  supply  sergeant,  regimental. 

14.  Sergeant  major,  squadron  and  battalion;  sergeant  major, 
junior  grade,  Coast  Artillery  Corps;  supply  sergeant,  battalion, 
Corps  of  Engineers. 

15.  (a)  First  sergeant;  (o)  sergeant,  first  class,  Medical  De- 
partment; sergeant,  first  class,  Quartermaster  Corps;  sergeant, 
first  class,  Corps  of  Engineers;  sergeant,  first  class,  Signal 
Corps;  electrician  sergeant,  first  class,  Const  Artillery  Corps; 
electrician  sergeant,  Artillery  Detachment,  United  States  Mili- 
tary Academy;  assistant  engineer,  Coast  Artillery  Corps;  (c) 
master  gunner,  Coast  Artillery  Corps;  master  gunner,  Artillery 
Detachment,  United  States  Military  Academy;  band  sergeant 
and  assistant  leader,  United  States  Military  Academy  band; 
assistant  band  leader;  sergeant  bugler;  electrician  sergeant, 
second  class,  Coast  Artillery  Corps;  electrician  sergeant,  sec- 
ond class,  Artillery  Detachment,  United  States  Military  Acad- 
emy ;  radio  sergeant. 

16.  Color  sergeant. 

17.  Sergeant;  supply  sergeant,  company;  mess  sergeant; 
stable  sergeant;  fireman,  Coast  Artillery  Corps. 

18.  Corporal. 

In  each  grade  and  subgrade  date  of  commission,  appointment, 
or  warrant  determines  the  order  of  precedence.  (Paragraph  9, 
Army  Regulations,  1913.) 

Section  4.  Insignia  of  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers. 

The  insignia  of  rank  appearing  on  the  shoulder  straps,  shoul- 
der loops,  or  collar  of  shirt  (when  shirt  is  worn  without  coat) 
of  officers  are  as  follows : 

General :  Coat  of  arms  and  two  stars. 

Lieutenant  general :  One  large  star  and  two  smaller  ones. 

Major  general :  Two  silver  stars. 

Brigadier  general :  One  silver  star. 

Colonel :  One  silver  spread  eagle. 

Lieutenant  colonel :  One  silver  leaf. 

Major ;  One  gold  leaf : 


800  LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

Captain :  Two  silver  bars. 
First  lieutenant :  One  silver  bar. 
The  grade  of  noncommissioned  officers  is  indicated  by  chev- 
rons worn  on  the  sleeve. 

Section  5.  Extracts  from  the  Articles  of  War. 

(Relating  to  enlisted  men.) 

CERTAIN  ARTICLES  TO  BE  READ  AND  EXPLAINED. 

Abt.  110.  Articles  1,  2,  and  29,  54  to  96,  inclusive,  and  104  to 
109,  inclusive,  shall  be  read  and  explained  to  every  soldier  at 
the  time  of  his  enlistment  or  muster  in,  or  within  six  days  there- 
after, and  shall  be  read  and  explained  once  every  six  months  to 
the  soldiers  of  every  garrison,  regiment,  or  Company  in  the  serv- 
ice of  the  United  States. 

DEFINITIONS. 

Abticle  1.  The  following  words  when  used  in  these  articles 
shall  be  construed  in  the  sense  indicated  in  this  article,  unless 
the  context  shows  that  a  different  sense  is  intended,  namely : 

(a)  The  word  "  officer  "  shall  be  construed  to  refer  to  a  com- 
missioned officer  ; 

( & )  The  word  "  soldier  "  shall  be  construed  as  including  a 
noncommissioned  officer,  a  private,  or  any  other  enlisted  man ; 

(c)  The  word  "  company  "  shall  be  understood  as  including  a 
troop  or  battery  ;  and 

(d)  The  word  "  battalion  "  shall  be  understood  as  including  a 
squadron. 

PERSONS  SUBJECT  TO  MILITARY  LAW. 

Art.  2.  The  following  persons  are  subject  to  these  articles  and 
shall  be  understood  as  included  in  the  term  "  any  person  subject 
to  military  law  "  or  "  persons  subject  to  military  law  "  whenever 
used  in  these  articles :  Provided,  That  nothing  contained  in  this 
act,  except  as  specifically  provided  in  article  2,  subparagraph 
(c),  shall  be  construed  to  apply  to  any  person  under  the  United 
States  naval  jurisdiction,  unless  otherwise  specifically  provided 
by  law : 

(a)  All  officers  and  soldiers  belonging  to  the  Regular  Army 
of  the  United  States;  all  volunteers,  from  the  dates  of  their 
muster  or  acceptance  into  the  military  service  of  the  United 
States ;  and  all  other  persons  lawfully  called,  drafted,  or  ordered 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR.  801 

Into  or  to  duty  or  for  training  in  the  said  service,  from  the  dates 
they  are  required  by  the  terms  of  the  call,  draft,  or  order  to 
obey  the  same. 
(&)  Cadets. 

(c)  Officers  and  soldiers  of  the  Marine  Corps  when  detached 
for  service  with  the  armies  of  the  United  States  by  order  of  the 
President :  Provided,  That  an  officer  or  soldier  of  the  Marine 
Corps  when  so  detached  may  be  tried  by  military  court-martial 
for  an  offense  committed  against  the  laws  for  the  government 
of  the  naval  service  prior  to  his  detachment,  and  for  an  offense 
committed  against  these  articles  he  may  be  tried  by  a  naval 
court-martial  after  such  detachment  ceases. 

(d)  All  retainers  to  the  camp  and  all  persons  accompanying 
or  serving  with  the  armies  of  the  United  States  without  the  ter- 
ritorial jurisdiction  of  the  United  States,  and  in  time  of  war  all 
such  retainers  and  persons  accompanying  or  serving  with  the 
armies  of  the  United  States  in  the  field,  both  within  and  without 
the  territorial  jurisdiction  of  the  United  States,  though  not 
otherwise  subject  to  these  articles. 

(e)  All  persons  under  sentence  adjudged  by  courts-martial. 
(/)  All  persons  admitted  into  the  Regular  Army   Soldiers' 

Home  at  Washington,  D.  C. 

ENLISTMENT    WITHOUT    DISCHARGE. 

Art.  29.  Any  soldier  who,  without  having  first  received  a  regu- 
lar discharge,  again  enlists  in  the  Army,  or  in  the  militia  when 
in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  or  in  the  Navy  or  Marine 
Corps  of  the  United  States,  or  in  any  foreign  army,  shall  be 
deemed  to  have  deserted  the  service  of  the  United  States ;  and, 
where  enlistment  is  in  one  of  the  forces  of  the  United  States 
mentioned  above,  to  have  fraudulently  enlisted  therein. 

FRAUDULENT  ENLISTMENT. 

Abt.  54.  Any  person  who  shall  procure  himself  to  be  enlisted 
in  the  military  service  of  the  United  States  by  means  of  willful 
misrepresentation  or  concealment  as  to  his  qualifications  for 
enlistment,  and  shall  receive  pay  or  allowances  under  such  enlist- 
ment, shall  be. punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

OFFICER  MAKING  UNLAWFUL  ENLISTMENT. 

Abt.  55.  Any  officer  who  knowingly  enlists  or  musters  into  the 
military  service  any  person  whose  enlistment  or  muster  in  Is 


302  LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

-prohibited  by  law,  regulations,  or  orders  shall  be  dismissed  from 
the  service  or  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-m.ivtial 
may  direct. 

MUSTER  ROLLS— FALSE   MUSTER. 

Aet.  56.  At  every  muster  of  a  regiment,  troop,  battery,  or 
company  the  commanding  officer  thereof  shall  give  to  the  muster- 
ing officer  certificates,  signed  by  himself,  stating  how  long 
absent  officers  have  been  absent  and  the  reasons  ot -.their  absence. 
And  the  commanding  officer  of  every  troop,  battery,  or  company 
shall  give  like  certificates,  stating  how  long  absent  noncommis- 
sioned officers  and  private  soldiers  have  been  absent  and  the 
reasons  of  their  absence.  Such  reasons  and  time  of  absence 
shall  be  inserted  in  the  muster  rolls  opposite  the  names*  of  the 
respective  absent  officers  and  soldiers,  and  the  certificates,  to- 
gether with  the  muster  rolls,  shall  be  transmitted  by  the  muster- 
ing officer  to  the  Department  of  War  as  speedily  as  the  distance 
of  the  place  and  muster  will  admit.  Any  officer  who  knowingly 
makes  a  false  muster  of  man  or  animal,  or  who  signs  or  directs 
or  allows  the  signing  of  any  muster  roll  knowing  the  same  to 
contain  false  muster  or  false  statement  as  to  the  absence  or 
pay  of  an  officer  or  soldier,  or  who  wrongfully  takes  money  or 
other  consideration  on  mustering  in  a  regiment,  company,  or 
other  organization,  or  on  signing  muster  rolls,  or  who  knowingly 
musters  as  an  officer  or  soldier  a  person  who  is  not  such  officer 
or  soldier,  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service  and  suffer  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

FALSE  RETURNS— OMISSION  TO  RENDER  RETURNS. 

Abt.  57.  Every  officer  commanding  a  regiment,  an  independent 
troop,  battery,  or  company,  or  a  garrison  shall,  in  the  beginning 
of  every  month,  transmit,  through  the  proper  channels,  to  the 
War  Department  an  exact  return  of  the  same,  specifying  the 
names  of  the  officers  then  absent  from  their  posts,  with  the 
reasons  for  and  the  time  of  their  absence.  Every  officer  whose 
duty  it  is  to  render  to  the  War  Department  or  other  superior 
authority  a  return  of  the  state  of  the  troops  under  his  com- 
mand, or  of  the  arms,  ammunition,  clothing,  funds,  or  other 
property  thereunto  belonging,  who  knowingly  makes  a  false  re- 
turn thereof  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service  and  suffer  such 
other   punishment   as   a   court-martial   may   direct.     And   any 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR,  308 

officer  who,  through  neglect  or  design,  omits  to  render  such 
return  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

DESERTION. 

Art.- 58.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  deserts  or 
attempts  to  desert  the  service  of  the  United  States  shall,  if  the 
offense  be  committed  in  time  of  war,  suffer  death  or  such  other 
punishment  asi  a  «ourt-martial  may  direct,  and,  if  the  offense  be 
committed  at  any  other  time,  any  punishment,  excepting  death, 
that  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

ADVISING  OR  AIDING  ANOTHER  TO  DESERT. 
Art.  59.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  advises  or 
persuades  or  knowingly  assists  another  to  desert  the  service  of 
the  United  States  shall,  if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of 
war,  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct,  and  if  the  offense  be  committed  at  any  other  time  any 
punishment,  excepting  death,  that  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

ENTERTAINING  A  DESERTER. 

Art.  60.  Any  officer  who,  after  having  discovered  that  a  soldier 
in  his  command  is  a  deserter  from  the  military  or  naval  service 
or  from  the  Marine  Corps,  retains  such  deserter  in  his  command 
without  informing  superior  authority,  or  the  commander  of  the 
organization  to  which  the  deserter  belongs,  shall  be  punished  as 
a  court-martial  may  direct. 

ABSENCE  WITHOUT  LEAVE. 

Art.  61.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  fails  to  repair 
at  the  fixed  time  to  the  properly  appointed  place  of  duty,  or 
goes  from  the  same  without  proper  leave,  or  absents  himself 
from  his  command,  guard,  quarters,  station,  or  camp  without 
proper  leave,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

DISRESPECT  TOWARD  THE  PRESIDENT,  VICE  PRESIDENT,   CON- 
GRESS,   SECRETARY    OF    WAR,    GOVERNORS,    LEGISLATURES.     " 

Art.  62.  Any  officer  who  uses  contemptuous  or  disrespectful 
words  against  the  President,  Vice  President,  the  Congress  of 
the  United  States,  the  Secretary  of  War,  or  the  governor  or 


304  LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

legislature  of  any  State,  Territory,  or  other  possession  of  the 
United  States  in  which  he  is  quartered  shall  be  dismissed  from 
the  service  or  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct.  Any  other  person  subject  to  military  law  who  so 
offends  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

DISRESPECT    TOWARD    SUPERIOR    OFFICERS. 

Art.  63.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  behaves  him- 
self with  disrespect  toward  his  superior  officer  shall  be  punished 
as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

ASSAULTING  OR  WILLFULLY   DISOBEYING   SUPERIOR   OFFICER. 

Art.  64.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who,  on  any  pre- 
tense whatsoever,  strikes  his  superior  officer  or  draws  or  lifts 
up  any  weapon  or  offers  any  violence  against  him,  being  in  the 
execution  of  his  office,  or  willfully  disobeys  any  lawful  com- 
mand Df  his  superior  officer,  shall  suffer  death  or  such  other 
punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

INSUBORDINATE     CONDUCT     TOWARD     NONCOMMISSIONED 
OFFICER. 

Art.  65.  Any  soldier  who  strikes  or  assaults,  or  who  attempts 
ur  threatens  to  strike  or  assault,  or  willfully  disobeys  the  lawful 
order  of  a  noncommissioned  officer  while  in  the  execution  of  his 
office,  or  uses  threatening  or  insulting  language,  or  behaves  in 
an  insubordinate  or  disrespectful  manner  toward  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer  while  in  the  execution  of  his  office,  shall  be  pun- 
ished as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

MUTINY  OR  SEDITION. 

Art.  66.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  attempts  to 
create  or  who  begins,  excites,  causes,  or  joins  in  any  mutiny  or 
sedition  in  any  company,  party,  post,  camp,  detachment,  guard, 
or  other  command  shall  suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment 
as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 


EXTRACTS  PROM  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR.  806 

FAILURE   TO    SUPPRESS   MUTINY   OR   SEDITION. 

Aet.  67.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who,  being  present  at  any 
nutiny  or  sedition,  does  not  use  his  utmost  endeavor  to  suppress 
tie  same,  or  knowing  or  having  reason  to  believe  that  a  mutiny 
or  sedition  is  to  take  place,  does  not  without  delay  give  in- 
formation thereof  to  his  commanding  officer  shall  suffer  death 
or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

QUARRELS,   FRAYS,  DISORDERS. 

,  Aet.  68.  All  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  have  power 
to  part  and  quell  all  quarrels,  frays,  and  disorders  among  per- 
sons subject  to  military  law  and  to  order  officers  who  take  part 
in  the  same  into  arrest,  and  other  persons  subject  to  military 
law  who  take  part  In  the  same  into  aTrest  or  confinement,  as 
circumstances  may  require,  until  their  proper  superibr  officer 
is  acquainted  therewith.  And  whosoever,  being  so  ordered,  re- 
fuses to  obey  such  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  or  draws  a 
weapon  upon  or  otherwise  threatens  or  does  violence  to  him  shall 
be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

ARREST  QR  CONFINEMENT  OF  ACCUSED  PERSONS. 

Abt.  69.  An  officer  charged  with  crime  or  with  a  serious  offense 
under  these  articles  shall  be  placed  in  arrest  by  the  command- 
ing officer,  and  in  exceptional  cases  an  officer  so  charged  may 
be  placed  in  confinement  by  the  same  authority.  A  soldier' 
charged  with  crime  or  with  a  serious  offense  under  these  articles 
shall  be  placed  in  confinement,  and  when  charged  with  a  minor 
offense  he  may  be  placed  in  arrest.  Any  other  person  subject 
to  military  law  charged  with,  crime  or  with  a  serious  offense 
under  these  articles  shall  be  placed  in. confinement  or  in  arrest, 
as  circumstances  may  require;  and  when  charged  with  a  minor 
offense  such  person  may  be  placed  in  arrest.  Any  person  placed 
in*  arrest  under  the  provisions  of  this  article  shall  thereby  be 
restricted  to  his  barracks,  quarters,  or  tent,  unless  such  limits 
shall  be  enlarged  by  proper  authority.  Any  officer  who  breaks 
his  arrest  or  who  escapes  from  confinement  before  he  is  set  at 
liberty  by  proper  authority  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service 


306  LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

or  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct ' 
and  any  other  person  subject  to  military  law  who  escapes  from 
confinement  or  who  breaks  his  arrest  before  he  is  set  at  libert7 
by  proper  authority  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

INVESTIGATION   OF   AND  ACTION   XTPON  CHARGES. 

Art.  70.  No  person  put  in  arrest  shall  be  continued  in  con- 
finement more  than  eight  days,  or  until  such  time  as  a  court- 
martial  can  be  assembled.  When  any  person  is  put  in  arrest 
for  the  purpose  of  trial,  except  at  remote  military  posts  or 
stations,  the  officer  by  whose  order  he  is  arrested  shall  see  that 
a  copy  of  the  charges  on  which  he  is  to  be  tried  is  served  upon 
him  within  eight  days  after  his  arrest,  and  that  he  is  brought 
to  trial  within  10  days  thereafter,  unless  the  necessities  of  the 
service  prevent  such  trial ;  and  then  he  shall  be  brought  to  trial 
within  30  days  after  the  expiration  of  said  10  days.  If  a  copy 
of  the  charges  be  not  served,  or  the  arrested  person  be  not 
brought  to  trial,  as  herein  required,  the  arrest  shall  cease.  But 
poisons  released  from  arrest,  under  the  provisions  of  this  ar- 
ticle, may  be  tried,  whenever  the  exigencies  of  the  service  shall 
permit,  within  12  months  after  such  release  from  arrest:  Pro- 
vided, That  in  time  of  peace  no  person  shall,  against  his  objec- 
tion, be  brought  to  trial  before  a  general  court-martial  within 
a  period  of  five  days  subsequent  to  the  service  of  charges  upon 
him. 

REFUSAL  TO  RECEIVE  AND  KEEP  PRISONERS. 

Art.  71.  No  provost  marshal  or  commander  of  a  guard  shall 
refuse  to  receive  or  keep  any  prisoner  committed  to  his  charge 
by  an  officer  belonging  to  the  forces  of  the  United  States,  pro- 
vided the  officer  committing  shall,  at  the  time,  deliver  an 
account  in  writing,  signed  by  himself,  of  the  crime  or  offense 
charged  against  the  prisoner.  Any  officer  or  soldier  so  refus- 
ing shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

REPORT    OF    PRISONERS    RECEIVED. 

Art.  72.  Every  commander  of  a  guard  to  whose  charge  a 
prisoner  is  committed  shahV  within  24  hours  after  such  con- 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR.  307 

finement,  or  as  soon  as  he  is  relieved  from  his  guard,  report  in 
writing  to  the  commanding  officer  the  name  of  such  prisoner, 
the  offense  charged  against  him,  and  the  name  of  the  officer 
committing  him;  and  if  he  fails  to  make  such  report  he  shall 
be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

RELEASING    PRISONER    "WITHOUT    PROPER    AUTHORITY. 

Art.  73.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who,  without 
proper  authority,  releases  any  prisoner  duly  committed  to  his 
charge,  or  who,  through  neglect  or  design,  suffers  any  prisoner 
so  committed  to  escape,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct. 

DELIVERY    OF    OFFENDERS    TO    CIVIL    AUTHORITIES. 

AiiT.  74.  When  any  person  subject  to  military  law,  except 
one  who  is  held  by  the  military  authorities  to  answer,  or  who 
is  awaiting  trial  or  result  of  trial,  or  who  is  undergoing  sen- 
tence for  a  crime  or  offense  punishable  under  these  articles,  is 
accused  of  a  crime  or  offense  committed  within  the  geographical 
limits  of  the  States  of  the  Union  and  the  District  of  Columbia, 
and  punishable  by  the  laws  of  the  land,  the  commanding  officer 
is  required,  except  in  time  of  war,  upon  application  duly  made, 
to  use  his  utmost  endeavor  to  deliver  over  such  accused  person 
to  the  civil  authorities,  or  to  aid  the  officers  of  justice  in  ap- 
prehending and  securing  him,  in  order  that  he  may  be  brought 
to  trial.  Any  commanding  officer  who  upon  such  application 
refuses  or  willfully  neglects,  except  in  time  of  war,  to  deliver 
over  such  accused  person  to  the  civil  authorities  or  to  aid  the 
officers  of  justice  in  apprehending  and  securing  him  shall  bo 
dismissed  from  the  service  or  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

When  under  the  provisions  of  this  article  delivery  is  made  to 
the  civil  authorities  of  an  offender  undergoing  sentence  of  a 
court-martial,  such  delivery,  if  followed  by  conviction,  shall  be 
held  to  interrupt  the  execution  of  the  sentence  of  the  court-mar- 
tial, and  the  offender  shall  be  returned  to  military  custody,  after 
having  answered  to  the  civil  authorities  for  his  offense,  for  the 
completion  of  the  said  court-martial  sentence. 


308  LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

MISBEHAVIOR    BEFORE    THE    ENEMY. 

Abt.  75.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  misbehaves  himself  before 
the  enemy,  runs  away,  or  shamefully  abandons  or  delivers  up 
any  fort,  post,  camp,  guard,  or  other  command  which  it  is  his 
duly  to  defend,  or  speaks  words  inducing  others  to  do  the  like, 
or  casts  away  his  arms  or  ammunition,  or  quits  his  post  or 
colors  to  plunder  or  pillage,  or  by  any  means  whatsoever  occa- 
sions false  alarms  in  camp,  garrison,  or  quarters,  shall  suffer 
death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

SUBORDINATES     COMPELLING     COMMANDER     TO     SURRENDER. 

Art.  76.  If  any  commander  of  any  garrison,  fort,  post,  camp, 
guard,  or  other  command  is  compelled  by  the  officers  or  soldiers 
under  his  command  to  give.it  up  to  the  enemy  or  to  abandon  it, 
the  officers  or  soldiers  so  offending  shall  suffer  death  or  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

IMPROPER  USE  OF  COUNTERSIGN. 

Art.  77.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  makes  known 
the  parole  or  countersign  to  any  person  not  entitled  to  receive  it 
according  to  the  rules  and  discipline  of  war,  or  gives  a  parole 
or  countersign  different  from  that  which  he  received,  shall,  if 
the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of  war,  suffer  death  or  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

FORCING  A  SAFEGUARD. 

Am.  78.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who,  in  time  of 
war,  forces  a  safeguard  shall  suffer  death  or  such  other  punish- 
ment as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

CAPTURED  PROPERTY  TO  BE  SECURED  FOR  PUBLIC  8ERVICE. 

Art.  79.  All  public  property  taken  from  the  enemy  is  the 
property  of  the  United  States  and  shall  be  secured  for  the 
service  of  the  United  States,  and  any  person  subject  to  mili- 
tary law  who  neglects  to  secure  such  property  or  is  guilty  of 
wrongful  appropriation  thereof  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR.  309 

DEALING   IN    CAPTURED    OK    ABANDONED    PROPERTY. 

Art.  80.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  buys,  sells, 
trades,  or  in  any  way  deals  in  or  disposes  of  captured  or  aban- 
doned property,  whereby  he  shall  receive  or  expect  any  profit, 
benefit,  or  advantage  to  himself  or  to  any  other  person  directly 
or  indirectly  connected  with  himself,  or  who  fails  whenever  such 
property  comes  into  his  possession  or  custody  or  within  his  con- 
trol to  give  notice  thereof  to  the  proper  authority  and  to  turn 
over  such  property  to  the  proper  authority  without  delay,  shall, 
on  conviction  thereof,  be  punished  by  fine  or  imprisonment,  or 
by  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial,  military  commis- 
sion, or  other  military  tribunal  may  adjudge,  or  by  any  or  all 
of  said  penalties. 

RELIEVING,    CORRESPONDING   WITH,    OR   AIDING    THE    ENEMY. 

Art.  81.  Whosoever  relieves  the  enemy  with  arms,  ammuni- 
tion, supplies,  money,  or  other  thing,  or  knowingly  harbors  or 
protects  or  holdte  correspondence  with  or  gives  intelligence  to 
the  enemy,  either  directly  or  indirectly,  shall  suffer  death,  or 
such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  or  military  commis- 
sion may  direct. 

SPIES. 

Art.  82.  Any  person  who  in  time  of  war  shall  be  found  lurk- 
ing or  acting  as  a  spy  in  or  about  any  of  the  fortifications, 
posts,  quarters,  or  encampments  of  any  of  the  armies  of  the 
United  States,  or  elsewhere,  shall  be  tried  by  a  general  court- 
martial  or  by  a  military  commission,  and  shall,  on  conviction 
thereof,  suffer  death. 

MILITARY     PROPERTY— WILLFUL     OR     NEGLIGENT     LOSS. 
DAMAGE,    OR    WRONGFUL    DISPOSITION    OF. 

Art.  83.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  willfully  or 
through  neglect  suffers  to  be  lost,  spoiled,  damaged,  or  wrong- 
fully disposed  of  any  military  property  belonging  to  the  United 
States  shall  make  good  the  loss  or  damage  and  suffer  such  pun- 
ishment as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 


310  LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

WASTE   OR  UNLAWFUL  DISPOSITION   OF  MILITARY  PROPERTY 
ISSUED   TO   SOLDIERS. 

Art.  84.  Any  soldier  who  sells  or  wrongfully  disposes  of  or 
willfully  or  through  neglect  injures  or  loses  any  horse,  arms, 
ammunition,  accouterments,  equipments,  clothing,  or  other 
property  issued  for  use  in  the  military  service  shall  be  punished 
as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

DRUNK   ON   DUTY. 

Art.  85.  Any  officer  who  is  found  drunk  on  duty  shall,  if  the 
offense  be  committed  in  time  of  war,  be  dismissed  from  the 
service  and  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct ;  and  if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of  peace  he 
shall  be.  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct.  Any  person 
subject  to  military  law,  except  an  officer,  who  is  found  drunk  on 
duty  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

MISBEHAVIOR   OF   SENTINEL. 

Art.  86.  Any  sentinel  who  is  found  drunk  or  sleeping  upon 
his  post,  or  who  leaves  it  before  he  is  regularly  relieved,  shall, 
if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of  war,  suffer  death  or  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct;  and  if  the 
offense  be  committed  in  time  of  peace  he  shall  suffer  any  pun- 
ishment, except  death,  that  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

PERSONAL  INTEREST  IN  SALE  OF  PROVISIONS. 

Art.  87.  Any  officer  commanding  in  any  garrison,  fort,  barracks, 
camp,  or  other  place  where  troops  of  the  United  States  may  be 
serving  who,  for  his  private  advantage,  lays  any  duty  or  impo- 
sition upon  or  is  interested  in  the  sale  of  any  victuals  or  other 
necessaries  of  life  brought  into  such  garrison,  fort,  barracks, 
camp,  or  other  place  for  the  use  of  the  troops,  shall  be  dismissed 
from  the  service  and  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

INTIMIDATION    OF    PERSONS    BRINGING    PROVISIONS. 

Art.  88.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  abuses,  in- 
timidates, does  violence  to,  or  wrongfully  interferes  with  any 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR.  311 

>ersou  bringing  provisions,  supplies,  or  other  necessaries  to  the 
amp,  garrison,  or  quarters  of  the  forces  of  the  United  States 
hall  suffer  such  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct.. 

K)OD    OBDEB   TO    BE    MAINTAINED    AND    WRONGS    REDEESSED. 

Abt.  89.  All  persons  subject  to  military  law  are  to  behave 
hemselves  orderly  in  quarters,  garrison,  camp,  and  on  the 
narch;  and  any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  commits 
iny  waste  or  spoil,  or  willfully  destroys  any  property  whatso- 
jver  (unless  by  order  of  his  commanding  officer),  or  commits 
my  kind  of  depredation  Or  riot,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
nartial  may  direct.  Any  commanding  officer  who,  upon  com- 
)laint  made  to  him,  refuses  or  omits  to  see  reparation  made  to 
.he  party  injured,  in  so  far  as  the  offender's  pay  shall  go  toward 
;uch  reparation,  as  provided  for  in  article  105,  shall  be  tlls- 
nissed  from  the  service  or  otherwise  punished  as  a  court- 
nartial  may  direct. 

PROVOKING  SPEECHES  OE  GESTTJBES. 

Abt.  90.  No  person  subject  to  military  law  shall  use  any  re- 
proachful or  provoking  speeches  or  gestures  to  another ;  and  any 
person  subject  to  military  law  who  offends  against  the  pro- 
visions of  this  article  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may 
lirect. 

DUELING. 

Abt.  91.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  fights  or 
promotes  or  is  concerned  in  or  connives  at  fighting  a  duel,  or 
ivho  having  knowledge  of  a  challenge  sent  or  about  to  be  sent 
fails  to  report  the  fact  promptly  to  the  proper  authority,  shall, 
iif  an  officer,  be  dismissed  from  the  service  or  suffer  such  other 
LDunishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct;  and  if  any  other 
person  subject  to  military  law  shall  suffer  such  punishment  as 
ii  court-martial  may  direct. 

MUBDEB— BAPE. 

Art.  92.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  commits 
murder  or  rape  shall  suffer  death  or  imprisonment  for  life,  as 


812  LAWS  AND  BEGuTATIONS. 

a  court-martial  may  direct;  but  no  person  shall  be  tried  by 
court-martial  for  murder  or  rape  committed  within  the  geo- 
graphical limits  of  the  States  of  the  Union  and  the  District 
of  Columbia  in  time  of  peace. 

VARIOUS   CRIMES. 

Abt.  93.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  commits 
manslaughter,  mayhem,  arson,  burglary,  robbery,  larceny,  em- 
bezzlement, perjury,  assault  with  intent  to  commit  any  felony, 
or  assault  with  intent  to  do  bodily  harm,  shall  be  punished  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

FRAUDS  AGAINST  THE  GOVERNMENT. 

Art.  94.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  makes  or 
causes  to  be  made  any  claim  against  the  United  States  or  any 
officer  thereof,  knowing  such  claim  to  be  false  or  fraudulent ;  or 

Who  presents  or  causes  to  be  presented  to  any  person  in  the 
civil  or  military  service  thereof,  for  approval  or  payment,  any 
claim  against  the  United  States  or  any  officer  thereof,  knowing 
such  claim  to  be  false  or  fraudulent ;  or 

Who  enters  into  any  agreement  or  conspiracy  to  defraud  the 
United  States  by  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  obtain,  the  allow- 
ance or  payment  of  any  false  or  fraudulent  claim ;  or 

Who,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  obtain, 
the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any  claim  against  the 
United  States  or  against  any  officer  thereof,  makes  or  uses,  or 
procures,  or  advises  the  making  or  use  of,  any  writing  or  other 
paper,  knowing  the  same  to  contain  any  false  or  fraudulent 
statements;  or 

Who,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  obtain, 
the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any  claim  against  the 
United  States  or  any  officer  thereof,  makes,  or  procures,  or 
advises  the  making  of,  any  oath  to  any  fact  or  to  any  writing  or 
other  paper,  knowing  such  oath  to  be  false ;  or 

Who,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  obtain, 
the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any  claim  against  the 
United  States  or  any  officer  thereof,  forges  or  counterfeits,  or 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR.  318 

procures,  or  advises  the  forging  or  counterfeiting  of  any  signa- 
ture upon  any  writing  or  other  paper,  or  uses,  or  procures,  or 
advises  the  use  of  any  such  signature,  knowing  the  same  to  be 
forged  or  counterfeited ;  or 

Who,  having  charge,  possession,  custody,  or  control  of  any 
money  or  other  property  of  the  United  States,  furnished  or 
intended  for  the  military  service  thereof ,•  knowingly  delivers,  or 
causes  to  be  delivered,  to  any  person  having  authority  to  receive 
the  same,  any  amount  thereof  less  than  that  for  which  he 
receives  a  certificate  or  receipt ;  or 

Who,  being  authorized  to  make  or  deliver  any  paper  certi- 
fying the  receipt  of  any  property  of  the  United  States  furnished 
or  intended  for  the  military  service  thereof,  makes  or  delivers 
to  any  person  such  writing,  without  having  full  knowledge  of 
the  truth  of  the  statements  therein  contained  and  with  intent* 
to  defraud  the  United  States ;  or 

Who  steals,  embezzles,  knowingly  and  willfully  misappropri- 
ates, applies  to  his  own  use  or  benefit,  or  wrongfully  or  know- 
ingly sells  or  disposes  of  any  ordnance,  arms,  equipments,  am- 
munition, clothing,  subsistence  stores,  money,  or  other  property 
of  the  United  States  furnished  or  intended  for.  the  military 
service  thereof;  or 

Who  knowingly  purchases  or  receives  in  pledge  for  any  ob- 
ligation or  indebtedness  from  any  soldier,  officer,  or  other  per- 
son who  is  a  part  of  or  employed  in  said  forces  or  service,  any 
ordnance,  arms,  equipment,  ammunition,  clothing,  subsistence 
stores,  or  other  property  of  the  United  States,  such  soldier, 
officer,  or  other  person  not  having  lawful  right  to  sell  or  pledge 
the  same; 

Shall,  on  conviction  thereof,  be  punished  by  fine  or  impris- 
onment, or  by  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may 
!  adjudge,  or  by  any  or  all  of  said  penalties.  And  if  any  person, 
being  guilty  of  any  of  the  offenses  aforesaid  while  in  the  mili- 
tary service  of  the  United  States,  receives  his  discharge  or  is 
dismissed  from  the  service,  he  shall  continue  to  be  liable  to  be 
arrested  and  held  for  trial  and  sentence  by  a  court-martial  in 
the  same  manner  and  to  the  same  extent  as  if  he  had  not  re- 
ceived such  discharge  nor  been  dismissed. 


314  IAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

CONDUCT    UNBECOMING    AN    OFFICER    AND    GENTLEMAN. 

Art.  95.  Any  officer  or  cadet  who  is  convicted  of  conduct 
unbecoming  an  officer  and  a  gentleman  shall  be  dismissed  from 
the  service. 

GENEEAL  ARTICLE. 

Art.  9G.  Though  not  mentioned  in  these  articles,  all  disorders 
and  neglects  to  the  prejudice  of  good  order  and  military  dis 
cipline,  all  conduct  of  a  nature  to  bring  discredit  upon  the 
military  service,  and  all  crimes  or  offenses  not  capital  of  which 
persons  subject  to  military  law  may  be  guilty  shall  be  taken 
cognizance  of  by  a  general  or  special  or  summary  court-martial 
according  to  the  nature  and  degree  of  the  offense,  and  punished 
at  the  discretion  of  such  court. 

DISCIPLINARY  POWERS  OF  COMMANDING  OFFICERS. 

Art.  104.  Under  such  regulations  as  the  President  may  pre- 
scribe, and  whicli  he  may  from  time  to  time  revoke,  alter,  or]  i 
add  to,  the  commanding  officer  of  any  detachment,  company 
or  higher  command  may,  for  minor  offenses  not  denied  by  the 
accused,  impose  disciplinary  punishments  upon  persons  of  his  ] 
command  without  the  intervention  of  a  court-martial,  unless  the) 
accused  demands  trial  by  court-martial. 

The  disciplinary  punishments  authorized  by  this  article  may 
include  admonition,  reprimand,  withholding  of  privileges,  extra 
fatigue,   find   restriction  to  certain  specified  limits,   but  shall 
not  include  forfeiture  of  pay  or  confinement  under  guard.     A 
person  punished  under  authority  of  this  article  who  deems  his 
punishment   unjust    or    disproportionate    to    the    offense    may 
through  the  proper  channel,  appeal  to  the  next  superior  au 
thority,  but  may  in  the  meantime  be  required  to  undergo  the 
punishment  adjudged.    The  commanding  officer  who  'imposes  tht 
punishment,  his  successor  in  command,  and  superior  authority 
shall  have  power  to  mitigate  or  remit  any  unexecuted  portior 
of  the  punishment.     The  imposition  and  enforcement  of  dis  $ 
iplinary  punishment  under  authority  of  this  article  for  any  acl  T 
or  omission  shall  not  be  a  bar  to  trial  by  court-martial  for  t  • 
crime  or  offense  growing  out  of  the  same  act  or  omission ;  bu1 1 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR.  315 

the  fact  that  a  disciplinary  punishment  has  been  enforced  may 
be  shown  by  the  accused  upon  trial,  and  when  so  shown  shall  be 
considered  in  determining  the  measure  of  punishment  to  be 
adjudged  in  the  event  of  a  finding  of  guilty. 

REDRESS  OF  INJURIES   TO   PERSON   OR  PROPERTY. 

»?*  Art.  105.  Whenever  'complaint  Is  made  to  any  commanding 
officer  that  damage  has  been  done  to  the  property  of  any  person 
or  that  his  property  has  been  wrongfully,  taken  by  persons  sub- 
ject to  military  law,  such  complaint  shall  be  investigated  by  a 
board  consisting  of  any  number  of  officers  from  one  to  three, 
which  board  shall  be  convened  by  the  commanding  officer  and 
shall  have,  for  the  purpose  of  such  investigation,  power  to 
summon  witnesses  and  examine  them  upon  oath  or  affirmation, 
to  receive  depositions  or  other  documentary  evidence,  and  to 
assess  the  damages  sustained  against  the  responsible  parties. 
The  assessment  of  damages  made  by  such  board  shall  be  subject 
to  the  approval  of  the  commanding  officer,  and  in  the  amount 
approved  by  him  shall  be  stopped  against  the  pay  of  the  offend- 
ers. And  the  order  of  such  commanding  officer  directing  stop- 
pages herein  authorized  shall  be  conclusive  on  any  disbursing 
officer  for  the  payment  by  him  to  the  injured  parties  of  the 
stoppages  so  ordered. 

Where  the  offenders  can  not  be  ascertained  but  the  organiza- 
tion or  detachment  to  which  they  belong  is  known,  stoppages 
to  the  amount  of  damages  inflicted  may  be  made  and  assessed  in 
such  proportion  as  may  be  deemed  just  upon  the  individual 
members  thereof  who  are  shown  to  have  been  present  with  such 
organization  or  detachment  at  the  time  the  damages  complained 
of  were  inflicted,  as  determined  by  the  approved  findings  of  the 
board. 

ARREST  OF  DESERTERS  BY  CIVIL  OFFICIALS. 

Art.  106.  It  shall  be  lawful  for  any  civil  officer  having  au- 
thority under  the  laws  of  the  United  States,  or  of  any  State, 
Territory,  District,  or  possession  of  the  United  States,  to  arrest 
offenders,  summarily  to  arrest  a  deserter  from  the  military  serv- 
ice of  the  United  States  and  deliver  him  into  the  custody  of  the 
military  authorities  of  the  United  States. 


316  LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS. 

SOLDIERS   TO   MAKE   GOOD   TIME   LOST. 

Art.  107.  Every  soldier  who  in  an  existing  or  subsequent  en- 
listment deserts  the  service  of  the  United  States  or  without 
proper  authority  absents  himself  from  his  organization,  station, 
or  duty  for  more  than  one  day,  or  who  is  confined  for  more  than 
one  day  under  sentence,  or  while  awaiting  trial  and  disposition 
of  his  case,  if  the  trial  results  in  conviction,  or  through  the  in- 
temperate use  of  drugs  or  alcoholic  liquor,  or  through  disease 
or  injury  the  result  of  his  own  misconduct,  renders  himself  un- 
able for' more  than  one  day  to  perform  duty,  shall  be  liable  to 
serve,  after  his  return  to  a  full-duty  status,  for  such  period  as 
shall,  with  the  time  he  may  have  served  prior  to  such  desertion, 
unauthorized  absence,  confinement,  or  inability  to  perform  duty, 
amount  to  the  full  term  of  that  part  of  his  enlistment  period 
which  he  is  required  to  serve  with  his  organization  before  being 
furloughed  to  the  Army  Reserve. 

SOLDIERS— SEPARATION    FROM    THE    SERVICE. 

Art.  10S.  Xo  enlisted  man,  lawfully  inducted  into  the  military 
service  of  the  United  States,  shall  be  discharged  from  said  serv- 
ice without  a  certificate  of  discharge,  signed  by  a  field  officer  of 
the  regiment  or  other  organization  to  which  the  enlisted  man 
belongs  or  by  the  commanding  officer  when  no  such  field  officer  is 
present ;  and  no  enlisted  man  shall  be  discharged  from  said 
service  before  his  term  of  service  has  expired,  except  by  order 
of  the  President,  the  Secretary  of  War,  the  commanding  officer 
of  a  department,  or  by  sentence  of  a  general  court-martial. 

OATH   OF  ENLISTMENT. 

Art.  109.  At  the  time  of  his  enlistment  every  soldier  shall  take 

the  following  oath  or  affirmation  :  "  I, ,  do  solemnly  swear 

(or  affirm)  that  I  will  bear  true  faith  and  allegiance  to  the 
United  States  of  America ;  that  I  will  serve  them  honestly  and 
faithfully  against  all  their  enemies  whomsoever ;  and  that  I  will 
obey  the  orders  of  the  President  of  the  United  States  and  the 
orders  of  the  officers  appointed  over  me,  according  to  the  Rules 
and  Articles  of  War."  This  oath  or  affirmation  may  be  taken 
before  any  officer, 


CHAPTER  XV. 
ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

COMMON    WORDS. 

Afternoon  (this) Cet  apres-midi. 

Army  (an) Une  arrnee. 

Bandage Un  bandage. 

Bath Un  bain. 

Bayonet Une  ba'ionnette. 

Bed Un  lit. 

Blanket Une  couverture. 

Bov Un  garcon. 

Bullet Uneballe. 

Un  pruneau  (soldier  slang). 
Camp Un  camp. 

Un  campement. 

Cartridge Une  cartouche. 

Child Un  enfant. 

Une  enfant. 
Cook Un  cuisinier. 

Un  cuistot  (slang). 

Une  cuisiniere  (Tem.). 
Dance Un  bal. 

Une  danse  (one  dance). 

Dark Obscur. 

Day Un  jour. 

Dead Mort. 

Deserter Un  deserteur. 

Door Une  porte. 

Farm Une  ferine. 

Firearms Des  armes  a  feu. 

Field  gun Une  piece  de  campagne. 

Flag Un  drapeau. 

Un  etendard  (standard). 

317 


318  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

Forest Une  foret. 

Un  bois  (woods). 

Un  boqueteau  (clump  of  trees). 
Friend Un  ami. 

Une  amie. 

( ) irl Une  jeune  fille. 

Guide Un  guide. 

Gun Un  fusil. 

Halt! Halte! 

Hand Une  main. 

Hat Un  chapeau. 

Un  kepi  (cap). 

Un  casque  (helmet). 

Un  feutre  (campaign  hat). 

Head La  tete. 

Headquarters Le  quartier-general. 

Horse Un  cheval. 

Interpreter Un  interprete. 

Knife Un  couteau. 

Lake Un  lac. 

Man Un  homme. 

Moat De  la  viande. 

Name Un  nom. 

Night La  nuit. 

Noon Midi. 

Machine  gun Une  mitrailleuse. 

Mess  call La  soupe. 

Password Le  mot  de  passe. 

Pay Le  pret  (enlisted  men). 

La  solde  (officers). 

Prisoner Un  prisonnier. 

Recruit Une  recrue. 

Un  bleu  (slang). 

Un  bleuet  (slang). 

Un  blanc-bec  (slang). 
Restaurant Un  restaurant . 

Un  cafe. 
Road Un  chemin. 

Une  route. 
Retreat La  retraite. 


XTTMEBALS.  319 

Reveille Le  reveil. 

La  diane. 

Saber Un  sabre. 

Saddle Une  selle. 

Shoe Des  chaussures  (shoes  in  general). 

Des  souliers  (low  shoes). 

Des  bottines  (high  shoes). 

Des  brodequins  (marching  shoes). 

Shotgun Un  fusil  de  chasse. 

Sick Malade. 

Soup Une  soupe. 

Un  potage. 

Spy Un  espion . 

Supper Le  souper. 

Sword Une  £pee. 

Tent Une  tente. 

Shelter  tent Une  tente-abri. 

NUMERALS. 

One Un,  une. 

Two Deux. 

Three Trois. 

Four Quatre. 

Five Cinq  (pronounce  sank). 

Six Six  (pronounce  cease). 

Seven Sept  (pronounce  set). 

Eight Huit  (pronounce  wect) . 

Nine Neuf . 

Ten Dix  (pronounce  detss). 

Eleven Onze. 

Twelve Douze. 

Thirteen Treize. 

Fourteen Quatorze. 

Fifteen Quinze. 

Sixteen Seize. 

Seventeen Dix-sept. 

Eighteen Dix-huit. 

Nineteen Dix-neuf . 

Twenty Vingt  (pronounce  vant.) 

Twenty-one Vingt-et-un. 


320  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

Thirty Trente. 

Thirty-one Trente-et-un. 

Thirty-two Trente-deux. 

Forty Quarante. 

Fifty Cinquante. 

Sixty Soixante. 

Seventy Soixante-dix. 

Seventy-one Soixante-et-onze. 

Seventy-two Soixante-douze. 

Eighty Quatre-vingts. 

Eighty-one Quatre-vingt-un. 

Ninety Quatre-vingt-dix. 

Ninety-one Quatre-vingt-onze. 

One  hundred Gent. 

One  hundred  and  one Cent  un. 

Two  hundred Deux  cents. 

Two  hundred  and  one Deux  cent  un. 

One  thousand Mille. 

Two  thousand Deux  mille. 

One  thousand  one  hundred Mille  cent;  onze  cents. 

Thousands  of  soldiers Des  milliers  de  soldats. 

A  million Un  million. 

Two  million  men Deux  millions  d'hommes. 

A  score Une  vingtaine. 

About  forty  men Une  quarantaine  d'hommes. 

Hundreds  of  men Des  centaines  d'hommes. 

CURRENCY,  MEASURES,  AND  WEIGHTS. 

1  cent Un  sou;  cinq  centimes. 

10  cents Dix  sous;  cinquante  centimes. 

20  cents  (about) Un  francs. 

1  dollar Cinq  francs. 

(The  French  have  gold  pieces  of  10  francs  and  20  francs;  bank  notes 
of  50  francs,  100  francs,  and  higher..  The  gold  pieces  are  probably 
replaced  by  bank  notes  now.) 

1  meter  (1.093G  yards).. Un  metre. 

1  kilometer  (0.62138  mile).... Un  kilometre. 

Note. — For  all  ordinary  purposes,  the  "  kilometre  "=§  of  a  mile;  the 
'•  centimetre  "==A  of  an  inch. 


DAYS,  MONTHS,  AND  SEASONS.  321 

1  league  (2.48552  miles) Une  lieue. 

1  hectare  (2.4711  acres) Un  hectare. 

1  gram  (15.43239  grains  Troy) .  . . .  Un  gramme. 
]  kilogram  (2.204621  pounds  avoir- 
dupois)   Un  kilogramme. 

220.46  pounds  avoirdupois Un  quintal;  100  kilos. 

2.204.6  pounds  avoirdupois Unc  tonne;  1.000  kilos. 

(Coal  is  sold  by  the  tonne;  grain  and  hay  by  the  quintal.     Dix 
quintaux  de  ble,  de  foin=10  quintals  of  gram,  of  hay.) 

1.0567  quart  (liquid) Un  litre. 

26.417  gallons Un  hectolitre. 

0.9081  quart  (dry) Un  litre. 

2.8379  bushels Un  hectolitre. 

(The  litre,  which  is  the  principal  unit  of  both  fluid  and  dry  meas- 
ures, is  the  contents  of  1  cubic  decimetre  (decimetre —^  metre).) 

DAYS,  MONTHS,  AND    SEASONS. 

Sunday Dimanche. 

Monday. Lundi . 

Tuesday Mardi. 

Wednesday Mercredi. 

Thursday Jeudi. 

Friday Vendredi. 

Saturday. . . : Samedi . 

January Janvier. 

February Fevrier. 

March Mars. 

April Avril. 

May Mai. 

June Juin. 

July < Juillet. 

August Aotit  (pronounce  oo). 

September Septembre. 

October Octobre. 

November Novembre. 

December Decembre. 

The  seasons Les  saisons. 

Winter L'hiver. 


322  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

Spring Le  printemps. 

Summer I/ete. 

Fall L'autoinne. 

Year Un  an;  une  annee. 

Month Un  rnois. 

Week Une  semaine. 

Day ' Un  jour. 

Hour Une  heure. 

Minute Une  minute. 

Second Une  seconde. 

COMMON    PHRASES. 

Good  morning,  sir,  madam,  miss.  \Bon jour,    monsieur,    madame, 

Good  afternoon \ j     mademoiselle. 

Good  evening,  sir Bonsoir,  monsieur. 

Good  night,  sir Bonne  nuit,  monsieur. 

Pardon  rne Pardon ;  je  vous  demande  pardon. 

Don't  mention  it Je  vous  en  prie. 

How  do  you  do? Comment  allez-vous? 

Comment  ca  va? 

Comment  vous  portez-vous? 
Very  well,  thank  you Tres  bien,  merci. 

Je  vais  bien,  merci. 

£Ja  va  bien,  merci. 

Je  me  porte  bien,  merci. 
Do  not  trouble  yourself Ne  vous  genez  pae. 

Ne  vous  derangez  pas. 
I  am  very  glad  to  see  you Je  suis  bien  aise  de  vous  voir. 

Je  suis  content  (heureux)  de  vous 
voir. 

What  time  is  it? Quelle  heure  est-il? 

It  is  10  o'clock II  est  dix  hemes. 

Take  care ;  look  out Prenez  garde. 

Do  not  bother  me Ne  me  derangez  pas. 

Stop  here Arretez-vous  ici. 

Does  Mr.  —  live  here? M.  —  demeure-t-il  ici? 

Come  in Entrez. 

You  are  very  kind Vous  6tes  tres  aimable. 


COMMON  PHEASES.  323 

At  what  time  does  the  first  train  A  quelle  heure  part  le  premier 

start?  train? 

Whatis  the  name  of  this  station?.  .Coment    s'appelle    cette    station 

(gare)? 

I  want Je  desire. . Je  veux  (stronger). 

I  do  not  want  it Je  n'en  veux  pas. 

Let  me  know  what  I  owe  you Dites-moi  ce  que  je  vous  dois. 

Are  you  not  mistaken? Ne  faites-vous  pas  erreur? 

Ne  vous  trompez-vous  pas? 

Please  give  me Veuillez  me  donner. 

Move  on Avancez. 

Circulez.     (Policeman.) 

I  want  something  to  eat Je  desire  quelque  chose  a  manger. 

Where  is  it? 0  u  est-ce? 

Go  and  look  for  it Allez  le  cherchcr. 

Take  this  letter  to  the  post  office ..  Portez  cette  lettre  a  la  poste. 

How  much  is  it? Combien? 

Combien  cela  coute-t-il? 

It  is  dear C'est  cher. 

Thank  you Merci. 

Je  vous  en  remercie. 

Don't  mention  it II  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi. 

Dc  rien. 
Allow  me  to  present  my  friend — .  Permettez-moi  de  vous  presenter 

mon  ami  — . 
I   am  glad   to   make   your   ae-  Je  suis   enchante   dc  faire   votre 
quaintance.  connaissance. 

How  far  is  it?. A  quelle  distance  est-ce? 

What  can  I  do  for  you? Que  puis-je  faire  pour  vous? 

'  Do  you  speak  English? Parlez- vous  anglais? 

I  do  not  speak  French  very  well .  Je  ne  parle  pas  tres  bien  le  francais. 

Where  do  you  come  from? D'oii  venez-vous? 

How  did  you  come? Comment  etes-vous  venu? 

On  foot,  in  a  carriage,  in  an  auto,  A  pied,  en  voiture,  en  auto,  en 
by  rail,  by  boat,  on  a  bicycle,  chemin  de  fer  ■  en  bateau,  a 
on  horseback,  in  an  aeroplane.  bicyclette,  a  cheval,  en  aero- 
plane. 


324  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

MILITARY   TITLES,    RANKS,    AND    GRADES. 

General  officers Les  officers  generaux. 

General  staff L'etat-major  general. 

Field  officers Les  officiers  superieurs. 

Company  officers Les  officiers  subalternes. 

Enlisted'  men Lcs  hommes  de  troupe. 

Noncommissioned  officers Les  Bous-officiers. 

Private  soldiers Les  simples  soldats. 

Colonel Le   colonel    (addressed*  as  ' '  Mon 

colonel"). 
Major         Le  commandant  ("Mon  command- 
ant"). 

Captain Le  capitaine  ("Mon  capitaine"). 

Le  piston  (slang). 

First  lieutenant Le  lieutenant  (en  premier)  ("Mon 

lieutenant"). 
Second  lieu  tenant Le    sous-lieutenant    ("Mon    lieu- 
tenant'''). 

A  doctor Un  (m6decin)  major. 

A  sergeant Un   sergent    (addressed   as    "Ser- 

gent  ■"').. 
Un  marechal  des  logis  (mounted 
service). 

A  corporal Un  caporal  ("Caporal "). 

In  brigadier  (mounted  service). 

A  private Un  simple  soldat. 

A  body  of  troops Une  troupe. 

French  troops., Des  troupes  francaises. 

A  wagoner Un  conducteur. 

Un  iourgonnier. 

A  horsesnoer Un  roarechal-f  errant. 

A  saddler Un  sellier. 

A  signaler XJn  signaleur. 

A  deserter Un  deserteur. 

A  soldier  of  Infantry Un  fantassin. 

Cavalry Un  cavalier. 

Artillery Un  artilleur . 

Engineers Un  sapeur-mineur. 

Quartermaster  Corps .  Un  homme  de  Tin  tendance. 

*Seenotep.334. 


MILITARY  TERMS.  325 

Signal  Corps Un  homrae  du  corps  des  signaux. 

Hospital  Corps Un  infirmier. 

Line  of  Communica-Un  garde  des  voies  et  communica- 
tions, tions,  G.  V.  C. 

Infantry L'infanterie. 

Cavalry La  cavalerie. 

Artillery L'artillerie. 

Engineers Le  genie. 

Signal  Corps ; Le  corps  des  signaux. 

Hospital  Corps. . Le  corps  de  sante. 

Le  service  de  sante. 
Aviation  Corps Le  corps  d 'aviation. 

MILITARY   TERMS. 

The  headquarters Le  quartier  general. 

The  train Le  train  des  equipages. 

Railway  service Le  service  des  chemins  de  fer. 

Telegraph  sendee Le  service  des  telegraphes. 

Rural  guards La  gendarmerie. 

Des  gendarmes. 

A  paymaster Un  tresorier. 

A  chaplain Un  aumonier. 

An  army Une  armee. 

General  So-and-so's  army L'armee — (l'armee  Foch). 

An  army  corps Un  corps  d'armee. 

A  division Une  division, 

A  brigade Une  brigade. 

A  regiment Un  regiment. 

A  battalion Un  bataillon. 

A  company Une  compagnie. 

A  platoon Un  peloton. 

A  section Une  section. 

A  squad Une  escouade. 

A  detachment .Un  detachement. 

Barracks Une  caserne. 

A  camp Un  camp  (more  or  less  permanent). 

Un  campement  (temporary). 


326  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

A  cantonment Tin  cantonnement. 

Line (TJne)  ligne. 

Column (Une)  colonne. 

As  skirmishers .  .  .  r En  tirailleurs. 

Follow  me,  as  skirmishers A  moi,  en  tirailleurs. 

Scouts Des  eclaireurs. 

A  patrol Une  patrouille. 

The  advance  guard L' avant-garde. 

The  rear  guard L'arriere-gaixle. 

Flankers Des  flanc-gardes. 

The  main  body Le  gros  (do  la  colonne). 

Combat  train Le  train  de  combat. 

Field  Train Le  train  regimentaire. 

Outpost? Des  avant-postes. 

Cossack  posts Des  avant-postes  a  la  cosaque. 

A  sentinel Une  sentinelle. 

Un  factionnaire. 
On  post En  faction. 

De  faction. 

Guard  mounting La    garde    montante     (also    new 

guard) . 
The  sentinel  challenges:  "Halt!  ILa  sentinelle  crie:  "Halte!     Qui 

Who's  there?  "...... /    vive?  " 

The  answer  is:  •'France" La  reponse  est:  "France/' 

Advance  with  the  countersign. .  .Avance  au  ralliement. 

(The  person  challenged  gives  the  mot  d'ordrc,  which  is  the  name  of 
some  genera],  and  the  sentinel  replies  with  the  mot  de  ralliement, 
which  is  the  name  of  a  battle  or  a  city). 

Go  away;  you  can't  pass (Passe)  au  large. 

Halt,  or  I  fire .Halte,  ou  je  fais  feu. 

Put  down  your  arms Deposcz  vos  armes. 

Hands  up! Levez  les  bras. 

Face  about (Faites)  demi-tour. 

Come  here Venez  ici. 

A  spy Un  espion. 

A  flag  of  truce Un  drapeau  blanc. 

Un  drapeau  parlementaire. 


UNIFORM,  ARMS,  CLOTHING,  AND  EQUIPMENT.       327 

UNIFORM,    ARMS,    CLOTHING,    AND   EQUIPMENT. 

Clothing Les  vetements,  l'habillement. 

Change  your  clothes .Changez  de  vetements. 

Overcoat    ("worn    by    French    in- 
fantry)  Une  capote. 

Trousers Un  pantalon. 

Breeches Une  culotte. 

Shirt Unc  chemise. 

Blouse Un  dolman,  une  vareuse. 

Cap ' Un  kepi. 

Campaign  hat  (United  States) . .  .Un  (chapeau  de)  ieutre. 

Helmet Un  casque  (de  tranchee). 

Cap  without  visor  worn  by  French 
off  duty Un  bonnet  de  police. 

Tam-o'-shanter-  worn  by  Alpine 

chasseurs Un  beret. 

Shoes  in  general Des  chaussures. 

Service  shoes Des  brodequins. 

Leggins Des  guetres. 

Wrap  putties Des  bandes  molletieres. 

Leather  putties Des  houseaux  (or  housseaux). 

Full-dress  uniform La  grand  e  tenue. 

Dress  uniform La  petite  tenue. 

Field  uniform La  tenue  de  campagne. 

Overcoat  (mounted  men) Un  manteau. 

Overcoat  (officers) Un  manteau. 

Un  manteau-capote. 

Fatigue  coat Le  bourgeron. 

Fatigue  trousers  (overalls) Un  pantalon  de  treillis. 

Fatigue  uniform La  tenue  de  corvee. 

Magazine  rifle Un  fusil  a  repetition. 

The  barrel .Le  canon. 

The  bolt Le  verrou. 

The  ramrod La  baguette. 

The  butt .La  crosse. 

The  gun  sling La  bretelle. 

The  trigger La  detente. 

Rear  sight La  hausse. 

Front  sight Le  guidon. 


828  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

A  bayonet Une  ba'ionnette. 

Rosalie  (slang). 

Ball  cartridge Une  cartouche  a  balls. 

Blank  cartridge Une  cartouche  a  blanc. 

Dummy  cartridge Une  fausse  cartouche.. 

Belt. Un  ceinturon. 

Cartridge  box Une  carton chiere. 

First-aid  packet Un  paquet  de  pansement. 

The  pack Le  sac. 

A  haversack Un  etui-musette. 

Canteen Un  bidon. 

Tin  cup Un  quart. 

Mess  can Une  gamelle. 

Equipment L'equipement. 

Compass Une  boussole. 

Field  glasses Des  jumelles  (de  campagne). 

Whistle Un  sifliet. 

Revolver Un  revolver. 

QUESTIONS   ABOUT   THE    ROADS,  ETC. 

Pardon  me,  sir,  doyouspeakEn-fPardon,  monsieur,  parlez-vous  an- 
glish?. . . 1    glais? 

(German,   French,   Italian,   Rus- 
sian)  (Allemand,  francais,  italien,  russe.) 

All  right,  then  show  me,  please,  fTres  bien,  alors  indiquez-moi,  je 
the  road  to \     vous  prie,  le  chemin  de . 

Is  it  far  from  here? Es(:-ce  loin  d'ici? 

How  long  does  it  take  to  go  there?. Combien  faut-il  de  temps  pour  y 

aller? 

How  many  kilometres COmbien  de  kilometres? 

Is  there  a  short  cut?  (road) Y  a-t-il  un  chemin  de  traverse? 

Is  there  a  short  cut?  (trail) Y  a-t-il  un  sender  plus  court? 

Where  does  this  road  go? Ou  mene  cette  route? 

Are  we  on  the  right  road  to  gofSoinmes-nous  sur  le  bon  chemin 
to ? I     pour  aller  a ? 

Does  this  road  go  through  Com-/Cette  route  passe-t-elle  par  Com- 
piegne? :...\     piegne? 

Shall  we  find  any  villages  on  our  f'frouverons-nous  des  villages  sur 
road? 1     notre  chemin? 


QUESTIONS  ABOUT  ROADS,  ETC.  329 

Are  there  any  other  roads  going/Y  a-t-il  d'autres  chemins  pour  aller 
to ? _ I    a ? 

Is  this  road  in  good  condition?. -Cette  route  est-elle  en  bon  6tat? 

Are  there  Mils?" Y  a-t-il  des  cotes  (des  coteaux)? 

Are  they  steep? Sont-elles  raides? 

Does  the  road  go  through  open  orf La  route  traverse-t-elle  un  pays 
vooded  country? \     decouvert  ou  boise? 

Can  we  get  through  with  artil- 
lery?   Peut-on  passer  avec  de  l'artillerie? 

Casf :  *r«»  hs&-p  "s^s8  krs 

loaded  wagons  (auto  trucks) ' .       „„«.:  „    „„+ ~u;i^  v> 

3       v  '     [    camions-automobiles) ' 

Is  this  road  practicable  for  artil-f Cette  route  est-elle  praticable  pour 

lery? \    l'artillerie? 

Can  infantry  march  on  the  sides  of  fL'infanterie  peut-elle  marcher  sur 

the  roads? \    les  cotes  de  la  route? 

Is  the  ground  practicable? Le  terrain  est-il  praticable? 

Is  the  ground  marshy? .Le  terrain  est-il  marecageux? 

What  is  the  nature  of  the  eround?.  Quelle  est  la  nature  du  sol? 

Doestiietelegraphlinefo^ 
road  as  far°as  X? (L^&S*®5  SU     Ce 

Where  does  your  railroad  come 

from? D'oii  vient  votre  chemin  de  fer? 

Where  does  it  go  to? Ou  va-t-il? 

Is   it   single  tracked   or  doublefEst-il  a  une  voie  ou  a  deux  voies 

tracked  the  whole  way? \     sur  tout  le  parcours? 

Where  is  the  station?     Is  it  far? .  .Oil  est  lagare?    Est-elle  loin  d'ici? 
How  can  the  river  be  crossed?.  .  .Comment  peut-on  passer  la  riviere? 

Is  there  a  bridge?  a  ferry? Y  a- til  un  pont?  un  bac? 

Are  there  fords? Y  a-t-il  des  passages  a  gu<§  (des 

gues)? 
Can  we  get  boats? Peut-on  trouver  des  bateaux? 

In  that  wood  are  there  clearings ,fD^.cfS  ^^^S^S 

ravines, brooks, marshes, pools?;       df  ™ms>   des  ™lsseaux>   de3 

1  {     mares  r 

Are  there  any  places  near  here  for  f  Y  a-t-il  des  endroits  pres  d'ici  pour 

watering  horses? \    abreuver  les  chevaux? 

Is  the  water  good? L'eau  est-elle  bonne? 

Is  this  water  drinkable? Est-ce  de  l'eau  potable? 


330  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

Are  there  watering  troughs? Y  a-t-il  des  abreuvoirs? 

Where  is  there  good  grass  for  thef Oil  y  a-t-il  de  bonne  herbe  poir  les 

animals? \    animaux? 

Can  we  buy  provisions? Peut-on  acheter  des  vivree? 

t     *u~„~   „   g~ia    „.v „,„  „,„fY  a-t-il  un  champ  oil  nous  pouvons 

Is  there   a   held   where   we  canl     _^ /•   „+„ii^>  „„*»^  „„™^„ 

o  <     camper  (installer  notre  carupe- 

camp [     ment)? 

Can  you  give  me  any  information/ Pouvez-vous  me  donner  des  rensei- 

about  the  enemy? \     gnements  sur  l'ennemi? 

Please  find  me  a  guide  who  knows/  Veuillez  me  trouver  un  guide  qui 

the  country? }     connaisse  le  pays. 

We  are  going  to  follow  this  trail 

(tracks ) Nous  allons  sui vre  cette  piste. 

Crossroads Un  carrefour. 

TOWNS. 

Where  is  the  post-office  and  tele- (Oil  est  le  bureau  des  postes   et 
graph  office? \     teh'trraphes? 

The  postmaster {^raphe"^  ^   P°StG9  *  ^' 

The  mail Le  courrier. 

WTien  was    the   last    mail  dis-/A  quelle  heure  a-t-on  fait  la  der- 

tributed ? t     nierc  distribution? 

General  delivery Poste  restante. 

Are  there  any  letters  for ?. . .  Y  a-t-il  des  lettres  pour ? 

I  should  like  to  send  a  telegram.  .Je    voudrais    expedier    un    t£le- 

gramme. 
Have    you    received  a  telegram  (Avez-vous    recu    un    tel£gramme 

for ? \     (une  depeche)  pour ? 

A  telegraph  instrument Un  appareil  (telegraphique). 

Can  you  tell  me  where  the  mayor's]  Pourriez-vou3  me  dire  oil  se  trouve 

office  is? \     la  mairie? 

I  couldn't  tell  you;  I  am  a  stran-  f  Je  ne  saurais  vous  renseigner;  je  ne 

ger  here \     connais  pas  la  ville. 

Good  morning,   sir,  are  you  theJBonjour.    Monsieur,    etes-vous    le 

mayor? J     maire? 

No.  sir.  I  am  his  assistant Non,  Monsieur,  je  suis  son  adjoint. 

I   should    like   to  speak  to  thelJe  voudrais  parler  au  maire  lui- 

mayor  himself \    meme. 


RAILROADS.  331 

Listen,  sir.  A  detachment  will fEcoutez,  monsieur.  Un  d£tache- 
arrive  here  to-morrow  morningj  ment  arrivera  ici  demain  matin 
at  5  o'clock -.-.' I    a  cinq  heures. 

n  .     ,    ,     .  0  nrwYf  Pouvez-vous   prendre   des    dispo- 

*Li°l^FJS       gG     '  sitioJls  Pour  loger  2,000  hommes 

men  tor  two  days? ..-..}     p^^  deux>iirs? 

A  policeman Un  sergent  de  ville,  un  agent  de 

la  paix. 

RAILROADS. 

The  station  agent Le  chef  de  gare. 

The  conductor Le  conducteur.. 

The  engineer Le  mecanicien. 

The  fireman Le  chauffeur. 

The  brakeman Le  serre-freins. 

The  telegraph  operator Le  telegraphiste. 

An  engine .Une  locomotive. 

Passenger  cars Des  wagons  (de  voyageurs). 

Flatcars Des  trucks. 

Box  cars Des  wagons  de  marchandises. 

Stock  cars Des  wagons  a  bestiaux. 

An  express  train : Un  train  express. 

A  through  train ; Un  train  direct. 

A  local  train Un  train  omnibus. 

A  passenger  train Un  train  de  voyageurs. 

A  freight  train , Un  train  de  marchandises. 

To  entrain  the  troops Embarquer  les  troupes. 

To  detrain  the  troops Debarquer  les  troupes. 

To  get  on  a  train Monter  dans  un  train. 

To  get  off  a- train Descendre  d'un  train. 

The  railroad  track La  voie  (ferr£e). 

A  side  track Une  voie  de  garage. 

A  ticket Un  billet. 

A  round  trip  ticket Un  billet  d'aller  et  retour. 

One  way  only '. .  Aller  seulement. 

The  ticket  window Le  guichet. 

At  what  time  does  the  Paris  train/A  quelle  heure  part  le  train  pour 
start? \    Paris? 


332  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

It  is  late  (15  minutes  late) II  est  en   retard    (de   quinze  mi- 
nutes |. 

Do  we  have  to  change  cars? Faut-il  changer  de  train? 

The  train  stops Le  train  s'arrete. 

All  aboard! En  voiture! 

The  train  starts Le  train  s'ebranle. 

RATIONS    AND    FOOD. 

Provisions  (in  general  Lea  viyres. 

The  ration La  ration. 

Fresh  beef De  la  viande  fraiche.- 

Bacon Du  lard . 

Flour De  la  farine. 

Soft  bread Du  pain  irais. 

Hard  bread  (crackers) Du  biscuit. 

Field  bread Du  pain  de  guerre. 

Corn  meal De  la  farine  de  mai's. 

Coffee Du  cafe. 

Sugar Du  sucre. 

Eggs Des  oeufs. 

Chickens Des  poulefs. 

Potatoes Des  pommes  de  terre. 

Peas Des  pais. 

String  beans Des  haricots  verts. 

Vegetables  (in  general") Des  legumes. 

An  apple Une  pomme. 

A  pear L'ne  poire. 

A  cherry L'ne  cerise. 

A  peach Une  peche. 

Cheese Du  fromage. 

Wine Du  vin. 

De  la  biere. 

A  glass  of  beer L'n  bock. 

I  am  hungry J'ai  faim. 

Bring  me  something  to  eat.  please.  Apportez-moi    quelque    chose    a 

manger.  s*il  vous  plait. 

I  am  thirsty J'ai  soif. 

Please  give  me  a  glass  of  water..  .Yeuillez  medonner  un  verred'eau. 
Waiter,  I'll  take  a  beefsteak Garcon.  je  desire  un  bifteck. 


HOSPITALS.  POINTS  OF  THE  COMPASS.  333 

Some  black  coffee Du  cafe  noir. 

Coffee  vrith  milk Du  cafe  an  laii. 

Rolls Dea  petite  pains. 

Crescent  rolls Des  croissants. 

HC  S 

A  field  hospital Une  ambulance. 

A  ha  Un  he  pital  (plural :  des  h6pitaux). 

A  dressing  station Un  j:  jste  de  se  :ours. 

A  first-aid  dressing I":  x mmaire. 

Red  Cross La  Croix  Rouge. 

A  doctor Un  medecin. 

Un  docteur. 

A  Burgeon , . . .  Un  ch  i  i     ■ 

A  military  surgeon .Un  lajor. 

Assistant  -  . . .  Un  ai  le-ma 

A  male  nurse,  hospital  corps  man.Un  infirniier. 

A  female  nurse Une  infirmiere. 

An  ambulance Une  ambuls 

A  stretchc  Un  brancard . 

A  litter  bearer Un  branca:  \ 

A  roll  of  bandages Un  rouleau  ce  bandage. 

A  first-aid  packet Un  paquet  de  pansement. 

A  «  :  :i Un  oh  - 

I  am  sick Je  suis  mal - 

J'ai 

Ihav<  nd  fever J'ai  c—  lefievre. 

:pe. 

Jai  la  diarrhea. 

POINTS    OF    THE    COMPASS. 

North Le  n  jrd . 

L 

East L 

West L'ouest. 

Le  nord-est. 

east Ia 

Northwest Le  ::  ard-ou 

Southwest Le  sud-ouest. 


334  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 

TRENCH   WARFARE. 

Tier.  : **  gn««  *«  tranches. 

La  guerre  de  |   nti 

La  guerre  de  ta  En). 

Dne  tranch 

tch Uu  te  ctmmuiuiratkwi). 

.  -  it Le  parapet. 

A  loophole Uu  a  <neau. 

Due  meurtni  i 

Dn 

mber lr.  rre:v;i  iier. 

Du  nl  de  fer  barbele. 

:a.ngiement U:.  :-  =eau  ie  nls  de  :er  barbeles. 

lr.  :-    r;:er 

Ur.  uillaud. 

3/-.  German*. 

I  - 

:er Dn        pier. 

>  m Due  naitrailleuae. 

b Due  piece  de  campagne. 

field  gun Une  pi  -  Lxaute-qumze. 

I 

og Centvingt  long 

:: Cent  vingt  court. 

::   German S  uxante-dix-Bept   allemand  . 

|] Dn  »bua. 

Dne  marmite   =la:  a 

Dn  '    lis  -   Lomicile    dai  g 

I 

Dn  ragenr  (slang}. 

Periscope [  pe. 

Trench  knife C  tranchee. 

it Dn  abri  lane  lea  tranchees. 

Ur.  .^azibi    sipg  . 

Uns.urbi    shn?  .' 
Une'ruit  .u-e    flange 

j    ar:     :fi>:    c:    :rr.v>:>    sup-::::    to    bis    otc.    an 
■nio:    ac  irtssing  a   junior 
:    ':.-    :::>:■    '::/.:      T  i       a  _ 

;:  the     :..:;.  ;■!   :a  -  'A  &a\    •Commandant.' 


APPENDIX 

FORM   FOR  LAST  WILL  AFD  TESTAMENT. 


r.i  Testaneat 

OF 


7 



publish,  and  declare  this  my  last  will  and  testament. 

•. ::;.  :;  : 


both  real  and  verscnal.  : 


\cv  -■  -".:-  :--;".. -.-5  '':•■:.  r 


'■::-.:. 
which  it  is  to  be  divided,  as  "in  equal  shares  as  tenants  in  a 


::: 


336             FORM  FOR  LAST  WILL  AND  TESTAMENT. 
I  hereby  appoint 


.executor 


of  this  my  last  will  and  testament,  and  I  desire  that 

shall  not  be  required  to  give  bond  for  tlie  performance  of  the  duties  of 
that  office. 

Witness  my  hand  this  3 

day  of ,  191 


Signed,  published,  and  declared  by . 


the  above-named  testator,  as  and  for  Ms  last  will  and  testament,  in  the 
presence,  of  us,  who,  at  his  request  and  in  his  presence,  and  in  the  presence 
of  each  other,  have  subscribed  our  names  as  witnesses  thereto.* 


Residence: 
Residence: 
Residence : 


3  If  the  will  is  made  in  Nevada,  cr  if  the  testator  has  real  estate  in  that  Stace,  he 
should  affix  his  seal. 

4  If  the  will  is  made  in  Louisiana,  unless  it  is  wholly  in  the  handwriting  of  che 
testator,  there  should  be  seven  witnesses  and  a  notary  at  the  "sealing  up.'!  If  wholly 
in  his  handwriting  no  formalities  are  required. 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Abbreviations  on  maps 272 

Advance  guards ^  166 

Advance  party  of  advance  guard 167, 168 

Advice  to  riflemen 1.97 

Aiming  rifle : 191 

Alignments 76,  93 

Ammunition 29, 150 

Arm  signals 59 

Arms  (see  Field  kit) 29 

Articles  of  War: 

Extracts  from 300-316 

Reading 300 

Assembling  Infantry  equipment 30 

Ball  cartridges . 19,  29 

Battle  sight 48,189,192 

Bayonet: 

Charge 74 

Description  of 125 

Fix 73 

Unfix 73 

Bayonet,  manual  of: 

Attacks 127 

Combat 136.147 

Combined  movements 135 

Defenses 131 

Fencing  exercises 137-147 

Foot  movements 125 

General  rule? 123-125 

Instruction  without  bayonet 134 

Instruction  with  rifle 126 

Instruction  without  rifle 125 

Suggestions  for  fencing  at  will 145 

337 


338  INDEX. 

Page. 

Blank  cartridges 19 

Blanket  roll -34,120 

Blanks,  message 274 

Blisters 44,  45 

Bugle  signals 53 

Calling  the  shot 196 

Camp: 

Making  camp 183 

Service  and  duties -      184 

Care  of  feet 46 

Care  of  rifle 20 

Cartridges: 

Ball 19,29 

Blank 19 

Dummv 20 

G  uard 19 

Cleaning  pistol 26 

Cleaning  rifle 21 

Close  order,  company  drill 91-99 

Clothing.     (See  Uniforms.) 

Coast  Artillery  companies 3 

Codes  used  in  signaling '. . .       275 

General  service  code  (International  Morse  code) 276 

Two-arm  semaphore  code 62,  280-282 

Wig- wag  code 278 

Letter  codes — 

Cavalry 283 

Field  Artillery 284 

Infantry 283 

Combat 149-150 

Exercises 51 

Commander  of  the  guard 214 

Commands,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations 57 

Company  inspection Ill,  120 

Company,  school  of: 
Close  order  drill — 

Alignments 93 

At  ease  and  route  step 98 

Facing  or  marching  to  the  rear 96 

Front  into  line 97 


INDEX.  339 

Company,  School  of — Continued. 

Close  order  drill — Continued.  PaSe- 

Movements  oh  fixed  pivot 94 

Movements  on  the  moving  pivot 95 

On  right  (left)  into  line 96 

Rules 91 

To  diminish  the  front  of  a  column  of  squads 98 

To  dismiss  company 93 

To  form  the  company 92 

Division  of  company 89 

Extended  order  drill- 
Deployments  .'. 100 

Rules  for  deployment 99 

The  advance 102 

The  assembly 101 

The  company  acting  alone 106 

The  company  in  support 105 

The  fire  attack 104 

Fire— 

Classes  of  firing 108 

Fire  control 109 

Fire  direction 109 

Fire  discipline 110 

General  rules 106 

Ranges 107 

The  target 108 

Instruction 88 

Position  of  officers,  noncommissioned  officers,  guides,  etc.  89-91 

Position  of  platoons  and  squads 89-91 

Compliments  from  guards ". 239 

Contours 263 

Conventional  signs  on  maps 272 

Cooking,  individual T 36-40 

Coordination  in  firing  rifle „ 196 

Corporal  of  the  guard 222 

Cossack  post 171 

Course  in  small-arms  firing 199 

Courtesies  in  conversation 18 

Courtesy,  military 81 

Cover,  use  of 27 


340  INDEX. 

Page. 

Datum  plane  on  maps 263 

Definition,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations 48 

Details  and  rosters,  interior  guards 211 

Directions  on  maps 25'8 

Discipline 11 

Fire  discipline 110 

Distances  on  maps 261 

Drill  {sec  Infantry  Drill  Regulations;: 

Close  order. 49,  91-99 

Extended  order , 49,  99-104 

General  rules 51 

Drill  Regulations,  all  arms 298 

Dummy  cartridges 20 

Engineer  companies 3 

English-French  vocabularies 317-334 

Enlistment  oath 9 

Equipment: 

Assembling 30-34 

Part  of 28-30 

Extended  order  drill 49,  99-104 

Facings 64 

Feet,  care  of 46 

Field  exercises 51 

Field  kit 28 

Field  message  blanks 274 

Field  service: 

Advance  guard 166 

Advance  partv 167 

Patrols 167  168 

Point.... 167 

Reserve 167 

Support 167 

Combat 149 

Flank  guards 169 

Outposts — 

Cossack  posts 171 

Duties  of 169 

Line  of  observation 171 


INDEX.  341 

Field  Service — Continued. 

Outposts — Continued.  Paie- 

Line  of  resistance 170 

March  outpost 174 

Outguards 170-172 

Patrols - 173, 174 

Pickets 170 

Reserves 170 

Sentinels 172, 173 

Sentry  squads. 171 

Supports .       170 

Patrolling 158-166 

Principles  of  Infantry  training 148 

Rear  guards 168 

Rifle  trenches 175-178 

Field  Service  Regulations 298 

Fire: 

Control 109, 153 

Direction 109,153 

Discipline 110 

Ranges 107 

Rapid  firing 198 

Targets 200 

Firing  positions 194 

Firing  with  rests , 19S 

First-aid  rules 288 

Flag  signals 61,276-285 

Flank  guards 169 

Formations,  general  rules 51 

Forage  ration 40 

Form  for  last  will  and  testament 335 

French-English  vocabulary 317-334 

General  service  code 276 

Grain  ration 41 

Ground  forms  on  maps 265 

Guard  cartridges 19 

Guard  duty  (extracts  from  Manual  of  Interior): 

Classification  of  interior  guards 211 

Color  sentinels 227 

Commander  of  the  guard *  214-219 


342  INDEX. 

Guard  duty— Continued.  Pa?e- 

Compliments  from  guards 239 

Corporal  of  the  guard 1 222-227 

Countersigns 237 

Details 211 

Flags 248 

Guard  mounting 250 

Formal 250 

Informal -  - 255 

Guard  patrols... 239 

Guarding  prisoners 244-248 

Introduction 210 

Musician  of  the  guard 227 

Orderlies 227 

Orders  for  sentinels 229-237 

Paroles 237 

Prisoners 241-244 

Privates  of  the  guard 228 

Relieving  the  old  guard 255 

Retreat  gun 249 

Reveille  gun 249 

Rosters 211 

Sergeant  of  the  guard 219-222 

Watchmen , 239 

Guard  mounting 250 

Formal 250 

Informal 255 

Gun  sling,  use  of 195 

Hashures  on  maps 263 

Hygiene,  personal 42-46 

Individual  cooking 36 

Recipes 36-40 

Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  extracts  from: 

Company  inspection Ill,  120 

Definitions.." 48 

General  rules  for  drills  and  formations 51 

Introduction 50 

Manual  of  the  bayonet 123 

Manual  of  tent  pitching 114, 121 


INDEX.  343 

Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  extracts  from — Continued.  Page. 

Orders,  commands,  and  signals 56 

School  of  the  company „ . .  88 

School  of  the  soldier : 63 

School  of  the  squad 74. 

Infantry  equipment,  assembling 30-34 

Infantry  training  principles .• 148 

Insignia: 

Noncommissioned  officers 300 

Officers 299 

Inspection: 

Company Ill,  120 

Interior  guard  duty,  Manual  of.     (See  Guard  duty.) 

International  Morse  code 276 

Intrenching  tools 29,  30 

Kit.     (See  Field  kit;  Service  kit;  Surplus  kit.) 

Laws  governing  Army 297-316 

Line  of  observation 171 

Line  of  resistance 170 

Loadings  and  firings. 83 

Loyalty 10 

Making  maps 271 

Manual  of  arms 68 

Manual  of  the  Bayonet.     (See  Bayonet,  Manual  of.) 
Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty.     (See  Guard  duty.) 
Manual  of  Tent  Pitching.     (See  Tent  Pitching,  Manual  of.) 
Maps: 

Abbreviations - °72 

Contours 263 

Datum  plane 263 

Directions 258 

Distances 261 

Ground  forms : 265 

Hashures 263 

Making  (sketching) . . '. 161,  271 

Orienting 260 

Reading 161,258 

Ridges 269 

Scales 262 


344  INDEX. 

Maps— Continued.  Page- 
Signs 272 

Slopes 264 

Stream  lines 263 

Valleys 288-270 

Vertical  intervals 264 

Marching 181-183 

Preparation  for 179 

Markmanship,  preliminary  training i 189 

Message  blanks 274 

Metal  fouling  solution  for  cleaning  rifle 25 

Military  courtesy 12 

Morse,  international  code.     (See  General  service  code.) 

National  anthem 17, 186,  234,  248 

Noncommissioned  officers: 

Corporal  of  guard '. 222 

Insignia 300 

Precedence 298 

Rank 298 

Sergeant  of  guard 219 

Oath  of  enlistment 9 

Obedience 9 

Observation,  line  of.     (See  Line  of  observation. ) 
O  flic  ere: 

Insignia 299 

Precedence 298 

Rank 298 

Orders: 

How  obeyed 9, 10 

Infantry  Drill  Regulations 56 

Orienting  maps 260 

Outguards 170-172 

Outposts 169-175 

Pack 30-34 

Close 113. 120 

Open 113,120 

Patrolling 156-166 

Patrols: 

Advance  guards 167, 168 

Outpost 173-174 


INDEX.  345 

Page. 

Peep  si^ht 192 

Personal  hygiene 42-46 

Pickets 170 

Point  of  advance  guard 167 

Pistol: 

Cleaning 26 

Practice 202-209 

Pivots: 

Turn  on  fixed 79,  94,  95 

Turn  on  moving 79,  95,  96 

Position  of  the  soldier 63 

Precedence: 

Noncommissioned  officers . .      298 

Officers 298 

Principles  of  Infantry  training 148 

Prisoners 241-244 

Privates  of  the  guard. 228 

Range  estimators 107 

Rank: 

Noncommissioned  officers 298 

Officers 298 

Rapid  firing 198 

Rations; 

Carrie'd  on  person . . , 29,  35 

Cooking. ..._ 36 

Emergency , 40 

.  Forage 40 

Grain 41 

Kinds  of 35 

Reading  maps 161,  258 

Rear  guards T 1 68 

Regulations,  Army 297 

Regulations,  Drill ,  all  arms 298 

Regulations,  Field  Service  : 298 

Regulations  Governing  Army 297,  298 

Relieving  the  old  guard 255 

Reserve : 

Of  advance  guard 167 

Of  outpost 170 


346  INDEX. 

Resistance,  line  of.     (See  Line  of  resistance.)  Page. 

Rests • 64,  98 

Retreat  gun 249 

Reveille  gun 249 

Revolver  practice 202-209 

Ridges  on  maps  . 2t>9 

Rirlc: 

Aiming 191 

Battle  sight 48, 189,  192 

(  are  of 20 

(  loaning 21 

Coordination  in  firing 196 

Description  of 19 

Plate  showing  principal  parts 18 

Sight  adjustment 189 

Trenches 175-178 

ra ,  interior  guards 211 

Rules  (see  First-aid  rules): 

General  Rules  for  Drills  and  Formations 51 

Governing  saluting 15 

Salutes: 

Hand 1 4,  65 

Rifle 14,  73 

Saber 14 

Sentinels 16 

Saluting 13 

Rules  governing 15 

Scales  on  maps 262 

School  of  the  company.     (See  Company,  school  of.) 
School  of  the  soldier.     (See  Soldier,  school  of.; 
School  of  the  squad.     (Sec  Squad,  school  of.) 

Semaphore,  two-arm  signaling  code 280 

Sentinels: 

Interior  s;uard ,  orders  for 229-237 

Of  outpost 172,  173 

Sentry  squad 171 

Sergeant  of  the  guard 219-222 

Service  kit 28 

Shoes 46 


INDEX.  347 

Sights:  PaSe- 

Adjustment 189 

Battle  sight 48,189,192 

Open  sight 191 

Peep  sight 192 

Table  of  sight  corrections 191 

Signaling,  general  instructions 275 

Signal  flags 61,  62 

Signals : 

Arm 59 

Bugle 58 

Enemy  in  sight *  -  -  -  166 

Firing  line  and  reserve 62,  283 

Flag.! 278,  282 

Other  signals 166 

Sound 282 

Take  cover 166 

Two  arm  semaphore 62,280,281,282 

Whistle -  - 58 

Wig- wag 278 

Sketching 161,  271 

Slopes  on  maps 264 

Small-arms  firing  course 199 

Socks 47 

Soda  solution  for  cleaning  rifle 24 

Soldier,  school  of: 

Duties  of  instructor 63 

Eyes  right  or  left 64 

Facings 64 

Instruction  without  arms 63 

Manual  of  arms 68-72 

Position  of  the  soldier  on  attention 63 

Rifle  salute •  73 

Salute  with  the  hand - 65 

Salute  with  saber 14 

Steps  and  marchings 65 

Back  step 67 

Change  step 68 

Quick  time 66 


348  INDEX. 

Soldier,  school  of— Continued. 

Steps  and  marchings— Continued.  Page. 

Side  step 67 

The  half  step 66 

To  halt 67 

To  march  by  the  flank 67 

To  march  to  the  rear 68 

To  mark  time 66 

The  bayonet 73 

The  inspection 74 

The  rests 64 

To  dismiss  the  squad 74 

Solutions  for  cleaning  rifle 25 

Squad,  school  of: 

Alignments 76 

Instruction 74 

Kneeling  and  lying  down 82 

Loadings  and  firings 83-87 

Observation , 88 

The  assembly 82 

The  oblique  march 78 

The  use  of  cover 87 

To  cease  tiring 87 

To  deplov  as  skirmishers 81 

To  fire  at  will 86 

To  fire  bv  clip 86 

To  fire  by  volley 85 

To  follow  the  corporal 81 

To  form  squad 75 

To  increase  or  diminish  intervals 81 

To  load 83 

To  set  the  sight 85 

To  stack  and  take  arms 77 

To  suspend  firing 86 

To  take  intervals  and  distance 77 

To  turn  on-  .Ixed  pivot 79 

To  turn  on  moving  pivot 79 

To  unload S4 

Star-Spangled  Bauner 17, 186,  234,  248 


INDEX.  349 

Page. 

Steps  and  marchings 65 

Streams  lines  on  maps 263 

Subsistence.     (See  Rations.) 
Support: 

Advance  guard 167 

Outpost 170 

Surplus  kit 29 

Swabbing  solution  for  cleaning  rifle 24 

Target  practice: 

Advice  to  riflemen 197 

Aiming  rifle w 191 

Battle  sight 192 

Calling  the  shot 196 

Coordination 196 

Firing  positions 194 

Preliminary  training  in  marksmanship 189 

Sight  adjustment 189 

Table  of  sight  corrections 191 

Targets 199 

The  course  in  small-arms  firing 199 

Trigger  squeeze .„ 193 

Targets 199 

Tent  Pitching,  Manual  of: 

Conical  wall  tent 117 

Folding  tents ]  18 

Pitch  all  type  Army  tents  (except  shelter  and  conical 

wall  tents) 116 

Shelter  tent .' 114, 121 

Sleeping  bags 116 

Striking  tents. 116, 118 

Toilet,  articles i 29 

Trenches,  rifle 175-]  78 

Trigger  squeeze 193 

Two-arm  semaphore  code 280 

Uniforms . .   .....  26 

Care  of . '. , 27,  28 

Disposing  of 26 

Drees 26 


350  INDEX. 

Uniforms— Continued.  Page- 
Full  dress 26 

How  worn 27,  28 

Service 27 

E    over 87 

Valleys  on  maps 268-270 

Vertical  intervals  on  maps 264 

Visual  signaling  (sec  Signals): 

In  general 275 

Flag 278,  282 

Vocabulary — English-French 317-334 

Whistle  signals... 58 

Wig-wag  signaling 278 

Will ,  form  for  last  will  and  testament 335 

Windage  corrections 190 

Wind  gauge 190 

O 


[C.  M.  N.  C.  O.  and  P.  of  I.  1.] 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS  AND 
PRIVATES  OF  INFANTRY. 


Changes  I  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

.No.  1.    J  Washington,  November  9,  1917. 

The  Manual  for  Noncommissioned  Officers  and  Privates  of  In- 
fantry, 1917,  is  changed  as  follows: 

Page  17,  twenty-fourth  and  twenty-fifth  lines,  omit  the  words 
"or  uncovered,  or  in  civilian  clothes,  uncovered."     (C.  M.  N.  0. 
and  P.  of  I.  No.  1,  Nov.  9,  1917.) 
[300.31,  A.  G.  0.] 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  op  War  : 

JOHN  BIDDLE, 
Major  General,  Acting  Chief  of  Staff. 
Official  : 

h.  p.  McCain, 

The  Adjutant  General, 


Books   necessary    for    citizens    and    for   every 
man  interested  in  home  defense   and  the  military. 


Field  Service  Regulation*  .75 

Regulations  for  the  Army  of  the  United  States  1.00 

Manual  for  Army  Bakers  75 

Blue   Jackets  Manual  1.00 

Sanitary    Troops  .75 

Manual  of  Physical   Training  .75 

Rules  of  Land   Warfare  .75 

Coast  Artillery  Drill   Regulations  1.00 

Provisional  Drill  &  Service  Reg.  for  Field  Artillery  1.25 

Ship  and  Gun  Drills  .60 

Cavalry  Drill    Regulations  .75 

Small  Anns  Firing    Manual  .75 

United  States  Army  Transport    Service  Regulation*  .50 

Manual    for    Army  Cooks  .75 

Engineer's  Field    Manual  1.25 

The  Deck  and  Boat  Book  .60 

Infantry  Drill  Regulations  .50 

Drill  Regulations  for  Machine  Gun  Companies  30 

Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty  United  States  Army  .50 

Signal  Book  United  States   Army  .35 

Provisional    Drill  Regulations  for  6"   Howitzers  1.25 
Drill  Regulations  for  Field  Companies  of  Signal  Corps       .75 

Gunnery  and  Explosive  .35 

Manual  for  Court  Martials  ],]() 

Manual  for   MecMcal  Department  ]  jo 

Army   Horse  in   Accident   &  Disease  .35 

Non-Commissioned  Officers  and  Privates  Manual  .50 

Provisional  Drill  Reg.  for  Horse  and  Light  Artillery  1.25 

All  the  above  Military  and  Naval  text  books  have 

been  compiled  by  U.  S.  Army  and  Navy  officers 

and  contain  all  changes  to  date. 

MILITARY  PUBLISHING  CO. 

42  BROADWAY 

NEW  YORK 


F 


This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last 
date  stamped  below 


B  000  008  380 


UD 

153 

A4 

1917 


